CONTENTS

OB!TUARIFS—

T. E. Barr SMITH

Srr Grorce J. R. Murray

Stir WiLL1AMm Bracec

Sir Ropert W. CHAPMAN

Jamis Huco Gray

R. S. Rocrrs

W. M. WINKLER ia es Ne te = = ods pe

ALpERMAN, A, R.: Sillimanite, roe and Clay Deposits near Williamstown, South

Australia oo

Womenrs ey, H.: The Acad Mites a3 Wsisiealin

WomersLey, H.: New Genera, Species and Records of Collembéla — Widicslia, ew.

Zealand and New Guinea

Dickinson, S. B.: The Moonaree Station Gale Ground asa a ie Origin of he

Saline Material

Prescort, J. A.: The Phase and eepntude of Austealion fieeam: Monthly Beubseratnree as

Jounston, T. H., and Ancer, L. M.: Larval Trematodes from Australian Freshwater

Molluscs. Pt. VIII

Suearp, K.: The Genus Regsindats Contate tex. euatausent

jJounston, T. H., and Mawson, P.M.: Nematodes from Australian Lee and Pethels

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M.: Some Avian Nematodes from Tailem Bend, South

Australia

Womers.ey, H.: A Ney Bpiscans Tajstoran (Scatoneae) rom South | Restrain

Corton, B. C.: Some Australian Freshwater Gasteropoda

Corton, B. C.: Cephalopoda from East and South Australia

WomenrsLey, H.: Miscellaneous Additions to the Acarine Fauna of ngeetts

jounston, T. H., and CLeLranp, B. H.: Aboriginal Names and Uses of Plants in the Ooldea

Region, South Australia ..

Biackpurn, M.: A Systematic List of the Biydaiida a South Australia, with a Summary

of their Distribution in Other States

Jounston, T. H., and Ancer, L. M.: The Life cee of the Dread eines

phostomum tenuicollis (S, Tk Johnston)

Corron, B. C.: Australian Gastr pee of the Bunaiiies Hy drobidae, sccingnernae: aa

Acmeidae

Cooke, W. T.: An heseaete pti =o a eis of eee enue Gaal -

Wark, D. C.: Trends in the Yields of Fallow-sown and Stubble-sown eee in some

South Australian Experiments

WomersLey, Hj.: Additions to the Acarina-Par siecle ee oie, -Pt. i.

Jounston, T, H', and Stmpson, E. R.: Some Nematodes from Australian Frogs

Evans, J. W.: Further Notes on the Morphology of the Insect Head

Srricc, R. C.: The Geology of the Eden-Moana Fault Block

Love, J. R. B.: A Primitive Method of making a Wooden Dish by Matin cence, a

the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia

Eyans, J. W.: The Morphology of Nannochorista ragennaeaats aR é

Jounston, T. H.: Trematodes from Australian Birds. I. Cormorants anil Darters

Fintayson, H. H,: A new Melomys from Queensland, with Notice of two other

Queensland Rats a

Biack, J. M.: Additions to the Blow of Sein Palistralla. No. 41 .. :

Jounston, T. H., and Best, Erriz W.: Australian Acanthocephala, No. 3

Finiayson, H. H.: A second specimen of Wyulda squamicaudata Alexander ..

Mawson, D.: The Structural Characters of the Flinders Ranges

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Verco MEDAL

List or FELLOWS

INDEX

Page

RD BD De HS HS

119

124

130

133

142

172

180

185

215

218

226

243

248

250

255

262

273

274

277

OBITUARIES

TOM E. BARR SMITH, B.A.

Summary

A life-member of our Society since 1925; he died on 26 November 1941 at the age of 78. Mr. Barr

Smith was the son of Robert Barr Smith, one of the founders of Elder, Smith & Co., Ltd. He was a

member of the University Council since 1924, and made large financial contributions to the

University, particularly in providing for and housing the Barr Smith Library. He also facilitated

much research undertaken by the Waite Agricultural Research Institute.

TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED

OBITUARIES

TOM E. BARR SMITII, B.A.

A life-snember of our Society since 1925; he died on 26 Noventber 1941 at

the age of 78. Mr. Barr Smith was the son of Robert Barr Smith, one of the

founders of Elder, Smith & Co., Ltd. He was a member of the University

Council since 1924, and made large financial contributions to the University, par-

ticularly in providing for and housing the Barr Smith Library. He also facilitated

much research undertaken by the Waite Agricultural Research Institute.

SIR GEORGE J. R. MURRAY, K.C.M.G,, B.A. L.L.M.

Sir George Murray, Lieut. Governor and Chief Justicc, passed away on

18 February 1942 at the age of 78. Although not a frequent attender at the

Socicty’s meetings, he was a Life Member since his election in 1925, He was

Chancellor of the University for many years.

SIR WILLIAM BRAGG, O.M., K.B.E., M.A., D.C.L., L.L.D., FR.

With the death of Sir William Bragg, at the age of 79, the Society loses one

of its most noted Honorary Fellows.

After a brilliant career at King’s College, Isle of Man, and Trinity College,

Cambridge, he came to Adelaide in 1886 as Professor of Physics, a position which

he held until 1908, when he was appointed to a similar post at Leeds, later occupy-

ing the Quain Chair of Physics at London University.

He became K.B.E. in 1920 and received the O.M. in 1931. He was director

of the Royal Institution and also of the Davey-Faraday Research Institution, and

in 1935 was elected President of the Royal Society of London.

Asa result of his brilliant researches in pure physics, radio activity, the struc-

ture of crystals and the application of X-rays to the structure of the atom, Sir

William received many scientific honours, including the Nobel Prize in 1915.

He was elected an Honorary Fellow of our Society in 1910.

SIR ROBERT W. CHAPMAN, C.M.G., M.A., B.CE., F-R.ALS.

The death of Sir Robert Chapman, at the age of 75, occurred on 27 February

1942. The son of Charles Chapman, he was born at Stony Stratford, England,

on 27 December 1866, coming to this country at the age of 10, After attending

Wesley College he took the degrees of M.A. and B.C.E. of Melbourne University

with final first class honours and scholarship in mathematics and physics. At the

age of 23 he was appointed lecturer in mathematics and physics at the University

of Adelaide. He was lecturer in applied mechanics at the School of Mines for

some years, and after having been lecturer in Engineering at the University for

10 years was appointed the first professor of engineering in 1907, In 1910 he

also was appointed to the chair of mathematics and mechanics in succession to

the late Sir William Bragg, an office which he held until 1919. He retired in

1937 after 50 years of service.

In 1927 he became a C.M.G., and in 1929 the Institution of Engineers of

Australia, of which he was a foundation member, awarded him the Peter Mual

Russell Medal and in February of this year elected him its first engineering

honorary member. He was the Institution’s third Federal president.

From the University of Melbourne he received the Kernot Memorial Medal

for the years 1926-30. Sir Robert was president of the Astronomical Society of

South Australia and was elected a Fellow of the Royal Astronomical Society in

1909, He was a member of the council of the Australian Institute of Mining

Engineers and in 1907 became president of the South Australian Institute of Sur-

veyors, in 1913 president of the South Australian Institute of Engineers, and in

“

1920 president of the Australian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, We was a

member of the Councils of the University and School of Times: and in 1939

succeeded Sir Langdon Bonython as president of the School of Mines.

He was a Tellow of the Royal Society since 1907; a member of the Council

from 1914 to 1922, and again from 1939 to 1941. Th 1936, on the oceasion of

the Society’s Centenary, he delivered the Centenary Address on “The Past Work

of the Royal Society outside the Domain of Natural Science.”

JAMES HUGO GRAY, M.D.

James Hugo Gray was born in South Australia on 14 March 1909, being the

eldest son of James T. Gray of Orrorco, He was educated at St. Peter’s Coilege,

where he obtained a Leaving Honours Bursary in Medicine, As an undergraduate

of the University of Adelaide he came under the influence of Prof. H. H. Woollard

and decided to make anatomy his career. He obtained the M.B., B.S. degrees in

1932 and M.D. in 1913. After finishing his Medical course with a resident post at

the Adelaide Hospital he demonstrated anatomy for a short time under Prof. H. J.

Wilkinson betore going to England to work under Woollard at St. Bartholomew’s.

Between 1930 and 1933 he joined in four expeditions to Central Australia

under the auspices of the Board for Anthropological Research of the Adelaide

University.

He was honorary demonstrator in anatomy and cancer research fellow at

St. Bartholomew’s 1935-36, full-time demonstrator in anatomy at University

College London, 1936-37, and senior demonstrator from 1937 until he was

appointed Professor at St. Mary’s. In all he published 18 papers of a medical

or scientific nature, some in conjunction with Prof. J. B. Cleland and others. He

died at Epsom on 20 December 1941 at the early age of 32.

DR. R. S. ROGERS, M.A,, M.D., D.Sc, FLAS.

Dr. Richard Saunders Rogers, whose death took place on 18 March 1942 at the

age of 80 years, was one of the oldest Fellows of the Society, having been elected

as far back as 1905.

As a recognised authority on the Orchidaceae of the Australian Region,

Dr. Rogers was a worthy associate of those other medical Fellows of our Society,

such as Sir Joseph Verco and Dr. R. H. Pulleine, who as amateur naturalists did

so.much to increase our knowledge of the fauna and flora of this continent.

During his association with the Royal Society he contributed 25 papers of high

merit to the Transactions as well as two others in collaboration, and two to the

Royal Society of Victoria and one to the Journal of the Royal Society of Western

Australia, all dealing with the orchids. Amongst the most interesting which he

described was Rhizsanthella Gardneri, a new genus and species of Western Aus-

tralian orchid with underground flowers.

He also published an “Introduction to the study of Australian Orchids” in

1911, and contributed the portion of Part [ of Black’s “Flora of South Australia”

dealing with the Orchidaceae.

He graduated as Bachelor of Arts at Adelaide in 1883, and at the time of his

death was its senior graduate. At the age of 74 he was awarded the degree of

D.Se. on the merit of his published works on the Orchidaceae. Dr, Rogers was

on the Board of Governors of the Public Library, Museum and Art Gallery for

44 years and President from 1929 io 1931,

He was President of this Society in 1921-22, Vice-President from 1914-19

and 1922-24, and a member of the Council from 1907-14 and from 1919-21.

DR. M. T. WINKLER

Dr. M, T. Winkler, who passed away on 13 May 1942 at the age of 60 years,

was a Fe ellow of our Society since 1935, and an active member of the Field

Naturalists’? Section for many years earlier, being keenly interested in Botany.

SILLIMANITE, KYANITE, AND CLAY DEPOSITS NEAR

WILLIAMSTOWN, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By A. R. ALDERMAN, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide

Summary

The occurrence near Williamstown of a large deposit of fire-clay of exceptional purity and quality

has long been well known in South Australia. The main mass of this occurs in and around Section

950, Hundred of Barossa,‘” where the clay has been worked extensively. R. L. Jack (1926) and P. S.

Hossfeid (1935) have described and discussed certain aspects of the occurrence and a number of

short references to mining operations have been published from time to time in "The South

Australian Mining Review."

SILLIMANITE, KYANITE, AND CLAY DEPOSITS NEAR WILLIAMSTOWN,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By A. R. ALDERMAN, Department of Geology, University of Adelaide

[Read 10 April 1942]

The occurrence near Williamstown of a large deposit of fire-clay of excep-

tional purity and quality bas long been well knewn in South Australia. The main

mass of this occurs in and around Section 950, Hundred of Barossa,“ where

the clay has been worked extensively. R. L. Jack (1926) and P. S, Hossfeld

(1935) have described and discussed certain aspects of the occurrence and a

number of short references to mining operations have been published from time

to time in “The South Australian Mining Review.”

The country rocks adjacent to the clay deposit consist of a great varicty of

schists and gneisses with quartzites and marbles. The age of these rocks is still

uncertain. They dip steeply to the east, and actually overlie a considerable thick-

ness of ilmenitic grits and sandstones, which both Howchin (1926) and Hoss-

feld (1935) agree are the basal members of part of the Adelaide Series, ze.,

Proterozoic. Howchin believed that the observed sequence is the stratigraphic

sequence and that the schists, gneisses, etc., which occur to the east of Willtams-

town, are therefore the lower members of the Adelaide Series in a metamorphosed

eendition. On the other hand, Hossfeld has maintained that the sequence in this

particular locality is inverted and that the schists and gneisses are of Barossian

age and, thercfore, older than the basal grits of the Adelaide Series which they

actually overlie.

Adjacent to the clay deposits the alteration of the surrounding rocks has

been very severe. ‘he structure has been largely obscured by intense metasomatic

alteration, by pegmatisation and by kaolinisation, In my opinion the high degree

of metamorphism of these rocks is local rather than regional. Away from the

comparatively narrow belt of intense alteration the grade of regional meta-

morphism seems to be about that of the biotite zone.

OcCURRENCE OF CLAY AND SILLIMANITE

Among the remarkable features shown by the clay deposit itself is the

presence in it of large and irregular masses of sillimanite-quartz-rutile rock.

Some of the larger of these masses may measure two or three feet across, and

the weight may be as much as a ton, or sometimes much more, The relative

amounts of the three minerals are very variable and random specimens show the

following variations, given in approximate volume percentages: sillimanite,

98-47; quartz, 51-2; rutile, 3—trace. Usually scme clay mineral is also

present. It will be seen that some of these masses consist almost entirely of finely

fibrous sillimanite, with some needles and bunches of fibres a half centimetre or

so in length. Such a rock is almost pure white with specks of red rutile. The

felted nature of the sillimanite and the absence of any directional arrangement

give it an extraordinary: toughness which has been a very big problem in its

commercial utilisation (fig. 1). Most of the varieties richer in quartz are roughly

banded, layers rich in sillimanite alternating with quartz-rich layers in which

small kyanite crystals may occur. Strings of tiny grains of rutile sometimes give

a pale pink colour (fig. 2).

©) Unless otherwise stated, section numbers given in this paper are in the Hun-

dred of Barossa.

Trans. Roy. Soc. §.A., €6 (1), 31 July 1942

The sillimanite rocks and quartz-sillimanite-gneisses, besides occurring as

discontinuous masses in the clay, also form massive deposits in the neighbourhood

of the clay at a number of different centres. Many of the sillimanite-poor

varieties resemble ordinary quartzite very closely in the field and their distinctive

character is shown only under the microscope.

Fic. 1 FIG 2

Fig. 1—Quartz-sillimanite-rutile-rock, (MC5). Section 950. Consists of fibrous

sillimanite and quartz with dark grains of rutile, Aggregates of fine granules

of clay-mineral have developed from the sillimanite in some places. x25.

Fig, 2—Quartz-sillimanite rock. (MC15). Section 950, The drawing shows a

quartz-rich band in which kyanite has formed. A few grains of rutile are also

present, x 25,

Fis, 3 Fic. 4

Fig. 3—Quartz-kyanite rock. (MC69). Section 3101, In the centre of the

field kyanite has changed to damourite, small flakes of which are also dis-

tributed throughout the quartz groundmass. Rutile is fairly plentiful, x25.

Fig. 4—Kyanite changing to damourite, (MC1). Section 951. Large kyanite

individuals are surrounded by a sheath of microcrystalline damourite. In the

lower part of the field this has recrystallised to large flakes. x 25,

A point which has formerly escaped notice is that a freshly broken surface

of the clay shows exactly the same fibrous structure as the massive sillimanite, and

there can be no doubt that the clay has been formed by hydrothermal alteration

from sillimanite. In thin sections all stages in this process can be seen, the doubic

refraction of the sillimanite fibres becomes lower, and they then become cloudy and

eventually break up into very fine granules of clay, which is probably dickite.

The clay always scems to contain some unaltered sillimanite. ‘lo confirm this,

six samples of apparently pure clay from various parts of the deposit were

examined, and all contained sillimanite fibres. This doubtless accounts for the

excellent refractory qualities of the clay. Apart from some quartz, small grains

of unaltered rutile are the only other normal constituents, although flakes of

damourite derived from kyanite are sometimes very plentiful. The chemical

compositions of typical clay and sillimanite-quartz-rutile rock, all from Section

950, are given in table A.

TABLE A

wr = i : Silfimanite-quartz-

CLAY CLAY rutile rock

(Jack, 1926) (Jack, 1926) (‘Mining Review” 73,

| 1940)

SiOe ee tee 44-04 42-86 41-26

TiOs .... rae x 0-52 0-04 | 2°70

AkLOn ttt ial 44-74 47-96 54°35

FeO .... tae _ n.d, | n.d. ‘ n.d.

MgO 20 es nil | 0-12 | 0-08

CaO... eis deal 0-32 : 0-04 0-44

Naz:O one Whee 0-39 0-18 0-02

K:0 i. ay 0-19 0-41 nil

H.O+ bh me 9-10 8-00 0-40

H.0- rer ne 1:00 0-60 0:02

CO2 ... set ag! nil nil nil

Cl A sess amet 0-04 0-01 n.d.

100-63 100-52 99:86

Molecular ratio:

AlbOs : SiOz Tr 1 : 1-67 1: 1-52 1: 1-29

Molecular ratios of AL,O, to SiO, show that in both samples of clay the

ALO, is in excess of the 1:2 ratio of dickite or kaolinite. This excess is

accounted for by the presence of sillimanite, and occasionally of pale pink crystals

of diaspore, In the third analysis, SiO, is in excess of the 1:1 ratio of pure silli-

manite and suggests that about 9% of quartz was present in the sample analysed.

Sporadic patches and aggregates of small black tourmaline crystals are some-

times found in the clay. As I have not found these in the unaltered sillimanite-

quartz-rutile rocks, it would appear that boron was introduced during the hydro-

thermal period when the sillimanite was kaolinised.

OccurRENCE OF KYANITE

Kyanite is widely distributed in the area and occuts in a variety of ways.

Pale green damourite has a similar wide distribution and its association with

kyanite proves it, in most instances, to be an alteration product of that mineral.

Some flaky damourite occurring in schists may have been formed by alteration of

normal muscovite, but most of it comes from kyanite. In schists which have

pseudomorphs of microcrystalline damourite after kyanite, the derivation is

certain.

(1) Massive quartz-kyanite rocks occur adjacent to, and apparently marginal

to, the massive quartz-sillimanite rocks referred to above. These also resemble

quarzite in the hand specimens and can often be distinguished only in thin sec-

tion from normal quartzite or from some of the quartz-sillimanite-rocks. Under

the microscope they are seen to consist of xenoblastic grains of kyanite in a grano-

blastic groundmass of quartz, A small amount of rutile is always present. The

kyanite, which may constitute up to about 20% by volume of the rock, is usually

concentrated in parallel bands and may or may not be elongated parallel to the

banding. Some muscovite (damourite) is often present as an alteration product

of kyanite. In these rocks the largest kyanite individuals rarely exceed 2 mm. in

length (fig. 3).

(2) Kyanite occurs, generally with additional quartz, as veins and aggregates

in the massive quartz-sillimanite rocks. The kyanite has generally changed partly

or completely to damourite, this change being most advanced where the silli-

manite of the host rock has been altered to clay. It would appear that during a

liydrothermal period when much sillimanite was converted to clay, the kyanite

was similarly changed to damourite. The kyanite-damourite veins and aggregates

are sometimes very thin, though they frequently measure one or more centimetres

across. In such cases they appear as bluish patches and bands in the white quartz-

sillimanite rock, the kyanite individuals being a few ainillimetres in length and

having no definite orientation. In rare cases the veins may be as much as a foot

in thickness, as shown in the accompanying sketch (fig. 5). It is obvious in these

occurrences that the kyanite veins were formed later than the sillimanite-bearing

rocks. Rutile is a very constant member of these kyanite-damourite veins. To

the south and east of the Warren Reservoir rutile occurs in quartzose veins and

lenticles in massive damourite and hag been mined, off and on, for many years.

Although, as has been mentioned, rutile is finely distributed through the sillimanite

rocks and their clay derivatives, the concentration of rutile is much higher in the

kyanite-damourite rocks. The smaller veins and segregations are very plentiful

in the sillimanite and at least some trace of kyanite can be seen in most specimens.

This has had the effect of making a variable amount of damourite a very common

component of the clay aggregate.

(3) Kyanite or pseudomorphs of da-

mourite after kyanite are very common com-

ponents of the micaceous gneisses and schists

occurring near the margin of the massive

quartz-sillimanite and quartz-kyanite rocks.

The schists and gneisses have suffered a great

deal of alteration and now appear as red-

stained chloritic schists with a characteristic [71-0 0-7

knotted and irregular weathered surface. [/°-) 200%

The knots are damourite pseudomorphs after oaeegen

kyanite, and in thin section these rocks typi- [+ ,. cay -” ;

cally consist of bands rich in quartz with |D.-7.¢;.° 00

some orthoclase, fincly crystalline damourite, |--: «1.

and biotite which has largely changed to [07.7

chlorite and much fine haematite. The rock = [+/+

has been a quartz-felspar-kyanite-biotite- [>/ . ,

gneiss. The depth and extent of the altera- |.

tion suggest that the change has largely taken

WA Xvanrre oo

WA Sos ge mer ©

MO Ae ee

place during the pneumatolytic period, and Fig. 3

thus contemporaneously with the kaolinisa- Sketch showing occurrence of

tion of the sillimanite, kyanite-daimourite vein in quartzose

clay (altered quartz - sillimanite

“AS. Revarite -oeeurs’as: -sevvestt .

(4) Kyanite occurs as segregations in itce.. Ovary, -Skeden 3100

the kyanite-bearing gneisses and schists.

These may be of the nature of veins, but their actual relations with the country

rock are obscure. Most of this matcrial now consists of damourite, and the

change from kyanite to damourite is well shown in thin section (fig. 4). The

kyanite first changes to microcrystalline damourite, which later recrystallises to

the coarser flaky variety. In Section 942 these kyanite segregations consist of

large unorientated blades, which may be several inches in length. Some of the

masses are very large: one weighing over 400 Ibs., and consisting of practically

pure kyanite, was found by Mr. G. Warren, the owner of the land, and presented

by him, with many other specimens, to the Geological Museum of Adelaide

University. In Section 951, the kyanite was in places changed a'most completely

to finely crystalline pale-green damourite which has in the past been referred to

as serpentine, and in fact greatly resembles that mineral. The highly aluminous

nature of these segregations is shown by the presence of cccasional pale blue

crystals of corundum, Rutile is always present in varying amounts, but quartz

is typically absent.

(5) Veins of kyanite with quartz occur in the schists and gneisses par-

ticularly in and around Section 959, Some of these kyanite-quartz veins contain

a small amount of felspar and they apparently grade into kyanite-orthoclase peg-

matites. I have not found this latter rock im sifu, but a large surface boulder

found m the same locality by Mr. Warren consists of unorientated bladed crystals

of kyanite, often two or three inches in length, in a matrix of orthoclase felspar.

This remarkable specimen, the dimensions of which are roughly 12 x 10 x 4

inches, is sufficiently large to give a very good idea of its origin, and I have no

hesitation in regarding it as an example of a ‘kyanite pegmatite,

DAMOURITE

Damourite is extremely widespread in the area, and its derivation from

kyanite is, in most cases, certain. Ilowever, in some quartz-damourite veins and

schists it is possible that it has been derived irom normal muscovite. It occurs

in two forms, one a fine-grained massive green type, which has been variously;

referred to as pinite. greenstone, or serpentine; the other consists of pale-green

non-elastic foliae and has sometimes been referred to as tale. In the alteration

of kyanite the fine-grained type is first formed, and on recrystallisation the coarser

foliated variety is developed. The identity of the two forms is established by

chemical analysis.

Taste B

| *

Fine-grained damourite, Coarse foliated damouriie. es

Section 3101. 4 : Prob, Section 3101, | Dana (1899)

Anal, A. R. Alderman (?) Anal, T. W. Dalwood. p. 618

% Metal atoms Go Metal atoms

to 12(0, OH) to 12(0, OH) | Go

SiO, a. a. 44-61 2°95 ; 13-00 44-95 2-95 1 3-00 45-62

“G i 4 -06

AhOs ... .. | 3862 3-01 { ae (30-48 3-04 ear 4 ae

TiOs 0-02 — | = -- | —

FesOs F 0-98 “04 3-02 tr — K3-Q1} = 2-93

FeO 0-24-01 zy he | i

MgO 0-11 “OL 0-32 +03 ; 0-34

CaO 0-71 “05 nil — i

NacQO 0-69 08 ¢ 0-93) Q-98 12 0-89 0-71

K:O 9-54 “80 J 9-22 77 } 9-40;

H2O+ 4-47 1-97 1-97 | 4-92 2-12 2:12 4-93

H:0- 0-13 0+47 —_—

100-12 100-34 99-86

It will be seen that with appropriate replacements by ions of similar dimen-

sions the formula approximates closely to that of muscovite, KAI,Si,0O,,(OH),

or better KAI, [Si,A10,,] (OH),.

@) TiO. Fe:Oa, FeO, and HeO determined by W. B. Dallwitz.

The production of damourite from kyanite obviously requires the addition of

silica, water and alkalis, mainly potash, The presence of corundum in the

damourite may indicate either a silica deficiency in the converting solutions or an

excess of alumina during the formation of the original kyanite,

Quarfly -kyanste

Kyanite-damourite ae

Sillimanite & Quarty-silfimanita

residual boulders

Damoursle

* * Aba

a Ce yp

Vaart tae y * 2A VAM EY

We od arlene yt he ye MY

ve ed 2697 sillimatile ately Uta.

EEUU Ayaae tv a cilomadife , eek ON AN NYY

WO Ryahites** ¥ ores i, gt tee ky artite ©

+4 . Ky

datnourtte, \ Seow 8” aantourtte}

\vaeaishsy tu i yy tehists 4

AXCRe CGN AMAA

Fig. 6

Diagrammatic Section to show Relations of the Aluminous Rocks around

Section 950. Not drawn to scale.

OCCURRENCE

The accompanying map shows that the western part of the area is occupied by

a considerable thickness of sandstones or grits which are generally regarded as

the basal members of part of the Proterozoic Adelaide Series (Howchin, 1926;

Nossfeld, 1935). The bedding of these rocks is well shown by the presence of

much detrital iron-ore which is usually referred to as ilmenite, although titanifer-

ous magnetite is probably a better description. Along their eastern margin these

beds are in places highly pegmatised, and although they show a good deal of drag-

folding the general dip is steep and to the east. With minor variations, the rocks

of the whole of the area shown in the map have an average strike of about

30° W. of N. and dip steeply towards the east.

The rocks overlying the ilmenitic sandstones are best observed to the north

and west of Springfeld House, where the degree of metamorphism is not so

great. As has already been mentioned, Hossfeld considers that the ‘sequence here

is inverted and that the rocks to the east of the ilmenitic sandstones are actually

older and are of Barossian age. These, which for convenience will be referred

to in this paper as low-grade schists, are metamorphosed sediments and consist of

a series of schists, fagstones, marbles, quartzites, and sandstones, although around

and to the north of Section 959 the metamorphism is much greater and a narrow

belt of sillimanite-clay and kyanite-damourite rocks occur.

To the south of Springfield House the low-grade schists are also replaced by

a large area of rocks in which sillimanite and kyanite and their derivatives, clay

and damourite, are the dominant features, It will be seen from the map that these

aluminous rocks cut directly across the bedding of the low-grade rocks, which

occur to the north, The general trend of the kyanite-damourite schists and

gneisses is also truncated by the quartz-kyanite and quartz-sillimanite rocks and

their derived clays. Where the quartz-sillimanite rocks show a rough banding,

and this is confined to the quartz-rich members of the group, this banding is

parallel to the foliation of the schists and gneisses which lie to the south and also

to the bedding of the low-grade schists which occur in the north.

The relations of the aluminous rocks in the field and also their mineralogical

and petrological characters indicate that they have been very largely formed by

replacement and are the metasomatised representatives of the low-grade schists

which occur in the northern part of the area, Although folding and faulting are

shown around the margins of the aluminous rocks, these appear to be on a small

scale and are probably due to volume changes accompanying the metasomatid

processes. There does not scem to be any major structural feature separating

the aluminous rocks from the low-grade rocks.

‘, :

* Sandsfone b- we

i we

he h as 5o i t

ao SE .

Aa yaaa yA

\ int blaces SS ee

: WA £ \ was

. ayt

, : 4

' ’ as 2

AL EARLE Zee &

Car Ne

‘

pegmatis ed.

ely SS

SACS

damourite:

pegm

GENESIS

The suggestion that the main masses of these aluminous rocks have been

formed by metasomatic processes has already been made in this paper. A some-

what similar explanation has been made to account for the occurrence of kyanite

in North Carolina, where kyanite occurs as disseminated crystals in schists and

other rocks, as well as in quartz veins and pegmatites. As shown by J. L.

Stuckey (1932), the kyanite has probably been formed as a replacement of older

minerals through the activity of pegmatitic solutions. In the Williamstown dis-

trict the more usual modes of origin of sillimanite and kyanite seem to be in-

admissible for many reasons. ‘The extraordinary purity of the quartz-sillimanite

and quartz-kyanite rocks, in which rutile is frequently the only, other minezal

present, seems to preclude their derivation from hedded aluminous sediments.

Advancing regional metamorphism in its highest grade might account for ihe

occurrence of sillimanite and kyanite together; but in the Williamstown ozcur-

rence the metamorphism is extraordinarily localised and the neighbouring rocks

have reached merely a low grade; moreover, the aluminous rocks are not confined

to one stratigraphic horizon, but replace rocks of such varying compositions as

dotomitic marbles, quartzites, and pelites. It might be argued that they are meta-

morphosed bauxitic clays formed on an ancient land-surface, a theory which Dunn

(1929) has advanced to account for somewhat similar deposits in Singhbhum, but

the localised character of the metamorphism, as well as the texture of the rocks

themselves, makes this theory unacceptable.

The circumstances of occurrence of corundum sillimanite rock in the unorite

of the Bushveldt complex as described by Hall and Nel (1926), and of kyanite

in the marundites and allied rocks in the Eastern Transvaal, also described by

Hall (1923), are so different from those at present under discussion that they can

be neglected.

A theory suggesting the metasomatic origin of kyanite and sillimanite rocks

pre-supposes the existence of fluids very rich in alumina. That such fluids, in

some form or other, existed in the Williamstown area is proved by the wide-

spread occurrence of quartz-kyanite veins and also of kyanite-pegmatites.

Although the smaller of the quattz-kyanite veins, and particularly those occurring

in massive quartz-sillimanite rock, may be segregation veins formed by the migra-

tion of aluminium silicate under changed physical conditions, this is a most un-

likely explanation for the formation of the larger veins and pegmatites.

Magmatic fluids sufficiently rich in alumina to produce the crystallisation of

aluniniuin silicates are usually supposed to owe their origin to contamination by

rocks of sedimentary origin. IIowever, this supposition does not seem to be

necessary, and there is certainly no positive evidence for it in the Williamstown

area, E. 5, Hills (1938) has reviewed the evidences which show that andalusite

and sillimanite may sometimes occur in uncontaminated igneous rocks. In this

paper Hills shows that andalusite occurring in such a way is far commoner than

sillimanite, but he comes to the conclusion that there is good evidence to show

that solutions rich in alumina can be developed from magmas without the aid of

contamination. In papers, also quoted by, Hills, H. H. Read (1931) from his

study of sillimanite-bearing granites in the Strath Halladale injection complex

has seen the possibility of alumina-rich liquids constituting the residual portions

of granite magma, and P, Niggli (1920) has suggested that the alumina in such

liquids may be present as aluminium halides, alkali aluminate and similar com-

pounds. Ita later paper, Niggli (1925) concludes that under special circumstance

normal niagmas may give rise to sillimanite and andalusite.

In California Macdonald and Merriam (1938) have described the occurrence

in Fresno County of andalusite developed by pneumatolytic action in pegmatite.

In a neighbouring locality, near Kings River, Durre!l and Macdonald (1939) have

indicated that chlorite veins occurring in serpentine are the result of the introduc-

tion of alumina from igneous emanations. In these two instances the activity of

alumina-rich fluids scems to be undoubted, and it is suggested that they are derived

from neighbouring diorite intrusions.

In the past, aluminiuni-metasomation has not been considered by many

writers to be an important factor in petrogenesis. Goldschmidt (1922), in a dis-

cussion of the gencral nature of metasomatic processes in silicate rocks, gives

instances of metasomatism in which all the common metals except aluminium are

introduced. Many writers, including Goldschmidt (1911), suggest that some

metals, particularly iron, may be introduced in the form of chlorides and

other halides, This is particularly interesting in view of Niggli’s suggestion,

mentioned above, that alumina-rich solutions concentrated from magmas may have

the alumina present in the form of halides. C. N. Fenner (1933, p. 54) comments

on the high volatility of FeCl, and AICI,, as shown by figures obtained by C. G.

Maier (1925). FeCl, at a temperature of 318°4° C, has a vapour pressure equiva-

lent to 8/2°6 mm. of mercury, The corresponding figures for AICI, are 181°3° C.

and 960-1 mm. of mereury. These vapour pressures are among the highest of all

the common metals, and Fenner points out that because of this and hecause of

the mass action effect caused by their large concentration in a magma they might

be expected to be volatilised in the greatest quantities. However, in the case of

AICL, its tendency to react with water to form oxide exerts a restraining influence,

which may prevent Al from being carried far, or may diminish to a great degree

its escape from the magma, uniess the ratio of HCl to water vapour is unusually

high. In another part of the same paper (p. 77) Fenner points out that hydro-

chloric acid is sometimes present in very large amounts during magmatic activity

and quotes the work of Zies (1929), who calculated that in 1919 the fumaroles of

the Valley of Ten Thousand Smokes, in the Katmiai region, were evolving hydro-

chloric acid at the rate of about 1,250,000 tons per year, and hydrofluoric acid

about 200,000 tons, This was seven years after the initial outbursts in the Katmai

region, when presumably the evolution of gas had been even greater, These con-

siderations suggest that under special, and perhaps rather rare, conditions

aluminium-rich liquids may be sufficiently concentrated, mobile and active to

promote metasomatic processes. I believe that such a combination of circum-

stances produced the aluminous rocks of the Williamstown area. The rarity of

similar examples of aluminium-metasomatism would be due to (a) the rarity of

solutions containing a sufficient aluminium content to cause metasomatic replace-

ment, and (b) the non-mobility of most of such alumina-rich solutions,

History AND CORRELATION

My conclusions concerning the history of the Wilhamstown deposits can best

be sumined up by considering them to have originated in a number of periods or

phases. Although these phases will be considered separately and in sequence it

must be understood that there would have becn, a transition between phases and

between localities, and that the phases may overlap in t’me from one locality to

another, The controlling factors would appear to be falling temperature and

falling alumina-concentration, with changes in pressure exerting no great effect.

1, Sulimanite Phase—This is the period of maxinium intensity of aluminium-

metasomatism, during which there was an introduction of alumina, silica and

probably titania. ‘The purer sillimanite deposits and the quartz-sillimanite-rutile

rocks would have been formed by this action. Rutile, in small amounts, is a

common constituent of these rocks, and it is prebable that most of the titania was

introduced, although some may be derived from the original sediments, many of

which contain original rutile. With this possible exception and perhaps some

silica, all the varied components of the sediments have been replaced. The areas

of sillimanite-quartz rocks are regarded as centres at which metasomatic activity

was greatest,

2. Quarts-kyanite-rock Phase—The reaction would be essentially the same

as those in Phase 1, with kyanite formed instead of sillimanite. The quartz-

kyanite rocks form a partial margin to, and merge into, the quartz-sillimanite

rocks. This phase is thus intermediate in all respects betwen Phases 1 and 3,

3... Main Kyanite Phase—The effects are very widespread and can be sub-

divided :

(a} Kyanite veins and segregations in the sillimanite rocks were obviously

formed after solidification of the sillimanite. The smaller ones have

probably developed through localised migration of aluminium silicate

derived from the host-rock under changed physical conditions, and thus

be somewhat similar in origin to the quartz-kyanite venules described by

C, E. Tilley (1937) in some kyanite-amphibclites, Such a mode of origin,

although applicable to small individuals, seems very unlikely for the larger

kyanite veins, and it would appear that these were formed from the

aluminium-rich solutions which produced the sillimanite but at a lower

temperature and probably lower aluminium concentration,

(b) The kyanite(-damourite)-schists and gneisses testify to the changed com-

position or lower temperature of aluminous solutions, which can be pic-

tured as permeating outwards from the centres of greatest activity

developed in Phase 1. The extent to which materials other than silica

and alumina have migrated during the reactions is problematical,

out quartz occur in a number of localities in the ‘kyanite-damourite-schists.

The quartz-free occurrences sometimes show the presence of corundum.

Although rutile occurs as disseminations in the majority of rocks formed

im Phases 1, 2, and 3, it reaches its greatest development in some of the

kyanite-damourite veins, thus indicating the maximum activity of titanium

during the sequence, Some of the more quartzose veins have a small

amount of orthoclase felspar, and thus form a natural transition to Phase 4,

4. Kyanite-pegmatite Phase — With falling temperature, the increasing

importance of alkali is shown by the kyanite-orthoclase-pegmatite phase. The

presence of kyanite indicates that the solutions are still rich in aluminium. There

is no direct proof that these rocks were formed at this stage of the sequence ; how-

ever, they fit best into the general scheme here,

5. Normal Pegmatite Phase—Quartz-orthoclase-muscovite-pegmatites are a

conunon feature of the area and extend beyond the limits of the aluminous rocks.

Tourmaline and beryl are common components with rutile a good deal scarcer.

The presence of orthoclase and muscovite and the absence of kyanite show that

the proportion of alkalis has increased with respect to alumina. Tourmaline is

not present in significant amounts in unaltered rocks of the earlier phases, so that

its occurrence in these pegmatites is notable and indicates the activity of boron.

The scarcity of rutile shows that titanium is no longer important in the solutions,

6. Hydrothermal Phase—The main features of this phase are the conver-

sion of sillimarite to clay and of kyanite to damourite, This lattcr reaction requires

the presence of alkalis, so that potash, particularly, must have been active through

at least part of this phase. Boron is still notable, tourmaline being fairly common

in both clay and damourite while being insignificant or absent from the unaltered

sillimanite and kyanite rocks. This point is of some importance as it indicates

that the activity of boron was confined to the later phases. A comparison of

analyses of sillimanite and clay (table A) shows that silica was added during the

conversion. It hag already been noted that the change of sillimanite to clay was

not a complete one, and that the clay normally contains fine needles of sillimanite.

The clay deseribed here is the northern limit of a belt of clay deposits which

extend for some miles roughly in a south-south-east direction as far as Birdwood.

In the Williamstown area the clay rocks coincide very approximately with the

quartz-sillimanite rocks, although pegmatites and other rock-types have also.

suffered kaolinisation. As the quartz-sillimanite rocks seem to be confined to

the Williamstown area, it would appear that the metasomatism reached its greatest

activity in the northern part of the belt, while further south the pegmatite and

hydrothermal phases were the main manifestations,

Table C summarises the nature of the substances active during the various

phases. ‘

TABLE C.

PHASES

' 1 . #23 | 4 a) 3 F 6

ACTIVE j SILLiMANITE | KYANITE | KYANITE | PEGMATITES | HYDROTHERMAL

SUBSTANCES ! | ROCKS |; PEGMATITES , '

| i 5 r :

; I I i ! {

Sid, : '

Al ns : ! \ 1

lies: | |

| t | ' I

K N ) { | ' 1 f]

a ! ' a a a A al

| \ \

B i ! 1 i

OH 1 ' ( 1 I

{ ! 1 ! !

ar au ial ne a

TEMP. HIGH ———_-__—_—_>. ——_ SES LOW

‘The association of rutile with sillimanite and kyanite rocks is very striking

in this area, It is notable that the same association is shown in other places where

aluminium silicate mincrals occur. It is possible that the similar ionic radii of

aluminium and titanium, 1°43 and 1-46 A.U., respectively, may be responsible

for the occurrence together of these minerals. In his memoir on the aluminous

refractory minerals of Northern India, Dunn (1929), records the almost invariable

association of rutile with sillimanite and kyanite. There are many other simi-

larities between these occurrences in India and that at Williamstown. However,

Junn has maintained that the Indian deposits have been formed by the meta-

morphism of bauxitic clays, an explanation which is untenable for those at

Williamstown, In the Bhandara district, kyanite and sillimanite rocks are

accompanied by such minerals as rutile, tourmaline, dumorticrite, topaz, and

roscoelite. S. K, Chatterjee (1931) has suggested that, accompanying the intru-

sion of tourmaline-muscovite-pegmatites, boron containing liquids would form

mobile solutions of aluminium silicate by reaction with the surrounding chlorite-

muscovite-schists, and that the kyanite and sillimanite rocks were derived from

these liquids. Such an explanation could not apply to the Williamstown rocks,

because boron does not appear to have been active until a late stage in the meta-

somatic processes, in fact, till after the sillimanite and kyanite rocks were formed.

Large masses of andalusite occur at White Mountain and elsewhere in Cali-

fornia. According to P. F. Kerr (1932) these owe their origin to the meta-

morphism of aluminous rocks (probably trachytic lavas) by porphyry intrusions.

Rutile was introduced during the metamorphism and topaz and tourmaline during

a subsequent pneumatolytic stage. The association of rutile with an aluminium

silicate mineral is again notable. This extremely common association has been

commented on by, J. A. Dunn (1933) who insists that the rutile, as well as the

aluminium silicate mineral, is never of magmatic origin but is derived from meta-

morphosed country rock. Certainly much of the country rock at Williamstown

has a titanium content which cannot be disregarded, but this could certainly not

account for the richness in rutile of the great bulk of the aluminium-silicate-rocks

in that area, where the amounts of titanium and aluminium scem to be roughly

proportional, The country rocks richest in titanium are felspathic sandstones.

Strangely enough, rutile is apparently a negligible component of the kyanite rocks

of North Carolina, which, according to Stuckey (1932) have had an origin very

similar to those at Williamstown. With this exception rutile and tourmaline and

frequently topaz and dumortierite are very. usual associates of the aluminium

silicate minerals. So far neither topaz nor dumortierite have been identified in

the Williamstown area, where it is possible they have been overlooked.

SUMMARY

Massive quartz-sillimanite and quartz-kyanite rocks asscciated with kyanite-

schists, quartz-kyanite-veins and kyanite-pegmatites occur in a region of low-

grade metamorphosed sediments which have also been intruded by normal peg-

matites. Sillimanite has been largely converted to clay (probably dickite) and

kyanite to damourite. Rutile is a very constant associate of the aluminium silicate

tuinerals. Aluminium-rich solutions cf magmatic origin are believed to have

produced varying degrees of metasomatism in the country rock, after which peg-

matitic and hydrothermal phases were active.

I wish to express my indebtedness to Sir Douglas Mawson, Prof, C, E.

Tilley, Mr. R. Grenfell Thomas and Dr. A. B, Edwards, which whom I have

discussed this work in the field or in the laboratory. Mr. W. B. Dallwitz has

made several chemical and mineralogical determinations. Mr. H. E. Brock pre-

pared the map and several of the diagrams for reproduction. Finally, I must

thank Mr. G. Warren for his interest and kindness at Springfield.

lust or REFERENCES

CHATTERJEE, S. K. 1931 Rec. Geol. Surv., India, 65, (1), 285-305

Dana, E. S. 1899 System of Mineralogy, New York

Dunn, J. A. 1929 Mem. Geol. Surv., India, 52, (2), 145-274

Dunn, J. A. 1933 Econ. Geol., 28, 692-695

Durrett, C., and Macponatp, G. A. 1939 Am. Mineral., 24, 452-456

Fenner, C. N. 1933 Ore Deposits of the Western States, A.I.M.FE,

GoLpsctiiMintT, V. M. 1911 Vidensk.. Skr., No, 1

GoLpscirtptT, V. M. 1922 Econ. Gecl., 17, 105-123

Hari, A. L. 1923 Trans. Geol. S. Africa, 25, 43-67

Hatt, A. L., and Nev, L. T. 1926 ‘Trans. Geol. S. Africa, 29, 1-15

Hints, EF, S. 1938 Geol. Mag., 75, 296-304

Efossretp, P.S, 1935 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 59, 16-67

Howcuin, W. 1926 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, 1-16

Jack, R. 1. 1926 Geol. Surv. S. Aust., Bull, 12

Kerr, P. F. 1932 Econ. Geol., 27, 614-643

Linporen, W. 1933 Mineral Deposits, New York

Macponatp, G. A., and MerrrAm, R. 1938 Am. Mineral., 23, 588-594

Mazer, C. G, 1925 U.S. Bur. Mines, Tech. Paper 360

Minixec Review 1940 S. Aust. Dept. Mines, 73, 36

Nicci, P. 1920 Die Leightflichtigen Bestandtcile im Magma, Leipzig

Nicci, P. 1925 Trans. Faraday Soc., 20, 428-441

Reap, H. IT. 1931 Geol. of Cent. Sutherland, Mem. Geol. Surv., Scot,

Sruckey, J, L. 1932 Econ. Gcol., 27, 661-674

Torney, C. E. 1937 Min. Mag., 24, 158, 555-568

Zigs, E.G. 1929 Natl. Geog. Soc., Contrib. Tech. Paper, 1, No. 4

THE ANYSTID MITES OF AUSTRALIA

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

Family ANYSTIDAE Oudemans, 1902

Reddish to yellowish, soft-bodied, long-legged, free-living predaceous mites. Body short and broad,

and somewhat triangular (subfamily Anystinae) or elongate-elliptical (subfamily Erythracarinae).

Cuticle soft and finely striated. Eyes, one or two on each side, generally strongly pigmented. No

transverse suture between propodo- and hysterosoma. Palpi 5-segmented; tibia with a series of stout

apical spines; tarsus situated ventrally, long and slender. Mandibles clubshaped with hook-like

apical chela. Peritremata horn-like arising from the base of the mandibles; arms free or not.

Dorsally usually with an anterior median shield formed by absence of cuticular striations, or by

striations running in a different direction; sometimes absent. Dorsal setae long, thick and coarsely,

strongly ciliated, frequently on small islands or plates of non-striated cuticle; in transverse rows of

2, 4, or 6. In front of the propodosoma is a hemispherical projection (anterior sensillary area of

crista of Oudemans) bearing a pair of fine sensory setae. The dorsal shield carries a second pair of

sensory setae and two pairs of normal setae.

THE ANYSTID MITES OF AUSTRALIA

By H. Womersiey, A.L.S., FLR.E.S., South Australian Museum

[Read 10 April 1942]

Family ANYSTIDAE Oudemans, 1902

Reddish to yellowish, soft-bodied, long-legged, free-living predaceous mites.

Body short and broad, and somewhat triangular (subfamily Anystinae) or

elongate-elliptical (subfamily Erythracarinae), Cuticle soft and finely striated.

Eyes, one or two on each side, generally strongly pigmented. No transverse suture

between propodo- and hysterosoma. Palpi 5-segmented; tibia with a series of

stout apical spines; tarsus situated ventrally, long and slender. Mandibles club-

shaped with hook-like apical chela. Peritremata horn-like arising from the base

of the mandibles; arms free or not. Dorsally usually with an anterior median

shield formed by absence of cuticular striations, or by striations running in a

different direction; sometimes absent. Dorsal setae long, thick and coarsely,

strongly ciliated, frequently on small islands or plates ot non-striated cuticle ;

in transverse rows of 2, 4, or 6. In front of the propodosoma is a hemispherical

projection (anterior sensillary area of crista of Oudemans) bearing a pair of fine

sensory setae. “The dorsal shield carries a second pair of sensory setae and two

pairs of normal setae.

Legs long and slender with long ciliated, and some sensory, setae; tarsi with

paired claws (ciliated) and a more or less bell-shaped empodium, or claws toothed

on inner margins, empodium claw-like or as a ciliated pad-like pulvillus. Tarsi

sometimes subdivided. Coxae in four pairs or all adjacent.

Ventrally are the large genital and anal openings, with or without a small

round plate anterior of the genital opening. The setae around the genital and

anal opening are of generic importance, often being arranged on small plates,

either singly or in twos.

Little is known of the life-history beyond the larvae and nymphs of some

species of Anystinae.

The family is divided by Oudemans into two well-defined subfamilies,

the Anystinae and the Erythracarinae.

ANYSTINAE Oudemans 1906

Arch. f. Naturgesch., 5, (3), 383, 1936,

Short and broad; two eyes on each side, situated comparatively well behind.

Anterior sensillary area and paired sensillae present. Median dorsal shield wider

than long with paired antero-median sensillae and four normal setae. Peritremata

horn-like with free ends. Palpi: tibia with three stout apical spines (one on

larva), tarsus long. Dorsal setae in rows of four often arising from small areas

(? shields) devoid of striations, long, strong and coarsely ciliated. Coxae all

adjacent, J and IL with supracoxal seta. Upper surface of legs smooth; the

free segments with sparse sensory setae, short, smooth, adpressed setae and long

ciliated outstanding setae. Basi- and telofemur always separated. Tibia longer

than tarsi and considerably thinner than genu; tarsi short, somewhat laterally

compressed, often arched. Claws smooth, finely striated. Empodium in larvae

claw-like, twice bent; in nymph I claw-like only on leg IV, on leg I to IIT bell-

shaped; in all other instars and on all legs bell-shaped.

Ventrally ; labium with 8-12 pairs of fine setae, Between coxae HI and IV

a median round shield. On each side of the genital opening two very small

shiclds, with a single long or special setae, or on each side only one shield with

two setae, Also on each side of uropore three or four very small shields with

single setae.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

The male is characterised by conical distally clavate setae on the palpal tarsi

and by the ciliated anal setae.

Key To THE GENERA OF ANYSTINAE

1 Without a median dorsal shield. In the position of the shield with 2 sensory setae and

4 normal setae. Dorsal setae 4, 6, 6, 4, 2, Small shields near genital opening with only

df singls sete. Gen. Tencatcia Ouds, 1936

With a median dorsal shield. Z

2 Median shield with entire transverse striations, with 2 sensory and 4 normal setae.

Dorsal setae 4, 4, 4. Small shields near genital opening with only a single seta,

Gen. Walsia Ouds. 1936

Median shield with short transverse striations along the midline, otherwise as above.

Gen, Suartia Ouds. 1936

Median dorsal shield entirely without striations of with finely punctured reticulations. 3

3 Small shields near genital opening with only single setae. Median dorsal shield more

than twice as wide as long. “ :

Gen. Anystis von Heyden 1826

Small shields near genital opening with paired setae. Median dorsal shicld relatively

t vid long.

RT te Tee Gen. Scharfenbergia Ouds. 1936

N.B.—Oudemans (1936) also erects the genus Autenriethia for Actineda velox Berl. 1905

from India, and Barellea for Anystis sinensis Berl, 1923 from China. The data given, how-

ever, does not permit them to be keyed here.

Genus Anystis von Heyden 1826

ANYSTIS BACCARUM (Linn. 1758)

In his monographic revision of the family Anystidae (Arch, f. Naturgesch.,

1936, Bd. 5, Hft. 3, 364-346) Oudemans questions my record of this species from

Western Australia, Victoria, New South Wales and South Australia (Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1933, 57, 111). I must admit that at that time one did

not recognise the minute details now used by Oudemans for the separation of

genera and species of this family. In consequence, in working up new material I

have taken the opportunity to re-examine my older mounts more critically. The

result is that I can now affirm that all my old records are definitely of A. baccarum

as understood by Oudemans, From this material I herewith give sufficient figured

details to show that this is so.

Unfortunately, however, Oudemans does not satisfactorily point out the

specific differences in the species of Anystis nor does he key the species. While

some of his species are valid, others seem to be very little if at all different from

baccarum.

He does not describe the male of this species, but of the genus states that

the males are distinguished by the conical distally clavate setae on the dorsal side

of the palpi, and mostly by the ciliated setae in the neighbourhood of the genital

opening. I give, therefore, a figure of the genital and anal openings, in which it

will be seen that the ciliated setae are associated with the anal and not the genital

opening (fig. D).

The following dimensions are from a male and a female specimen, respec-

tively, from Buckland Park, South Australia. The female was gravid.

Length $ 990, 9 910»; width 1,040», 1,083. Length of palpi

400 p, 480p. Length of mandibles 2904, 290, Anterior sensillary setae

113 », 121». Posterior sensillary setae 1354, 148. Scutal setae 243 p, 243 p.

Dorsal setae 240 », 240. Width of median dorsal scutum 370», 370»; depth

103 w, 103 p. Legs 11,120, 1,040; IT 1,520, 11204; II 1,390, 1,040»;

IV 1,120», 1,040 u. Tarsus 1% length of metatarsus in both sexes.

Localities—Western Australia: Waroona, August 1931; Mullewa, Sep-

tember 1931. New South Wales: Five Islands, July 1938. Victoria: Dan-

denongs, 1931; Burnley, 1938. South Australia: Urrbrac, May 1930; Buckland

Park, August 1933; Waterfall Gully, May 1938; Humbug Scrub, October 1938;

Bridgewater, February 1939; Victor Harbour, May 1939.

Fig. 1 A—F

Anystis baccarum (L.)—A, dorsal view of @ ; B, palp of ¢; C, tip of tarsus

from side; D, same from below; E, genital and anal opening of 9 ; F, same of ¢@.

Gen, Watzia Oudemans 1936

Arch. f. Naturgesch., 5, (3), 419.

As in Anystis, but the position of the median dorsal shield with fine hori-

zontal striations. Type species, W’. antiguensis (Stoll, 1886) Ouds., 1936,

Walzia australica n. sp

Pescription—Female: Length 880», width 860 vw. when gravid 720” long

by 850% wide. Palpi as figured 380 # long, apex of tibia with three long and one

smail, stout spines. Mandibles 230» long. Median dorsal scute 310 » wide,

108 » long, with horizontal fine striations, with a median pair of sensory setae

and two pairs of normal setae. Anterior sensory setae 108 » long, posterior 135 p,

ciliated for about the distal three-fourths. Dorsal setae on small plates, 216

long, ciliated, arranged 4, 4, 4, 4. Legs 11,280 n, 11 1,360 », LIT 1.200 ww, TV 1,300 p;

tarsus I 216, metatarsus | 3044; with numerous adpressed setae, and long out-

standing ciliated setae; claws and empodium as figured, Venter: Genital and

anal openings as figured. Male: Length 640», width 590 w. Palpi as figured,

Pig.2 A—G

Walzia australica n.sp.—A, dorsal view of 9 ; B, outline of gravid Q ; C, palp

of g¢; D, mandible; E, tip of tarsus from side; F, genital and anal openings

of 9; G, same of ¢@.

with dorsally numerous conical and apically clavate setae. Mandibles 220 » Jong.

Median dorsal scute as in female 324 wide by 120» long; scutal setae 243 p.

Anterior sensory setae 108 », posterior 121». Legs | 960», 11 1,040 4, LIT 880 p,

IV 930 w; tarsus I 150», metatarsus 1 255%. Dorsal setac on small plates as in

female. Venter: Genital and anal openings as figured; anal opening anteriorly

with a cluster of specialised setae.

Locahties—South Australia: Port McDonnell, January 1941, four ¢,two @,

on ti-tree (J. S. W.). Queensland: Nurimbah, April 1935, @ (A. R. B.);

Mount Cotton, Brisbane, on Jacksonia, 3 September 1941, two @ ; Redland Bay,

on Leptospermum, 3 September 1941, one 6, one 9 (A. R. B.).

_ Reimarks—TVhis specics may possibly be identical with the genotype Walsia

antiguensis (Stoll, 1886), but it seems advisable at present, on account of the

localities, to regard it as distinct. There are, however, no essential specific differ-

ences observable.

Subfamily ERYTHRACARINAE Oudemans 1936

Archiv. f. Naturgesch., 5, (3), 427, 1936.

Mostly elongate, two or four eyes situated well forward. Peritremata

mostly fused with the front edge of the epistoma. On the front of the idiosoma

with or without a sensillary area, with two sensillary setae; behind these again

a second pair of sensillary setae, which, if a median dorsal shield is present, are

situated thereon. Median dorsal shield present or absent. Dorsal setae behind

shield in transverse rows of 2,4 or 6. Mandibles short, longitudinally striate,

Palpal tibia with two ciliated claws, or only one smooth claw. Legs with

short adpressed and long outstanding setae, both ciliated, in addition to some

sparse sensory setae, ‘Tibiae in the Z2-eyed genera longer, in the 4-eyed shorter

than the tarsi. Tarsi cylindrical, undivided or divided into two or many parts.

Empodium claw- or brush-like. Coxae conjoined or free. No small shield

between coxae IIT and 1V. Near genital and anal openings no setae on small plates.

Male with specialised setae in a cluster associated with anal opening. Uropore

terminal.

The subfamily is divided by Oudemans (loc. cit., 428) into the following

groups of genera:

Group A Scapula row of setae with 4, the other rows with only 2. Peritremata not

chambered, Anterior sensillary: area present. Palpi long and slender,

femur and genu fused. Empodium a short thick, ciliated claw.

Genera Erythracarus, Schellenbergia, Bechstaenia

Group B- Dorsal setae in transverse row of 4 or more. Peritremata chambered,

built into the front edge of epistoma, their ends not free. No anterior

sensillary area. Mandible with two setae, posterior needle-like and out-

standing. Palpi short and thick, femur and genu separated. Basi- and

telofemur of legs separated; their sctae forming a crown. Tarsi sub-

divided into from 7 to 18 parts. All four pairs of coxae separated; their

posterior margins indistinct,

Genera Tarsotomus, Tarsolarkus

Group C Dorsum strongly haired. Propodosoma with large round shield, which is

only haired on the edge. No anterior sensillary area. Two eyes on each

side. Palpi short and thick. Basi- and telofemur of legs with crown of

setae. Coxal pairs touching.

Genus Anandia

Group D_ Short, rounded, quite quadrangular. Gnathosoma very short. Palpi

short. :

Genus Siblyia

Group E Only two eyes. Palpal tibia with only one claw.

Genus Chabrieria

As yet only the genera Erythracarus Berl. 1903, and Schellenbergia Ouds.

1936, are known from Australia.

Genus SCHELLENBERGIA Oudemans 1936

Archiv, f. Naturgesch., 5, (3), 433, 1936.

One eye on each side. Median dorsal shield broader than long. Dorsal

setae on small shields, Peritremata~—shaped ; distally broadened and the ends free.

Anterior sensory arca present, with terminal knob, Mandibles with two setae.

All legs with basi- and telofemur ankylosed. Tarsus shorter than tibia with long

basal part and short distal part. All coxae adjacent.

Type Erythracus domesticus C. L. Koch 1847

Schellenbergia warregense (Hirst 1931) n. comb.

P.Z.S., 562, as Tarsotomus warregense; Oudemans. 1936 (loc. cit.), 442.

Oudemans (loc. cit.) places this species amongst a list of uncertain and in-

adequately described species of Tarsotomus, We queries Hirst’s reference to the

sexes, in which the female is said to have a comb of specialised setae around the

genital opening. Oudemans correctly considers that this sex is the male,

As the type material of this species has been deposited by Prof. T. Harvey

Johnston in the South Australian Museum, it is now possible to place the species

in Oudeman’s new genus Schellenbergia, As Ilirst’s paper was published post-

humously after an unsuccessful search for his drawings, detailed figures drawn

from the type material are now given together with a more detailed and adequate

description.

Description—Male: Length ca. 1,120 4, width ca. 720 »; elongate. Eyes

1-+1. Dorsal scute large, wider than long, approximately 310% by 162 p; out-

line approximately as in figure, Anterior sensillary area present, with anterior

knob and a pair of sensory setae 190 long. Posterior sensory setae missing.

Palpi 480 » long, tibiae with two unequal shortly and coarsely ciliated claws at

apex, tarsi long. Mandibles 160 » long, with a short simple subapical seta, and a

long straight outstanding ciliated posterior seta. Scutal setae 216», Dorsal setae

220 w, arranged 4, 2, 2, plus. Legs I 1,200», 11 1,320 y, HT 1,120p, 1V 1,680 p;

tarsus I subdivided into basitarsus 216» long and telotarsus 81; metatarsus I

300». Genital opening with a complicated brush of specialised ciliated setae as

figured. Dorsal setae strongly and coarsely ciliated as are the leg setae, especially

the outstanding ones. Claws and empcdium as figured. Female: Jength 800 p,

width 560). Dorsal scute 320» wide by 128» long. Dorsal setae to 240 p.

Sensory setae, both anterior and posterior, missing. Genital opening as figured.

Otherwise as in male.

Locality—The type material in the South Australian Museum consists of

one ¢,two @ from Barringun, New South Wales, August 1927 (coll. S. Hirst)

and one ¢@ from Bourke, New South Wales, August 1927 (coll. S. Hirst)

The ¢ is the holotype, and the @ from Bourke the allotype.

Genus EryvrHracarus Berl, 1903

Eyes 2 + 2. Median dorsal shield longer than wide. Dorsal setae on

small shields. Peritremata quite straight; their ends free. Anterior sensillary area

with ventral point. Mandible with a distal scta only. Basi- and telofemur of all

legs dorsally ankylosed. Tarsi longer than tibiae and not subdivided. All coxal

pairs adjacent. Genital opening of male with clavate setae.

Type Trombidium parietinum Herm, 1804

ERYTHRACARUS ? PARIETINUM (Herm, 1804)

Trombidium partetinum Herm. 1804.

Erythracarus parietinum Ouds. 1936. Archiv. f. Naturgesch., 5, (3), 429.

A single specimen from under Eucalyptus bark, Bathurst, New South Wales,

30 December 1937 (S. L. A.).

Fig. 3 A—G

Schellenbergia warregense (Hirst)—A, anterior portion of dorsum; B, anterior

sensillary area and peritremata; C, mandible; D, tip of palpal tibia and tarsus;

EF, tarsus of lez II; F, genital opening of g ; G, same of @.

Fig.4 A—F

Erythracarus ? partetinum (Herm.)—-A, dorsum; B, anterior portion of dorsum

enlarged; C, tip of palpal tibia and tarsus; D, mandible; E, tip of tarsus; F, genital

aperture of 9.

Description—Female: Length 720 », width 480. Eyes ? 2 + 2, one very

distinct, behind which is a large dense pigment mass possibly obscuring a second

eye on cach side. Palpi 290» long, tibial claw and tarsus as figured. Mandibles

short, thick, 190» long, basally with only a single distal seta. Median anterior

dorsal shicld as figured, slightly longer than wide, and widest anteriorly, 100»

wide, 110 « long, with two pairs of ordinary setae, and a pair of sensillary setae.

Anterior sensillary area present with a pair of sensory setae, 108, long, and

ciliated their entire length. Dorsal setae strongly ciliated, arranged 4, 2, 2, 2, on

small plates. Legs relatively short, I 7204, IL 820, III 8004, 1V 880 »; tarsus

I 200», not subdivided, metatarsus I 135»; all legs with short adpressed, and

long outstanding setae; tarsi with paired ciliated claws, and claw-like ciliated

empodium. All coxae adjacent. Genital opening as figured.

Remarks—Al|though the preparation of this single specimen is not very good,

it appears to be E. parietinum (TTerm.) as described and figured by Oudemans

1936, except that the size is very much smaller. Oudemans gives the size as:

length 1,175 », width 575 p.

NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND RECORDS OF COLLEMBOLA

FROM AUSTRALIA, NEW ZEALAND AND NEW GUINEA

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

Superfamily PODUROIDEA Worn. 1933

Family ACHORUTIDAE Salmon 1941

Hypogastruridae Borner 1913, Womersley 1939.

It has been shown by Folsom 1916, Bagnall 1940, and more recently by Salmon 1941, that the

generic name Hypogastrura Bourlet 1839, revived by Borner 1906, is a homonym and invalid, and

that Achorutes Templeton 1835, with A. dubius Templeton 1935 as genotype, must be used. The

necessary change in the family name has been made by Salmon. Similarly Hypogastrurinae must be

replaced by Achorutinae, and the old Achorutinae by Neanurinae, with the germs Achotutes of

BG6rner being changed to Neanura MacGillivray.

NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND RECORDS OF COLLEMBOLA

FROM AUSTRALIA, NEW ZEALAND AND NEW GUINEA

By H. Womerstey, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

[Read 10 April 1942]

Superfamily PODUROIDEA Wom, 1933

Family ACHORUTIDAE Salmon 1941

= Hypogastruridae Borner 1913, Womersley 1939.

It has been shown by Folsom 1916, Bagnall 1940, and more recently by

Salmon 1941, that the generic name Hypogastrura Bourlet 1839, revived by

Borner 1906, is a homonym and invalid, and that Achorutes Templeton 1835, with

A. dubius Templeton 1935 as genotype, must be used. The necessary change in

the family name has been made by Salmon. Similarly Hypogastrurinae must be

replaced by Achorutinae, and the old Achorutinae by Neanurinae, with the genus

Achorutes of Borner being changed to Neanura MacGillivray.

Subfamily ACHORUTINAE Borner 1906

Achorutes armatus Nic. 1841—New Zealand: Manaka Hills, Auckland, 12 April

1941 (E. C. C.) ; Hunika Falls, Auckland, 12 April 1941 (C. S. W. R.).

Achorutes purpurascens Lubk.—New Zealand: Nelson, on tobacco plants, 9 Octo-

ber 1933 (E. C. C.).

Achorutes manubrialis Tullbg. 1869—New Zealand: Palmerston North, on swedes,

September 1930 (W. Cottier).

Xenylla maritima Tullbg. 1869—Australia: Bell’s Creek, Victoria, 24 June 1941

(R. T. M. P.). New Zealand: Palmerston North, on rotting swedes, 1931

(W. C.); on apple bark, 16 July 1932 (C. O. Burdon); Auckland, under

dead white-wax scale, February 1941 (1D. S.).

Subfamily NEANURINAE Borner 1906

Paranura australasiae Wom. 1935—Australia: Belgrave, Victoria, in rotting tree-

fern, November 1941 (O. W. T.). !

Pseudachorutes tasmaniensis Wom. 1936—Australia: Little Boys’ Creek, Vic-

toria, at 3,000-4,000 feet, 24 June 1941 (R. T. M. P.); Bell’s Creek, Vic-

toria, at 3,000-4,000 feet, 24 June 1941 (R. T. M. P.) ; West Tangil, Victoria,

3,000 feet, 23 July 1941 (R. T. M. P.).

Pseudachorutes pescotti n. sp.

(Fig. I, A-F)

Description—Length, to 2-0 mm. Colour, mottled blue-black. Antennae

shorter than head-diagonal, ratio of segments = 3:4:3-5:9-5, as figured, III

with a pair of subapical, clavate sensillae as figured, Ocelli, eight on each side on

deeply pigmented patches. Postantennal organ with four lobes. Tuibiotarsus with

clavate setae; claws with fine indistinct inner tooth at three-fourths; empodial

appendage absent. Furca as figured, dens with four setae, mucro with inner and

outer lamellae, one-third length of dens. Dorsal setae short and sparse.

Trans. Roy.. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

Location—Australia: Cumberland, Victoria, at 4,000 feet, 26 May 1941

(R. T. M. P.), several specimens.

Remarks—-In my key (1939) this species runs down to P. pacificus Wom.,

a New Zealand species, from which it differs in having clavate tibiotarsal setae,

and no strong inner tooth to the claw at one-third.

Fig. 1 Pseudachorutes pescotti n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, antenna; C, ocelli

and postantennal organ; D, sensory organ on ant. JII; F, tibiotarsus and

claw; I°, furea.

Neanura muscorum (Templeton 1935)—New Zealand: Grafton Gully, Auck-

land, in soil, 29 June 1941 (D. S.).

Neanura hirtellus v. cirratus (Schott. 1917—-Australia: Bell’s Creek, Victoria,

24 June, 1941 (R. T. M. P.); West Tangil, at 3,000 feet, 23 July 1941

(R. T. M. P.).

Neanura radiata Salmon 1941—New Zealand: Waitakeri Ranges, Auckland,

under bark of decaying log, 10 May 1941 (D. S.).

Family ONYCHIURIDAE Borner 1913

Subfamily ONYCHIURINAE Bagnall 1935

Onychiurus armatus (Tullbg. 1869)—New Zealand: Mount Wild, on Begonia

bulbs, 15 January 1936 (Fielding).

Onvehiurus ambulans v. inermis Agren. 1903—New Zealand: Blenheim, on seed-

crop, April 1935 (E. C. C.}; Palmerston North, 15 January 1937 (W.

Cottier) ; Wanganui, 7 October 1938 (A. Dingwell) ; Owairaka, 18 June 1941

(D. S.); Grafton Gully, Auckland, from soil, 29 June 1941 (D. 8.).

Subfamily TULLBERGINAE Bagnall 1935

Tullbergia tillyardi Wom. 1939—Australia: Belgrave, Victoria, in rotting tree

fern, November 1941 (O. W. T.).

Superfamily ENTOMOBRYOIDEA Wom. 1933

Family ISOTOMIDAE Schffr. 1896 .

Subfamily ISOTOMINAE (Schffr. 1898)

Cryptopygus tasmaniensis n. sp.

(Fig. 2, A-D)

Description—Length, to 2-2-5 mm. Colour, deep blue-black except the legs

which are white. Antennae longer than the head, ratio of segments =

5':5:5,:7°5. Eyes, eight on each side on ocular patch 70% long; postantennal

organ 35, from anterior end of ocular patch, elliptical but cne side rather

straighter than the other and slightly notched, length 21-5. Ratio of thoracic

and abdominal segments — 1°8:1°5:1°2:1-2:1°2:1-4:1-7, VI hidden under

V. Tibiotarsus with paired clavate setae, claws without teeth; empodial

appendage about one-third claw. Furca short, 0°34, long as figured, mucro with

large subapical tooth. Dorsal setae numerous, uniform, to 54 p» long.

Location—Australia: Mount Wellington, Tasmania, in very large numbers

on stones and crossing mountain paths, 30 January 1940 (V. V. H.).

Fig. 2 Cryptopygus tasmaniensis n. sp.: A, entire: B, ocelli and postantennal

organ; C, furca; D, tip of tibiotarsus, claw and empodial appendage.

Remarks—Closely related to C. loftyensis Wom. but differs in not having

any inner tooth to the claw, ratio of antennal segments, etc.

Folsomia emeraldica (Rayment 1937)—New Zealand: Palmerston North, in

rotting potatoes, 5 May 1931 CW. C.); Auckland, from decaying cherry

seed, 11 July 1941 (D. 3.).

lsotomurus palustris Mill. 1776)—Australia: Cumberland, Victoria, 26 May 1941

(R. T. M. P.) ; Mount Cascade Creek, Victoria, 26 June 1941 (R. T. M. P.).

New Zealand: Nelson, on tobacco plants, 9 October 1933 (E. C. C.).

Proisotoma minula (Tullbg. 1871)—New Zealand: Auckland, on decaying cut-

tings, 11 July 1941 (D. S.).

Protsotoma ripicola Linnan. 1912—Australia: Bell’s Creek, Victoria, 24 June

1941 (R. T. M. P.).

Parisotomma pentonmma (Wom. 1939)—Australia: Belgrave, Victoria, in rot-

ting tree fern, November 1941 (O. W. T.).

Genus Millsia nov.

Description—Of Isotomid facies. Antennae longer than head, IV with

apical knob, III with paired, stout, curved sensory rods. Eyes, eight on each side.

Postantennal organ absent. No clavate tibiotarsal setae; empodial appendage

present. Furca long, dens baso-laterally with spines and annulated in distal half,

mucro falciform, All abdominal segments visible dorsally. Clothing of very

long, closely pubescent setae. Genotype Millsia tiegsi n. sp.

Remarks—This genus is named after my American colleague, Prof. H. B.

Mills.

Millsia tiegsi n. sp.

(Fig. 3, A-G)

Description—Colour white, except for the black ocular patch and a tinge of

blue on the apical antennal segments, Length, to 1:0 mm. L[yes, eight on each

side, equal. Postantennal organ absent. Antennae longer than head, ratio of

Fig. 3 Millsia tiegsi n. g., n.sp.: A, entire; B, ocelli; C, sensillae of ant. III;

D, tip of ant. IV; E, furca with details; F, tip of tibiotarsus, claw, and

empodial appendage; G, dorsal seta.

segments = 4:5:3:10, IV with apical knob, III with sensory organ as figured.

Ratio of length of head, thoracic and abdominal segments = 14:11:5:5:6:9:9:

4:3. Tibiotarsi without clavate setae, claw with a long fine inner tooth at a half ;

eimpodial appendage pointed with wide inner and narrow outer lamellae. Furca

fairly stout, reaching to ventral tube; ratio manubrium:dens:mucro = 10:14: 1,

dens basally with spmes, mucro falciform. Clothing on body of very long, 160 p,

slender, strongly pubescent setae; on legs of normal short setac.

Location—Australia: in rotting log of tree-fern, Belgrave, Victoria, No-

vember, 1941 (O. W. Tiegs),

Subfamily ONCOPODURINAE Bérner 1913

This interesting subfamily has not hitherto been found in Australia. I am

indebted to Dr. O. W. Tiegs for specimens of the following new species collected

by him in Victoria. The occurrence of this subfamily in Australia is perhaps the

niost interesting discovery in the Collembolan fauna of this country for some years.

Oncopodura tiegsi n. sp.

(Fig. 4, A-D)

Description—Length, 370. Colour, white. Eyes absent; post-antennal

organ ? absent. Antennae longer than head, segments II and IV with specialised

sensory setae, number uncertain, but approximately as drawn. Furca as figured,

but the serrated dental spines may be more than shown.

Location—Four specimens from decaying tree-fern log at Belgrave, Victoria,

January and February, 1941 (O. W. T.).

Fig. 4 Oncopedura tiegsi n. sp.: A, lateral view; B, antennal segments

IT-IV; C, claw, and empodiat appendage; D, furca and dental spine,

Remarks—All previous known species of this genus are cave or soil inhabit-

ing forms. Of the four specimens found, it has been possible to get a mount of

one only and this itself is not altogether satisfactory for a complete description.

As soon as further material can be obtained a more detailed description will be

published.

Family TOMOCERIDAE (Schffr. 1896)

Subfamily LEPIDOPHORELLINAE Borner 1906

Lepidophorella australis Carp. 1925—New Zealand: Owairaka, in soil, 18 June

1941 (D.S.).

Subfamily TOMOCERINAE Borner 1906

Tomocerus tasmanicus Wom.— Australia: Mount Wellington, Tasmania,

30 January 1940 (V. V. H.).

Family ENTOMOBRYIDAE Borner 1913

Subfamily ENTOMOBRYINAE Borner 1906

Sinella termitum Schott. 1917—Australia: Brisbane, Queensland, in leaf mould,

July 1940 (II. Jarvis); Mount Gambier, South Australia, under log, shore

of Leg of Mutton Lake, January 1941 (H. W.).

Sinella coeca (Schott. 1896)—New Zealand: Auckland, in termites’ nest after

treatment, 16 June 1941 (J. Kelsey).

Entomobrya stramineola nom. nov.

= Entomobrya straminea Borner 1913, Handschin 1920, 1925, nec. Folsom 1898.

(Fig. 5, A-C)

Location—In numbers in the leaf sheaths of banana at Morobe, New Britain,

June 1937 (J. L. F.); and banana and sugar-cane, Brisbane, Queensland, 27 July

1940 (H. Jarvis).

Fig. 5 Entomobrya stramineola n.nov.: A, ocelli; B, claw, empodial

appendage, and tip of tibiotarsus; C, tip of dens and mucro.

Entomobrya termitophila v. clarki Wom. 1937—Australia: Bell’s Creek, ‘Vic-

toria, 24 June 1941 (R, T. M. P.); Little Boys’ Creek, Victoria 24 June,

1941 (R. T. M. P.).

Entomobrya multifasciata (Tullbg. 1871)—Australia: Brisbane, Queensland, in

leaf mould, July 1940 (H. Jarvis).

Entomobrya nivalis Linne 1758—New Zealand: Palmerston North, on rotting

swedes, 16 October 1930 (W. C.); Auckland, on roses, 21 April 1941

(J. Kelsey).

Entomobrya nivalis v. immaculata Schffr. 1896—New Zealand: Palmerston

North, on dry rot of swedes, 25 June 1931 (J. G. G.); or new swede area

23 March 1931 W. C.).

Sira jacobsoni Borner 1913—Australia: Cumberland, Victoria, at 4,000 feet,

26 May 1941 (R. T. M. P.).

Lepidocyrtinus queenslandica Wom. 1935—New Guinea: Rabaul, on over-ripe

and decayed cocoa pods, July 1940 (J. L. Froggatt).

Lepidocyrtoides cheesmani Wom. 1937—Australia: Coreen, Queensland, under

pig-face in newly burnt scrub April 1941 (Fergusson),

Mesira flavocincta v. unicolor Wom. 1934—Australia: Coraline, near Mount

Gambier, South Australia, January 1941 (H. W.).

Mesira brunnea Wom. 1935—Australia: Brisbane, Queensland, in leaf mould,

27 July, 1940 (H. Jarvis).

Mesira cincta n. sp

(Fig. 6, A+B)

Description—Length, to 3-7 mm. Colour, yellowish with blue-black mark-

ings, scattered on the head, dense laterally on thorax II and II] and abdomen I,

laterally and along posterior margin on abdomen II, entire band on abdomen ITI,

and laterally on abdomen 1V; furca blue near junction of manubrium and dens.

Legs with coxae and trochanters blue, femora blue-black at tip, tibiotarsi bluish

towards apex. Antennae? longer than head, darkening on apical segments, ratio

of segments I: IDs1T]:IV:=4:5:?:?. Ocelli, eight on each side on black patch.

Ratio of lengths of head, thoracic and abdominal segments = 50:40:22:12:15:

12:100:10:5. Furea: ratio of manubrium:dens:mucro = 70:85-90:3; dens

annulated, distal unannulated part three to four times length of mucro, mucro as

figured with two teeth and basal spine. Claws with paired inner teeth at one-third,

and one fine distal tooth at three-fourths, with outer basal tooth, praetarsus with

with small paired outer teeth. Empodium lanceolate, about half length of claw.

Tibiotarsus with a long and strong spathulate seta.

Location—Australia: Cumberland, Victoria, 26 May 1941 (R. T. M P..).

fos A

Fig. 6 Mesira cincta n.sp.: A, claw, empodial appendage and tip of tibio-

tarsus; B, mucro and tip of dens.

Genus Promesira nov.

For Mesira sigrocephala Wom. 1934,

An examination of fresh material from Biloela, Queensland, and Earlsfield,

Queensland, April (Fergusson), revealed the presence of bothriotrichia on

abd. IT, 111 and IV, and this was later confirmed by a re-examination of my type

material,

Promesira nigrocephala n. comb.

A very variable species, ranging from dirty yellow with two transverse dark

spots on posterior margin of abd. IV. to entirely black.

Location—Australia: Biloela, Queensland, April 1941 (Fergusson) ; Earls-

field, Queensland, from Portulaca oleracea in forest country, April 1941, (Fer-

gusson).

Urewera flava Salmon 1938—New Zealand: Auckland, Waitakeri Ranges,

14 July 1941 (D.S.)..

Urewera purpurea Salmon 1938—New Zealand: Auckland, 23 July 1941 (E.

Ballard).

Suborder SYMPHYPLEONA Borner 1941

Family NEELJDAE Folsom 1896

Megalothorax swani (Wom. 1932)—Australia: Belgrave, Victoria, in rotting

tree-fern, November 1941 (O. W. T.).

Family SMINTIIURIDAE Lubbk. 1870

Siminthurinus aureus v. ochropus (Reuter 1891)—Australia: Little Boys’ Creek,

Victoria, 24 June 1941 (CR. T. MM. P.); Bell’s Creek, Victoria, 24 June 1941

(R. T. M. P.).

Purabadlanie zebra n. sp.

(Fig. 7, A-E)

Description—Length, 1,200». Colour, yellow with transverse dark bands

between and in front of the eyes; on the abdomen with black bands as follows;

on anterior half with a crescent-shaped band running from middle of dorsum,

anteriorly down the sides from the middle of this band a longitudinal band runs

almost to the genital segments, and from each side of this two transverse bands

run down the sides, these lateral marks give a zebra-like effect ; antennae dark on

Ill and IV. Ocelli, eight on each side on pigmented patches. Antennae much

longer than head, ratio of segments ca. 20:45:65:150, IV with about 16 sub-

divisions. Claws as figured, with inner tooth just beyond middle, empodial

appendage as figured. Tibiotarsus with three fine clavate setac. Mucro as figured,

with toothed inner lamella, Clothing of strong setae, but not so long and strong

as in Katianna, Female genital appendage as ‘shown.

Fig. 7 Parakatianna zebra n.sp.: A, dorsal view; B, lateral view; C, claw,

empodial appendage and tip of tibiotarsus; D, mucro.

Location—Australia: Brisbane, Queensland, a single specimen in leaf mould,

July 1940 (H. Jarvis).

Bourletiella arvalis (Fetch 1863)—-New Zealand: Palmerston North, on new

swede area, 25 March 1931 (W. Cottier).

Deuterosminthurus bicinctus v. repandus Agren. 1903—New Zealand: Lumsden,

on dock 22 January 1930 (W. C.); Palmerston North, on broad beans

26 October 1931 (J. G. G.); Avondale, on pumpkins, 1 April 1939 (D. S.}.

Deuterosminthurus bicinctus v. pallipes Lubk. 1867—New Zealand: localities as

above.

Corynephoria quadrimaculata n. sp.

(Fig. 8, A-D)

Description—Length, 0-9 mm.. Colour, dorsally yellowish, laterally dirty

white with a pair of black spots before anal segments. Eyes, eight on each side,

on black patch,. Antennae and dorsal club brownish. Antennae not much longer

than head, ratio of segments = 12:23:32:73, IV with 10 subdivisions. Dorsal

hump club-shaped, directed backwards and furnished with short spines. Tibio-

tarsi with three stout spathulate setae. Claw simple, empodial appendage modi-

fied as a thin spathulate seta. Furca as figured, ratio of dens: mucro = 70:17.

Location—Australia: a number of specimens by sweeping ti-tree, Port

McDonnell, South Australia, January 1941 (J. S. W.).

Remarks—Related to C. absoloni Wom. 1939, but differing in the colour, and

in the absence of the small dorsal tubercle in front of the club,

Fig. § Corynephoria quadrimaculata n.sp.: A, lateral view; B, antenna;

C, tip of tibiotarsus; D, mucro and dens.

Sminthurus viridis L—New Zealand: [umsden, Auckland, on Plantago major

21 January 1930 (W. C.).

Sminthurus regalis Wom. 1939—Australia: Belgrave, Victoria, in rotting tree

fern, November 1941 (O. W. T.).

THE MOONAREE STATION SALINE GROUND WATERS AND THE

ORIGIN OF THE SALINE MATERIAL

By S. L. DICKINSON, B.S c. (Melb.), Department of Mines, S.A.

Summary

Moonaree Station property covers an area of nearly 1,000 square miles. situated in a strip of county

between I.akes Acraman, Everard, and Gairdner on the northern edge of the Gawler Ranges about

120 miles north-west of Iron Knob. Water for stock is derived almost entirely from bores and wells,

the majority of which have been discovered in recent years by the practical operation of a

prospecting policy based on a thorough understanding of local underground water conditions. These

conditions are fully discussed in the paper. The accompanying map shows all the important features

of the property, wells, bores, tracks, paddocks, etc.

THE MOONAREE STATION SALINE GROUND WATERS AND THE

ORIGIN OF THE SALINE MATERIAL

By S. B. Dickinson, B.Sc. (Melb.}, Department of Mines, S.A.

y : 13)

[Read 9 April 1942]

INTRODUCTION

Moonaree Station property covers an area of nearly 1,000 square miles,

situated in a strip of country between Lakes Acraman, Everard, and Gairdner on

the northern edge of the Gawler Ranges about 120 miles north-west of Iron Knob.

Water for stock is derived almost entirely from bores and wells, the majority

of which have been discovered in recent years by the practical operation of a

prospecting policy based on a thorough understanding of local underground water

conditions. These conditions are fully discussed in the paper. The accompany-

ing map shows all the important features of the property, wells, bores, tracks,

paddocks, ete.

It is important to bear in mind at the outset, that the occurrence in the Gawler

Ranges of artesian water, derived from a distant source, is extremely unlikely.

The Ranges are composed of a homogeneous igneous rock which appears to have

a deep-seated origin. This paper is therefore limited to the consideration of the

ground water which has been absorbed in the immediate vicinity of the wells and

bores, together with related phenomena,

As the region is one in which the ground waters are, for the most part, saline,

the sampling of the waters in wells and bores constituted an important part of the

investigation. The analyses of the various samples were made by Mr. T. W.

Dalwood, the Government Assayer, and they form the basis of an interesting

study on the origin of salinity in ground water, a subject which has not received

the attention, the value of which daily experience demonstrates, The causes of

ground water salinity have been clearly expounded. by R. L. Jack in Bulletin

No. 14, G.S., S.A. His statements are gencrally accepted. This paper simply

gives quantitative expression to his deductions; but it is hoped that it may be the

beginning of a more intensive inquiry into the causes of salinity, as wcll as into

the properties of the salts found in ground water and their effects on stock.

The paper is written primarily to assist the man on the land in the search for

usable ground water in the Gawler Ranges, and secondarily to record information

which may be valuable to future investigators.

The subject matter of the paper is divided into the following sections :

(1) Topography of the Gawler Ranges and of Moonaree property in

particular.

(2) The nature of the rocks in which the ground water occurs.

(3) The ground water conditions.

(4) The quality of the ground water.

(5) The origin of the saline material in the ground water.

(6) Conclusions.

(1) Torocraruy

The Gawler Ranges consist of isolated hills and groups of hills rising to an

average height of about 1,200 feet above sea level. The use of the term “Ranges”

in this region is somewhat misleading. The isolated hills are really the residual

elevated portions of a dissected plateau, and they are best described as residual

_ prominences or “monadnocks.” A “monadnock” is the remnant of an original

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

land surface which persists owing to its superior resistance or to its remoteness

from main drainage lines. The following sketch shows the main features of the

topography of the Gawler Ranges. The sketch was made from an actual photo-

graph taken from the cairn on Mount Gairdner, looking westward towards Yardea

and Thurlga properties. A southern arm of Lake Gairdner occupies the centre

of the picture.

Fig, 1

The tops of the hills have a characteristic horizontal! profile, and this feature

suggests that the hills were at one time part of an old uplifted land surface which

has been dissected by a long and continuous erosion process to a stage of full or

late maturity. Two erosion cycles are thus in evidence: an old cycle which gave

the peneplanation revealed by the even profile of the top of the hills, and a younger

cycle marked by the valley floors between the prominences. Dr. C. Fenner states,

p. 53, “South Australia, a Geographical Study”: “The Gawler Ranges were

probably formed in an upwarp during the late Tertiary. If not, we may regard

them as a residual monadnock ridge from the pre-Miocene planation, probably

due to differential resistance, rounded off by ages of arid erosion.” The facts

enumerated below favour the second hypothesis of Dr. Fenner’s. The hypothesis

of an upwarp on an east-west axis through the range is difficult to sustain in con-

sequence of the following observations. Firstly, the divide between the Lake

Gairdner and the Lake Gilles surface drainage basins is, for the most part, to the

south of the Gawler Ranges proper. Secondly, residual prominences or

monadnocks of resistant rock in the pre-Cambrian complex to the south of the

Gawler Ranges have elevations comparable with those of the Gawler Ranges and

in addition show rudimentary flat-topped profiles. Thirdly, the drainage south

of the Gawler Ranges still finds its way into independent inland salt lakes. and

low-lying depressions and does not possess a general southerly trend. Fourthly,

there is no sign of a rejuvenation having occurred in the present normal erosion

cycle which has now reached a stage of maturity. There are no signs of dissected

pediments, dissected old alluvial fans, nor of newly-formed alluvial fans on the

pediments and alluvial aprons flanking the Ranges. Generally, a marked stability

of conditions must have persisted for a long period in order to bring about the

present topographic form.

The Gawler Ranges, as well as the Kimba district to the south, show all the

features indicative of the occurrence of a prolonged period of regional stability

in which denudation processes have sculptured the laud surface to a form deter-

mined chiefly by the relative resistant qualities of the underlying rocks. The

felspar porphyry rock of the Gawler Ranges is considerably more durab!e than the

gneissic granites of the Kimba district. The occurrence of the porphyry is there-

fore, for the most part, co-extensive with the Gawler Ranges. The hills at

Moonarce are composed of this felspar porphyry. On account of the uniform

character of the porphyry, the hills have few distinguishing features one from

another, and gently curving profiles are common to them all.

In the centre of the Moonaree property the ground is re‘atively high, and

from the centre the terrain falls rather rapidly to the levels of the surrounding

lakes. The drainage pattern is roughly a radial one, in which the stream courses

are short and have fairly steep gradients. They usually preserve their continuity

to the edges of the salt lakes, except perhaps in the northern part of the property

where they tend to disintegrate on broad flats. Flats of varying width are found

around the lakes, and in places they often extend up wide valleys into the hilly:

regions. In such valleys definite watercourses only occur where the grades of

the valley floors steepen. The defined watercourses are usually limited to the

upper portions of the wide valleys. The flats which surround and penetrate into

the hills seem to be formed by erosion, as they appear to be covered by relatively

thin layers of alluvium. Around the margins of the salt lakes it is common to

find planed surfaces of basement rocks. Such surfaces may represent local tem-

porary base levels below which the streams from the range fronts cannot incise

more deeply. These flats have therefore similar features to the so-called pediments

which are typical of mountain fronts in desert or semi-desert regions, although

they are not strongly developed here. They will become more and more pro-

nounced as the erosion cycle proceeds towards the old age stage.

The region in question presents one rather interesting point of difference from

the usual features exhibited by a mature mountain front in a semi-arid region.

Instead of composite alluvial fans or bajadas on the outer margins of the pedi-

ments salt lakes are found instead and form the zone of deposition. The diagram,

below, is taken from Lobeck’s Geomorphology, p. 244, and shows the features

of the usual type. Below it the Moonaree type of terrain is illustrated.

Possibly, with passage of time, the salt lakes will lose their distinctive

character. At present they are separate physiographic units. They are all the

time shoaling; material, mainly mud, being deposited in them spasmodically by

flood water whilst the wind is continually adding its share of transported material

in the form of dust, sand, etc., which tends to be caught by the moisture present

on the surface of the lake. The fact that the surface of the sait lake is always

damp shows that the ground water table is almost at the same level as the lake

and evaporation leaves the incrustation of salt on it, In picturing the condition

of the salt lake in the old stage of the erosion cycle, it must be borne in mind that

the wind will become the main eroding agent in place of water and therefore the

limiting factor in wearing down the surface will be the ground water table. (Sec

p. 243, P. G. Worchester, Geomorphology.) Worchester states, “Wind cannot

erode wet ground; therefore the water table is the base level for the arid cycle

of erosion.” Hence in following the cycle of erosion from the present stage of

‘maturity to that of old age, it seers likely that the salt lake will first rise to a

limiting level dependent on the ability of the streams from the mountain front

and of the wind to supply the material. Concurrently the lake will increase in

size and will transgress over the pediment eliminating gradually the inequalities,

filling hollows and covering up or tending to cover up inselberges, or isolated

monadnocks. The limiting level will probably be attained when the run-off from

the mountain front is unable to reach the lake. At this stage it also seems likely

MAP OF

EE PASTORAL RUN

NGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

ee A Es i=

es us

—IREFERENCE+—

[3 & BORE SITES

eee

“ES

KS.

T SAND....

A Bond Hill

BONO HILL 'R

YARDEA

pecreeestet

BEE. 1981

x at Fee

INSELBERGE /' , *

poe

Se NR aa

man Yo

DIAGRAMS SHOWING MOUNTAIN REGION

MATURELY DISSECTED IN ARID ENVIRONMENT

AFTER LOBECK

UAE

} 7

ZONE OF. DEPOSITION

DIAGRAM SHOWING GAWLER RANGE

MOUNTAIN FRONT AND GROUNDWATER TABLE

ASST. GOVT. GEOLOGIST

eat?

that the water table will have fallen or will tend to fall below the level of the lake.

lf this happens, the surface of the lake will become dry and the wind will be able

to scour out hollows, build up dunes and in general create a featureless desert

waste, the depth of scouring and removal of material depending finally on the level

of the ground water table. Such is the probable fate of the salt lake if the present

erosion cycle goes to completion without interruption.

A feature of the southern portion of Moonaree is a well-defined sand dune

area which extends from Lake Acraman to Lake Gairdner and has a width of

about eight miles. The sand appears to be chiefly derived from the disintegration

of the felspar porphyry rock, and it is still shitting. The dunes themselves are

smnall and have no definite character. The sand is more of the nature of a thin

blanket over the underlying rocks, and it does not mask to any great extent the

topography that existed prior to the deposition of the sand. The most striking

characteristic of the deposit is the sharp boundary which defines it both on the

north and the south sides. There is a slight topographic break to the south

between Moonaree and the Gawler Ranges proper. Whether this break is

responsible for the presence of sand is a very debatable point, but it is possible

that the sand has accumulated on the lee side of the break if it is assumed that

the prevailing winds come from the north,

(2) Rock Typrs

The ground water at Moonaree is present in three different types of rock, often

seen in the one well.

Firstly, ground water occurs in the porous alluvium and detrital material

which fill the valleys and form the so-called talus slopes or aprons along the

margins of the high ridges and hills.

Secondly, ground water occurs in the weathered top of the felspar porphyry

basement rock, a thin layer averaging six to ten feet thick lying immediately under

the alluvium. This layer has a porous character and is usually impregnated with

varying quantities of secondary calcium carbonate. The weathered porphyry

with the calcium carbonate impregnations is generally in the form of flat-joimted

sheets which allow the ready percolation of water. This sheeted white rock is

locally termed ‘artesian rock” owing to its resemblance to the white rock found

around mound springs south of Lake Eyre South. A specimen of it was assayed

for calcium carbonate and was found to contain 92°7%. It is very similar to

travertine limestone and it is most likely formed by the evaporation of ground

water containing mineral matter and coming within the influence of capillary and

transpiration agencies. It is a good indicator of ground water near the surface.

For example, White Well and Crown Well, both shallow wells, 20 feet and 8 feet

deep respectively, have strong travertine limestone outcrops adjacent to them.

This rock should therefore not be overlooked in water finding, as it points to the

presence of ground water at a shallow depth.

Thirdly, ground water occurs in joints in the unaltered felspar porphyry.

The joints are very irregular in character. They become tighter and less numerous

with depth. The location of a useful bore or well in hard porphyry is therefore

wholly a matter of chance depending on the striking of a good water-bearing

crack. In general, jointing tends to be developed deeper in the porphyry beneath

the main and subsidiary valleys, and therefore the ground water table is more

likely to be intersected by jointed rocks in the valley bottoms. It has been

suggested that the felspar porphyry occurrence in the Gawler Ranges is of the

nature of a volcanic pile composed of acid lava flows, etc. If such is the case, it

is reasonable to expect the junction between two lava flows to be a possible water-

bearing joint. This idea has not been substantiated so far by any reliable facts,

and hence it is of little or no value in predicting possible ground water sources.

(3) Grounp WATER CONDITIONS

Throughout the entire Gawler Ranges the ground water is saline and, for

the most part, it is unfit for stock. There are, however, occurrences of brackish

water which are usable, and the finding and utilisation of such water has meant

a great deal to the pastoral industry. At Moonaree the discovery of usable ground

water has led to the stocking of country which otherwise would have remained

idle on account of the difficulties involved in securing surface catchment water

supplies,

The usable ground water at Moonaree occurs, as a general rule, in the

alluvium covering the basement porphyry rocks. The following discussion is

accordingly restricted to this type of occurrence.

At any locality, whether it be in a valley or on the top of a hill, ata certain

distance below the surface of the land a depth is reached where the rocks are

saturated with water. The water saturating the rocks is known as ground water,

and the upper surface of this saturated zone is known as the ground water table.

At Moonaree, the surface of the ground water or the ground water table is every-

where below the land surface, except at the salt lakes where the two surfaces are

horizontal and practically coincide with one another, At the salt lakes the ground

water is all the time evaporating, and hence there is a continual passage of water

into the atmosphere. To make up for this Joss, the ground water circulates

slowly towards the salt lake from the limits of the drainage basin concerned. It

is replenished in this basin by that portion of the rainfall which is absorbed by

the soil and which escapes the influence of evaporation and transpiration agencies.

Where ground water increments from rainfall are relatively high, the ground

water is generally comparatively fresh. Where the ground water increments from

the rainfall are relatively small in comparison with the percentages of the rainfall

transpired, the ground water is generally saline and useless. This is due to the

accumulation of salts in the soil in the latter case; and therefore, when there is an

excess of absorbed water which is capable of percolating to the ground water

table, this water is usually so highly charged with saline matertal dissolved during

its passage through the soil, that it renders saline and keeps saline the main body

of the ground water in its immediate vicinity. The absorption of the water which

replenishes the ground water is more pronounced in the watercourses where flood-

waters arc concentrated. As the flood-waters flow towards the low lying ground,

they diminish very quickly in quantity and usually only the stronger surface flows

are able to discharge directly into the salt lakes. As a consequence of the rapid

absorption in the watercourses, little opportunity is afforded the ground water

increment to become appreciably saline, and as a result, in alluvial-filled valleys

where the stream channels are well defined and where stream gradients are still

quite marked, an area of relatively fresh ground water may occur.

The depth of this ground water is variable, but a general average for

Moonaree would be about 60 feet. Ata few places ground water has been found

very near the surface, This abnormality is due to some irregularity in the surface

of the basement rocks underlying the alluvium, The Crown Well and the White

Well are places where the ground water comes very close to the surface. At both

these localities, hard rock bars are exposed in the watercourses, below the wells.

These bars operate like walls constructed across surface streams for impounding

water, except in these instances, the water is impounded in the alluvium above

the rocky bars. Below or down-stream from the bars, the water table is con-

siderably lower.

The possible occurrence of brackish water besides depending on the ratio of

the quantity of water absorbed and added to the ground water to the quantity

absorbed and transpired to the atmosphere, depends also on the scope of ground

water movement at the particular place in question, In general, where stream

gradients are appreciable, the movement of ground water is sufficient to keep the

top layers at least, of the water relatively fresh. It is only where conditions of

stagnation tend to be produced that the ground water is too saline for use. These

conditions are readily, recognisable on the surface by a keen observer.

Salinity of ground water is generally due to the building up of sa‘ts in prac-

tically stagnant ground water. The degree of salinity varies from place to place

and chiefly depends on the balance between salts added to ground water by

replenishing water from rainfall, and salts removed by ground water movement

for the particular place concerned, These two opposing tendencies are governed

by three factors, namely: (1) The nature of the topographic relief, (2) The

absorptive capacities of the rocks. (3) The vegetation. The first factor has

already been dealt with. It determines the capacity of the ground water to circu-

late once it is given a relatively permeable medium to move in. If the generalised

section of the region showing the ground water table and the land surface profile

is considered, it will be observed that the ground water table is flatter than the

land surface profile. At the salt lake they both coincide, but at the foot of the hills

the water table may be 100 feet or more below the surface, If these two profiles

are compared, it will be seen that the well-defined curvature in the upper portion

of the land surface profile may be correlated with the upper portion of the water

table, which is also curved. In this curved portion movement of ground water is

’ quite marked, like that in the youthful part of a surface watercourse. Lower down

the watercourse, movement is very sluggish in comparison with that higher up.

In a similar way ground water movement is very small in flat country, but the rates

of movement in the two cases are not comparable. Where the ground water curve

flattens out, the movement of ground water is so retarded that it is almost

negligible, but the movement still goes on because it is the only means of replenish-

ing the ground water at the salt lake where continual evaporation is taking place.

It follows from the above remarks that at some critical spot not far distant from

the foot of the hills, the ground water must permanently havd a saline character.

The second factor to come under consideration is the permeability of the rocks

or the facility with which water can percolate through them, The alluvium and

the so-called “artesian rock” are relatively porous and permit the ready percola-

tion of ground water through themselves. On the other hand the hard un-

weathered felspar porphyry is relatively impermeable, and ground water can only

circutate through it along defined cracks and joints which are exceedingly irregular

in character and occurrence. For the former rock types, therefore, the facility

of ground water percolation is constant from place to place, whilst for the latter

type. the felspar porphyry, the facility varies continually and depends on the

presence or absence of a pattern of interconnected joints and fractures. The third

factor, and possibly a very important one, is the effect of surface vegetation on

ground water salinity, This point is very clearly explained by Dr, R.'L. Jack

(p. 47, Bulletin 14, G.S., S.A.). Comparing thick mallee scrub country with

open grasslands, Dr. Jack writes: “Despite very favourable conditions for down-

ward percolation, the mallee transpires so much moisture that there is an accumula-

tion of cyclic salts in the soil, and that, when the exceptionally heavy rains do

provide an excess over soil evaporation and transpiration to form ground water,

the excess is contaminated by these accumulated salts. On grass lands, and

ultimately on cleared and cultivated land, a greater proportion of the rainfall is

available for percolation, and consequently a layer of good water is formed.”

To complete the discussion of ground water conditions, it is necessary to

consider the question of supply. Having once located usable water, what are

the conditions favouring the occurrence of suitable supplies of such water?

Firstly, the rocks in which the usable water occurs must have a definite porous

and jointed character to allow the passage of water. Secondly, the topography

must be sufficiently pronounced to maintain an appreciable ground water miove-

ment. Thirdly, the configuration of the hard rock underlying the alluvium must

be known because it determines the zones or channels in which ground water

movement is concentrated. Just as surface water tends to flow in a channel, so

ground water tends to move more freely, in the channels in the basement rocks,

and the greatest supply of water is therefore obtained when a well or bore is sunk

into such an underground channel. The supply in this underground channel is

greatest where the channel is constricted. For example, it will be greatest at a

point where surface land features suggest that the valley walls may locally be

closer together; where the V-shaped cross section of the valley has a more acute

angle. The position of this underground channel in a valley can rarely be found

by one bore-hole, particularly if the valley is wide. Usually a series of bores are

required. The following diagram illustrates the best position for a bore or well,

once the ground water has been proved usable for watering stock.

BLOCK DIAGRAM SHOWING TYPICAL

MOONAREE GROUNDWATER OCCURENCE

Af fE Baickin gore.

ASSIST, GOVT. GEOLOGIST

FIG. 3

(4) THe Quarity of THE GrounD WATER

The ground water of the Gawler Ranges contains saline matter in varying

amounts according to locality and depth. Samples of the majority of Moonaree

Station bores and wells were taken and they were analysed by Mr. T. W. Dalwood,

the Government Assayer. The analyses are given in the following table. All

these waters are suitable for sheep. The ground water of Grant’s Bore is con-

sidered to possess too high a salinity for use under normal conditions, although

in emergency it could be used as its value is less than 24 ozs., the maximum salinity

tolerable by sheep.

(5) THe Oricin of THE SALINE MATERIAL IN THE GROUND WATER

From the above analyses, a study of the sodium and chlorine ions has shown

that the amounts of sodium and chlorine in the individual samples closely approxi-

mates to the amounts of sodium and chlorine in ocean salt, if ocean salt is dis-

solved in pure water to produce saline waters having total salinities equivalent to

that of the Moonaree samples. This result is shown graphically in fig. 4 and 5.

i=)

eS a

68-0 -

c7-8ge

0Z:F1 i

6-91 nt

66°60T 7"

yuasaid = °*

OL-+F1 <5

60-92 a

O8sdZ

Of-II-6

rine -

OL $-08

TS-T I8-T

OF-6S9 90-062

BE-1Z 9+ PE

65°05 ZT 8S

F6:S9T OL: 88T

doR4, «Jussaud

Ofc OF TT

se-19 — ££-09

06:ZFE O08 98F

OF-TI-EL OF-TI-ce Ob-LI-FT

yovippayyg 940g

OTN TOA SURI

poosyeg AL ‘L 4q sasspeuy

oe 02 6 fol ical She ZI es $9 op StI

— —_ 00s‘T 000's 000°9 000° ia 000°9 000'T 000'8 000‘0T

01-0 8¢-0 09-0 69-0 cZ-0 +Z-0 S£°0 18-0 8-0 o8-0 58-0

00-Fr ZU-1T2t -P6*Z9Z—§B-86Z LB HIE 88-cc£ 12-82 £S-95€ 91-69 B0-IZE FI-cZe

OFZ 60-é 0S-6 eZ-0F 6r- Tt gs-Or 89-6 88-01 Ob IT €9-él 60-01

L524 6£°¢ 80-91 98-6 6L°S1 10°91 00-TT 6L-1T 6¢e°t1 80-ST 00-01

S24°9 SIP 9£°69 PP-88 0-28 £S-T6 P£-66 19-801 Zo°60T = £€-60T Sc 4it

aoe} yoseid yuasaid jussoid yuasaid yuosaid = juasaid [tu yuasoid pr yuosaid

$6-6T cr:8I Or IT £6-01 Or TT S8-Fl 06-6 06-ST 8S-el £S-81 IL TT

ge-0 88-ST £9°@Z £6°S2 FE-92 £9-+Le #8°e¢ 98-0¢ Zee’ £S-0¢ 66°£L

00°Z 88-0F £S-eCT G6°cST «= §Z-29T) = OR c9T = SS S9T 0S: 841 S6°Z81 S6°F6I = OZ O8T

OF-TI-ZZ OF-LI-S1T) OF-TI-OL = OF-TE-ST)«OR-TI-PT «= OP-TI-9L)«OF-TI-ST)—OF-TI-OL) OF-TI-EL OF-TI-81 OF-TT-8T

IPM T2M TAM TEM TPM TIAA ZONIPM IPM TM TAA Waa

8 OBIpIYS ATI SAP Sayiw~g oolesuey eynyzey aA SuUEley epuasuryiA, eaane A, S SSTAR VUlLe sy

oot 801 ést 902 OT Ir S-09 OF 0ZT ev 0zI 89

= 00st ooo. 000° 000s ONs'z 005 o00‘r 000'9 = — = 000°S

63-0 +6°0 $6-0 26°0 10:1 £0°T OI-T ftt Z1-T orl Le-T OFT

IU:688 £2-ZIF 69:-91b GL-E%b 90-Zhr P2-6rr O2-18h 9OF-foh LOFTS Z6°61S 91-555 0z-8E9

60-TT 09-9 Z8-ET Z8-hI = £8-01 FI-ST 29-12 62-21 89-6F zO-et ZP-2l 60-92

SI-Z4—) 6022+ cLit 98°6 80-11 Bf-Z€ BOI 9E-ET cores LST 1S-c1 69-6F

O0-FIT 6S-FPL 60-8ZE OF 6ZT 86-IbT 96°60T 80-TET 6-951 ZEIT OF for 99-081 £9-¢ST

ru sovd} a9eI} 3001} «yuasoid yuasoid yuosoid = yuasoid Juosaid Juasoid qussoid Juasoid

Bo-el 886 £2:6 6£°8 OZ: IT 99-01 Cl-el = ar el OT TE Sr st CL-2r OF-8

ce-OF $162 CE-oZ beh L6°8E I9-Ff OS-62 6E-SP (Sy AS sO) A A

O6-S6L SE-ZIZ $6-622 O8-6TZ OS-42Z OS-1Fe Sl+99Z 00-762 O£°99% OZ-o9E c£-08¢ OF-BSe

OF-LI-SL OP-TI-£ T OP-TI-EL OF-TI-SE Ob-TI-LE OF -1I-6 OF-TI-PT OF-1I-8T OF-TT-6 Ob-IE-6 OF-TT-FT

TI? AA IPM Ta a10g TRAN a10g TP AA TM a10g, TM TPA IPMS

RUUL[EY BUUGATING vazue Yysiusoyy uMOIDQ Jodie yy ye apsuriiy, adtory [TEL O8uiqT uapaery ey3P[COT eyyediryy) }

SALLINITVS ONT wa] AO VAGUGC) NI STIAA\ GNV Sav0q APIVNOOJY AO SHSMIVNY 30

(‘xoidde) Jas} ul ydag

Avp sad suoyyes ‘A,ddns

yeqo} ‘uoyyes Jed saaung

ejo} ‘uoyped asd suresn

Sy ‘umissuse py

‘ey ‘tunyeg

“CM EON) HRNTW TRIO

"BON ‘pry SEIN

#OD ‘pry suede)

OS ‘ploy sHnYdns

- ID Suey}

Apeuy jo a3ecqy

TPA IO 310g

(xoidde) joay ul yidacy

Aep aad suoyed ‘Ajddng

[e10} ‘uo[jes Jad sasung

yejo ‘uoyyes sed surery

Sy ‘Umnissuse yy

ey “uintoyes

(SE -+ PN) NeXIW 1230.

"7 8ON ‘ply OMUIN

"OD ‘PPy suoqiey

‘OS ‘ploy dungding

ry ID ‘euro yD

sis{jvuy jo a4ecy

- TPA IO alog

AIL [,

DIAGRAM SHOWING SODIUM AND CHLORINE ION CONTENTS

USABLE GROUNDWATERS IN WELLS AND BORES OF

MOONAREE STATION, GAWLER RANGES, S.A.

(COMPARED WITH CURVES FOR SOLUTIONS OF OCEAN SALT)

Sodium lor

Theoretical curves for C! ana! Na ions in corresponding saline waters

containing ‘ocean salt, the composition of which is the average of

77 samples collected by the Challenger Expedition. Analyses

by W. Dittmar... 2.22. eee ee ee — ee oe ee

OCEAN WAY ER

(DITTMAR'S AVERAGE ANALYSIS OF SALT CONTENT)

FARTS PER] ¢

“199,099 | PER CENT

1932-4 §5:292

6-6 0:188

269-6 7-692

74 0-207

1072-2 30-593

38-2 1106

42-0 1197

131-6 3725

3500-0 100-000

fe)

\PARTS PER {00,000 CL.OR NA ION

Well

Grant Bore+

OZS.PER GAL. CL OR NA ION

Charpatia +

a”

rai

290 390 so9$ 590 600 790 800 900 1090 HOO 1290 PARTS PEA 100000

25 050 075 1-00 25 50 175 2-00 OZS.PER GAL.

TOTAL SALINE MATTER

Fic. 4

GRAPH SHOWING SODIUM AND CHLORINE ION CONTENTS

MOONAREE STATION GROUND WATERS

AND THOSE OF

OCEAN WATERS

ION

Chlorine fon.....0 Sodium lon... +

Theoretical curves based

on Dittmar’ Average Analysis

of ocean saline matter,

\ SA Vincent Gull

100000 CL OR NA

Analysis

Spencer Guit

OZS. PER GAL. CL OR NA

\, PARTS PER

~t——- Grant Bore

Sea Water, North \*

Djttmar’s Average

Sea Werter,

PARTS PER

2000 3000 5000 (jonooo

+++ — 7 as

3 4 5 8 O2S. PeR GAL

TOTAL SALINE MATTER SL Bchendon

Fic. 5 ASSIST. GOVT. GEOLOGIST

- 194! pF

‘

N.B. The Sodium Ton content expressed graphically represents

Total Alkali (Na + K).

Fig 4 shows the various amounts of sodium and chlorine expressed in

ounces per gallon and parts per hundred thousand for each water sample. The

dotted line represents the corresponding values for water containing ocean salt.

‘The composition of ocean salt used for the comparison is that calculated by

W. Dittmar from the analyses of 77 samples collected by the Challenger Expedi-

tion from various localities and depths.

Fig. 5 carries the comparison still further because it shows the actual values

for the quantities of sodium and chlorine in ocean water (Dittmar’s quantities),

and it also shows the sodium and chlorine values for two samples of sea water

collected by Dr, R. L. Jack, one from St. Vineent Gulf, about 15 miles west of

Adelaide, the other from the north end of Spencer Gulf, The beginning of this

graph is simply a replica of fig. 4 on a smaller scale. The theoretical line is

extended to show how the prolongation of the average curve for the Moonaree

samples would approximately intersect the ocean water analyses, It is hoped to

obtain samples of saline water between two and five ounces per gallon from other

localities at Moonarese, to fill the large gap in the graph between the usable water

values and the ocean water values, whereby the correlation of the percentage

compositions of the salts may be more definitely demonstrated.

These graphs quantitatively support the conclusions reached by Dr. R. L.

Jack, that the saline material causing ground water salinity is the so-called “cyclic

salt” which occurs in the atmosphere and which is brought to the earth by rain.

Dr. Jack (p. 7, Bulletin 14, G.S.S.A.) quotes analyses of rain water containing

appreciable quantities of sodium and chlorine. The presence of these minerals

in rain water was suggested by Gray in New Zealand (A.A.A.S,, 1, 1887). This

cyclic salt has a quantitative mineral association similar to that of ocean salt, and

Dr. Jack suggests that its mode of origin may be the evaporation of sea spray.

The only other possible source of salt in these regions of inland drainage is

from the rocks themselves. The Gawler Ranges, as previously stated, are com-

posed of felspar porphyry. W. S. Chapman made three analyses of the felspar

porphyry and they are given in vol, 18, of A.A.A.S., Perth, 1926, at the conclusion

of a brief resume by Sir D. Mawson on the Igneous Rocks of South Australia, The

sample localities are some distance from Moonarec, but the rocks are identical in

‘character and occurrence with the Moonaree porphyries. . The analyses are as

follows: Felspar Porphyry

One mile west Four miles north |

; ) Paney Bluff of Paney Bluff ° of Burkett’s Hill

SiO,, - - 72°22 71:48 68-90

Al,O,, : - 14350 14-73 «14-43

Fe,O, - - 1-22 1:14 ; 1:91

FeO - - 1-69 1-16 2°80

MgO - - 0°30 0-25 0°33

CaQ - - 1°22 0-54 / 0:92

Na,O - - 2°50 2°74 3°07

KO , L 512 — 5-68 5-70

H,O at 110°C. - 0°68 1-08 0:87

H,O at 100° C, - 0:12 0°32 0:29

co, - - : 0-22 0-12 0-23

TiO, - - | 0-42 0°35 0°69

P.O. ‘ : | 0-07 0-04 0-03

Gh. - - 0:02 0-04 0°03

FeS, : - | 0-06 0-14 0-15

MnQ - - | 0-02 0-10 0-03

Total = - | 100-23 | 99°91 100-38

Note—SOs, NiO & CoO, BaO, LIO, VeOs, no values.

Tt will be seen that the chlorine content of these samples is very low; there-

fore it seems very doubtful if weathering has relcased the quantity of that element

that now appears in the soil, ground water, and on the salt lakes. We must look,

therefore, to some other source for the chlorine ion, now so widespread in the

region.

The other interesting feature in these rock analyses in connection with ground

water salinity is the potassium content of the porphyry. It ig typically an alkali

rich rock. The K,O values are high, namely, 5-12, 5-68, and 5-70, respectively.

If the saline matter found in the ground water were derived at least in part from

the weathered country rock, would not there be a high potassium content in the

ground water of an alkali-rich rock region compared with the potassium content

in the ground water of a region not characterised by the presence of alkali rocks?

The following table gives the percentage content of potassium in salt samples

collected at various inland salt lakes. It was prepared by Dr. L, K. Ward, the

Government Geologist, in the course of an inquiry into the possible exploitation of

potassium rich brines in South Australia, (See also the note on “Potash,” p. 9,

No. 21, “Mining Review.”) The table is as follows:

Percentage of

Material tested Potassium

Lake Hart salt - - - - - 0-20

Lake Dutton salt - - - - - ° 0°34

Pernatty Lagoon salt, northern shore - = 0°23

Pernatty Lagoon salt, western shore - - 0-21

Pernatty Lagoon, salt from brine - - 0°36 —

Lake Gairdner salt - - - - 0°25

Ocean salt - - - - - 1-11

From this table it will be seen that Lake Gairdner salt, occurring as it does

in an alkali-rich rock environment, is no richer in potassium than the other salts

which occur in areas practically free of outcropping alkali-rich rocks. This non-

appearance of a potassium-rich salt on Lake Gairdner is indirect evidence against

the possible origin of saline material in ground water resulting from the dis-

integration of the felspar porphyry. Doubtless some contamination of ground

water must be due to the decomposition of the felspar porphyry, but it appears to

be of negligible amount in the general consideration of the origin of saline material

in ground water.

The possible origin of the saline material from so-called “connate water” can-

not be accepted, because there is no evidence of its present or probable former

occurrence in this Gawler Range region. “Connate water” is defined as that water

which has remained in sedimentary rocks since their time of deposition either in

a fresh water or marine environment. “Connate water” is often found in regions

where sedimentary basins have been raised above the sea level by epeirogenic

movements. The complete absence of sedimentary rocks in the Gawler Ranges,

together with the strong impression that the Ranges are residual hills from a pre-

Miocene planation, makes the occurrence of “connate water” in this region

extremely unlikely.

In brief, the analyses of the Moonaree samples, in conjunction with the above

discussion, indicate fairly conclusively that the salt of the interior salt lakes and

ground water is derived mainly from a source which has the same composition

as ocean salt. This source is assumed to be the ‘‘cyclic salt” which from its detection

in rain water has been proved to be present in the atmosphere. Furthermore, the

“cyclic salt” appears most likely, initially, to be formed over the ocean in part of

a process similar to that suggested by Dr. R. L. Jack, namely, in the evaporation

DIAGRAM SHOWING

MAGNESIUM, CALCIUM, CARBONATE AND SULPHATE ION CONTENTS

USABLE GROUND WATERS iN WELLS AND BORES

MOONAREE STATION, GAWLER RANGES, S.A.

(COMPARED WITH CURVESLFOR SOLUTIONS OF OCEAN SALT)

Magnesium fon (Mg)....-- fe)

-0-Z078

os” Bo

ms 2, oa

Lost es

100-5260 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 PARTS Per 100000

050 Of5 [00 125 150 2-00 {Oa PER

oF o

Calcium ton (Ca)

ef -

es ew

0 8% oO °

E 100 0200 300.400—500— °600° 700 800 900

O25 0:50 0-75 1-00 150

Carbonate ton (COQj).-...-0

fo] °o

100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 _II00 PARTSPER 100000

O25 0-50 O75

Sulphate jon (S04)

100,000

PARTS PER

Charputta Well °

Grant Bore

Pes x

_-l00 200 300 400 S00 600 700 800 900 1000 HOO PARTS PER IOQ000

1) O25 0-50 0-75 ele) 125 150

TOTAL SALINE MATTER

Theoretical curves for respective

tons From Dittmar's average

composition of ocean salt, ...— — — Fic. 6 Asssthcou ricer Git

1941

RL.

of sea spray. From the ocean the “cyclic salt” is probably flown inland and sub-

sequently brought down by the rain, to be accumulated in the inland basins

from which there is no escape except by the way it came.

On this latter thought a little amplification is necessary, because in consider-

ing the saline contents of the ground water, it is advisable to allow for the

possibility of a certain amount of salt in the ground water resulting from a process

involving the redistribution of salt, whether it be from wind-blown saline material,

wind-blown soil, sand, etc. Such a process is practically incapable of quantitative

expression, but it must occur and influence salinity value.

Besides the chlorine and sodium ions, which form the greater bulk of the

saline material in the ground waters, there are other ions present, namely, sulphate,

carbonate, magnesium,, calcium, etc. The quantities of these ions are shown

graphically in fig. 6, in a manner similar to that used in fig. 4 and 5. except

that the vertical scale is enlarged five times to show up the values of these

ionic contents more clearly. It is difficult to express an opinion on the rela-

tions of these ionic contents to those in similar solutions of ocean salt. The question

of relative solubilities has an important bearing on the possible comparisons. For

example, the solubility of gypsum, calcium sulphate, is a function of the sodium

chloride content of the water. However, the behaviour of these small constituents

of saline water is of minor importance compared with that of sodium chloridé

which shows so strikingly the correlation between ground water salts and ocean

salt.

(6) CoNncLusIons

It is hoped that the above detailed explanation of the ground water condi-

tions at Moonaree will assist those interested in water finding in the Gawler

Ranges. At the same time it is hoped that the explanation will tend to dispel some

of the many misconceptions concerning the occurrence of ground water which are

so common and on which the art of water divining sustains its perennial glamour.

Moonaree presents a curious anomaly compared with the general run of the

Gawler Ranges, Although it is almost completely surrounded by low-lying salt

lakes, and in spite of the concentration of salt around it, it has a better ground

water supply than most sheep stations in the Gawler Ranges, The Mullaroo

peninsula, at the southern end of Lake Gairdner, has ground water supplies com-

parable to those at Moonaree. Mullaroo also occurs in a similarly isolated environ-

ment. The questions naturally arise: Do these areas possess certain distinctive

features which favour the more prolific occurrence in them of usable ground

water? Do they only have better ground water supplies by reason of the fact

that they have been more thoroughly and more methodically explored? It is

premature to attempt to answer either of these questions, but it is hoped as oppor-

tunities arise, to extend this type of examination to other pastoral properties,

whereby facts may be gained to enable an explanation to be given as well as to

specify more definitely the ground water conditions.

THE PHASE AND AMPLITUDE

OF AUSTRALIAN MEAN MONTHLY TEMPERATURES

By J. A. PRESCOTT, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

Summary

During the course of an investigation into the relationship between temperature and evaporation at

certain Australian recording stations it was observed that significant differences in the phase of the

temperature curves were to be observed for different parts of Australia. These differences appeared

to be sufficiently important to justify a more complete examination of all available data by the

method of Fourier analysis. By means of this analysis the three principal constants of the curve

representing the march of monthly temperatures can be calculated. These three constants are the

mean annual temperature, the amplitude of the swing of the curve about the mean, and the phase of

the curve, that is, its position along the time axis. Low amplitudes are well known to be

characteristic of coastal climates and high amplitudes of continental climates, but less is known

regarding the phase except that oceanic climates would be expected to have a late phase owing to

the great heat capacity of the oceans.

THE PHASE AND AMPLITUDE

OF AUSTRALIAN MEAN MONTHLY TEMPERATURES

By J. A. Prescorr, Waite Agricultural Research Institute

[Read 14 May 1942]

During the course of an investigation into the relationship between tempera-

ture and evaporation at certain Australian recording stations it was observed that

significant differences in the phase of the temperature curves were to be observed

for different parts of Australia. These differences appeared to be sufficiently

important to justify a more complete examination of all available data by the

method of Fourier analysis. By means of this analysis the three principal

constants of the curve representing the march of monthly temperatures can be

calculated. These three constants are the mean annual temperature, the amplitude

of the swing of the curve about the mean, and the phase of the curve, that is, its

position along the time axis. Low amplitudes are well known to be characteristic

of coastal climates and high amplitudes of continental climates, but less is known

regarding the phase except that oceanic climates would be expected to have a late

phase owing to the great heat capacity of the oceans.

The method employed in the analysis was the standard method of fitting ta

the data a Fourier series of the type

uty +a, cose + a,cos2a—+a,cos3xr+ ...

+b,sne+b.sin2e+b,sin3r+...

where w is the temperature for any month.

wv is the period expressed in degrees over a range 0-360° corresponding to the

12 months of the year and represented in this case by the period 0° for

15 January, 30° for 15 February, etc., to 330° for 15 December,

a and b are constants, and a, is the general mean.

‘The cquation can also be expressed in the form:

u=a,+c,sin (4+ ¢,) +c, sin(2*+ ¢,) te,sin(gr+¢,) +...

where c is the amplitude and ¢ the phase angle of each term and

a, cosa-- b, sina = c¢, sin(x + ¢,)

and similarly for 24 and 3,

After a preliminary trial using the first six terms of the Fourier series, that

is, +, 2.v, up to 6.x, it was found sufficient to employ only the first three, the method

used being that recommended by Whittaker and Robinson (1940). The data

were those of Pamphlet 42 (1933) of the Council for Scientific and Industrial

Research prepared by the Commonwealth Meteorological Bureau, These include

monthly temperature data for 389 stations. The mean temperature was calculated

from the average of the maximum and minimum for each month and the results

for cach station entered on a form specially prepared to simplify the arithmetical

work involved.

Except tor the tropical stations where the sun is overhead twice each summer,

the first term was found to account so nearly for the greater part of the amplitude

of the curve that only this term was used in determining the phase angle and the

amplitude for each temperature curve.

These values, ¢, and ¢,, were then entered on maps. The map representing

values of a, is the familiar map of the isotherms of mean annual temperature and

need not be repeated here. The maps recording lines of equal value for phase

and amplitude are given in fig. 2 and 3.

‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

The actual meaning of these constants can best be understood by reference

to fig. 1 where the temperature curves for the three stations, Daly Waters, Mount

Barker (W. Aust.) and Hillston, are shown, The actual equations for these

stations are:

For Daly Waters - uv == 80°36 + 8°92 cosa — 2°70 cos2.% + 0°03 cos 3.x

— 2°77 sins —0°35 sin22 + 0°08 sin3x

¢,= 935

$, = 107°2°

For Mount Barker «= 57°96 + 8-10 cosx — 0-05 cos24% + 0°10 cos3.x

+ 2°35 sing + 0°55 sin24—0:25 sin3 x

¢, == 8°43

$,= 738°

For Hillston - - w= 64:004 15°42 cosx -+ 0°05 cos24% + 0°08 cos 3

— 0°37 sing + 1:02 sin2x + 0:13 sin3 x

c, = 15°42

¢, = 914°

cS CLTTTTIIT.

Dene ES

C294

TOAD LITLE

SVAN TEM ARIN AES

Cab 4

60 [7al= 5810 EN Banat

Cc Q a

7 | | fe

—| a ne,

JAN FEBIMAR/APR MAY/JUN! JUL JAUG/SEPIOCT|INOV|DEC

Fig. 1

Illustrating three examples of curves and constants of mean monthly temperatures

fitted to a Fourier series of the form:

= ao +c (sins + p,) + (sin2x + 5) + ca (sin ga + $s)

The circles represent the actual monthly means in each case.

A Daly Waters, N.T.: inland tropical, high mean, small amplitude, early phase.

Hillston, N.S.W.: continental, large amplitude, medium phase,

C’ Mount Barker, W. Aust.: oceanic, small amplitude, late phase,

ad = mean annual temperature.

c1 = amplitude of the first term. ;

i= phase angle of the first term, when a value of 0° is given to 15 January.

The amplitudes are readily understood. The magnitude of the phase angle

is determined by the point of origin of the curve, in this case 15 January, and

represents the distance between the time of intersection of the temperature curve

in the spring with the mean value, and 15 January.

If there were no lag between solar radiation and temperature this point of

intersection would occur at the spring equinox and the phase angle would have a

value of approximately 116°. Actually a value of 115°6° was chosen as this was

the phase angle of the curve for solar radiation at the outer limit of the atmosphere

i \

AUSTRALIA

—— scan or wrens

. (ae

LAG IN DAYS OF TEMPERATURE BEHIND

SOLAR RADIATION

— er

Fig, 2

calculated for the latitude of Adelaide. The lag between temperature and solar

radiation which is the form in which the phase is expressed in fig. 2 has been cal-

culated in each case from the equation:

: 365

Lag in days = (115-6° — —

§ ys= ( $1) X 360

Fig. 3 calls for littlke comment. It may be compared with Griffith Taylor’s

map (1920) showing the mean temperature range. ‘This range is approximately

twice the amplitude. The areas having the greatest amplitude are the central

parts of Western Australia and the north-western parts of New South Wales with

the adjacent portions of Queensland. Fig. 2, illustrating the lag in phase between

the temperature curve and that of solar radiation, is of some considerable interest

in that Western Australia is almost unique in having appreciable areas with a Jag

greater than 40 days. The only other areas are Kangaroo Island, the islands in

Bass Strait and the north coast of Tasmania. This feature may well play an

important part in determining the choice of varieties of crops and the quality of

these crops. The Karri belt falls mainly within this zone, and there may possibly

be some correlation between this characteristic temperature regime and the fact

that tobacco of acceptable quality can be grown, for example, at Manjimup.

There appears to be little in the literature on this subject but reference may

be made to recent investigations along similar lines by Hopkins (1941), who

examined the mean monthly sequence of summer temperatures at three Canadian

' ———— | | iS 7 i F if - =

: Lt ben — f |

ii | Fe ae Mae so

| | |

\ | 16

\ a”

. is —

SET \2 Y

19 .

Sal | :

a oa

AUSTRALIA

—— SCALE OF MILER

AMPLITUDE IN °F OF MEAN

MONTHLY TEMPERATURES

iad Be ‘er os

Fig. 3

stations over a period of forty-four years by expressing each annual sequence as

an orthogonal polynomial! function of time. Differences in “continentality” were

found by this method, but no evidence of differences in phase was obtained.

Acknowledgments are due to Miss P. J. Fraser and to Mr. R. A. Priest for

assistance in the arithmetical computations.

REFERENCES

Hopxtns, J. W. 1941 Can, J. Res., 19, 485

Taytor, Grirritm 1920 Australian Meteorology, fig. 42, Oxford

WuitTaker, E. T., and Rosrnson, G. 1940 “The Calculus of Observations,”

271. London

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER

MOLLUSCS PART VIII

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and L. MADELINE ANGEL, University of Adelaide

Summary

Cercaria metadena n. sp.

This cescaria was first found at Tailem Bend. Murray River, South Australia, in April 1937. It has

been obtained from 15 Planorbis isingi from 1 of 22 during April to October 1937; from nil of 10 in

1938; from 14 of 2,751 during February to November 1939 (4 of 237 in February, 8 of 114 in April,

1 of 2,129 in May, 0 in September, | of 267 in November); from nil of 34 during 1940; and from nil

of 4 during 1941; thus 15 have been found infected amongst 2,821 examined (1-17%). The mollusc

has been taken very rarely since November 1939.

LARVAL TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER MOLLUSCS

PART VIII

By T, Harvey Jounston and L. MApELINE ANGEL, University of Adelaide

[Read 14 May 1942]

Cercaria metadena n. sp.

This cercaria was first found at Tailem Bend, Murray River, South Aus-

tralia, in April 1937. It has been obtained from 15 Planorbis isingi—from 1 of

22 during April to October 1937; from nil of 10 in 1938; from 14 of 2,751 during

February; to November 1939 (4 of 237 in February, 8 of 114 in April, 1 of 2,129

in May, 0 in September, 1 of 267 in November) ; from nil of 34 during 1940; and

from nil of 4 during 1941; thus 15 have been found infected amongst 2,821

examined (1:17%), The mollusc has been taken very rarely since November 1939.

Amerianna pyramidata is the chief host for the larval parasite, though the

latter has been found occasionally in A. tenwistriata which is a much less common

mollusc. Its incidence in A. pyramidata was found to be as follows: in 0 of 995

examined in 1937 (April to December); one of 585 in 1938 from March to

December (present in May); four of 2,191 in 1939 from February to October

(present in February and April) ; four of 1,303 in 1940 from February to Decem-

ber (present in March and December) ; 25 of 6,865 in 1941 (present in January,

February and December), ‘The total for the period 1937 to 1941, inclusive, was

34 infected A. pyramidata in 11,939 examined, i.¢., 0°28%. In these totals the

less common A. pectorosa has been included, but the parasite has not been detected

in that species. We have recently found the cercaria issuing from 12 of 127

A. pyramidata and A. tenuistriata in January 1942, from 6 of 546 in February

1942, and from 1 of 73 in March 1942, The parasite has been observed from

December to May, and chiefly in December and January.

SPorocystT

The long narrow sporocysts, whose walls contain many orange-yellow refrac-

tive granules, resemble those of Cercaria multicellulata Miller in being so twisted

in the liver of the snail that it is almost impossible to dissect them out unbroken.

They apparently disintegrate very readily, even before the liver of the dead host.

On the death of the snail the cercariae must soon leave the sporocyst for very

few of the latter, whether obtained from snails which had died or from those killed

for the purpose, contained any cercariae, there being present only a few bodies

which may have been germ bails. An unbroken sporocyst which was dissected out

measured 15 mm. long. The free end which, according to Miller’s observations

(1926) on C. inulticellulata, projects from the liver, is tapering and bluntly rounded

with the most anterior portion translucent and free from pigment granules, as in

C. multicellulata, A birth pore was not recognised. The diameter of jthe sporo-

cyst remained constant, being devoid of constrictions such as have been reported

for C, multicellulata,

CERCARTA

The usual position of the cercaria in water is that of rest, with the body

flexed on itself, the tail stem vertical, and the furcae (by which the animal is

suspended) making an angle of 90°-120° with each other. From this resting

position it sinks slowly or it may float passively in currents. It swims, tail first,

in short jerky movements, the body and tail stem describing a figure of eight, while

the furcae vibrate separately. There is a slight phototropism, Cercariae may live

up to 52 hours.

Trans. Roy, Soc, §.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

The anterior organ is more or less oval and about 60, long by 28. in

maximum width, with a slight waist-like constriction. The anterior half of the

organ is retractile and is closcly set with spines, broader at their base and with

the apex directed forwards. There are between 40 and 50 spines around the

circumference and about 12 along the length, but there is no definite arrangement

in rows. The small protrusible. cap, through which the mouth opens, is provided

with longer spines, about 18 around the circumference and six or seven in the

length, but the arrangement is indefinite. This cap is contained usually in the

anterior organ, but under pressure becomes alternately protruded and withdrawn.

At its base there open the ducts of the penetration glands.

The spines on the general body surface resemble those on the anterior organ,

but are much less closely placed, being more densely situated at the anterior end

and becoming relatively sparse behind the level of the front border of the second

pair of penetration glands.

There is no definite ventral sucker, but between the first and second pairs of

gland cells is a small slightly differentiated ‘anterior cell mass” which probably

represents an acetabulum. ‘The “posterior cell mass” lying behind the third pair

of gland cells is probably the genital anlage.

‘The digestive system is usually visible only after intra-vitam staining, There.

are a long, very narrow prepharynx, wide pharynx and a slender oesophagus which

divides into two short, comparatively thick, crura whose walls regularly show the

cell outlines (fg. 1).

Laterally from, and level with the posterior ends of, the crura and just

anterior to the first pair of gland cells, is a pair of clear rounded or oval struc-

tures, probably unpigmented eyespots, as in Cercaria bessiae Cort and Brooks.

They seem to be joined by a fine transparent line from the midpoint of which there

is a short prolongation anteriorly (fig. 1), but we have no suggestion to offer

regarding these structures, unless they are optic nerves.

There are three pairs of large granular penetration glands in the posterior

half of the body. On each side the middle and posterior glands are close together

while the anterior is slightly separated from the middle gland, so that in certain

states of extension of the body there appear to be two groups of gland cells.

Each cell has a large nucleus near its posterior end. The glands stain deeply with

neutral red and with nile blue sulphate, the latter staining the ducts as well.

These staining reactions are similar to those described by Miller (1926, 53) for

C. multicellulata, The ducts arise from the anterior lateral border of the

glands and the three ducts from each side travel forwards together to the anterior

organ which they enter near the midline, their termination being at the base of

the small protrusible cap already mentioned.

The nervous system was not definitely identified, but staining with neutral

red sometimes showed on either side of the prepharynx a mass of tissue which

may have been che brain.

The point of union of the anterior and posterior collecting tubes appeared

to be in the vicinity of the anterior border of the middle gland cell, just as in

C. multicellulata. There are almost certainly eight pairs of flame cells in the bady,

though the presence of several long vibratile flames in the collecting tubes adjacent

to the gland cells rendered counting in that region difficult. On each side there is

a pair of flame cells in the anterior and posterior regions of the body respectively,

as well as two pairs adjacent to the gland cells. There are also two pairs in the

tail. The formula is probably 2 {(2+2)+(2+2+2); The excretory canal

in the tail leaves the bladder by an island of Cort and the furcal branches terminate

just in front of the mid-length of the furcae.

In the tail, the furcae are of approximately the same length as the tail

stem. There are neither finfolds nor caudal bodies. The main stem bears a few

extremely fine sensory hairs visible only under favourable conditions of lighting

‘pouoHUatl! JOU Udye] SpUIWIOINseaU YDYM Woy ‘aelr"IIII JO ajRIG = 4

‘Wwes[eqy Bpeuey ul pajunoyy = ft

“(S}UHOUL JUaULIMAad JOP SIY} SUOTUDLA SUTTJOD sduTs ‘WuyeUIsO; %>G OY UT poxy ‘qoid) ,paasosarg,, = 4

‘avtieorad

Td]RM OLUTITOA

‘UpeLutoy %¢ JOY UL payry =

jenba 0} pappe myeusoy %o, Suywog =

«Spoq s@ SuoT se a0rM} Ayjeonoeid Yuna prep, = Ft

(602) #022) | (09) (OFT) Pn T= TSTAPOALID SIQIOUEI o> 9. BASEIOp Uetite yy

| : i

| eULIAS vscy

(p61) 9T2-S8T |] (98) Te-8z | (zzz) Tez-S8T || (oe) = 9e-TE | CEPT) = zat-e2t |e > > + oged esxy - aesayd “+ 4

| | SIjsnoepeuseur BesAyg

(éF1) | (2) | (961) (92) (9¢T) joo = RULIAR BSAUYT - eyeyNypoanur “-y 4h

(861) (8rz) (82) (641) [7 7 > SIAJOALI sIquouey - -Byeurey “DL f

(691) 86I-9ET |] (zz) Se-eT | (881) Zez-98T |] (9Z) = 28-6 | (OST) = ZBI-Z0T j-- SIATOATI] BULOSH9 FH - vdiosrxay “2 4

(841) €61-69T || (Zh) GF-OF | (56z) = BOE-ObZ |! (48) = OPE | COZT) = ODZ-GET J- ~~ Stapoarty stqsouR; gy ~ BRISSOG "Dae

($02) PEe-PST || (Ie) = Be-6z | (60Z) = PEZ-LOT |) (OE) = OSL | (zor) «= SeenSzT [- ~~ Suns siquoues ~ Puspepour “D »

(oez) ose-rst | (ze) = ee-6z | (rez) = OSZ-O0Z || (2h) = OP-BE |) C212) ZTZ-O07 © - BT eIsINUe} eUURLeUTy

eyepiuesdd = euueowy - BUapeyput “yy

‘aBAVR asued | -aae asues “Bae asuEs BAe S55 ue "aBAR asgues

HLONAT HLGVaud HLONAT HLavaud HLONAT LSo

von WLS TVL AGOW

payepnqe} aie ‘eeviiroiay)

UBIO LION

paizjet JO as04} YA Jayjaso} ‘srqaoun/ gy PUP DUUDIOULP” WO1] Puappjaut “D Jo 7 UT SUOISUAUMIp IZ,

and magnification. Along the lateral margins of the stem is a series of small,

pale greenish bodies (probably nuclei) which stain with haematoxylin, but, unlike

those of C. mullicellulata (Miller 1926, 52), do not take up neutral red. The

margin of the stem appears to be corrugated, apparently marking the boundaries

of the cells containing the greenish bodies. The stem and furcae are besct with

minute spines like those on the body, but perhaps not so closely arranged.

C. metadena is a pharyngeal, longifurcate, monostome cercaria closely related

to C. Posthodiplostomi-minimi (= C. multicellulata Miller) and to the other mem-

bers of Dubois’ (1938, 272) “rhabdocaeca” group (C. rhabdocaeca Faust,

C. hamata Miller, C. flexicorpa Collins), as well as to C. Uvuliferi-ambloplitis

(= C. bessiae Cort and Brooks). In describing C. physae, Cort and Brooks did

not give an account of the excretory system, but in other features the cercaria

resembles those just mentioned. The behaviour of all these cercariae in water

is similar except that in C. multicellulata and C. physae the anterior part of the

body is not, apparently, bent over to the ventral surface, while in the brief account

of C. rhabdocaeca this feature is not mentioned. C. metadena differs from all

those mentioned above in that its short gut is bifid, whereas in the others, with

the possible exception of C. multicellulata, it is rhabdococle. C, metadena is

larger than the others in body dimensions and differs from them all in the ratio

of the lengths of the tail stem and furcae, this being approximately 1:1 for

C. metadena, whereas in the others the stem is definitely longer than each furca.

In addition the arrangement of the spines on the anterior organ and the protrusible

cap of C, metadena appears to ba quite different from the other forms, with ihe

possible exception of C. multicelludata. C. metadena differs from Faust’s descrip-

tion of C. rhabdocaeca in the ratio of length to breadth, as well as in the shape of

the body. Faust, in his description, made no mention regarding the presence or

absence of sensory hairs or caudal bodies. Since Cort and Brooks (1928) con-

sidered C. rhabdocaeca to be the same as C. hamata, as Miller (1926) had pre-

viously hinted, these various characters cannot be used to differentiate between

the species. Our species differs from C. mutlticellulata in the absence of pigmented

eyespots, caudal bodies, and furcal finfold; from C. hamata in having a shorter

tail stem, and in the absence of caudal bodies; from C. bessice in the smaller

dimensions of the tail stem, in the greater width of the bedy in relation to the

tail stem, and in the less prominent eyespots (these being unpigmented in both

farms) ; from C. physae in the absence of caudal bodies and pigmented eyespots,

and in the extent of body spination; and from C. flexicorpa in the absence of head

gland cells, and in the presence of body spines in the region behind the pharynx.

Precocrous DEVELOPMENT OF TITE DIPLOSTOMULUM IN THE SNAIL Host

A specimen of Amerianna pyranudata from which cercariae had ceased to

emerge at least a week (probably several weeks) previously, was dissected early

in February 1941, in half-normal saline, and almost immediately many diplo-

stomula appeared in the fluid. The liver and adjacent tissues of the snail were

found to be packed with sporocysts, and within each of the latter the diplostomula

were being forced up and down rapidly by contractions of the sporocyst. Probably

as a result of the change in pH, the diplostomula were emitted almost immediately

and the sporocysts then lost their uniform diameter, becoming somewhat

moniliform. The sporocysts appeared to be similar in form to those which pro-

duce cercariae except that they were white, while normal sporocysts contain

orange yellow refractive granules. Amongst the hundreds cf diplostomula

liberated from the sporocysts, no tailed cercaria was found and extremely few

immature cercariae were present. Diplostomula remained alive for several days

in one-third-normal saline at 40° F. though they died in a few hours at room

temperature.

Fig, 1-11

Fig. 1-4, Cercuria metadena: 1, drawn from balsam mount, with details from

living specimens incorporated; 2, formalinised cercaria (excretory tubes in

tail from living specimen); 3, 4, resting position in water. Fig. 5-11,

Diplostomulum metadena from fish hosts: 5, reserve bladder system (contained

concretions not shown), holdfast distorted due to compression; 6, curving

arms of bladder; 7, drawn from stained balsam mount; 8, cyst; 10, anterior

end of hody under compression; 11, freshly excysted specimen. Fig. 5, 6, 9,

10 drawn from compressed specimens, thus showing no differentiation of fore

and hind body. Fig. 3, 4, 11 sketches; fig. 5, 7, 10 to same scale; fig. 6, 8, 9.

a, anterior cell mass; ac, acetabulum: es, evespot; hg, holdfast gland; 1s, latcral

sucker; n, nervous tissue; os, oral sucker; p, posterior cell mass.

Later, in February 1941, a snail (4. pyramidata) infected with C. metadena

was collected at Tailem Bend. It gave off some cercariae for a few days, was

not tested during the next two days and died on the following day. Dissection

showed that there were thousands of diplostomula throughout the liver and the

tissues adjacent to the digestive tract, while others were present in the remaining

tissues of the body. Cercariae were entirely absent. Not more than twelve sporo-

cysts, all of which had given off any diplostomes they may have-contained, were

present. Partly because the diplostomes were not alive when found and partly

because of our previous observations on normal sporocysts as well as those

referred to in the preceding paragraph, the snail (although its body appeared to

be intact) was assumed to have been dead for sufficient length of time to have

permitted the disintegration of most of the sporocysts in which the diplostomula

must have developed.

We ate unable to suggest what factor causes the precocious development of

diplostomes in the snail host. It is not associated with lateness in the season,

because the occurrences were in midsummer and cercariae (C. metadena) had

been collected issuing from a snail as late as May (1939). In one case a snail

taken in January 1941 emitted very few cercariae during the next 35 days, and

then ceased until early March when it liberated two cercariae, Some days later

it was killed and dissected, but no trace of sporocysts, cercariae or diplostomula

was found. Another snail which had ceased emitting cercariae for some time

before its death in early April was found, on dissection, to contain only empty

sporocysts. The remaining snail hosts of C. metadena, which had been preserved

in formalin at death and dissected subsequently, showed no sign of precocious

development of diplostomula. Several of them, both Amerianna and Planorbis,

showed no evidence of having been infected, while in most of the Planorbis little

of the sporocysts remained, though a number of cercariae were still present.

These facts indicate: (1) that sporocysts disintegrate readily, (a) on the death

of the host, and (0) after a certain period of infection, leaving no evidence of

previous infection; and (2) that for some reason, not yet known, developing germ

balls may give rise within the sporocyst to diplostomula instead of cercariae.

Cort and Brackett (1937) recorded the precocious development of meta-

cercariae of Diplostomum flexicaudum in the snail host, Stagnicola emarginata

angulata in U.S.A. They found it in 8-6% of 669 snails examined in one month

(August). They believed (as we do for C. mefadena) that in living snails the

diplostomula occurred only within the sporocysts; that the presence of diplostomula

was associated with old infections; and they recorded that in some cases

diplostomula were found in snails which contained very few cercariae and empty

sporocysts. They found that these diplostomula were usually considerably smaller

than those described by Hughes and Berkhout (1929) as D. gigas (which was

identified by Van Haitsma in 1931 as D. flericaudum) from the normal habitat of

the species, i.¢., in the lens of certain fresh-water fish.

Cort and Brackett (1937) believed that Diplostomulum browni described by

Hughes (1929) from sporocysts as well as from the soft tissues of Stagnicola,

was the precocious metacercaria of Diplostomum flexicaudum, Olivier (1940),

by feeding experiments, showed that this suggestion was correct, thus proving

that diplostomula which had developed in a snail host not only were normal in

appearance, but were infective when fed to a suitable avian host.

We found that formalinized diplostomula from one snail were much smaller

than those from another, the range in the former case being: length, 225-334 »

(average 250), breadth 134-184, (average 167); while in the second they mea-

sured: length, 350-585 (average 443), breadth 184-267 » (average 212). The

specimens had been killed with boiling 10% formalin, and ten were measured in

each case,

DIpLosTOMULUM STAGE FrRoM SnNaiu Llosr

The Hving diplostomulum was capable of continual change in form, from

being broad, flat and leaf-like to become narrow and elongate. Lateral “suckers”

were not obvious, though present, the form of the head region depending on the

slight degree of protrusion or retraction exhibited by these organs which lay on

either side of and closely adjacent to the oval sucker. The latter measured

24 by 25 long. The acetabulum! is small 19 hy 23 » wide, the nuclei (about 24

in number) around its periphery showing clearly after staining. It lies imme-

diately in front of the holdfast (fig. 12, 13, 18). The latter is rather large

(53-106 p, averaging 76» in diameter), lies mainly in the posterior third of the

body and surrounds a narrow slit which enters a wide cavity (fig. 17). Surround-

ing the slit are many elongate pyriform cells with large nuclei towards the distal

ends. The cuticle in this region is provided with spines which, though minute,

are more prominent than those on the rest of the body. The holdfast gland lies

transversely just behind the holdfast. Under oil immersion magnification the

body cuticle is seen to be roughened with what are, perhaps, extremely minute

2 ed

oot OP ote

2°? 0% o%Q8 59.

o Xo

Fig, 12-18

Fig. 12-18, Diplostomuium metadena from snail host: 12, drawn from stained

balsam: mount; 13, uncompressed specimen; 14, arrangement of calcareous

corpuscles of secondary system as seen in one individual; 15, sketch (see

text); 16, 17, sections through sporocyst containing diplostomes; 18, parts

of primary and secondary systems, Fig. 13, 14, 15, 18 sketches drawn from

living specimens. Fig. 1, 5, 6 to same scale.

ac, acetabulum; d, diplostome; e, excretory, pore; eb, excretory bladder;

g, gland cells: gr, excretory granules; h, hindbody; hd, holdfast; hg, holdfast

gland; i, intestine; n, nerve cord; r, reproductive anlage; sp, sporocyst wall.

spines. The surface of the body is almost entirely covered with granular ceils

which stain faintly after treatment with neutral red and orange G.

A prepharynx is absent. The short oesophagus is succceded by the narrow

crura which extend into the hind body; these also stain with neutral red. Two

lateral nerve cords are connected by a commissure situated posteriorly to the

pharynx,

The main arms of the excretory system converge in the hind body to open

dorsally at the excretory pore near the end of the worm. The pattern of the

primary excretory system, as far as recognisable, has become more complex than

it was in the cercaria. Fig, 18 indicates the position of flame cells seen, but it is

ebviously not a complete picture of the arrangement, and we were unable to trace

the capillaries or any but the main collecting tubules.

The secondary or reserve excretory system showed up best at death, and

immediately after. The general plan conformed to the typical strigeid arrangement

suggested by van Haitsma (1931) and Bosma (1934, 144). The anterior ends

of the original primary bladder which extend far up the body anteriorly are joined

by two commissural vessels which in turn connect with a median longitudinal

vessel extending from the anterior commissural pair to end blindly somewhere

posterior to the acetabulum.

In one favourable specimen was seen on each side a very narrow marginal

vessel somewhat like the secondary collecting tubules of a cercarita—and from

this arose numerous twig-like branches, which might end in one “follicle,” or

four or five, each follicle having its own short twig. These structures would, no

doubt, correspond to the “terminal tubules with their caleareous corpuscles” of

3osma. Although only the two lateral vessels were secn, the calcareous bodies,

which were extremely numerous, appeared to be arranged in seven longitudinal

lines. These almost certainly represent the site of excretory canals, the two outer

vessels and the median vessel (previously mentioned) which were actually seen,

and two more vessels on either side of the median.

In addition to the system of calcareous bodies, there was another system con-

sisting of five or six parallel rows of tubes, extending from the pharyngeal region

to the anterior borders of the holdfast organ. On either side each tube gave rise

to a number of elongate diverticula arranged like leaves on a flattened branch.

Fig. 15 is a sketch illustrating the gencral arrangement, We do not know whether

this system was part of the reticulum of the reserve bladder system, or had a

lymphatic or a glandular function.

DIPLOSTOMULUM METADENA IN Fisit

Experiments showed that Cercaria metadena will develop into a diplostomulum

in the aquarium fish, Gambusia affinis and Phalloceros caudomaculatus, but regular

attempts to infect gold fish (Carassius auratus), rice fish (Oryzias latipes) and

Barbus sp. were unsuccessful. Negative results were also obtained with the

yabby, Cherax destructor, and with tadpoles of Limnodynasles sp., but the last-

mentioned were frequently found dead soon after having been placed in contact

with cercariae, this suggesting that the latter have a detrimental effect on them.

Two Gambusia jumped out of their tank some hours after having been subjected

to infection, and this was probably caused by irritation during invasion.

Amongst native fish, Craterocephalus fluviatilis and Mugilogobius galwayi

from the Murray swamps at Tailem Bend have been found infected with the

diplostomulam.

The diplostomula are found in the subcutaneous tissues of the body as well

as in the coelom and pericardium, but not in the eyes. Usually the worm was

found free and sometimes actively moving, having presumably escaped from its

thin investing cyst which probably breaks down soon after the death of the host.

In fish which were examined immediately after having been killed, the parasites

were enclosed, folded once, within a thin ovoid cyst averaging 1 to 1-2 mm. by

“52-58 mm. When released the worms meastired little more than the length

of the cyst.

The diplostomula from fish have undergone further development than those

found precociously produced in snails. They are larger, the average of five

specimens in canada balsam being *88 by *3 mm., the largest reaching 1-67

by ‘5 mm, The region between the acetabulum and the holdfast has lengthened

considerably, so that the former, which hes at the anterior border of the holdfast

in the snail diplostome is now situated at about the midlength of the worm and

separated from the holdfast by a distance approximately equal to the length of

the latter.

The following are measurements recorded from a particularly favourable

specimen fixed in formalin and examined in glycerine: acetabulum, about 25 p.

long by 20 » broad; holdfast, about *12 mm. long by *08 mm. broad (nearly one-

fifth of the width of the forebody in this region).

‘The forebody is about nine times as long as the hindbody. The holdfast lies

in the posterior third, or more usually, just within the posterior fourth of the

body ; its length is between one-seventh and one-eighth of the length of the fore-

body. The oral sucker is slightly larger than the acetabulum and measures about

*036 mm, in diameter, Immediately laterally from it are the lateral pseudo-suckers

which may appear as very shallow depressions, and which are readily protrusible

in life, They do not appear to possess gland cells, but are marked by fine muscular

striations, The region just postero-lateral to them may project as a prominent

shoulder, causing the anterior end of the worm to appear somewhat trilobed.

‘The pharynx is narrower and shorter than the oral sucker. Behind the deeply

staining holdfast gland lies the lobed genital rudiment which does not show much

differentiation beyond the stage present in the diplostomula from snails.

The five main longitudinal channels of the secondary excretory system are

very conspicuous because of their width and contents and can be seen readily

through the cyst wall. The median canal extends posteriorly to a point about mid-

way down the length of the holdfast, thence becoming greatly narrowed and less

defined, with smaller and more scattered globules. The main canals have become

connected by a number of more or less transverse anastomoses (fig. 5). Besides

the large channels there are numerous very narrow vessels, with a more or less

regular arrangement, extending between the former. The terminal tubules con-

taining calcareous concretions seen in the precociously developed diplostomula

were not observed in those from fish. In the region behind and cxtending

posteriorly from the holdfast are very small canals of the secondary system, which

communicate with the central stem of the secondary, as well as with the main

arms of the primary, system. These canals contain only minute granules.

Some of the stages in the development of the excretory system were recog-

nised, In fig. 6 the arms of the main bladder appear to be bending mesiad (cp.

Bosma’s plate x, fig. 14). The anterior and posterior collecting tubules of the

primary system are still visible, as are various branches which contain calcareous

concretions of the reserve system, though the actual connections of this system

with the main arms of the bladder were not seen in this specimen. Fig. 9 shows

the main branches of the reserve system, and the commissural vessels which mark

the first stage of anastomosis, In the specimen figured in fig, 5 the anastomosis

has extended further, and this probably represents the young adult stage (cp.

Bosma’s fig. 18 of the adult system).

RELATIONSHIPS

C, multicellulata Miller 1923 has been shown by Ferguson (1936; 1937) to

be the larva of Posthodiplostomum minimum (McCallum). Dubois (1938, 272)

stated that C. rhabdocaeca, C. hamata and C. flexicorpa could be considered as

larvae of species of Posthodiplostomum, though he mentioned (1938, 322) that,

apart from the flame cell formula, C. bessiae (larva of Uvulifer ambloplitis)

possessed all the characters belonging to this group. Cort and Brooks in describ-

ing C. bessiae, stated that they could not be certain that there were not more than

six pairs of fame cells in the body, and it seems to us to be unwise to discriminate

between the cercariae of these two genera until the excretory system of the larva

of Uvulifer has been determined definitely,

The structure of the diplostomulum suggests that it may be the larva of

Bolbophorus, a species of which occurs in pelicans at Tailem Bend. The position

ef the pseudo-sucker in relation to the oral sucker, the tendency for “shoulders”

to be present, the general relations of the acetabulum and holdfast, and the relative

widths of the fore and hind body all point towards such a conclusion. These same

features distinguish it from the larva of Diplostomum., The differentiation into

well-defined fore and hind body distinguishes it from Hysteromorpha and the

presence of pseudo-suckers allows ils separation from most of the remaining

diplostome genera,

We have placed eggs of Bolbophorus in experimental tanks containing a

number of Amerianna and Planorbis, but none of these snails has subsequently

produced cercariae. One Planorbis, dissected at death two months after having

been subjected to infection, contained about twelve sporocysts, but it was not

possible to identify these definitely as those of C. metadena, Further experiments

will be undertaken when material shall have become available,

We have used the term Diplostomulum as a collective name for the meta-

cercaria stage of species of Diplostomidae. The specific name is based on the

posterior position of the gland cells in the cercaria,

We desire to acknowledge generous assistance received from Messrs, G, and

F. Jaensch and L. Ellis of Tailem Bend, as well as from the Commonwealth

Research grant to the University of Adelaide.

SUMMARY

1 Cercaria metadena n.sp. is described from Planorbis isingi, Amerianna

pyramidata (type host) and A. tenuistriata from Tailem Bend, South Australia.

2 The percentage infection observed in Planorbis was 1:17, and in

Amerianna spp. 0°28 during 1937-1942.

3 The sporocyst, cercaria and diplostomulum are described and the cercaria

compared with allied North American species.

4 The diplostomulum occurs in some species of native fish, and has been obtained

from experimentally infected aquarium fish (Gambusia and Phalloceros).

5 Precocious development of diplostomula in a snail host (Amerianna) is

reported,

6 The adult stage is probably a Bolbophorus, a species of which occurs in local

pelicans.

LITERATURE

Bosma, N. J. 1934 Trans. Amer. Micr., 53, 116-153

Cotuins, W. W. 1935 Jour. Parasit., 21, 18-20

Cort, W. W., and Brackett, S. 1937 Jour, Parasit., 23, 545-546

Cort, W. W., and Brooxs, S. T. 1928 Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc., 47, 179-221

Duszois, G. 1938 Monographie des Strigeida (‘rematoda), Neuchatel

Faust, E, C. 1919 Biol, Bulletin, 36, 315-344

HucuHes, R. C. 1929 Occ. Pap. Mus. Zool, Univ. Michigan, 202, 1-29

Hucues, R. C. and Berxnout, P. G. 1929 Pap. Michigan Acad. Sci. Arts

and Letters, 10, 483-488

Miirer, H. M., Jr. 1923 Jour. Parasit., 10, 35-46

Minter, H. M., Jr. 1926 Ill, Biol. Monogr., 10, 1-112

Outvier, L. 1940 Jour, Parasit., 26, 85-86

Van Harrsma, J. P. 1931 Pap. Michigan Acad. Sci. Arts and Letters, 13,

483-516

THE GENUS THYSANOPODA (CRUSTACEA, EUPHAUSIACEA)

By KEITH SHEARD

Summary

This difficult genus is characterised as follows: In general as in Euphausia, but penultimate pair of

legs distinctly developed and of the same structure as the preceding; last pair with the endopod

obsolete but having a well-developed exopod. All the true gills provided with an interiorly bent

branch, the two posterior pairs rather complex in structure, last pair much the larger and richly

arborescent. Flagella of both pairs of antennae greatly elongate. Exognath of second pair of

maxillae very small. Luminous globules as in Euphausia. Genotype Thysonapoda tricuspidata

Milne-Edwards 1830.

THE GENUS THYSANOPODA (CRUSTACEA, EUPHAUSIACEA)

By Kerra SHEARD

[Read 14 May 1942]

This difficult genus is characterised as follows: In general as in Euphausia,

but penultimate pair of legs distinctly developed and oi the same structure as the

preceding; last pair with the endopod obsolete but having a well-developed exopod.

All the true gills provided with an interiorly bent branch, the two posterior pairs

rather complex in structure, last pair much the larger and richly arborescent.

Flagella of both pairs of antennae greatly elongate. Exognath of second pair of

maxillae very small, T.uminous globules as in Euphausia, Genotype Thysona-

poda tricuspidata Milne-E-dwards 1830.

The main specific characters are to be found in the maxillulae, male copula-

tory organs, the lappet of the first antennular segment, the presence or absence of

lateral denticles on the carapace in the aduit, and the presence or absence of teeth

or denticles on the midline of posterior margins of the abdominal! segments also

in the adult.

Thysanopoda should be preserved in 70% alcohol, Formalin, the commonly

used preservative not only renders examination difficult but is a source of error

in these, as in all crustacean specimens.

The genus is of world oceanic distribution. Australian representatives are:

Thysanopoda obtusifrons Sars, T. monacantha Ortmann, T. tricuspidata Milne-

Edwards and T. orientalis Hansen, and T. johnstoni n. sp.

Order EODPHAUSIACEA

Family EUPHAUSIIDAE

Genus TrivsAnoropa Milne-Edwards 1830

Thysanopoda Milne-Edwards 1930, 451; Sars 1885, 97; Hansen 1905, 12; 1905a,

18; 1910, 81; 1911, 1; 1912, 207.

Parathysanopoda Ilig 1909, 225.

List or Specres AND SYNONYMY

THYSANOPODA TRICUSPIDATA Milne-Edwards 1830

Thysanopoda tricuspide Milne-Edwards 1830, 451, pl. xix; tricuspida Milne-

Edwards 1837, 45, pl. xxvi, fig. 1-6; tricuspidata Sars 1885, 98, pl. xvii;

Hansen 1910, 82, pl. xii, fig. 3a-3b; 1912, 208, pl. iv, fig. 2a; 1913, 23; 1916,

637 ; Tattersall 1913, 873; 1924, 14; 1926, 13; 1936, 165 (larvae) ; 1939, 212;

Zimmer 1914, 416; Illig 1930,

Cyrtopia rostrata Dana 1852.

THYSANOPODA CRISTATA Sars 1883

Thysanopoda cristata Sars 1883, 22; 1885, 104-106, pl. xviii, fig. 15-20; Hansen

1911, 15; 1912, 209-212 (larvag 284-287, pl. xii, fig. la-lg), pl. iv, fig. la-1b;

Zimmer 1914, 416; biproducta Ortmann 1893, 8, pl. i, fig. 1.

THYSANOPODA MONACANTHA Ortmann 1893

Thysanopoda monacantha Ortmann 1893, 9, pl. i, fig. 2; Hansen 1912, 212, pl. iv,

fig. 3a-3c; 1915, 61; 1916, 638; Zimmer 1914, 417; Tattersall 1926, 14;

1939, 213; Tllig 1930, 507, fig.; agassizi Ortmann 1894, 99, fig. 1-2;

Hansen 1910, 87-89, pl. xiii, fig. 3-g; lateralis Hansen 1905, 18-19, fig. 14-19;

ctenophora Illig 1908, 112-113, fig. 1.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

THYSANOPODA AEQUALIS IJansen 1905

Thysanopoda aequalis Hansen 1905a, 18-20; 1910, 84, pl. xii, fig. 4a-4c, pl. xiii,

fig. la; 1912, 214-215, pl. iv, fig. 4a; 1915, 61-62; 1916 67; Zimmer 1914,

417-418, pl. xxvi, fig. 53-54; Tattersall 1909, 123; 1912, 128; 1924, 15; 1926,

14; 1939, 213; Lllig 1930; obtusifrons Lo Bianca 1901, 440; Thiele 1905,

452; fig.; Ortmann 1905, 964; ainicrophthalma t.o Bianca 1903, 192;

aequalis var. latifrons Colosi 1916, 67.

THYSANOPODA OBTUSIFRONS Sars 1883

Thysanopoda obtusifrons Sars 1883, 21; 1885, 102-104, pl. xviii, fig. 1-14; nec

Lo Bianca 1901, 440, and 1903, 192; nec Ortmann 1905, 964; nec Thiele 1905,

452, fig.; Hansen 1910, 15; 1912, 215, pl. iv, fig. 5a-5f£; Tattersall 1924,

16; 1939, 213; Zimmer 1914, 419; Chilton 1926, 519; vulgaris Hansen 1905,

15; 1905a, 20.

THYSANOPODA PECTINATA Ortmann 1893

Thysanopoda pectinata Ortmann 1893, 10, pl. i, fig. 4; Hansen 1905a, 25; 1912,

218-222, pl. v, fig. la-lm; 1915, 62; 1916, 639; Tattersall 1912, 129; 1939,

213; nec Hansen 1905, 20.

Parathysanopoda folitfera Mig 1909, 225; 1930, 510, fig.

THYSANOPODA ACUTIFRONS Holt and Tattersall 1905

Thysenopoda acutifrons Holt and Tattersall 1905, 102, (pars); 1906, 8, pl. i;

Tattersall 1925, 6; 1925, 6, pl. ii, fig. 4; 1939, 213; Hansen 1905a, 22; 1910,

85, text fig.; 1912, 218, pl. v, fig. la-lm; 1915, 62; Illig 1939; pectinata

Hansen 1905, 20.

THYSANOPODA ORIENTALIS Hansen 1910

Thysanopoda orientalis Hansen 1910, 222, pl. v, fig. 2a-2c; 1912, 222, pl. v,

fig. 2a-2c; 1915, 64-65; 1916, 639; Zimmer 1914, 419; Tattersall 1939, 214;

1936, 166,

THYSANOPODA MICROPHTITALMA Sars 1885

Thysanopoda microphthalma Sars 1885, 106-108, text fig. 3; Hansen 1910, 85,

text fig.; Tattersall 1926, 15; nec Lo Bianca, 1905, 192; distinguenda

Hansen 1905, 17, fig. 13; Holt and ‘lattersall 1906, 11, pl. ii.

THYSANOPODA CorNUTA Illig 1905

Thysanopoda cornuta Mig 1905, 663-664, fig. 1-3; 1908, 463-464; Ilansen 1911,

16; 1912, 223-224; ? 1915, 65-66, 1916, 639; Tattersall 1913, 872; ? 1926,

15-16; 1939, 214 (larvae) ; Illig 1930, 513; insignis Tlansen 1905, 19, text fig.

THYSANOPODA EGREGIA Hansen 1905

Thysanopoda egregia Hansen 1905, 22, text fig.; 1912, 225; Illig 1908, 463;

? megalops Illig 1908, 54, fig. 1 and 2; 1911, 45-46, fig.

THYSANOPODA MANSUIIL Marukawa 1928

Thysanopoda mansuti Marukawa 1928, 23.

THYSANOPODA ARMATA Marukawa 1928

Thysanopoda armata Marukawa 1928, 23.

THYSANOPODA SPINULA Macdonald 1929

Thysanopoda spinula Macdonald 1929, 63.

The genus has been divided by Hansen (1912, 206) into two well-marked

sections.

Group A: Carapace without any distinct cervical groove. Maxillula with

the psetidexopod moderately large to very large, at least half its length situated

beyond the outer margin of third joint, palp at most moderately long and some-

what over-reaching the third joint. Sixth abdominal segment longer than the fifth.

This section may again be divided.

(1) The carapace in the adult with a denticle on or near the lower margins

near their posterior end.

T. tricuspidata Milne-Edwards; cristata Sars; monacantha Ortmann

= ? agassisi Ortmann) ; aequalis Hansen, obtusifrons Sars.

(2) Carapace in the adult without denticles on the lower margins near

their ends.

T. microphthalma Sars; pectinata Ortmann; ortentalis Hansen;

aculifrons Iolt and Tattersall; jolmstoni n. sp.

Group B: Carapace with a well-developed cervical groove. Maxillula with

the pseudexopod somewhat small, scarcely or not at all over-reaching the outer

margin of the third joint, palp very long, Sixth abdominal segment shorter than

the fifth.

T. cornuta Illig and T. egregia Hansen.

I am unable to obtain descriptions of T. mansuii and T. armata erected by

Marakawa 1928, or of T. spinula Macdonald 1929.

In Group A, section 1, separation is difficult. T. tricuspidata Milne-Edwards

possesses two denticles on or near the lower margin of the carapace, and the male

of T. aequalis Hansen lacks the spine-shaped process (p') on the copulatory

organs. The remaining three species can be separated by small differences in the

copulatory organs and by differences in the frontal plate, antennular lappet and the

dorsal armature of the abdomen. The species are good. Careful reference must

be made to the appropriate descriptions and figures.

The species of Group A, section 2, may be separated as follows:

Adult males and females—

(a) Antennular lappet multidigitate .. - i ne .. T. pectinata Ortmann

(aa) iv » not multidigitate.

(b) Abdominal segments 4 and 5 slightly acuminate mesially on

postero-dorsal margin.

(ec) Antennal scale reaching beyond the end of the second joint T. orientalis Hansen

(bb) Abdominal segments 4 and 5 smooth on the postero-dorsal

margin.

(d) Abdominal side plates 1-2-3-4 slightly indented on the

lower margin .. 3

. wd ee ws set «- T.acutifrons H.& T.

(dd) Abdominal side plate 1 not indented, 2-3-4 deeply

indented on lower margin .. she : T. johnstoni n. sp.

Adult males. Copulatory organs-—

(a) Spine-shaped process absent as fg es - .. TT. johnstonin. sp.

(aa) Spine-shaped process (p*) present.

(b) Terminal process (p*) saw-toothed behind the terminal

margin = ae at : ms »» T.microphthalma Sars.

(bb) Terminal process not toothed.

(cc) Terminal process shorter than the proximal.

(d) Terminal process evenly rounded at distal end .. .. T. orientalis Hansen

i acutely pointed at distal end .. .. TT. acutifrons H, & T.

T. aequalis Hansen and T. johnstoni n. sp., although in different sections of

the genus, are peculiar amongst the Thysanopeda in lacking the spine-shaped pro-

cess of the copulatory organ.

Group B—

(a) Rostral plate slightly up-curved, tip surmounted by a small

tubercle hi bet = os ie .- We .. TT. cornuta Mig.

(aa) Rostral plate down-curved, no rostral tubercle present .. TT. egregia Hansen

Thysanopoda johnstoni n. sp,

B.A.N.Z.A.R.E, sta. 111 (44° 115 S., 143° 36’ E.) N200, 1,710-0 m.,

17 March 1931, surface temperature 12-00°, surface salinity 34-56, 2 2 9 39 mm,

1 ¢ 33mm. “Warreen” sta. 25/38 (37° 14/5 S., 150° 23’ E.) N70, 500-250 m.,

14 August 1938, surface temperature 14-90°, surface salinity 35-50, temperature

at 300 m, 11-°55°, salinity at 300 m. 35-06, three damaged specimens, Investigator

Straits, from stomach of Southern Blue-fin Tuna (Thunnus maccoyi Castelnau),

one adult.

This species falls into Hansen’s group A, section 2, possessing the charac-

teristic maxillula, the sixth abdominal segment longer than the fifth and having

neither a cervical groove, nor a denticle on the lower margin of the carapace.

The eyes are small, rounded and brown in spirit specimens, with the produced

frontal plate barely protruding beyond them.

The antennule has the first segment the longest, furnished with a lappet

similar to that of 7. acutifrons H, & T. but longer, reaching to the middle of the

second segment. The third antennular segment terminates in a small setose lappet.

The antennal squama, fringed with long setae along its curved inner margin

and on its slightly curved distal end reaches to a little more than half-way up the

third antennular segment. The spiniform outer process from the sub-basal joint

is thin and tapering, as long as the breadth of the squama.

In the maxilla the distal segment is ovate, slightly longer than the preceding.

The maxillula resembles that of T. pectinata Ortmann but the pseudexopod

is narrower and the palp relatively longer. Both the maxilla and maxillula

are heavily setose with plumose setae. The abdominal segments are without trace

of any denticles dorsally. The side plates of abdominal segments 1 to 5 resemble

those of T. microphthalma, figured by Holt and Tattersall (1906, pl. ii) as

T. distinguenda, Tlowever the emargination of the lower border of plates 2, 3,

and 4 is much greater than for that species.

The preanal spine is well developed and is simple in both male and female.

The endopod and exopod of the uropods are both slightly longer than the

telson, which bears four pairs of dorsal denticles,

The copulatory organs are distinctive. The spine-shaped process is absent.

The terminal process, about half the length of the proximal, is sickle-shaped at

its distal third, but from the bulb of the commencement of the sickle, a flat mem-

brane runs nearly to the tip. At its distal end this membrane bears, on the outer

margin, two very small, rounded prolongations.

The proximal process is somewhat of the form figured for T. orientalis by

Hansen (1912).

The median lobe resembles that of T. pectinata figured by Hansen (1912),

but the additional process is not hooked, while there are two secondary additional

processes. In all the median lobe bears four processes instead of the three normal

to the genus.

A subadult female (length, 15 mm.) does not possess a lateral denticle on

the carapace.

This species is named in honour of Professor T, Harvey Johnston, Biologist

to the B.A.N.Z.A.R.E. and Editor of the Expedition’s reports.

Thanks are due to the B.A.N.Z.A.R.E, committee for permission to publish

this preliminary description of the species, which will be more fully dealt with in a

forthcoming paper on the Euphausiacea of the Expedition; and also to Dr. H.

Thompson of the Division of Fisheries, Council for Scientific and Industrial

Research of Australia, for the use of the “Warreen” material.

Fig. A-Q | Thysanopoda johnstoni n. sp.

A, antennular peduncle; B, antennuler lappet; C, maxilliped; D, maxillula;

E, frontal plate; F-J, abdominal side plates 1-5; K, copulatory organ; L

terminal process (p*); M, tip of proximal process (p*); N, lateral process

(p*); O, additional process (p°); P-Q, secondary additional processes (p*, p’).

’

THYSANOPODA LARVAE

While no Thysanepoda larvae have been definitely correlated with the adults

by breeding experiments, it is fairly certain that, by (1) a process of elimination,

and (2) comparison of forms gradually approaching an identifiable stage, the

larvae of several species have been identified.

The larvae of T. acutifrons have been recorded by Frost (Proc. Roy. Irish

Acad., 45, B, No. 13) and of T. tricuspidata by Sars (1885) and Tattersall (1936).

Other larvae belonging to the genus, if not to the ascribed species, are:

T. agassigi Hansen 1910; T. orientalis of Hansen 1910; T. aequalis, obtusi-

frons and pectinata of Hansen 1912.

There appears little possibility of working out any scheme whereby conclu-

sive specific identifications of single stages of Euphausiid larvae can be made,

although generic separations are possible following on a working knowledge of

the group. It is extremely: difficult to reduce this knowledge to exact definition.

Keys based on the emergence of pleopods are unsound guides. For example, the

examination of plankton secured by the “Warreen” over a period of four years

along the Southern and Eastern coastline of Australia shows enormous numbers

of larvae which can certainly be referred to the genus Nyctiphanes and which

present, over all, every form of pleopod emergence with no one form dominant

over the whole area, although at certain times in certain areas one form or the

other may be statistically dominant.

It is extremely likely that particular minor phases of development which may

be passed through are as much expressions of the available food supply as of

anything else.

Opinions on the significance of minor developmental stages in the Euphausiid

larvae have changed from the purely schematic (Lebour 1926, Jour. Mar. Biol. -

Assoc., U.K., N.S., 14) to a consideration of dominant stages (Fraser 1936, Dis-

covery Reports 14). A wider view has been taken by Rustad (Norske Vidensk.

Ak., Oslo, 1930, 1 (5) ) who, as the result of work done by the Norwegian Ant-

arctic Expedition of 1927-1928 et seq., endeavours to consider the organism as a

whole and discards the idea of a schematised development beyond the very early

stages.

LITERATURE

Cuitton, C. 1926 Trans. N.Z. Inst., 56

Cotost, G. 1916 Mon. Zool. Ital., Firenze, 27

Dana, J.D. 1852 U.S. Expl. Exp. 1838-1842, 13, Crustacea

Hansen, H. J. 1905 Bull. Mus. Ocean., Monaco, No. 30

Hansen, H. J. 1905a Bull. Mus. Ocean., Monaco, No. 42

Hansen, H. J. 1910 Siboga Expeditie, No. 37

Hansen, H. J. 1911 Bull. Inst. Ocean., Monaco, No. 210

Hansen, H. J. 1912 Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., 35,

Hansen, H. J. 1913 Swedish Ant. Exped. “Shizopods”

Hansen, H. J. 1915 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 48

Hansen, H. J. 1916 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 49

Hort and TarrersALL 1905 Fish. Ireland Sci. Invest., 1902-05, 4

Hott and Tatrrersati 1906 Fish. Ireland Sci. Invest., 1904, 5

Intic, G. 1905 Zool. Anz., 28, (19/20)

Inuic, G. 1908 Zool. Anz., 33, (4)

Intic, G. 1909 Zool. Anz., 35, (8)

Inuic, G. 1911 Zool. Anz., 38

Intic, G. 1930 Wiss. Erg. Deutsch. “Tiefsee” Exp., 22, (6)

Lo Bianca, S. 1901 Mitt. Zool, Stat, Neapel, 15

Lo Branca, S. 1903 Mitt. Zool. Stat. Neapel, 16

Macponacp, R. 1929 Proc. New England Zool. Coll., 2

Maruxkawa, H. 1928 Annot. Ocean. Rech., Tokyo, 2, (1)

Mitne-Epwarps, H. 1830 Ann. Sci. Nat., 19

Miine-Epwarps, H. 1937 Hist. Nat. Crustacea, (2)

OrTMANN, A. 1893 Erg. Plank. Exp., 2, (G.B.)

Orrmann, A. 1894 Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., 25

Sars, G. O. 1883 Forh. Selsks. Christiana, No. 7

Sars, G. O. 1885 Rep. Voy. Challenger, (37)

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1909 Mitt. Zool. Stat. Neapel, 19, (2)

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1912 Trans. Jinn. Soc. Lond., (2), 15

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1913 Trans. Roy. Soc. Edin., 49

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1924 Brit. Ant. (Terra Nova) Exped., 1910, Zool., 8, (1)

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1925 Rep. Fish. Mar. Surv. Sth. Africa, 4, (8)

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1926 Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 69, (8)

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1936 Great Barrier Reef Exped., 1928-29, British Mus.

Sci. Rep., 5, (4)

TATTERSALL, W. W. 1939 John Murray Exp. 1933-34, Brit. Mus. Sci. Rpt.,

5, (8)

TrHere, J. 1905 Zool. Jahr. Suppl., 8

ZIMMER, C. 1914 Deutsch. Sudpolar Exp. 1901-03, 15, Zool. 7

ZIMMER, C. 1932 Die Tierwelt Nord- und Ost-See, 22, (10)

NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN ALBATROSSES AND PETRELS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

The collection, which is now being reported on has been assembled during the past thirty-three

years, mainly from birds washed ashore after gales. Many of the hosts were sent from the South

Australian Museum by the late Director, E. R. Waite, and the present Director, H. M. Hale, to the

senior author for examination, the birds having been obtained by Messrs. E. R. Waite, J. Sutton, H.

Condon or B. C. Cotton. Mr. Condon has been assiduous in patrolling the local beaches, especially

Sellicks Beach, after storms in order to obtain sea birds for the Museum collection and is

responsible for many of the host identifications. Prof. Cleland supplied material from Encounter

Bay. The Director of the Australian Museum, Sydney, sent some parasites from New South Wales

for identification. We desire to thank those who have assisted us, and to acknowledge indebtedness

to the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN ALBATROSSES AND PETRELS

By T. Harvey Jounston and Patricia M. Mawson, University of Adelaide

[Read 11 June 1942]

The collection which is now being reported on has been assembled during the

past thirty-three years, mainly from birds washed ashore after gales. Many of

the hosts were sent from the South Australian Museum by the late Director, E. R.

Waite, and the present Director, H. M. Hale, to the senior author for examination,

the birds having been obtained by Messrs. E. R. Waite, J. Sutton, H. Condon or

B. C. Cotton. Mr. Condon has been assiduous in patrolling the local beaches,

especially Sellicks Beach, after storms in order to obtain sea birds for the Museum

collection and is responsible for many of the host identifications. Prof. Cleland

supplied material from Encounter Bay. The Director of the Australian Museum,

Sydney, sent some parasites from New South Wales for identification. We desire

to thank those who have assisted us, and to acknowledge indebtedness to the Com-

monwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

The types of the new species now described, with the exception of

Contracaecum pelagicum, have been deposited in the South Australian Muscum,

Adelaide. The types and other material of C. pelagicum are in the Australian

Museum, Sydney.

The only nematodes previously recorded from Australian petrels were:

(1) Seuratia shipleyi from the Cape pigeon, Daption capense, from New South

Wales (Johnston 1912), and (2) S. marina, described by us (1941) from Pelago-

droma marina, collected by Prof. Cleland on Flinders Island, Bass Strait. Johnston

(1937) recorded Anisakis diomedeae as having been taken from Diomedea exulans

off south-western Tasmania (44° 30’ S., 141° F.). Stossich (in Shipley 1900)

identified Guathostoma shipleyi (= Seuratia shipleyi) from D. erulans taken off

New Britain by Willey.

The following is a list of parasites identified, recorded under their hosts:

DIOMEDEA EXULANS Linn.—Port Jackson, N.S.W.: Paryseria diomedeae n. Sp.

Anisakis sp. (immature), Seuratia shipley: (Stoss.). Tasmanian Seas:

Anisakis diomedeae (Linst.).

DIOMEDEA CURYSOSTOMA Forst.—Sellicks Beach, S. Aust.: Paryseria diomedeae

n. sp., Paryseria macronectes nu. sp., Anisakis diomedeae (Linst.), Anisakis sp.

DIOMEDEA MELANOPIIRIS Temm.—Brighton, S. Aust.: Anisakis sp. (immature),

Seuratia shipleyt (Stoss.). Sellicks Beach, 5S. Aust.: Paryseria diomedeac

n.sp., Anisakis diomedeae (Linst.). Broken Bay, N.S.W.: Anisakis

diomedeae, Contracaecum pelagicum n. sp.

DIOMEDEA CHLORORHYNCHA Gmel.—Sellicks Beach, S. Aust.: Anisakis diomedeae

(Linst.). Port Adelaide, 5. Aust.: Tetrameres diomedeae n.sp., Seuratia

shipleyi (Stoss.). Broken Bay, N.S.W.: Contracaecum pelagicum n. sp.

DriomepEA cAuTa Gould—Brighton, 5. Aust.: Amisakis diomedeae (Linst.),

Contracaecuim magnicollare Jnstn. and Mawson.

MAcRONECTES GIGANTEUS Gmel.— Brighton, S. Aust.: Anisakis diomedeae

(linst.), Auisakis sp., Paryseria macronectes n. sp., Seuratia shipleyi (Stoss.).

Port Adelaide, S. Aust.: Anisakis diomedeae, Anisakis sp., Phocascaris sp.

Paryseria macronectes n.sp., Seuratia shipleyi, Sellicks Beach, S. Aust-:

Seuratia shipleyi, Phocascaris sp., Anisakis diomedeae, Anisakis sp.

Dartion cAPENSE Linn.—Encounter Bay, 5. Aust.: Anisakis diomedeae, Anisakis

sp., Seuratia shipleyt.

Trans. Roy. Soc, S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

PACHYPTILA vitTata Gmel.—Sellicks Beach, S. Aust.: Seuratia shipleyi, Pary-

seria pachyptilae n. sp.

PreRODROMA LESSONI Garnot—Encounter Bay, 5. Aust.: Anisakis sp.

PELAGODROMA MARINA Lath.—Reevesby Island, S. Aust.: Seuratia marina,

ANISAKIS DIOMEDEAE (Linst.) Yorke and Maplestone

Immature females from Diomedea chrysostoma and D. melanophris (Sel-

licks Beach, S. Aust.); D. cauta (Brighton, S. Aust.) ; 2. exulans (Tasmanian

Seas); Macronectes giganteus (Brighton, Sellicks Beach, Encounter Bay and

Port Adelaide); and from Daption capense (Encounter Bay). The species is

characterised by the prominent toothed bilobed anterior projections on the lips,

the large labial papillae, the prominent cervical papillae lying behind the nerve

ring, the short conical tail, and also by the relative lengths of the oesophagus,

ventriculus and body. A more detailed account will appear in the report on the

parasitic nematodes collected by the British, Australian and New Zealand Ant-

arctic Research Expedition.

ANISAKIS sp. (immature)

From Diomedea exulans (New South Wales coast); D. melanophris

(Brighton, South Australia); D, chrysostema (Sellicks Beach); D. cauta

(Brighton) ; Macronectes giganteus (Brighton, Sellicks Beach, Port Adelaide) ;

Daption capense (Encounter Bay); and Pterodroma lessoni (Encounter Bay).

Larvae 15-20 mm. long, -4 mm. wide; with three low lips, well developed

larval tooth; oesophagus 2:7 mm. long, including ventriculus -48 mm, long,

oesophagus one-sixth body length; nerve ring at -25 mm, and cervical papillae at

-42 mm, from anterior end of body. Tail +1 mm. long, rounded, with small

pointed tip.

Some of these larvae were exsheathing; others which were rather narrower,

were still coiled; while others appeared to be older since the form of the lips was

more definite. In some cases the three stages occurred in the same host, and in

company with them were more mature worms identifiable as A, diomedeae. If

all these larvae belong to the latter species, then it appears that the parasites enter

the bird as fine coiled worms and that their main subsequent growth is in thickness,

CONTRACAECUM MAGNICOLLARE Johnston and Mawson

A male and two females whose general appearance and measurements agree

with those of C. magnicollare (originally described in 1941 from the noddy,

Anous stolidus, from the Great Barrier Reef) were taken from Diomedea cauta

from Brighton, South Australia.

Contracaecum pelagicum n. sp.

Fig. 1-3

From Diomedea melanophris (type host) and D. chlororhyncha, both from

Broken Bay, New South Wales (coll. Australian Museum, Sydney). ‘Those

from D. chlororhyncha are smaller than those from the type host.

Male 30-33 mm., females 35-38 mm. Head narrower than succeeding part

of body; distinct annulate collar. Each lip with marked rounded antero-lateral

projections, each projection bearing a distinct tooth, Interlabia bifid at tips in all

specimens, the bifurcation being as long as one-third the length of the interlabia

in some cases, and the amount of bifurcation not necessarily the same on all three

interlabia of one specimen; interlabia generally short, conical, sometimes tapering

markedly towards tip. Ocesophagus 1:10 to 1:13 of body length; oesophageal

appendix 1:3-3 and intestinal caecum 1:1:5 of oesophageal length.

Male—Spicules 1:6°5 of body length. Tail -18 mm. long, ending in point.

Six pairs postanal and numerous pairs preanal papillae, latter arranged in long-

tudinal row on each side.

female—Tail conical, -32 mm. long. Vulva at about one-third body length

from head, Eggs 40-50» by 70-80 u.

The species is distinguished from others of the genus by the presence of two

teeth on each lip. The shape of the tail and the number of caudal papillae in the

male differentiate it from C, Scofti (Leiper and Atkinson) from Diomedea

melanophris,

PHocascaris sp. larvae

Fig. 4

Several immature females were taken from Macronectes giganteus (Sellicks

Beach and Port Adelaide). Length 5 mm.; head 70, diameter; three lips, with

non-denticulate ridges; interlabia absent. Oesophagus -95 mm. long, appendix

‘5 mm., intestinal caecum -7 mm. Nerve ring °25 mm. from head end. Tail

conical, pomted, -14 mm. long.

Fig. 1-3, Contracaccum pelagicum: 1, dorsal; 2, lateral view of head; 3, male

tail, ventral. Fig. 4, Phocascaris sp., anterior end. Fig. 5-7, Tetrameres

diomedeae: 5, entire worm; 6, head; 7, female tail. Fig. 8-9, Seuratia shipleyi:

8, male tail; 9, tip of shorter spicule. Tig. 10-11, Paryseria diomedeae: 10,

anterior end; 11, male tail. Fig. 12-13, Paryseria macronectes, lateral and ventral

views of anterior end. Fig. 14, Paryseria pachyptilac, anterior end. Fig. 1, 2, 3,

and 8 to same scale; 6, 9, and 14; 10, 11, 12, and 13.

‘69

Tetrameres diomedeae n. sp

Fig. 5-7

One female from proventriculus of Diomedea chlororhyncha (Port Adelaide).

Length 3-2 mm., maximum breadth (under cover-slip) 1:8 mm., is in front of

mid-length. Anterior end tapering; head truncated with six small lips; buccal

capsule well chitinized, 20 4 external diameter, 12 internal diameter, 15 » long.

Nerve ring ‘12 mm. from anterior end. Vulva ‘15 mm, and anus *8 mm. in front

of tip of tail, Internal structure obscured, even after clearing in creosote.

The only species of Tetrameres known from an albatross is T. certa (Leidy

1886, syn. Filaria dubia Leidy 1856, nec Creplin 1846) from Diomedea exulans

from the South Atlantic. Leidy’s account is inadequate and, since our form is

much smaller, it is advisable to regard T. diomedeae as distinct.

SEURATIA SHIPLEYI (Stossich)

Fig. 8-9

From Diomedea exulans (New South Wales), D. chlororhyncha (Port

Adelaide), D. melanophris (Brighton, South Australia), Daption capense (En-

counter Bay), Macronectes giganteus (Brighton, Port Adelaide, Sellicks Beach)

and Pachyptila vittata (Sellicks Beach).

Our specimens agree generally with the descriptions given by Stossich (in

Shipley 1900) and by Seurat (1916). In those points in which these two investi-

gators differed, e.g., size of cervical papillae, proportions of the vestibule, and

form of the collar (differences which are evident in the figures given by these

authors), our material agrees with Seurat’s account, Seurat examined only

females, while Stossich had both sexes. A lateral view of the male tail in our

material agrees with that figured by Stossich, but in ventral view (which was not

illustrated by him) definite alae can be seen and there is an extra pair of papillae

near the tip of the tail. The terminal multicuspidate papilla does not show up

distinctly in ventral view, but, when seen in lateral view, it resembles that figured

by Stossich.

The spicules differ in shape and are very unequal, one being -9 mm. long,

cylindrical and tapering; the other :23 mm, long, stout, trough-like, with incurving

alae on the distal half and with the sides of the trough uniting near its tip to form

a prow-like structure, and with the extreme tip bearing a ball-like thickening, just

as figured by Stossich who did not indicate the length of the spicules. Eggs are

30% by 154.

SEURATIA MARINA Johnston and Mawson

This species was described by us recently (1941) from Pelagodroma marina

from Flinders Island, Bass Strait. We now record it from the same host species

from Reevesby Island, Spencer Gulf, South Australia.

Paryseria diomedeae n. sp.

Fig. 10-11

Females from Diomedea exulans (type host) from Port Jackson, New South

Wales; a complete male from D. melanephris and a damaged male from

D. chrysostoma, both from Sellicks Beach, South Australia.

Female—11-12 mm. long; anterior end rounded, with two pointed lips, each

with two papillae. Denticulate collar of two lateral lobes each with about nine or

ten spines. Mouth leading to vestibule -14 mm. long, 10, diameter. Anterior

part of oesophagus '1 mm. long, constricted where nerve ring surrounds it *2 mm.

from head; posterior part 3 mm. long. Cervical papillae tridentate, with middle

tooth of each shorter than the other two. Tail -16 mm, long, tapering to rounded

tip, Vulva 7 mm. from head, Eggs thick-shelled, 40-43 » by 20-21 p.

Male (from D. melanophris)—7-7 mm. long. Anterior end agreeing generally

with that of female, Vestibule -11 mm. long; anterior part of oesophagus -8 mm.

long, termination of posterior part not seen. Spicules 1-2 mm. and :09 mm, long.

‘ail -17 mm, long with wide caudal alae +35 mm, long. Four pairs precloacal and

five pairs postcloacal pedunculate papillae; counting from the most anterior of

these, the second, fourth, fifth and seventh have very long peduncles which are

twisted in such a way that, in ventral view, the tip appears above its origin from

the hypodermis.

The species differs from the genotype, P. adeliae Johnston 1937, in the shape

and position of the cervical papillae, the number of spines on the collar, and the

size of the body.

Paryseria macronectes n. sp.

Fig. 12-13

From ‘Macronectes giganteus (type host) from Brighton, South Australia,

and Diomedea chrysostoima from Sellicks Beach, South Australia. Females only

present; 12-15-5 mm. Jong. Collar with about 18-20 serrations, Cervical papillae

*23 mm. from anterior end, tridentate with the three cusps of approximately equal

length. Nerve ring 25 mm. from anterior end. Vestibule :17--18 mm. long, 10

wide; anterior part of oesophagus *62-'7 mm. long, posterior part about 2 mm.

Vulva 7-9-8-1 mm. from head. Tail -2 mm. long, blunt-tipped. Eggs 40 » by 20 p..

The species differs from P, diomedeae in the length of the vestibule and in

the number of serrations on the collar.

Paryseria pachyptilae n. sp.

Fig. 14

One immature female was taken from Pachyptila vittata from Sellicks Beach,

south Australia. The number of spines in the collar, and the position of the

cervical papillae in relation to the posterior end of the vestibule, do not agree

with any of the three known species of the genus, so, in spite of the inadequacy

of the description we have erected a new species:

Length 10°5 mm. Lips cach with an anterior projection and two papillae.

Collar with about 13 to 15 large serrations on each side. Cervical papillae 90 »

from anterior end, each with three equal teeth. Vestibule +11 mm. long, with an

S-shaped bend about its mid-length (this is not regarded as likely to be typical

of the species). Oesophagus 1 mm, long, not obviously divided into two parts,

but widening distinctly posteriorly. Nerve ring surrounding anterior end of

oesophagus. Tail rounded, 904 long. Reproductive organs immature and vulva

not seen.

Jounston, T. H. 1912 Emu, Melbourne, 12, 105-112

Jounston, T. Hl. 1937 Parasitic Nematoda. Rep. Austr. Antarct. Exp. Ser.

C., 10, (5), 31 pp.

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1941 Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,

65, 110-115

Jounsron, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1941a Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,

65, 254-262

Lerpy, J. 1856 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Philad., 8, 42-58

Linsrow, O. 1888 Report on the Entozoa. Challenger Reports, Zool., 23, 18 pp.

seuraT, L.G. 1916 C. R. Soc. Biol., Paris, 79, 785

Snipcey, A. E. 1900 In Willey’s Zoological Results, 5, 531-568

SOME AVIAN NEMATODES FROM TAILEM BEND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and PATRICIA M. MAWSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

All of the material described below was collected at Tailem Bend, South Australia. Many of the

parasites taken had been recorded previously, and only new hosts or species are listed below. The

hosts were collected by Messrs. G. and F. Jaensch and L. Ellis, to whom we are indebted for help.

The work was made possible by the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

New records and species are as follows:

SOME AVIAN NEMATODES FROM TAILEM BEND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. Harvey Jounston and Patricia M. Mawson, University of Adelaide

[Read 11 June 1942]

All of the material described below was collected at Tailem Bend, South

Australia. Many of the parasites taken had been recorded previously, and only

new hosts or species are listed below, The hosts were collected by Messrs. G, and

F. Jaensch and L. Ellis, to whom we are indebted for help. The work was made

possible by the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

New records and species are as follows:

QUERQUEDULA GIpBERIFRONS Muller—Echinuria querquedulae nu. sp, Eponu-

diostomum uncinatum (Lundahl), Sireftecara sp.

MrcrocaRBo MELANOLEUCUS Vieill—Streptocara recta (Linst.), Synhimantus

sp.

CHLIDONIAS LEUCOPAREIA Temin.—Streptocara recta (Linst.).

PELECANUS CONSPICILLATUS Temm.—Teframeres pelecant un. sp., Phocascaris

sp.

LEIPOA OCELLATA Gould—Leipoanema ellisi n. g., n. sp.

Echinuria querquedulae n. sp.

Fig. 1

From the grey teal, Querquedula gibberifrons. The material consists only of

a female 4-2 mm. long; it is, however, mature, as it is distended with eggs ready

for deposition, Jips very shallow, each with two papillae and a large anterior

projection. Cordons ‘41 mm. long, not recurrent, each apparently formed of a

double row of minute plates. Cervical papillae not seen. Four rows of hooks on

body, beginning at level of posterior end of vestibule and extending to level of

anus; in region of cordons all four rows are on dorsal surface of body. Excretory

pore *36 mm. from head. Vestibule 100 long; its anterior 30 » cup-shaped,

18 » wide; posterior 70» cylindrical, 11 wide. Anterior part of oesophagus

-4 mm. long, posterior part 1:36 mm. Tail tapering, 444 long. Vulva *36 mm.

from posterior end, eggs 20-21 » by 32-33 y, thick-shelled, containing embryos.

The specimen in general features closely resembles E. uncinata (Rud.) and

E. jugadornata Soloviey which, as Cram points out, is almost identical with

F. uncinata, The difference of size of body and the larger hooks in.our specimen,

combined with the difference in locality, suggest that we are dealing with a

new species.

SYNHIMANTUS sp.

Tig. 2

From Microcarbo melanoleucus, One female obtained, 7:2 mm, long. Lips

broken (reconstructed in fig.). Cordons narrow, extending 12 mm. from head,

recurrent, anastomosing +7 mm. from head. Cervical papillae very large, tri-

cuspid, *27 mm. from head. Vestibule +2 mm. long, about 10 wide. Tail taper-

ing, ‘14 mm. long. Vulva 3 mm. from posterior end. Eggs 36 by 21 p.

The proportions of the cordon and vestibule lengths, and the position and

size of the cervical papillae do not agree with those of any species of Synhimantus

of which we have a description.

STREPTOCARA RECTA (Linstow)

A male of this species was taken from a marsh tern, Chlidonias leucopareia,

and a female from Microcarbo melanoleucus, They agree with the description

given by Yamaguti 1935.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

STREPTOCARA sp,

Fig. 3

A single female belonging to Streptocura was taken from Querquedula

gibberifrons. Because of the paucity of the material and of the fact that only a

distorted face view of the anterior end was obtainable, we have not attempted to

classify it. The number of serrations in the collar and the irregular shape of the

cervical papillae distinguish it from S. recta. It agrees in these characters with

S. crassicauda (Creplin).

Length 7 mm.; cervical papillae about 50» from anterior end, each with five

to six irregular teeth. Vestibule about 15 » long, 114 wide; anterior oesophagus

*36 mm.; posterior 1-1 mm.; nerve ring -1 mm. from head. Anus almost terminal,

posterior end of body rounded; vulva not observed; eggs 19m by 32 p.

Tetrameres pelecani n. sp.

Fig. 4-5

One male found, a fine coiled worm 6 mm.

long. Anterior end truncated, with six small lips, two of them (either laterals or

dorsal and ventral) narrower than the others. No papillae seen. Buccal capsule

strongly chitinized, 7 » wide internally, walls about 1-5» thick, 15» long, resting

on chitinized ring at anterior end of oesophagus. Oe¢sophagus 1-5 mm. long, not

divided into anterior and posterior parts, Tail -18 mm. long, tapering to blunt

From Pelecanus conspicillatus.

sng a

sre

ate

y ve

: ss

on ae :

vie 33

vig

y Ve a

vya

vrais

s8 «88

te §

y & ‘Ze 2

23 52,

Ss 2a

/ ss bs

Zs =

33 Ee]

iy %

cs 3

1 Bap, all

Fig. 1, Echinuria querquedulae, anterior end. Fig. 2, Synhimentus sp., anterior end.

Fig. 3, Streptocara sp., head. Fig. 4-5, Tetrameres pelecani: 4, head: 5, male tail.

Fig. 6-8, Leipoanema ellisi: 6, head; 7, head, face view; 8, male tail. Fig. 1 and

2 to same scale; fig. 5 and 6.

tip. No preanal papillae; three pairs small postanal, distributed as in fig. 5.

Cloaca with prominent lips. Spicules needle-shaped but blunt-tipped, 1-5 mm.

and °13 mm. in length respectively.

The assignment of the specimen to Tetrameres ig made with some doubt.

The characters of the anterior end suggest Tetrameres, but the absence of spines

on the body is an unusual, though not a unique, feature of the genus. In its small

size and the number of caudal papillae in the male, it differs from T. paradoxa

(in which the presence of body spines is uncertain) and from T. gynaecophila

(Molin) in which the male is without spines.

EpoMIDIOSTOMUM UNCINATUM (Lundahl)

One male 4 mm. long, one female 8-2 mm. long, and several pieces were taken

from Querquedula gibberifrons. The worms are smaller than any previously

recorded for the species, but the various parts bear the same relations to one

another.

Leipoanema ellisi n.g., n. sp.

Fig. 6-8

From a mallee hen, Leipoa ocellata. Males about 12-15 mm. long; females

25-30 mm. Head with three lips, joined to each other internally near their anterior

margins to surround natrow mouth opening, their posterior borders sharply out-

lined by a cuticular groove separating the “head” from the rest of the body. Each

lip with two papillae and ending in small projecting part, seen only in face view.

Buccal capsule wider at base than at mouth opening, -1 mm. long, with three

rounded teeth at its base. Ocesophagus 1-5 mm. long in male, 1°9-1:7 mm. in

female, including bulb +24 mm. long in male, and -3 mm. in female. Excretory

pore ‘8 mm. from anterior end in female; nerve ring *28 mm. in male.

Male—Caudal alae very narrow. Middle of elongate sucker 1:2 mm., and

cloaca +35 mm. from rounded posterior end. Caudal papillae in three groups, a

pair at each end of sucker, five pairs around cloaca (three of which are preanal

and two postanal), and four pairs near tip of tail, Spicules equal, 2°16 mm.

long; gubernaculum trough-shaped, '15 mm, long.

Female—Tail long, tapering, 1-4 mm, Vulva just anterior to mid-body ;

eggs thick-shelled, sub-globular, about 63 » in diameter.

The characters of the oesophagus and male tail suggest relationship with the

Subulurinae, and especially with Subulura and Aulonocephalus; the presence of

three such deeply demarcated lips, however, distinguishes it from these and all

other genera of the Subulurinae. A new genus is therefore proposed, with the

following characters:

Subulurinae—Three lips separated from each other and from the rest of the

body by deep cuticular grooves, two papillae on each lip; buccal cavity with three

teeth at its base; oesophageal bulb present. Male—Preanal sucker and guber-

naculum present, caudal alae very narrow ; spicules equal; caudal papillae present.

Female—Vulva in front of mid-body; eggs thick-shelled, sub-globular. Type,

Leipoanema ellisi n.sp.

PHOCASCARIS spp.

Several very minute worms from Pelecanus conspicillatus are referable to the

genus Phocascaris, since they possess an intestinal and an oesophageal appendix

and lack interlabia. Owing to the size of the worms the presence or abseice of

teeth on the lips cannot be determined. The oesophagus is *6 mm, long, the

intestinal caecum °36 mm., the oesophageal appendix +3 mm., and the tail 72 p.

No reproductive organs are distinguishable. In spite of the size of the worm, the

lips are apparently completely developed.

A NEW APTEROUS DIPTERON (SCATOPSIDAE)

FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. WOMERSLEY, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

Scatopse aptera n. sp.

Description-Male: Colour entirely dark black. Length to 1-2mm. Wings absent. Halteres represented

by mere vestiges. Eyes holoptic with comparatively few facets, bare. Antennae with 10 segments,

segments I, II and X longer than wide, all segments with fine pubescence and whorls of fairly long

hairs. Palpi 1-segmented, about two and a half times as long as wide. Legs moderately long, strong

and fairly stout, anterior femora rather broader than rest; tibiae without apical spines; claws two,

simple, with pad-like empodium; legs with fine pubescence and short strong spine-like setae, tarsi 4-

segmented. Scutellum present, but small and apparently somewhat hidden under the first abdominal

segment. Abdomen ventorally and ventro-laterally longitudinally striated, as in other species of

Scatopse and also Thripomorpha. The clothing of the thorax and abdomen consists of fine

pubescence and short, strong spine-like setae.

A NEW APTEROUS DIPTERON (SCATOPSIDAE)

FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. Womerstey, A.L.S., F.R.E.S., South Australian Museum

[Read 11 June 1942]

Scatopse aptera n. sp.

Fig.

Description—Male: Colour entirely dark black. Length to 1-2 mm. Wings

absent. Halteres represented by mere vestiges. Eyes holoptic with comparatively

few facets, bare. Antennae with 10 segments, segments I, II] and X longer than

wide, all segments with fine pubescence and whorls of fairly long hairs, Palpi

l-segmented, about two and a half times as long as wide. Jegs moderately long,

strong and fairly stout, anterior femora rather broader than rest; tibiae without

apical spines; claws two, simple, with pad-like empodium; legs with fine pubescence

and short strong spine-like setae, tarsi 4-segmented. Scutellum present, but

small and apparently somewhat hidden under the first abdominal segment.

Abdomen ventrally and ventro-laterally longitudinally striated, as in other

species of Scatopse and also Thripomorpha. The clothing of the thorax and

abdomen consists of fine pubescence and short, strong spine-like setae.

Remarks—In general appearance this insect resembles the curious thrips-

like Thripomorpha paludicola described by Enderlein in 1904 from Germany.

Enderlein’s genus and species, however, has a 12-segmented antenna, a more

pronounced scutellum and specialised structure of the tarsi.

Locality — Two specimens found in the debris of a decayed Yacca

(Xanthorrhoea) stump, Adelaide, 10 April 1939, with the aid of the Berlese

funnel by R. V. Southcott.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

SOME AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER GASTEROPODA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, South Australian Museum

Summary

Because of their economic importance as hosts of various trematodes parasitic in man and animals,

it is extremely necessary that the systematics of the Freshwater Mollusca should be thoroughly

understood.

SOME AUSTRALIAN FRESHWATER GASTEROPODA

By Bernarp C. Cotton, South Australian Museum

[Read 11 June 1942]

Because of their economic importance as hosts of various trematodes para-

sitic in man and animals, it is extremely necessary that the systematics of the

Freshwater Mollusca should be thoroughly understood.

In New South Wales intensive research has been undertaken on the sheep

liver-fluke, and out of about twenty species of freshwater snails recorded from

that district one, Limnaea bragiert Smith, was found to be the host carrier of the

fluke. Similar investigations on this and other trematode worms have been carried

out in South Australia by Professor T. Harvey Johnston, with consequent interest-

ing and important discoveries. With the possible introduction of many tropical

diseases with which trematode worms are associated such as Hetcrophyes

heterophyes, Metagonimus yokogawi, Paragonimus ringeri, Schistosoma mansoni,

japonica and bovis into Australia by the influx of internees, refugees, prisoners

of war, etc., it is of immediate importance that our freshwater fauna be thoroughly

investigated so that a strict watch may be kept to avoid the possibility of these

trematodes selecting a local host.

In preparing this preliminary paper, South Australian and West Australian

species were particularly studied and records for Kangaroo Island listed. Roughly

the South Australian Area may be subdivided into regions each having its own

assemblage of freshwater life, though these regions are not very well marked.

The regions are:

(a) The Lower Murray.

(b) The creeks and rivers of the Adelaide Hills.

(d) The Flinders Range and Far North of South Australia,

(e) The South-East with its odd Victorian species.

In the few previous lists which have been published numerous duplications

of names have been made and preoccupied names used, while some old and valid

names have been entirely overlooked. Localities have also been confused.

Genus AMERIANNA Strand 1928

Ameria Adams, 1861, P.Z. Soc., Lond., 143, preoc.; nec Ameria Walker 1854,

Lep. Insects, Brit. Mus., 2, 554.

Amerianna Strand 1928, Arch. Naturgesch., 92, A. 8; 1926, 63.

Adams’ generic description reads: “Shell with the whorls flattened, and

angulated or carinated at the posterior part; spire short, depressed.” The first

‘ species following this description is Physa (Ameria) carinata Adams, and the

description of this is: “Shell subovate, thin, pale yellowish-brown; spire very

short, the apex flat; whorls three, flattened and strongly carinated posteriorly ;

aperture subovate, columellar plait moderate. Long, 54 in.; diam., 34 in. Habitat

Boyne River, Australia.”

The animal of Amerianna has not the produced and reflected mantle lobes

of Physa and the radula resembles that of Planorbis rather than Limnaea, and

shows some affinity to that of the African genus [sidora.

Under this genus Adams lists the following species:

A. truncata Adams 1861, from the Calliope River, South Queensland.

A. obesa Adams 1861, from the Fitzroy River, North Queensland,

A, cumingit Adams 1861, from Port Essington, Northern Australia,

A. moesta Adams 1861, from New Zealand.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

The species most closely related to this group in South Australia is A. aliciac

Reeve 1862, from the Lower River Murray.

Some fifty species of “Physa” have been described from Australia, As they

have nothing whatever to do with Physa it is proposed to place them all under

the genus Amertanna, No doubt this will be split up by future workers, but until

more animals have been examined splitting seems inadvisable. he typically

carinate shell appears so different from the ordinary tenuistriata type with its

taller spire and rounded whorls that a division seems necessary. Considering the

variability in carination and length of spire, however, the species had better all

remain in Amerianna until further information is forth-coming.

AMERIANNA ALICIAE (Reeve 1862)

Physa aliciae Reeve 1862, P.Z. Lond., 106, text fig.; cingulata Clessin 1886,

Syst. Conch. Cab., 17, 364, pl. li, fig. 8 (locality, South Australia). Type

locality, Lower Murray.

Distribution—General in South Australia; Rivers Para, Torrens and Onka-

paringa ; creeks in the Mount Lofty Ranges; Lake Alexandrina and Lake Bonney

near Barmera, and in water towers and pipes around Adelaide.

There is considerable variation in the strength of the keeling and length of

spire in different specimens.

AMERIANNA SUBUNDATA (Sowerby 1873)

Physa subundata Sowerby 1873, Conch Icon., 19, pl. viii, fig. 61; pinguis

Sowerby 1873, Conch, Icon., 19, pl. xii, fig. 93, loc. South Australia;

bullata Sowerby 1873, Conch. Icon., 19, pl. xii, fig. 97, loc. South Aus-

tralia.

Type Locality for subundata is “St. Margaret’s, South Australia.”

Distribution—River Torrens; Rocky River, Kangaroo Island.

Sowerby 1873 gives the following description: ‘Shell olive-brown, ventri-

cose, concentrically slightly undulated; spire rather short, apex acuminated,

penultimate whorl broad, rather angular, last whorl large, swelled near the suture,

roundly angular; aperture large, striped with chestnut within near the border;

columella fold rather thick, tortuous.”

According to Cockburn, ‘Nomenclature of South Australia,” revised edition

(manuscript), Saint Margaret’s, is a subdivision of the Port Adelaide district.

Although this species may yet prove to be an extreme variant of the tenui-

striata complex, it can be picked out readily from River Torrens specimens by the

solidity of the shell, faint almost obsolete spiral striae and the odd yellow and

brown axial colour bands,

Physa bullata Sowerby 1873, type locality South Australia, is a juvenile

specimien, quite typical of the species in general shape.

AMERIANNA TENUISTRIATA (Sowerby 1873)

Physa tenuisiriata Sowerby 1873, Conch. Icon., 19, pl. x, fig. 85; texluratus

Sowerby 1873, Conch. Icon. 19, pl., xii, fig. 95, South Australia; smithi

Clessin, 1886,. Syst. Conch. Cab., 17, 294, pl. xlii, fig. 2, 3, River Murray;

conica Clessin, 1886, Syst. Conch. Cab., 17, 360, pl. li, fig: 3, South Aus-

tralia; waterhousei Clessin, 1886, Syst. Conch. Cab., 17, 361, pl. li, fig. 6,

South Australia.

Ameria tenuistriata Gabriel, 1939, Mem. Nat. Mus. Melb., No. 11, 111, pl. i,

fig. xu, Victoria.

Type Locality for Physa tenuistriata is the River Torrens, South Australia.

Distribution—General and common in South Australian rivers, creeks,

swamps and reservoirs.

This species, like many other of the genus, is very variable, and consequently

many names have been given to it. Some of these synonyms have not previously

been listed by Australian authors. Gabriel, 1939, recorded five Victorian varieties

under a trinominal nomenclature, but this seems inadvisable as the ‘‘subspecies”

thus named are probably only iocal variants.

Physa texturata Sowerby 1873, has strong axial and slightly less strong spiral

striae and the shell is thick, sculpture coarse.

Physa smithi Clessin, 1886, is a thin-shelled faintly striate variant.

Physa conica Clessin, 1886, is a very narrow species according to the figure

and is unlike any Australian shell known. It is possible that there has been some

error in type locality. It is, however, described as “minute striata’ and may be

an inaccurately figured form of P. tenutstriata,

Physa waterhousei Clessin, 1886, is a direct synonym of P. tendistriata

Sowerby, the figure by Clessin being typical.

AMERIANNA SUBACUTA Cotton and Beasley 1941

Amerianna subacuta Cotton and Beasley, 1941, S. Aust. Nat., 21, No. 1, 17.

Holotype from River Torrens at Marden, South Australia, Reg. No. D. 19081,

South Australian Museum.

Distribution—Creeks running from the Mount Lofty Ranges; Adelaide

Plains,

This species was in the South Australian Museum collection under the name

Physa pyramidatus Sowerby. Sowerby’s species was described from “Australia,”

but has since been recognised as the common Victorian and North Tasmanian

species, which is considerably larger and more elongate than any South Australian

species.

AMERIANNA LINCOLNENSIS (Clessin 1886)

Physa lincolnensis Clessin 1886, Syst. Conch. Cab., 17, 363.

Type Locality—Port Lincoln, South Australia,

Distribution—Eyre Peninsula and Kangaroo Island.

This long-spired, smooth species appears different from other species recorded

from South Australia. It does not show the decussate sculpture of tenuistriata

and its allies and is a much more solid shell than its nearest relative subacuta.

Until further material is available to prove or disprove the validity of the species

it is here listed as distinct.

Amerianna gabrieli non. nov.

Physa (Ameria) truncata Adams 1861, P.Z. Soc., 143; nec Physa truncata

Bourguignat 1856, Amern, Malac., 1, 170, pl. xxi, fig. 5-7,

Type Locality—Calliope River, South ‘Oxeenslina

Distribution—Rivers of South Queensland.

The name frumcata introduced by Adams for this South Queensland species

with the truncate spire is pre-occupied by truncata Pourguignat, an entirely

different North African species. The above name, after the noted Victorian

conchologist, C. J. Gabriel, is therefore introduced.

The Australian species of Amerianna, with type localities, listed accor ding to

the various river systems are as follows:

(1) The Darling, Murrumbidgee, Murray and their tributaries and the river

captures of South-East Queensland.

Amerianna novaehollandiae Blainville 1925, Macquarie River, New South

Wales, originally described from “New Holland”; lessont Smith 1882, Australia

= novaehollandiae Lesson 1830, New Holiand; aliciae Reeve 1862, Lower Mur-

ray, South Australia = cingulata Clessin 1886, Lower Murray, South Australia;

pectorosa Conrad 1866, Bogan River, New South Wales; subundata Sowerby

1873, Adelaide Plains, South Australia = pinguis Sowerby 1873, South Australia

= bullata Sowerby 1873, South Australia; ausiraliana Conrad 1850, Bogan River,

New South Wales; tenutstriata Sowerby 1873, River Torrens, South Australia =

teviuralus Sowerby 1873, South Australia = smithi Clessin 1886, South Aus-

tralia = conica Clessin 1886, South Australia = waterhousei Clessin 1886, South

Australia = puncturata Sowerby 1874, South Australia; sabacuta Cotton and

Beasley 1941, River Torrens, South Australia; confluens Hedley 1917 Echuca,

Victoria.

(2) Rivers of Eastern New South Wales, also Victoria and Northern Tasmania.

Amerianna gibbosa Gould 1847, “New South Wales,” Cooks River, near

Sydney, coastal New South Wales = adamsiana Canefri 1873, Australia = grayi

Smith 1883, New Holland = sovachollandiae Gray 1834, New Holland = nevae-

hollandiae Sowerby 1873, New Holland; marginata Kuster 1844, “New Holland”

probably coastal New South Wales = novaehollandiae Anton 1938, New Holland

==ludwigii Kuster 1844, New Holland; acutispira Tryon 1886 “Australia probably

Victoria; arraensis Tenison Woods, Upper Yarra, Victoria; etheridgii Simith

1882 Yan Ycan Reservoir, Victoria, may be a synonym of acutispira; pyramidata

Sowerby 1873, ‘Australia” probably Flinders Island, Bass Strait, also found in

Victoria and Northern Tasmania; aciculata Sowerby 1873, “New South Wales”

probably Coastal New South Wales; fusiformis Nelson and Taylor 1879, Rich-

mond River, New South Wales; kershawi Tenison Woods 1878, Upper Yarra,

Victoria ;aperta Sowerby 1873, Hamilton, Northern Tasmania; teasmanica Tenison

Woods 1875, Great Lake, Central Tasmania; fasmmanicola Venison Woods 1875,

Mount Mary, central east coast Tasmania; ehurnca Sowerby 1874, near Launces-

ton, North Tasmania — attenuata Sowerby 1874, Lake Dulverton, North Tas-

mania, closely allied to pyramidata; ciliata Tenison Woods 1875, Lake Dulverton,

North Tasmania; vandtemenensis Sowerby 1873, Northern Tasmania; kreftii

Clessin 1886, Calverts Creek, New South Wales.

(3) Coastal Rivers of South Queensland and North New South Wales from

Bundaberg to Grafton.

Amerianna producta Smith 1882, Clarence River, Grafton, New South

Wales; carinata Adams 1861, Boyne River, Queensland; gabrieli Cotton 1942,

Calliope River, Southern Queensland = truncata Adams 1861, preoc.; brisbanicus

Nelson and Taylor 1879, Brisbane, River Brisbane, Queensland; duplicate

Sowerby 1873, Wide Bay, Queensland; fortvosa Clessing 1886, “Urara River,

undoubtedly Orara River, tributary of the Clarence River, Northern New South

Wales; multtspirata Clessin 1886, “Urara River,” t.2., Orara River, Northern

New South Wales.

(4) Coastal Rivers of Queensland, from Bundaberg northwards.

Amerianna obesa Adams 1861, Fitzroy River, Queensland; beddoinei Nelson

and Taylor 1879, Townsville, Queensland; gracilenta Smith 1882, Endeavour

Queensland, gueenslandica Smith 1882, Dawson River, Queensland.

(5) Coastal Rivers of the Northern Territory from Port Essington to the Queens-

land Border.

Amerianna cumingi Adams 1861, Port Essington, north Western Australia;

reevei Adams and Angas 1863, Arnheim Land, Northern Australia; bonushenri-

cus Adams and Angas 1863, Arnheim Land, Northern Australia; badia Adams

and Angas 1863, a tributary of the Adelaide River, Arnheim Land, Northern Aus-

tralia; olivacea Adams and Angas 1863, Arnheim Land, Northern Australia;

conncinna Adams and Angas, Arnheim Land, Northern Australia,

(6) The Coastal Rivers of Middle Western Australia from Port Essington south-

wards to Geraldton.

Amerianna exarata Smith 1882, Depuch Island, North Western Australia;

cumingi Adams 1861, Port Essington, North Western Australia.

Specimens seem to indicate that these may probably extend southwards. Other-

wise this region has not been investigated as far as the freshwater shells are

concerned.

(7) The Coastal Rivers of South Western Australia, from Geraldton in the north

to the western end of the Great Australian Bight.

Amerianna georgiana Quoy et Gaimard 1832, King George Sound, Western

Australia; australis Kuster 1844, Western Australia — elongata Menke 1843

(preoc. Say 1821), South Western Australia; breviculmen Smith 1882, King

George Sound, Western Australia; qguoyi Smith 1882, King George Sound,

Western Australia; tenuilirata Smith 1882, Swan River, Western Australia;

decorata Thiele 1930, Brancaster, Upper Blackwood District, near Cape Leeuwin,

South Western Australia.

(8) The Rivers and Lakes of Central Australia westward of the Darling, and

embracing the Coastal Area of the Great Australian Bight.

Amerianna lincolnensis Clessin 1886, Port Lincoln, Eyre Peninsula, South

Australia,

The genus Isidorella which is widely spread in this area scems to take the

place of Amerianna so common elsewhere, though species of Amerianna occur

there and will be described in a later paper.

(9) The Rivers of Southern Tasmania.

Amerianna nitida Sowerby 1873, South-east Tasmania; mainillata Sowerby

1873, Bruni Island, South Tasmania; huonensis Tenison Woods 1875, Huon

River, South Tasmania = legrandi Tenison Woods, Richmond, South Tasmania

== huonicola Tenison Woods 1875, Upper Huon River, South Tasmania;

tasmanicola Tenison Woods 1875, Mount Murray, east coast Tasmania; bruniensis

Sowerby 1874, Bruni Island, South Tasmania.

Genus IsrporELLA Tate 1896

Isidorella Tate 1896, Horn Exped., 1, 212.

Genotype Physa newcombi Adams and Angas.

The characters of this genus may; be summarised as follows: Shell oval, last

whorl much inflated, peritreme continuous, adnate to the parietal wall and form-

ing a false umbilicus; columella without a fold; periostracum horny, raised into

spiral fringes of hairs and into imbricating folds at the suture; spiral rows of hairs

superimposed on the spiral striae of the test. Animal with tentacles slender, sud-

denly dilated at the base of the upper outer side, the eyes on the inner base of the

tentacles, the mantle not exsert, with a plain margin; dentition related to Planorbis.

The following Australian species belong to this genus: snewcombi

Adams and Angas, 1863, from a pond near Mount Margaret, Central Australia =

physopsis Cooks, 1887, “Australia” = contortula Clessin, 1886, “Australia”; sub-

inflata Sowerby, 1873, South Australia; rubida Cotton and Godfrey, Yabmana,

Franklin Harbour, Eyre Peninsula, South Australia; brazieri Smith 1882, Ash-

field, near Sydney, New South Wales; pallida Smith 1882, Rooty Hill, near Chats-

worth, New South Wales; major Smith 1882, Burnett River, Queensland;

ferruginea Adams and Angas, 1863, from a tributary of the Adelaide River, Arn-

heim Land, North Australia; hainesii Tyron, 1886, Australia—probably Victoria;

pilosa Tenison Woods, 1878, Melbourne, Victoria = crebreciliata Tenison Woods,

Caulfield, Victoria = hirsuta Tenison Woods MSS., Tasmania; egregia Preston,

North Western Australia.

IsiDORELLA NEWCOMBI (Adams and Angas 1863)

Physa newcombi Adams and Angas 1863, P.Z. Soc., 1863, 416.

Type Locality—Pond near Mount Margaret, Central Australia.

Distributtion—Central Australia Fifteen Mile Creek, River Finke country,

Storm Creek, Alice Springs.

IsIDORELLA SUBINFLATA (Sowerby 1874)

Physa inflata Adams and Angas, 1864, P.Z. Soc., 39, (pre-occupied) ; nec

inflata Lea, 1941, P. Am. Phil. Soc., 11, No. 17, 32; nec fontinalis inflata

Mogquin-Tandon, 1855, Hist. Nat. Moll., 11, 451, pl. xxkii, fig. 13; sub-

inflata Sowerby 1874, Conch. Icon., pl. i, fig. 4.

Isidora newcombi hedleyi Clench, 1926, J. Conch., 18, No. 1, 12.

Type Locality—South Australia (subinflata), Wakefield River, South Aus-

tralia (inflata).

Distribution—River Torrens, Wakefield River, River Para, River Angas,

Mount Pleasant, Penola, Tatiara Creek, Wirrabara; also Rocky River, Kangaroo

Island.

IsIDORELLA RUBIDA Cotton and Godfrey 1932

Isidorella rubida Cotton and Godfrey 1932, S. Aust. Nat., 13, 160, pl. ii, fig. 7.

Type Locality—Yabmana, Franklin Harbour, Eyre Peninsula, South Aus-

tralia.

Distribution—Eyre Peninsula; Kangaroo Island.

Shell ovate-globose, solid, dark reddish-brown in life; aperture violet within,

margin of columella and outer lip white; colour frequently faded in dead shells,

Animal carmine coloured. Height 13 mm., diameter 10°5 mm. The species is

best described as intermediate in shape between subinflata and newcombi. The

colour of the animal and shell is distinctive and quite different from either species.

Genus Austropeplea gen. nov.

Genotype Limmaea papyracea Tate 1889, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 3, 103,

pl. iv, fig. 5= Lymnaea aruntalis Cotton and Godfrey, 1938, Gastr.

S. Aust., 36.

Shell ovate, thin, shining, axially wrinkled, spire short, whorls rounded at

the sutures, last whorl ovate-oblong, anteriorly expanded; outer lip sinuously

produced about the middle; columella fold slender, slightly tortuous; inner lip

widely and thinly spread. Animal with mantle lobes entirely covering the shell and

foot and so voluminous that it cannot be wholly withdrawn into the wide-mouthed

shell.

This species has been placed in Limnaea, genotype stagnalis with which there

ig no similarity; in Myras, genotype glutinusa to which the shell bears little, re-

semblance; also in Amphipeplea which is a synonym of Myxas with the same geno-

type; all these are European genera,

AUSTROPEPLEA ARUNTALTS (Cotton and Godfrey 1938)

Lymnaea aruntalis Cotton and Godfrey 1938, Gastr. 5. Aust., 36; Limnaea

papyracea Tate, 1880, Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust., 3, 103, pl. iv, fig. 5,

preoc.; nec Limnaea papyracea Spix, 1827, Test, Bras., 17, pl. x, fig. 5.

Type Localtty—Bed of dried up marsh near Penola, South Australia.

Distribution—River Torrens; Kangaroo Island at Discovery Flat.

The species described by Spix from Brazil is quite distinct from the South

Australian species. Related species are:

Austropeplea huonensis Tenison Woods, 1875, from the Huon River, South

Tasmania. A. launcestonensis Tenison Woods, 1875, from a creek near Laun-

ceston, North Tasmania.

Bythinella pattisoni sp. nov.

Fig. 1

Holotype, River Torrens, at Paradise Park, March 1942, Reg. No. D. 14095,

South Australian Museum. Height, 5 mm., width 3 mm.

Distribution—Common in rivers, crecks, water towers, pipes and reservoirs

in South Australia. River Murray at Tailem Bend, Lake Alexandrina, upper

reaches of the Port River, Franklin Harbour, Eyre Peninsula, Kangaroo Island

at Raining Creek, Stunsail Boom River and Upper Cygnet River, Onkaparinga at

Port Noarlunga, Hallett’s Cove, Glenelg and Meadows.

Shell smail, ovately conical, dark horn colour, frequently carrying an earthy’

deposit; whorls six, rounded, slightly bulbous, smooth, separating suture deep;

aperture pinkish white, outer and inner. lip slightly thickened and well defined;

base imperforate; operculum horny but slightly calcareous, paucispiral, ear-

shaped, nucleus towards the base and columella margin. The species is found in

hundreds on the underside of small smooth stones in pools left in the partly dried

up bed of the River Torrens. Numerous small transparent capsules about one-

quarter by one-sixteenth of an inch, in the same position as the shells, are pro-

bably the egg capsules of the species. The Waterworks Department has frequently

forwarded this shell in quantities to the Museum, taken from various pipes and

meters.

Some of the records are as follows: Prospect, at Halstead Street, blocking

water meter. Kintore Avenue, City, Teachers’ Training College, from water pipe.

Marryatville, blocking water meter. Burnside, Portrush Road, blocking water

meter. Toorak, Grant Avenue, residence of W. A. Holden, blocking water meter,

situated at fifteen feet from a 3-inch water main. In the last were also juvenile

specimens of Amerianna aliciae Reeve. F

BYTHINELLA BUCCINOLDES (Quoy et Gaimard 1835)

Paludina buccinoides Quoy et Gaimard 1835, Zool. Astrolabe, 3, 175, pl. lviii,

fig. 13, 14.

Bythinia victoriae Tenison Woods, 1878, P. Roy. Soc. Vict., 14, 65.

Type Locality—Western Port, Victoria (buccinoides), Geelong (victoriae).

Distribution—Victoria, Northern Tasmania, and the South-East of South

Australia. We have specimens in the South Australian Museum collection from

Eight Mile Creek, South-East South Australia (Cleland),

TATEA RUFILABRIS (Adams 1862)

Diala rufiabris Adams 1862, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., (3), 10, 298,

Tatea rufiabris Smith, 1881, Linn. Soc. (Zool.), 16, 268, pl. vii, fig. 19;

Thiele, 1929, Hand. der Syst. Weicht., 1, 168, fig. 146; Pilsbry, 1897,

Acad. Nat. Sce., Philad., 360, pl. ix, fig. 9.

Type Lecality—Port Lincoln, South Australia,

Distribution—Kangaroo Island, from Cygnet and Harriet Rivers; Patawa-

longa, River Torrens.

Smith, 1882, writes: “The operculum is said to be calcareous, with a sub-

marginal claw. As far as I can discover, judging from an external view, it appears

to be thin, horny, paucispiral, with the nucleus subcentral, but rather towards the

base or lower end.”

The operculum is paucispiral, ear-shaped, nucleus towards the base and

columella side; the claw is calcareous, situated at the back of the operculum, and

6-digitate with a longitudinal narrow calcarcous base.

Pilsbry, 1897, figures the operculum of Tatea paradisiaca Pilsbry, but his

crude drawing gives no idea of the claw which is also digitate. Ilis key to the

three Australian species of Tatea, however, is correct, and the species are cer-

tainly separable, as he suggests. They are: rufilabris Adams 1862, Port Lincoln,

South Australia; Awonensis Tenison Woods, 1879, genotype, Huon River, South

Tasmania; paradisiaca Pilsbry, 1897, Eden, New South Wales. To these can be

added preissii Philippi 1846, Western Australia = acuta Menke 1843, preoc.,

Swan River, Western Australia.

The radula definitely locates this genus in the Family Hydrobiidae.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Ciesstn, S. 1886 Conch. Cab., 17, 1-28 and 236-439, pls. i-iv and xxxiv-liv

Corton, B. C., and Goprrey, F. K. 1932 South Australian Naturalist, 13, 156-

165, text fig. 1, pls. ii and ii

GaprieL, C. 1939 Mem. Nat. Mus. Vict., 11, 100-139, pls. 1-iv

Heptey, C. 1917 Rec. Aust. Mus., 12, (1), 1-8, pls. 1 and ii

SmirH, E. A. 1882 J. Linn. Soc, (Zool.), Lond., 16, 255-317, pls. v-vii

Sowersy, G. B. 1873-1874 Conch. Icon., 19, pls. i-xii

Tate, R. 1882 Proc. Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 6, 552-569

EXPLANATION OF PLATES I AND II

PLaTE I

Fig. 1 Tatea rufilabris Adams, dorsal view, x12. Fig. 2 Tatea rufilabris Adams,

operculum, inside view, x12. Fig. 3 Tatea rufilabris Adams, operculum, outside view,

x12. Fig. 4 Tatea rufilabris Adams, ventral view, x12. Fig. 5 Bythinella pattisoni

sp. nov., ventral view, x15. Fig. 6 Bythinella pattisom sp. nov., operculum, outside

view. Fig. 7 Bythinella pattisoni sp. nov., dorsal view.

Prate II

Fig. land2 Amerianna subundata Sowerby, River Torrens, S. Aust. x3. Vig. 3 and 4

Amerianna subacuta Cotton, River Torrens, S. Aust., x3. Fig. 5 and 6 Amerianna

tenuistriata Sowerby, River Torrens, S. Aust, x3. Fig. 7 and 8 Amerianna lin-

colnensis Clessin, Port Lincoln, S. Aust., x3. Fig. 9 and 10 Amerianna breviculum

Smith King George Sound, W. Aust. x 3, Fig. 11 and 12 Amerianna tasmanicola

Tenison Woods, Mount Murray, Tasmania, x 4. Fig. 13 and 14 Amerianna pyrami-

data Sowerby, Victoria, x 2. Fig. 15 and 16 Amerianna ciliata Tenison Woods, Lake

Dulverton, Tasmania, x 3.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate I

Del, G. Walsh

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate II

Del. G. Walsh

CEPHALOPODA FROM STOMACH CONTENTS OF FISH FROM

EAST AND SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By BERNARD C. COTTON, South Australian Museum

Summary

In 1940 Dr. H. Thompson, Chief of Division of Fisheries, Marine Biological Laboratory, Cronulla,

kindly forwarded many interesting specimens of Cephalopoda (cuttle fishes, etc.), taken off the

Australian coast. Included were fragments taken from the stomachs of Tuna, Albacore and other

fishes, and a preliminary report was prepared in manuscript. As very definite localities are given for

all the specimens, and as some Cephalopoda form a principal article of diet of certain edible fishes,

this short paper covers the early part of the report submitted.

CEPHALOPODA FROM STOMACH CONTENTS OF FISH FROM

EAST AND SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By Bernarp C. Corton, South Australian Museum

[Read 11 June 1942]

In 1940 Dr. H. Thompson, Chief of Division of Fisheries, Marine Biological

Laboratory, Cronulla, kindly forwarded many interesting specimens of Cephalopoda

(cuttle fishes, etc.), taken off the Australian coast. Included were fragments taken

from the stomachs of Tuna, Albacore and other fishes, and a preliminary report

was prepared in manuscript. As very definite localities are given for all the

specimens, and as some Cephalopoda form a principal article of diet of certain

edible fishes, this short paper covers the early part of the report submitted.

NotToroparus GouLDI (McCoy 1888)

Ommastrephes gouldi McCoy 1888, Prod. Zool. Vict., (17), 2, 255, pl. clxix,

170, Victorian coast; Nototodarus gouldi (McCoy), Cotton and Godfrey,

1940, Moll., S. Aust., (2), 392, fig. 384-388.

Distribution—New South Wales, Victoria, Tasmania, South Australia,

Western Australia.

The following exact records of localities are now listed:

16 November 1938—Fragments from stomach of Bluefin, Thunnus maccoyit from

Jervis Bay, New South Wales.

25 November 1938—Partly digested fragments from stomach of Albacore,

Thunnus germo, from twelve miles east of Babel Island, off Flinders Island.

9 October 1939—Partly digested juveniles from stomach of Bluehn Thunnus

maccovi, from Bass Strait between Gabo Island and Flinders Island.

9 October 1939—Partly digested fragments from stomach of Bluelin, Thwnnts

maccoyii, from between Green Cape and Cape Everard.

17 October 1939—Fragments from stomach of Bluefin, Thunnus maccoyi, trom

Pambula, New South Wales.

1 November 1939—Fragments of adults and juveniles from stomach of Bluefin,

Thunnus maccoyii, {rom Tollgates Island, New South Wales.

4 November 1939—One adult and four juveniles, all females, taken in dip net at

night near submarine light. Port Arthur, Tasmania.

18 February 1940—Four specimens partly digested from stomach contents ot

Thunnus maccoyti, taken at Cape Pillar, Tasmania.

SEPIOTEUTHIS AUSTRALIS Quoy and Gaimard 1832

Sepioteuthis australis Quoy and Gaimard 1832, Voy. Astrolabe, 2, 77, pl. iv,

fig. 1, Western Port, Victoria; Cotton and Godfrey, 1940, Moll., 5S. Aust.,

(2), 414, fig. 402-405.

Distribution—Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria and New South

Wales.

19 February 1939—'Iwelve adult females, one juvenile, taken off Wallaroo Jetty,

South Australia, submarine light.

9 September 1939—Five juvenile females taken at Port Hacking, New South

Wales.

EuprYMNA STENODACTYLA (Grant 1833)

Sepiola stenodactyla Grant 1833, Trans. Zool. Soc., Lond., 1, 84, pl. xi, fig. 1,

2, Port Jackson, New South Wales; Euprymna stenodactyla (Grant),

IIedley 1918, J. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 51, 33.

Distribution—New South Wales, South Australia.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

19 February 1939—Two females from Wallaroo Jetty, South Australia, sub-

marine light. This is a new record for South Australia.

19 June 1939-—Oneé adult female from Fortescue Bay, Tasmania, submarine light.

20 September 1939—One adult female from Gunnamatta Bay. Blackish and

chestnut chromatophores on the body surface were noted during life.

14 February 1940—Four juvenile females from Lady Barron, and Flinders

Island, Bass Strait.

26 February 1940—Three juvenile females from Wollongong, New South Wales,

submarine light.

SEPIOLOIDEA LINEOLATA (Quoy and Gaimard 1832)

Sepiola lineolata Quoy and Gaimard 1832, Zool. Voy. Astrolabe, 2, 82, pl. v,

fig. 8, 13, Jervis Bay, N.S.W.; Sepioloidea lineolata (Quoy and

Gaimard), Cotton and Godfrey, 1940, Moll., S. Aust., (2), 405, fig. 396.

Distribution—Western Australia, South Australia and New South Wales.

1 September 1939—One adult female from Gunnamatta Bay, New South Wales.

Known as the “Tiger Squid.” Common on mud flats.

SEPIA (SOLITOSEPIA) MESTUS Gray 1849

Sepia mestus Gray 1849, Ceph. Antep. Brit. Mus., 108, Port Jackson, N.S.W.

Sepia (Solitosepia) mestus Gray, Cotton and Godfrey, 1940, Moll.,

S. Aust., (2), p. 440.

Distribution—New South Wales.

16 November 1938—One partly digested adult specimen from stomach of

Seriola grandis from Ulladulla, New South Wales.

SEPIA (SOLITOSEPIA) PLANGON Gray 1849

Sepia plangen Gray 1849, Ceph. Antep. Brit. Mus., 104; Port Jackson,

N.S.W. Sepia (Solitosepia) plangon Gray, Cotton and Godfrey, 1940,

Moll., S. Aust., 2, 441.

Distribution—New South Wales.

1 September 1939—Three female adults from Gunnamatta Bay, New South

Wales. One was dissected to contirm the identification and the gladius was

found to be typical.

EUOPLOTEUTIIS GALAXIAS Berry 1918

Euoploteuthis galaxias Berry 1918, Biol. Res. Endeavour, 4, (5), 211,

pls. lix-lx, Gabo Island, Victoria, 200-250 fathoms.

Distribution—V ictoria.

25 December 1939—One juvenile female about half the length of the holotype.

Lat. 38° 42’, long. 149° 23’, taken in net N. 70, 200 metres oblique.

Octopus PALLIDUS Hoyle 1885

Octopus boscit var. pallidus Iloyle 1885, Zool, Challenger, 16, 81, pl. i, ii,

Twofoald Bay, New South Wales. Octopus pallidus Hoyle, Cotton and

Godfrey, Moll., S. Aust., 2, 449,

Distribution—New South Wales, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania and

Western Australia.

20 October 1938—Two females, one adult and one juvenile, taken in the scallop

dredge 6-7 metres in d’Entrecasteaux Channel, Tasmania.

25 January 1939—One juvenile dredged at Jervis Bay, depth ?.

Octopus cYANEA Gray 1849

Octopus cyanea Gray 1849, Cat. Ceph., 15, Port Jackson, N.S.W.

Distribution—East coast Australia, etc.

14 September 1939—One small female specimen from Gunnamatta Bay, The

common Sydney octopus.

MISCELLANEOUS ADDITIONS TO THE ACARINE FAUNA OF

AUSTRALIA

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

Family CHEYLETIDAE Leach 1914

Genus MYOBIA v. Heyden 1826

von Heyden 1826, Oken, Isis, xix, col. 613.

MYOBIA MUSCULI (Schrank 1781)

Schrank, F. v. P., 1781, Enum. Ins., Austriae. (Fig. 1, A-B)

A number of specimens from a white mouse, McMaster Laboratory, Sydney,

3 January 1942 (H. B. Carter).

MYOBIAA FFINIS Poppe 1896

Poppe, S. A., 1896, Zool. Anz. (Fig. 1, C)

A few specimens with the preceding from a white mouse, McMaster Laboratory, Sydney, 3 January

1942 (H. B. Carter). The seven species of this genus now known to occur in Australia may be keyed

as follows :

MISCELLANEOUS ADDITIONS TO THE ACARINE FAUNA OF AUSTRALIA

By H. Womerstey, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

{Read 11 June 1942]

Prate III

Family CHEYLETIDAE Leach 1914

Genus Mvyosta v. Heyden 1826

von Heyden 1826, Oken, Isis, xix, col. 613.

Myopia Muscuti (Schrank 1781)

Schrank, F. v. P., 1781, Enum. Ins., Austriae.

(Fig. 1, A-B)

A number of specimens from a white mouse, McMaster Laboratory, Sydney,

3 January 1942 (H. B. Carter).

Myosra AFFINIS Poppe 1896

Poppe, S. A., 1896, Zool, Anz.

(Fig. 1, C)

A few specimens with the preceding from a white mouse, McMaster Labora-

tory, Sydney, 3 January 1942 (H. B. Carter). The seven species of this genus now

known to occur in Australia may be keyed as follows:

1 ‘Tarsus II furnished with two claws. 3

Tarsus II with only a single claw. 2

2 Dorsal sctac 2.2.4.4.2.4, first two broadly leaf-like. musculi (Schrank)

Dorsal sctac 0.2.4.4.2.2, not as above, minima Wom.

3 Tarsus III furnished with two claws. 5

‘Tarsus III furnished with only a single claw. 4

4 Dorsal surface posteriorly with three pairs of lancct-like setae differing from the

remainder. ensifera Poppe

Dorsal surface posteriorly with two pairs of setae, not differing from the rest.

affints Poppe

5 Short squat species. Dorsally with three pairs of long siender setac,

chalinolobus Wom.

Elongate species. Dorsal setac otherwise. 6

G Dorsal setae 4.4.2.4.4.2, very broad basally, especially the anterior rows, and longi-

tudinally striated. muniopleris Wom.

Dorsal setae 4.4.2.4.2.2Z, not very broad basally. clara Wom.

Genus CHELETOGENES Oudemans 1905

Entom. Bericht, 1905, 208.

CHELETOGENES ORNATUS Canest. and Fanzago 1876

For synonymy see Oudemans 1906, Mem. Soc. Zool. Fr., 19, 133.

(Fig. 2, A-B)

The following record of this species was inadvertently missed from my paper

of 1941 (Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 7, (1) ), and in the key to genera Cheletogenes was

cited as not occurring in Australia.

A single specimen sent by Mr. S. L. Allman and found in galls on a fig, at

Lismore, New South Wales, 7 June 1934, is of this species.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

Fig. | A-C—A, Myobia musculi (Schrk.), dorsal view of 9; B, same of ¢ ; C, Mvobia affinis Poppe, dorsal view of ©.

AD, ay,

iq ‘ 4

Fig. 2. A-B—Chelelogencs ornatus: A, dorsal; B, ventral.

Family TETRANYCHIDAE Dufour 1832

Ann. Sci. Nat., 25, 276-283.

Genus Sepranycuus MacGregor 1919

Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1919, 56, 663.

SaPTANYCHUS TUMIDUS (Banks 1900)

Tetranychus tianidus Banks 1900, Tech. Bull. No. 8, U.S. Dept. Agric., 73.

Septanychus tumidus MacGregor, 1919, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 56, 663.

This American species has been sent to me by Mr. R. T. M. Pescott as

affecting Buffalo grass, Stenotaphrum dimidiatum (L.) Brogn., on a lawn at

Melbourne, Victoria, in February, 1942. For the very interesting photograph of

the webbing (pl. iii) of this species of “Red Spider” I am indebted to Mr. L. W.

Miller.

Family TRICHADENIDAE Oudemans 1938

Genus RaoreLLa Hirst 1924

Hirst, S., 1924, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (9), 14, 522, pl. xvi, fig. 1-6.

In Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, (2), 264, 1940, I described Reotella aus-

tralica n. sp., from the leaves of eucalypts in New South Wales and Queensland.

I am now able to add a second Australian species, also from Queensland.

(Fig. 3, pl. 1)

Fig. 3. A-D—Scptanychus tumidus (Banks): A, dorsal view: B, tip of palp,

showing tibia, claw and tarsus; C, peritreme; D, claw of leg LL.

Raoiella queenslandica n. sp.

(Fig. 4, A-E)

Descriptton—Colour in life probably greenish. Length of @ 225 4, width

of 2 148, hysterosoma as wide as propodosoma and evenly rounded posteriorly.

Length of é 190,, width across propodosoma 95 », hysterosoma tapering pos-

teriorly. Eyes two on each side. Mouthparts piercing suctorial. Palpi 2-

segmented, without tibial claw. Legs short with paired claws. each with two

lateral tenent hairs, empodium with two series of tenent hairs as in genus; tarsi I

and II with a strong thick rod-like sensory seta. Cuticle dorsally striated, as

figured. All dorsal setae long and slender, finely ciliated, not apically clavate as

in R, australica, Peritremata as figured. Penis of g long and slender, as figured,

Locality—From Eucalyptus micrantha from Redland Bay, Queensland,

3 September 1941 (A. R. Brimblecomhe).

Family ANOETIDAE Oudemans 1904

Entom. Bericht, 1904, 1, (1), 191.

Genus Histrostoma Kramer 1876

Arch. Naturges., 1876, 42, (1), 105.

SO re

YE?

VEY

fig

VAY

Vy ed

vAtliiy

Fig. 4 A-E—Raoiella queenslandica n. sp.: A, dorsal view of 9 ; B, dorsal view

of 2; C, dorsal seta; D, peritreme; E, penis of g.

HISTIOSTOMA HUMIDITATUS (Vitzthum 1926)

Anoetus humiditatus Vitz. 1926 (1927), “Acarologischen Beobachtungen,’

Reche. Sitz. Ber. Gess. Naturf. Fr., Berlin, 98.

(Fig. 5, A-F)

Vitzthum described this species from the female only, from pine-needles

from Lower Austria.

It has now been found in numbers on the roots of tomato plants grown in

nutrient solution by Mr. S. lL. Allman, at Ryde, New South Wales, 22 Sep-

tember 1941.

From the material submitted to me for study by Mr. Allman, it is now

possible to figure and describe the male and the deutonymphal stage.

Fig. 5 A-F—Histiostoma humiditatus Vitz.: A, dorsal view of 9 ; B, ventral view

of 9 ; C, ventral view of ¢, posterior half; D, mandibular appendage; E, dorsal view

of deutonymph; F, ventral view of deutonymph.

Description—Female: Length to 310», width to 190 ». Gnathosoma distinctly

visible from above in front of propodosoma. Palpi 2-segmented the segments not

expanded laterally, with two long apical curved setae, the outer of which is directed

backwards. Mandibles with long serrated, “augur-like” process (fig. 5D). Propo-

dosoma somewhat triangular, hysterosoma broadly rounded, both without raised

bosses. Dorsal setae fine and arranged as figured. Legs normal as for the genus.

Ventrally the two pairs of pores are “sole”-shaped, being two to four times as

long as wide; one pair is between coxae III and IV and lies horizontally, the

other pair is longitudinal and lies inside coxac IT] and IV. Male: As! in female,

length 190 », width 100». Ventrally the two pairs of pores are shortly oval, and

both lie between coxae IV (fig. 5C). Deutonymph (fig. 5E, F). Length 160 p

width 130. Dorsally with distinct suture between propodosoma and hystero-

soma, apparently without setae. Ventrally as figured with paired discs between

coxae I and II, and on coxae III. Suctorial plate with eight discs, median pair

larger than the rest; another disc on each side of vulva.

Genus Chiropteranoetus n. g.

Deutonymph—As in Ancetus but disc on coxae I replaced by a strong blunt

spine-like process, no disc or process but a normal spine on coxae III, suctorial

disc with two large dises, on each side of which is a short blunt spine-like process,

and the two posterior discs also replaced by spine-like processes; a spine-like

process on each side of vulva. Legs relatively long with fairly strong spines, tarsi I,

II and III with single claw, [V without claw but with two apical setae not as

long as tarsus.

Dorsally with a pronounced gnathosomal projecting plate ; with strong suture

between propodosoma and hysterosoma ; dorsal setae long and fine. Eyes absent.

Genotype Chiropteranoetus chalinolobus n. sp.

Chiropteranoetus chalinolobus n. sp.

(Fig. 6, A-B)

Fig. 6 A-B—Chiropteranoetus chalinolobus: A, dorsal, legs omitted; B, ventral.

Description—Deutonymph, length 300 », width 195 pm. Dorsally on propodo-

soma with six fine setae, the median pair being the shortest ; on hysterosoma setae

arranged 6.4.4.4.2, length of setae 184. Adult unknown.

Locality—A single specimen from residue in jar containing bats (Chalino-

lobus gouldi), M 503-5, 507, 453, 532, probably South Australia.

Family PONTOPPIDANIIDAE Oudemans

Entom. Bericht, 1, (7), 1927, 244,

Genus CALvoLtiA Oudemans 1911

Entom. Bericht, 1, (3), 1911, 187.

CALVOLIA ? HETEROCOMUS (Michael 1903)

Tyroglyphus heterocomus Michael 1903 (in part), Brit. Tyrog., 2, 106,

pl. xxxiii, fig. 4-5.

(Fig. 7, A-B)

Deutonymphs—Length 215, with 170, of what is probably the above

species, have been sent to me for study by Mr, Tarlton Rayment. They were

found on Prosopis sp. at Borroloola, Victoria.

’

Fig. 7 A-B—Calwolia ? heteracomus (Michael): A, dorsal, legs omitted; B, ventral.

TIramily ANYSTIDAE Oudemans 1902

Genus CHAUSSIERTA Oudemans 1937

Zool, Anz. 120 (3/4).

In the Zoologischer Anzeiger (loc. cit.) Oudemans changes his generic name

Schellenbergia 1936 to Chaussieria on the grounds of pre-occupation by von Heer

1865 for an arachnid. The species Schellenbergia warregense (Hirst) re-described

by me (this Journal, p. 20) must therefore be renamed Chaussieria warregense

(First).

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate III

Webbing of Septanychus tumidus (Bks.) on Buffalo Grass,

Melbourne, Victoria.

Photo by L. W. Miller

ABORIGINAL NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS IN THE OOLDEA REGION,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and J. BURTON CLELAND, University of Adelaide

Summary

In August 1939 a visit was paid to Ooldea, under the auspices of the Board for Anthropological

Research, University of Adelaide. We desire to acknowledge assistance received from Messrs. H.

Green and A. G. Mathews of the United Aborigines Mission at Ooldea. Our information was

derived from various tribesmen, some of them associated with the Mission Station, whilst others

were nomads. The ecology of this extremely interesting region where the sandhill country and the

great Nullarbor Plain meet, has been studied by Adamson and Osborn (1922). The systematic

botany of the district, as well as of adjacent areas, was reported on by Black (1917 a), who also

published a vocabulary of the Wirrung people from Murat Bay (1917). Mrs. Daisy Bates, in her

vocabulary of the Wirrung people (1918) from the adjacent region of the Great Australian Bight,

mentioned a number of native names relating to the fauna and flora, and also gave some

information in her account of "Ooldea Water” (1921).

ABORIGINAL NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS IN THE OOLDEA REGION,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By T. Harvey Jounston and J. BURTON CLeLanp, University of Adelaide

[Read 11 June 1942]

In August 1939 a visit was paid to Ooldea, under the auspices of the Board

for Anthropological Research, University of Adelaide. We desire to acknowledge

assistance received from Messrs. H. Green and A. G, Mathews of the United

Aborigines Mission at Ooldea, Our information was derived from various tribes-

men, some of them associated with the Mission Station, whilst others were nomads.

The ecology of this extremely interesting region where the sandhill country and

the great Nullarbor Plain meet, has been studied by Adamson and Osborn (1922).

The systematic botany of the district, as well as of adjacent areas, was reported

on by Black (19174), who also published a vocabulary of the Wirrung people

from Murat Bay (1917). Mrs. Daisy Bates, in her vocabulary of the Wirrung

people (1918) from the adjacent region of the Great Australian Bight, mentioned

a number of native names relating to the fauna and flora, and also gave some

information in her account of “Ooldea Water” (1921).

The presence of permanent water at the Soak (Yuldi, native name for

Ooldea) has led to the locality becoming an extremely important centre for native

visitation, bartering and ceremonial, aborigines visiting it from distant regions

lying west, east and north, The importance of Ooldea in these connections has

been referred to by one of us (Johnston, 1941). Though originally occupied by

the Wirrung tribe, its chief inhabitants are the Andigerri from the sandhill

country to the north and from the Everard Ranges, but tribesmen from the far

north-west, even from the Warburton kanges in Western Australia, are also to

be met with there, Few Wirrung were present during the time ot our visit, In

view of these facts, it is not surprising that many of the names we obtained for

plants are similar to those received in the Musgrave Ranges. as well as to those

published by Helms (1896), who accompanied the Elder Expedition. The latter

traversed the northern and western portion of the great desert from the Everard

Ranges, Blyth Ranges, south to the Fraser Range, and Helms has given short

vocabularies of the peoples met with, the lists of words including many relating to

the fauna and flora. Those referring to the flora have been mentioned in our paper

dealing with the ethnobotany of the Musgrave Range region. (Cleland and John-

ston, 1937, 1938).

The order of arrangement of the plants mentioned in this paper is that given

by Black in his Flora of South Australia (1922, 1924, 1926, 1929), and we have,

in most cases, omitted authors’ names. Mr. Black kindly supplied us with some

native names collected by him when at Ooldea some years ago, and has identified

some plants regarding which we were in doubt.

Black (1917), in his Wirrung vocabulary, published the following names

relating to the plants:—blucbush (Cratystylis conocephala), bududu, bundera,

burunda; Trichiniwm incenum, bunjuru; saltbush (Alripler Muellerr), bunjuru;

Myoporum brevipes, djindidji; [Telipterum floribundum, djindidji ; Pholidia W eldit,

(= Eremophila Weldii) djindijn. He commented on the fact that the same name

was applied to quite different plants, and went on to say that it appeared that the

natives’ power of discrimination was not great as regards vegetation which was

of no practical use to him. We suggest that, in some cases, the term used applics

to some attribute which is common to such plants, just as the word tjilka (djilka),

which means prickly, has been received by us as the name of a wide variety of

plants; or okiri (ugiri) for various green and somewhat succulent forms. If a

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

plant is used by natives for a food (either as seeds, fruits, flowers, leaves, roots),

for making implements, for decoration, or for ceremonial purposes, ete., then it

has a name; if not, then it receives no more attention than would be given to it

amongst ordinary white people. Black’s term djindiji applied to several plants

is suggestive of jinda-jinda given by Basedow (1904) as a general term for flower

in north-western South Australia, the same name djinta-djinta having been

obtained by us (1937) for flowers, e.g., the flowering head of Myriocephalus

Stuartt, in the Musgrave Ranges. Black’s name jilba for Solanum hystrix suggests

the term djilka (prickly) already referred to by, us. /

Other Wirrung names for plants quoted by, Black (1917) are Mesem-

bryanthemum aequilaterale, wilelbi, wildalbi; Tetragonia implexicoma, walbelbi

(apparently the same name as for the preceding); Acacia notabilis, mi-na (we

received this name for several shrubs until the natives pointed out to us that it

referred to bird nests which we had not noticed in them); Nitraria Schoeberi

wanjeri, whose berries are edible; Zygophyllum Billardieri, merkaltji; Melaleuca

parviflora (= M. pubescens), karo; Eucalyptus incrassata var. dumosa, the com-

mon mallee near Murat Bay, gi-lja, ki-lja; Alyxia buxifolia, ping-gjeli; Westringia

Dampieri kunbudn; Solanium coactiliferum, kumba. Amongst the more general

terms mentioned by him in his Wirrung vocabulary are:—leaf, kalbi; food, ma;

water from the roots of a mallee, nga-ru kabi (since the latter term means water,

nga-ru is the name of the tree; we obtained nga-barri as the name of the chief

water-bearing species at Ooldea); berry, tata; wurley, ngu-ra.

Mrs, Rates’ Wirrung vocabulary (1918) was apparently based largely on her

contact with natives near Fowler’s Bay, south of Ooldea. Few of the names in it

relating to plants are associated with definitely identified species, and we have

added our comments in square brackets. Anguillaria dioica, gibera ma, i.e., turkey

food, gibera = wild turkey [Eupodotis australis], ma = plant food as distinct

from baru or ku-ga meaning animal food. A species of she-oak [Casuarina lepi-

dephloia], kurli, gurli, Loranthus [L. miracularis var. Boormani| parasitic on

sandalwood [Myoporum platvcarpum|, miljiling, fruit edible. Saltbush [Atriplex

Muelleri] mambulu. Mesembryanthemum sp., kargala. Pittosporuin philly-

vaeoides, kundelu. Acacia sp. myall, [A. Sowdenii|, kardia. Acacia sp., bu-ndi

[this name is applied widely to Cassia phyllodinia|. Acacia sp., walduri, its

edible gum being called dauw [walduri is applied at Ooldea to A. oswaldii].

Native currant, wanjiri [Black (1917) gave this name for Nitraria Schoeberi|.

Melaleuca sp. [M. pubescens], karu. A species of mallee, djindu. Mallee with

water-bearing roots, latter termed birli or ngari [Eucalyptus oleosa var. Peenari|.

Red mallee, jagala. Mallee, the bark of whose root is edible, kong-u or (in Eucla

district) nala. Solanum sp., fruit is kumba [Black (1917) gave this name for

S. coactiliferum]. Solanum sp., a small prickly species, fruit is walga (probably

S. hystrix). Native gooseberry [Solanum ellipticum] gujana. Sandalwood

[Myoporum platycarpum] bulgara; its gum (kandi) was used for fastening flints

on implements. Myoporum sp. djindidji [this term was given by Black (1917)

for Mf. brevipes]. Pholidia scoparia [Eremophila scoparia] walgala. Green edible

mushroom, dhamuna. Red fungus found on dead sandalwood [Trametes cinna-

barica on dead Myoporum platycarpum|. Various edible fruits, not identified, were

termed kalgula, karambi, mindara, njilba, tjurguin (a small white fruit), Edible

fruits were tjugarn (like a parship) [probably Boerhavia diffusa], kagu and

djungu-djungu. Wongonu was appled to small seeds (?nardoo) pounded and

made into damper [this term is applied to all small seeds, ¢.g., of grasses, which,

are so treated]. Other terms are jilgi, a bed made of leaves, grass, etc.; ngutra,

a wurley or hut of boughs (joo) and saplings; warda, shrub; kala warda, fire-

wood (kala = fire). Wooden implements include ju-jan, a spear made from a

root and bartered from a region in Western Australia; kadji, spear; kali,

boomerang; windu, a hooked twig used for picking out edible grubs (mo-gu,

dji-rigi, jalgundu) from roots.

In a paper dealing with “Ooldea Water” Mrs. Bates (1921) mentioned boorn-

boorn (quandongs), dharrulga (mulga apples), nyurongil (parakylia [Calan-

drinia] ) as edible foods; ugiri, native tobacco (the “pitchuri” of Spencer and

Gillen) brought down by northern tribes for barter; kooli (she-oak) ; walgala (a

broombush) ; saltbush and bluebush (mambula) ; a water bush growing round the

Soak (wilbala) [Melaleuca and Leptospermum] ; ngabbari (mallee) ; and ngalda

(mallee with water-bearing roots).

We have arranged our observations according to the families to which the

plants belong.

PINACEAE

Callitris verrucosa, middurtu. Its gum (girrdi, middurtu girrdi) is used for

attaching parts of weapons, and for fixing the flint (kandi) to the spear-thrower

(meru). Helms (1896, 320) recorded the same name (medurtu) from the Blyth

Range, miduru (324) from Fraser Range, and medduru (325) from Hampton

Plains.

SCHEUCHZERIACEAE

Triglochin centrocarpa, nim-ba-lba, o’kiri, o-giri. The latter terms are applied

to various low-growing green plants.

GRAMINEAE

Paspalidiuwin jubiflorum, karra garra, The same term was obtained for

Stenopetalum lineare, Helms (1896, 320) stated that the term kara which is asso-

ciated with some plants, e.g., Aristida arenaria (putta kara, putta = grass), in the

Blyth Range, probably means cough or vomit.

Stipa sp., wang-u. Seeds utilised as food. Flower stems used by children

as play spears. Helms (320) obtained the same name for spinifex (Triodia)

seed and for young plants, and stated that it probably was employed as a term for

all kinds of seeds.

Triodia irritans, goolbarra. Bolam (1925, 51) mentioned that there were two

kinds of spinifex, one kind edible by stock, and the other “porcupine grass” of

little value; and that from the latter (51) the natives extracted a resin with

which they attached the heads of spears to the shafts. He referred to the method

of using the material (86). He also mentioned that water from cavities in trees

was sucked up through a hollow spinifex stalk.

Eragrostis Clelandti S. T. Blake, wangu, wanganu, wonganu. Seeds ground

and made into a damper (ngu-ma). Damper made with white man’s flour is called

damper and not ngu-ma. Mai-i is a general term for plant food. Helms (1896,

320) recorded wangurna for E. eriopoda, Bates (1918, 160) gave wonganu as

the Wirrung name for a small seed (regarded as ?nardoo) which was pounded

and made into damper. The seed is much more likely, in the Ooldea region, to

be that of grasses,

LiLIACEAE

Lomandra leucocephala, iria. Flowering stem placed in the hair as a

decoration.

Thysanotus exiliflorus, tjipari. Long, tuberous, rather watery, root eaten.

the taste being slightly bitter and somewhat like that of raw potato. Bolam (1925,

50) stated that natives obtained water from the long thin bulb on the root of a

particular kind of grass called joonga joonga; that this bulb, two to three inches

long, was very juicy and was eaten raw or roasted; and that it grew in dry sandy

areas. Bates’ term (1918, 154) djungu djungu for an edible root obviously

belongs to the same plant. We believe that both authors were referring to

Thysanotus.

CASUARINACEAE

Casuarina lepidophloia, goorli, kurli. Bolam (50) published a photograph

oi the tree (‘kooli) and stated that its roots were water-bearing. Magarey (1895,

650-651) referred to Tietkens’ experience of the oak in the Ooldea region as a

supply of potable root water.

Casuarina Decaisneana, the desert oak of the region lying northward from

Ooldea, Magarey (1895, 652) referred to the use by natives of water collected

in hollows at the forks of this tree, Bolam (1925, 50) mentioning that a spinifex

stalk was sometimes used for sucking up such water. The latter author stated

that shields were made from the oak (presumably C, lepidophloia) and gave an

account of their manufacture (84).

PROTEACEAE

Hakea multilineata, yuldi-nga; this is the native name for Ooldea. Helms

mentioned yundinga (pl. 27) and yindinga (pl. 15, fig. 1) as head ornaments

(322, but the terms may not be related to that given by jus. Water was obtained

at Oo!dea from the surface roots which, after having been pulled up, are broken

into pieces 9 to 12 inches long, the bark removed (with the teeth) from one end,

and the pieces held with that end downwards to allow the water to drain.

Hakea leucoptera, urrbi. Its roots also afford an important supply of water.

Magarey (1895, 650) referred to it.

Grevillea stenobotrya, yeraing. It often has an edible grub (ma-gu, ma-ku)

in its roots.

Grevillea Hugeliu, orrbi, urrbi.

SANTALACEAE

Eucarya acuminata (quandong), toordoo, Fruit roasted when green and

then eaten. Kernel of ripe fruits eaten. Bates (1918, 15) gave the name kurdi

for the tree and burn burn (154) for the fruits. Mr. Black obtained the latter

name for the fruits of this species as well as E. murrayana. Welms (318) gave

bunbun as the name in the Everard Ranges. The light wood is used in making

fire. A small branch or stem is partly split and the crevice filled with dried grass

or leaves or very soit wood or dung, all of these being objects capable of smoulder-

ing. A piece of hardwood or a harder piece of quandong, shaped to a fairly sharp

firm edge, is used as a saw, which is moved rapidly acioss the larger piece of

wood, the resulting heat causing smouldering of the tinder. Bolam (1925, 88)

mentioned as requisttes, some fine grass, a very dry piece of quandong, a sharpened

piece of hardwood and some dry animal manure.

Eucarya murrayana, Mr. Black, in a letter, informed us that burn burn was

applied to its fruits at Ooldea.

Eucarya spicata (sandalwood), pu-lara, bulara. Fruits not eaten. Mr. Black

obtained the name bulgar. Helms (1896) received the latter name from the

Fraser Range (p. 323) and Hampton Plains (p. 325) for the false sandalwood,

Myeoporum platycarpum.

LORANTHACEAE

Loranthus nuracularis var. Boormanit Blakely from Myoporum, barraka

barraka ; ngun-dji. These names are applied to any mistletoe. We obtained njingni

as the name in the Musgrave Ranges (Cleland and Johnston, 1937). The term

barruga means foliage, the duplication indicating, no doubt, the characteristic

dense and strikingly coloured foliage of the plant. Bates (1918, 157) gave mil-

jiling for Loranthus with edible fruit and parasitic on sandalwood, the reference

probably being to the species just mentioned by us.

Loranthus quandong, manni manni. Same term obtained for Dicrastvlis.

CHENOPODIACEAE

Chenopodium microphyllum, No name available.

Bassia. obliquicuspis, pilka pilka (not djilka djilka).

Bassia humiflora, djilka djilka.

Kochia triptera, kalaia-la, i.e., emu (kalaia) food.

Kochia sedifolia, pundtharra, pundtarra.

Arthrocnemum halocnemoides, walkidi.

Salsola kali, djilka-la, djitka djilka (prickly).

AMARANTACEAE

Trichinium alopecuroideum, windalura.

Trichinium obovatum, purar-purar. Same name obtained for it (syn. Ptilotus

obovatus) by Helms (1896, 320) in Blyth Range.

PHYTOLACCACEAE

Gyrostemon ramulosus, guru mart, kuru maru. (gurti = eyes; maru =

black—name applied apparently on account of the small black eye-like knots

exposed when branches fall off). =

Codonocarpus cotinifolius, kaloordi. Stem and roots commonly invaded by

a small edible grub (ma-gu).

AIZOACEAE

Carpobrotus aequilateralis (syn. Mesembryanthemum aequilaterale), nyoorn-

ngee.

The same name was obtained for a Calandrinia, According to Mr. H. Green

of Ooldea, it is also applied to the water-holding frog (nyarrn-ngee), and the

term suggests niurni quoted by Helms (1896, 324) for Dianella revoluta in the

Fraser Range. Bates (1918, 156) gives kargala as the Wirrung name for the

pigface (Mesembryanthemum). The flowers are used in a man’s head-band as

an ornament.

Tetragonia expansa, leru-leru,

PoRTULACACEAE

Calandrinia polyandra (probably), wakadi, edible. The same term was

obtained by us (1937) for C. volubilis in the Musgraves.

Calandrinia disperma, ngurn-ngni. Same name given for Carpobrotus

(Mesembryanthemum ).

CRUCIFERAE

Lepidium oxytrichum, ogiri.

Stenopetalum lineaye, karra garra, kara-kara. Same name given to a panic

grass. Mr. Black obtained the name arawin for this plant in 1920.

Stenopetalum velutinum, Mr. Black received unmurdu as its name. We

obtained unmuta for it (1937) in the Musgrave Ranges.

PITTOSPORACEAE

Pittosporum phillyreoides, ali-di. Bates (1918, 157) recorded kundelu as its

Wirrung name.

LEGUMINOSAE

Acacia colletioides, goordil-goordil.

Acacia Kempeana, ilgu-ara. Helms (1918, 318) gave the same name

‘(ilguarra) for the mulga in the Everard Ranges.

Acacia Sowdenti (myall) kardaia. Bates (1918, 156) gives kardia. The

wood is used extensively for making boomerangs (kali = curved), heavy waddies,

womerahs, and heavy spears.

Acacia Oswaldii, waldari, Wood used for making boomerangs. Bates

(1918, 154) gives dauw as the Wirrung name for the edible gum of walduri, a

species of Acacia.

Acacia Randelliana, murru.

Acacia brachystachya, buggu-da, baguda, bugata. Mulga apples (dharrulga)

caused by a hymenopteron, are eaten raw. The tree is commonly infested by the

larva of a bag moth, the large silky bag being termed wang-ga. The twigs and

leaves of the tree supply the ash (purrgu) for use with Nicotiana (pulandu) as a

chewing-narcotic. The needle-like leaves of the acacia are chewed to make saliva

flow more freely for use in mixing red (tur-tu) and white (pi-anba) ochre on a

piece of mallee bark or in a wooden or bark dish (wirra), the mixture being

utilised for decorating the body for ceremonial occasions. The leaves are chewed

and the resulting saliva is added to wood shavings from the same plant, and then

rubbed up in the hands along with ashes from the camp-fire to produce a silvery

green colour for decorating headbands. The plant is used extensively in connec-

tion with the inma-thali (inma = ceremony; thali or tjali = wreath or ring-like

pad), mention of which will be made later in this paper.

Acacia aneura (mulga), koorku, kurku. Is used extensively for making

implements and weapons, ¢.g., digging sticks (wanna), waddies (toording), spears

(kadji, katji), boomerangs (kali, kai-li), womerahs (meru), and rounded

decorated waddies (doorna). Edible lac from mulga is termed maruka. Mulga

apples (galls) are dharrulga or darulka.

Acacia ligulata, wadoolya, windulya, wadarraka.

Acacia tetragonophylla, koorara. Used for making small ceremonial objects.

Acacia spp. Seeds ground, cooked and eaten. The gum (girrdi) is also

eaten,

Cassia phyllodinia, poondi, boondi, bu-ndi. The shrub commonly has an

edible grub (ma-gu boondi) in its roots. The foliage is sometimes used for mak-

ing the main mass of the wreath for the inma-tjali ceremony. Ilelms (1896, 318)

gives bundi for Cassia desolata in the Everard Ranges, and makobundi for the

larva of a Cossus moth in the Blyth Range. Mrs. Bates (1918, 153) referred to

bundi as a species of Acacia,

Daviesia ulicina, djilka djilka (= prickly).

Chianthus speciosus (syn. C. Dampieri), gu-ru darn, kuru-darn, @.e., staring

eyes (guru = cyes) on account of the arrangement of the dark colouration in

the flowers.

GERANIACEAE

Erodium cygnorum, ngumilba. Root cooked in ashes and then eaten.

ZYGOPHYLLACEAE

Zygophyllum glaucescens, ngee-wee, “horse feed.” The term ngee may

suggest succulence since it forms part of the name of Mesembryanthemum,

Calandrinia and frogs (nyoorn-ngee).

Zygophyllum amimophilum, uraitja. Has a small edible grub in its root.

Zygophyllum fruticulosum var. eremaea, pai-yinda.

EUPHORBIACEAE

Adriana Hookeri (water bush), kapi kapi (ka-pi = water). Helms (1896,

320) gave the same name for Cassta pleurocarpa. Adriana has an edible grub

(magu) in its roots. Mr. Black obtained the name kanba gura for the plant.

Kanba or ganba is the name of the huge mythical snake of the Nullarbor Plain,

and gura or guru means eye.

Euphorbia Drummondi, mimmi (= milk).

Euphorbia eremophila, mimmi.

SAPINDACEAE

Heterodendron oleifolium, ta-lura, da-lura, taljura. Used for making light

shields and boomerangs.

Dodonaea attenuata, djinning, tjinning. The leaves and branchlets may be

used in making the pad or wreath (tjali) for the inma tjali. The bud-like male

flowers are termed ka-ludi.

Dodonaea viscosa. Mr. Black informed us tjining is applied to this species

as well as the preceding.

THY MELEACEAE

Pimelea microcephala. Mr. Black obtained the name djildjarbi for this

species at Ooldea. Mrs. Bates (1918, 154) stated that djildja means the calf of

the leg.

MyRTACEAE

Leptosperimum coriaceum, winba-la, wilba-la. Flowers sucked to obtain the

nectar (wom-a = something sweet; saimc name applied to sugar).

Melaleuca pubescens, karu, wilba-la. Bates (1918) also gives karu for

tea-tree,

Melaleuca uncinata, karu.

Species of mallee (Lucalyptus spp). Digging sticks (wanna), spears, clubs

and small dishes (wi-ra) may be made from any of the species, the three which

are common at Ooldea being E. oleosa, E. incrassata (dumosa) and E. pyriformis.

Bolam (1925, 83) has described the method of making spears by straightening

long thin mallee stems in hot ashes and then trimming them with pieces of broken

glass or with some iron implement. Where these accessories are not available.

ithe original method of trimming by using the flint chisel of the spear-thrower

would be employed. Black (1926, 418, 421) reported that E. oleosa was the

“water mallee” at Ooldea; that E. incrassata and E, dumosa were water mallees

in desert country, since natives were able to obtain a supply of water from the

roots; and that the two latter were very closely related and that perhaps E. dumosa

should be united with E, incrassata, We have used the latter name.

Eucalyptus leptophylla, midtyi, midtji.

Eucalyptus oleosa, nga-bari. The importance of the species as a supply of

“root water” for aborigines in the arid region extending east, north and west from

Ooldea has been emphasised by Johnston (1941, 34). Eyre was the first to

report (in 1845) the value of the tree in the region north of the Bight. The

method of obtaining the water has been described by Eyre (1845), Magarey

(1895, 648), Bolam (1925, 49), Macpherson (1936, 177) and Cleland (1940, 8).

The form growing at Ooldea is sometimes recorded as var. transcontinentalis, but

Black (1926, 418) apparently did not consider varietal rank necessary. He has

since informed us by letter that the Ooldea tree should be known as E. oleosa var.

Peenari Blakely. Bolam published a photograph of the tree.

We observed that after breaking off and pulling up long lengths of surface

roots and then breaking them into short pieces, 10-12 inches long, the bark was

torn off each piece by using the teeth, Then one end was blown hard and water

and bubbles appeared at the other, the water being astringent and pale brownish.

After a study of the area of pore surface seen in transverse section of a root just

under one inch in diameter, Cleland (1940, 9) reported that a piece little more

than a yard in length could hold about four ounces of water, and that three roots

each about 30 feet long and one inch in diameter could hold about one gallon,

The lerp which occurs on this and the other species of Ooldea mallees is

edible and is termed woma (= sweet).

E. oleosa is called red mallee (Magarey 1895; Black 1926) because of the

colour of its wood, but the same name is applied by: the latter author to E. lepto-

phylla-and to one form of E, gracilis, Bolam speaks of, it, as the “brown bark’

100

mallee (ngalda). Bates (1918, 153, 159) gave the Wirrung names birli and ngaru

for water-bearing roots of imallee, and called red mallee “jagala (155), but was

probably referring in the latter case to a species distinct from F. oleosa. Later

(1921) she used the names ngabbari for mallee and ngalda for the mallee with

water-bearing roots, Black (1921, 17) gave the terms nabbari or ngabbari for

E, olcosa and mentioned that, further north, it was called nabbara or abbara.

MacPherson (1936, 177), in an article on the eucalypts in the daily life and

medical practice of the aboriginal, called the water mallee at Ooldea FE. dumosa

(nabbari), and mentioned that during a funeral service mourners waved branches

of this shrub about the grave and finally buried them at the foot of the grave with

the body. A detailed account of the use to which grass, leaves and branches of

(apparently) any locally convenient mallee are put in connection with the burial

and reburial ceremonies, has been described recently by Berndt and Johnston

(1942).

Eucalyptus pyriformis, yeldar-ba, djar-gula, djar-gala. Nectar (woma) is

obtained from the flowers. The roots are not used as a water supply. Mr. Black

obtained jaldar as the name of the tree and dardu-gula for the large fruit capsule,

these names being similar to those received by us. Djar-gala is obviously Mrs.

Bates’ (1918, 155) jagala = dja-gala) which she called a red mallee, though Black

wrote of E. pyriformis as “Ooldea mallee.”

Eucalyptus incrassata (including £. dumosa), bi-arr, bi-arb, bi-arba, pi-arpa,

pi-arr. Branches and leaves used in ceremonials (inma). Capsules used as hair

ornaments (djindjula). Wood of this white mallee used for spear-throwers and

other wooden implements.

Helms gave the name Kararda (1896, 325) for it in the Fraser Range and

Hampton Plains.

Eucalyptus gracilis. We did not observe this species at Ooldea. One form of

it is a red mallee, and the other is a white mallee (Black 1926, 324).

Bates (1918, 156) gave kongu as the name of the mallee, the bark of whose

roots was edible, and also (158) nala for its name in the Eucla region. Black

(1926, 423) stated that E. gracilis was called kong mallee on Eyre Peninsula, and

mentioned that a form of E. oleosa which had similar narrow leaves and very

small fruits, was also so named in that locality (418). E. gracilis is widely dis-

tributed from New South Wales to Western Australia. Its fruits are said to be

like. those of E. largiflerens, for which Helms (1896, 325) obtained the name

wartralya in Hampton Plains. Though Mueller and Tate (1896) recorded the

latter species from that locality, Black gave the range of F. largiflorens as River

Murray and Eastern States. We suggest that the kong mallee of the Wirrung

tribe may be £. gracilis.

Helms (1896, 322) gave gnalla (nalla) yera and gnalla (nalla) guya as

names in the Fraser Range for the edible bark of a mallee while in its natural

state, and gnalla yindalya for it after having been dried and pounded to dust, ready

to be eaten. Yera = root, and kuyal or gual= green. Thus nalla or gnalla is

the name of the particular mallee. The method of preparation of this material

has been referred to by Helms (1896, 258-9, 304, 305-6). He also mentioned

(325) Eucalyptus caesia (gungurru) as one species of mallee whose roots were so

used in the Hampton Plains. This latter species was stated by Mueller and Tate

(1896) to be close to E. incrassata.

UMBELLIFERAE

Uldinia mercurialis. The natives have no name for this plant, but it. is

included in our list since the generic name was based by. J. M. Black (Flora, 3,

438) on “uldilnga gabi,” the native name of, the Ooldea Soak (gabi or kapi =

water).

101

ASCLEPIADACEAE

Marsdenia australis, poi-ya. Flower buds, stems and leaves eaten. The

“silky pear” is kalgula, Basedow (1925) obtained the saine name for the plant

in the northern ranges. . Helms (1896, 324) obtained the same term (boiya )

as applied east of the Fraser Range to the plant and edible root of Thysanotus

Patersoni, along with the names nurgs nurgu and malli malli, mentioning that the

last name was applied to the piant and its tendrils. Bates (1918, 156) gave

kalgula as the name of an edible fruit which she did not identify.

BorAGINACEAE

Halgania cyanea, ngau-ngau He'ms (1896, 320) gave gnau-grau, apparently

the same term, as being applied in the Blyth Range to Eremophila latifolia,

VERBENACEAE

Dicrastylis Beveridget, munni munni, Used in ceremonials, The same name

was obtained for Loranthus quandong.

SOLANACEAE

Solanum coactiliferum, e-toon, toon-ba.

Solanum ellipticum, e-toonba. Fruit esteemed. Bates (1819, 155) gives

eujana. She also recorded kumba as the name of a Solanum and this name

suggests kumberadda, the name of the native gooseberry in the Mann Ranges.

Black (1917) obtained kumba as the name for S. coactiliferum at Murat Bay.

Lycium australe, djilka (= prickly).

Nicotiana excelsior, This plant does not grow in the Ooldea region, but its

dried, prepared leaves are brought down from the Everard Ranges from time to

time, depending largely on climatic conditions and their effect on the availability

of water supplies along the route. The latter is referred to by Berndt (1941):

and Johnston (1941). The material is termed pulandu, balandu, pulantu, and

is chewed as a narcotic, after having been mixed with ashes (chiefly from

Acacia) and often with rabbit or other mammalian fur. Ordinary tobacco is

generally treated at Ooldea in the same way, being seldom smoked by men and

women because of the few pipes available. The similarity of the plant to other

species of Nicotiana was known at Ooldea. The term mingulba used in the War-

burton and Musgrave Ranges was also given to us at Ooldea. Helms (1896, 320)

gave the term pulanda for native: tobacco, Nicotiana suaveolens, in the Blyth

Range, but at that time the various Australian species of N icotiana had not. been

satisfactorily differentiated, though he gave the name okiri for the same kind of

plant in the Everard Ranges. We have discussed the various aboriginal narcotics

in an earlier paper (Johnston and Cleland, 1933; 1934).

Nicotiana Goodspeedii Wheeler, to-wal to-wal. Not used. The term is the

same as that obtained by us, tawalta walta for Solanum ellipticum in the Mus-

grave Range (1937, 211). a

Nicotiana rotundifolia Wheeler, nungar-nunga. Not used. Perhaps this is

the Wirrung name.

MYoPORACEAE

Myoporum platycarpum, boolgar, boolgarba. The gum (boolgarba girrdi or

kirrti) is used for attaching parts of spears, for connecting flints (kandi) to spear-

throwers, and for attaching hair or fur string to the pointing bone. The soft

wood is used for making womerahs and shields and is also utilised in fire-making.

Bates (1918, 154) gave djindidji as the Wirrung name for Myoporum sp.

102

Eremophila spp. Flowers are sucked to obtain nectar.

Eremophila glabra, mindyinga,

Eremophila alternifolia, mindyinga. Mr. Black informed us that walgalga

and gujaru are also applied to the plant.

Eremophila maculata, mindyinga (Mr. J. M. Black).

Eremophila decipiens, mindyinga.

Eremophila gibsoni, ta-lindera, Foliage used (amongst others) for making

the tjali (wreath or pad) worn around the face in an inma (ceremony ).

Eremophila scoparia, kwi-eru. Bates (1917) gave walgala as the Wirrung

name, this being the same as that given above for E, alternifolia.

GOODENIACEAE

Scacvola depauperata, nahmbul nahmbul. Not used.

Calotis erinacea, ulunyu.

Senecio Gregoryt, tju-ter-uru. Same name is applied to a low-growing,

yellow-flowered Helichrysum.

Helichrysum apiculatum, tju-ter-uru.

Podosperma angustifolium, tju-ter-uru. Flowers worn as hair ornaments by

girls and young men,

Funct

Edible mushroom (Psalliota, probably nsp.), tjanbi, tanbi. Mushroom

(general term), tamunara, dhamunara, winji-na,

Battarraea Stevenii, tandi, tandu.

Podaxon pistillaris, kooma-kooma. Used for smearing face and forehead

as a means for personal decoration.

Reddish bracket fungus, Trametes cinnabarica, muldu.

GENERAL TERMS

Tree, warrda; foliage, barraga barraga; plant food, ma, ma-i; leaf, nalbi,

nalpi; stem or stick, boonoo; root, mi-na;. bark, ligarra; ashes, purrgu; seeds,

kalgu; camp made of any kind of bushes suitable for the framework or for the

covering, ngura; vessel of bark or wood and used for digging or for carrying

food and water, wi-ra; spear for close fighting, kadji; jabbing spear, winda;

throwing spear, kula-da; boomerang, kali, kaili.

We have referred in this paper to the inma-tjali, Tjali, t(h)ali, or mang-ari

is the pad of plant material, chiefly grass (but now at Ooldea composed mainly

of old rags made into a ring-like pad), tied up with string made of fur of the

wombat (wardu), and placed on the head for carrying loads. Inma means cere-

mony. The inma tjali is so named because the chief actors (dancers) wear a

large conspicuous, wreath-like structure (tjali) which surrounds the face, It is

composed of leaves and branchlets of any suitable convenient shrubs which can

be formed into a thick ring. This wreath is ‘kept in position by a transverse bar

of plant material held in the mouth. The front portion of the wreath is decorated

with white shavings obtained by scraping the sapwood of E. incrassata (in the

cases observed by us), while the projecting decorated white sticks attached to the

outer border of the wreath were obtained by scraping supple branchlets of the

same tree. The ornamented projecting sticks bore, at intervals, series of curled

shavings still attached at their base, just as Helms (1896, pl. xv, fig. 1; fig. 17)

has indicated in his figures of the yindinga hair ornament for men in the Fraser

Ranges, where it was made of young shoots of Casuarina. Berndt and Johnston

reported that similar hair ornaments were worn by men during the inma which

followed reburial ceremonies at Ooldea.

103

In addition to the various plants already mentioned by us as having been used

in making the tjali, there was another called wallu-wallu, but we were unable to

identify the shrub which had narrow linear lanceolate opposite leaves, rather

greyish-green, and 2°5 cm. long. Acacia brachystachya supplied most of the

material for the wreaths during our visit.

LITERATURE

Apamson, R. S., and Ossorn, T. B. 1922 Trans Roy. Soc. 5S. Aust., 46, 539-564

Bates, D. M. 1918 Trans. Roy. Soc. S Aust., 42, 152-167

Bates, D. M. 1921 Pr. Roy. Geogr. Soc. S. Aust. (1919-1920), 21, 73-78

Bernptr, R. M. 1941 Oceania, 12, (1), 1-20

Brrnot, R. M., and Jounsron, T. H. 1942 Oceania, 12, (3), 189-208

Brack, J. M. 1917 Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 41, 1-13

Biack, J. M. 1917a Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 41, 378-390

Brack, J. M. 1921 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 45, 5-24

Brack, J. M. 1922, 1924, 1926, 1929 Flora of S. Aust., (i-iv)

Botam, A. G. 1925 The Trans-Australian Wonderland, Edit. 4, Melbourne

CLeLcanp, J. B. 1940 Pr. Roy. Soc. Tasm. (1939), 1-18

CreLanp, J. B,, and Jounston, T. H. 1937 Occania, 8, (2), 208-215

Cyiecanp, J. B., and Jounston, T. H. 1938 Oceania, 8, (3), 328-342

Heras, R. 1896 Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 16, (3), 237-332

Jounston, T. H. 1941 Pr. Roy. Geogr. Soc. S. Aust., 42, 33-65

Jounston, T. H., and Cievann,.J. B. 1933 Oceania, 4, (2), 201-223

Jounston, T. H., and Crevanp, J. B. 1934 Oceania, 4, (3), 268-289

MacPuerson, J. 1936 Mankind, 2, (6), 175-180

Macarey, A. T. 1895 Rep. Austr. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 6, 647-658; and in Pr. Roy.

Geogr. Soc. 5. Aust. (1894-1895), 3, 68-86

Mue ter, F. v., and Tate, R. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 16, (3), 333-383

A SYSTEMATIC LIST OF THE HYDROIDA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

WITH A SUMMARY OF THEIR DISTRIBUTION IN OTHER SEAS “?

By M. BLACKBURN, M.Sc.

(Communicated by B. C. Cotton)

Summary

The list here presented includes all species recorded in the literature for definite South Australian

localities, with one new record. It also includes forms recorded simply as from the Great Australian

Bight, some of which may possibly have been taken west and not east of the Western Australian

border, in addition to one (Salacia sinuosa, q.v.) which definitely was so recorded. "South

Australia" for the present purpose, therefore, includes the whole of the Bight. Mr. J. A. Tubb has

examined the collections of the late W. M. Bale in the Melbourne Museum, and Mr. R. E.

Trebilcock has gone over his own collection, in order to ascertain whether there were any species

that had been collected from South Australia but not recorded in the literature; none was found, but

the author is nevertheless indebted to them for their efforts.

104

A SYSTEMATIC LIST OF THE HYDROIDA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

WITH A SUMMARY OF THEIR DISTRIBUTION IN OTHER SEAS) |

By M. Bracxgurn, M.Sc.

(Communicated by B. C. Cotton)

[Read 11 June 1942]

The list here presented includes all species recorded in the literature for

definite South Australian localities, with one new record. It also includes forms

recorded simply as from the Great Australian Bight, some of which may possibly

have been taken west and not east of the Western Australian border, in addition

to one (Salacia sinuosa, q.v.) which definitely was so recorded. “South Aus-

tralia” for the present purpose, therefore, includes the whole of the Bight. Mr.

J. A. Tubb has examined the collections of the late W. M. Bale in the Melbourne

Museum, and Mr. R. E. Trebilcock has gone over his own collection, in order to

ascertain whether there were any species that had been collected from South Aus-

tralia but not recorded in the literature; none was found, but the author is never-

theless indebted to them for their efforts.

The writer has briefly indicated in the publication the systems of classifica-

tion followed. For each species the original reference and two or three additional

ones are given, these latter having been selected so as to indicate, where possible,

the whereabouts of good figures and recent summaries of the synonymy, The

geographical distribution as known is also briefly stated for each ‘form, and the

type locality, as appearing from the literature, is given after the original reference

for each. At the end of the list a summary of the facts of the geographical dis-

tribution is made,

Thanks are due to Dr. E. A. Briggs and Mr. R. E. Trebilcock for making

available certain texts not otherwise procurable.

A page of line drawings of the commoner South Australian hydroids has been

published in the South Australian Naturalist, 21, (2), 4, December 1941,

CLASSIFICATION

The question of family and generic limits in the Iydroida has long been a

vexed one, and several different schemes of classification have been put forward.

The author therefore judges it desirable to indicate by which of the various

systems he has been guided in allotting the species to genera and families,

SERTULARIIDAE—The conception of this family is as held by Broch (1918,

pp. 6, 94-95), Stechow (1923, 153-158) and Splettstosser (1929, esp. 121), ie.,

as including the genera Thyroscyphus and Parascyphus, although Billard (1925,

135) specifically excludes them. As regards generic boundaries Broch (1918,

94-149), Billard (1925, 135-139) and Splettstosser (1929, esp. 122-130) have

been generally followed, rather than Stechow (1923, 153-159). The genus

Sertularia has, however, been regarded in the broad sense of Bale (1915, 258),

i.e., as including even the forms separated off by Broch (1918, 95) under the name

Odontotheca (preocc..= Amphisbetia) as well as the genera Tridentata and

Nemella of Stechow.

SYNTHECIIDAE—Bale (1915, 261-264) has been followed in referring Stereo-

theca (= Levinsenia, preocc.) to this family.

PLUMULARIIDAE—The classification of Bedot (1921a, 1921b, and 1923) has

been followed, except that the genus Antenella has been dropped, and that the

genus-name Halicornaria has been replaced by Gymnangium for the reasons given

by Stechow (1923, 236).

of Fisheries, Cronulla, New South Wales.

Trans. Roy, Soc. S.A., 66 (1), 31 July 1942

105

CAMPANULARIIDAE—The author has generally followed Stechow (1923, 94-

99), although his genus Paracalix has been dropped.

LAFOEIDAE—The species of the old “Cryptolaria” group have been re-allotted

on the basis of the remarks of Totton. (1931, 161-162, 166).

AtHecata—The genus Clathrozoon is referred, following Stechow (1925, 59,

70), to the Bougainvilliidae ; by the system of Broch (1916, 11, 43) it would also

be placed here. The name “Pennaria” has been dropped in favour of Halocordyle

for the reasons given by Stechow (1923, 47-48).

Order ATHECATA

Family BOUGAINVILLUDAE

CLATHROZOON WILSONT Spencer 1891

Clathrozoon wilsoni Spencer 1891, 123, pls. xvii-xx (Port Phillip, Vict.). /dem,

Bale, 1915, 244.

Great Australian Bight, South Australia, Victoria, New South W ales.

Family IALOCORDYLIDAE

HALocorDYLE pIisTIcHa (Goldfuss 1820) var. AusTraLis (Bale 1884).

Pennaria australis Bale 1884, 45 (Port Jackson, N.S.W.).

Halocordyle disticha var. australis, Stechow, 1925, 194.

Pennaria rosea Lendenfeld, 1884, 594, pl. xxiv, fig. 40-42.

Western Australia, South Australia, New South Wales; also New Zealand,

Japan, China, Indochina, East Indies, Mergui, Christmas Islands, India, Ceylon,

East, West and South Africa. Other forms of the species also occur in the

Mediterranean and West Indies regions.

Order THECATA

Family CAMPANULARIIDAE

CAMPANULARIA AUSTRALIS Stechow 1924

Campanularia tincta var. e Mulder and Trebilcock, 1914a, 13, pl. ii, fig. 12, pl. ill,

fig. 9, 10 (Barwon Heads to Torquay, Vict.), and 1915, 56, pl. viii, fig, 2-2:f

(non ftincta Hincks).

Campanularia australis Stechow 1924, 61, and 1925, 206, fig. D (nom. nov.).

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria.

CAMPANULARIA PUMILA Bale 1914

Campanularia pumila Bale 1914a, 4, pl. i, fig. 6-8.

Great Australian Bight.

CAMPANULARIA PULCRATHECA Mulder and Trebilcock 1914

Campanularia pulcratheca Mulder and Trebilcock 1914a, 11, pl. ii, fig. 1, 2 (Tor-

quay, Vict.).

South Australia, Victoria.

SILICULARTA UNDULATA (Mulder and Trebilcock 1914)

Eucopella undulata Mulder and Trebilcock 1914a, 10, pl. ii, fig. 5-7 (Barwon

Heads to Torquay, Vict.).

South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales.

ORTHOPYXIS MACROGONA (Lendenfeld 1884)

Campanularia calyculata var. makrogona Lendenfeld 1884; 922 (Port Phillip,

Vict.).

Orthopyxis macrogona, Bale, 1914c, 77, pls. xi, xii, fig. 2.

South Australia, Victoria, New South ‘Wales; also New Zealand.

106

CLYTIA DELICATULA (Thornely 1900)

Obelia delicatula Thornely 1900, 453, pl. xliv, fig. 7 (New Britain).

Clytia delicatula, Stechow, 1913, 65, fig. xx, xxi, Idem, Blackburn, 1937b, 176,

fig. 7.

South Australia, Victoria, Queensland; also New Britain, Philippines, Japan.

The following species is of uncertain position, owing to the absence of its

gonosome in collected specimens, but seems fairly: close to this genus:

CLYTIA STOLONIFERA Blackburn 1938

Clytia stolonifera Blackburn 1938, 325, fig. 9, 10 (Banks Islands).

South Australia,

OBELIA GENICULATA (Linne 1758)

Sertularia geniculata Linne 1758, 812,

Obelia geniculata, Bale, 1884, 59, pl. ii, fig. 2. /dem, Nutting, 1915, 73, pl. xvili,

fig. 1-5.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales; also all

seas, including the Arctic and Antarctic. (Type locality not specified.)

OxeLta austRALIS Lendenfeld 1884

Obelia australis Lendenfeld 1884, 604, 920, pl. xliii, fig, 19-22 (east coast, New

Zealand). /dem, Blackburn, 1937b, 175, fig. 6.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Australia; also New

Zealand, Ceylon, St. Paul Island.

Family HALECIIDAE

PHYLACTOTHECA ARMATA Stechow 1924

Phylactotheca armata Stechow 1924, 59, and 1925, 204, fig. C (Champion Bay,

West. Aust.).

Ophiodissa fragilis Blackburn 193/a, 365, fig. 1.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria,

HALECIUM MEDITERRANIUM Weismann 1883

Halecium tenellum var. mediterranea Weismann 1883, 160, pl. xi, fig. 5, 6 (Bay

of Naples).

Halectum mediterraneum Stechow, 1919, 34.

Halecium flexile Allman 1888, 11, pl. v, fig. 2, 2a. Idem, Bale, 1915, 246.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales; also New Zealand,

Pacific coast of North America (Nicaragua, British Columbia), Japan, Indo-

china, Ceylon, Marion Island, Mediterranean, West Africa, Patagonia, Antarctica,

Family PLUMULARIIDAE

KIRCUENPAUERIA MIRABILIS (Allman 1883)

Diplocheilus mirabilis Allman 1883, 49, pl. viii, fig. 4-7, (E. Moncoeur Island,

Bass Strait).

Kirchenpaueria mirabilis, Bale, 1894, 109, pl. vi, fig. 4-7. Idem, Stechow, 1925,

241.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania (?), New South

Wales; also New Zealand, South Africa. :

107

KIRCHENPAUERIA, PRODUCTA (Bale 1882)

Plumularia producta Bale 1882, 39, pl. xv, fig. 3 (Queenscliff, Victoria), and 1884,

133, pl. x, fig..4.

Azygoplon productum, Bale, 1888, 774, pl. xix, fig. 1-5.

Kirchenpaueria producta, Bale, 1914a, 59.

South Australia, Victoria, Bass Strait, New South Wales, Queensland ; also

Japan, California.

KiIRCHENPAUERIA BISEPTATA Blackburn 1938

Kirchenpaueria biseptata Blackburn 1938, 318, fig. 3 (Banks Islands).

South Australia.

HALIcoRNOPSIS ELEGANS (Lamarck 1816)

Plumularia elegans Lamarck 1816, 129 (Indian Ocean).

Halicornopsis avicularis Bale, 1882, 14, pl. xii, fig. 3, and 1884, 185, pl. x, fig. 1, 2,

pl. xix, fig. 32.

Halicornopsis elegans, Briggs, 1914, 309.

Great Australian Bight, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South

Wales; also Indian Ocean,

THECOCAULUS oBCONICUS (Kirchenpauer 1876)

Plumularia obconica Kirchenpauer 1876, 46, fig. '5 on pl. i, iii, v (Gulf St. Vin-

cent). Idem, Bale, 1884, 127, pl. xviii, fig. 3-4.

Thecocaulus obconicus, Bedot, 1921, b, 9.

South Australia, (This may be identical with Schizotricha buski, q.v.).

TuecocauLus oprosirus (Mulder and Trebilcock 1911)

Plumularia opposita Mulder and Trebilcock 1911, 120, pl. ii, fig. 5 (Torquay,

Vict.).

Thecocaulus opposita, Bedot, 1921b, 9. Idem, Blackburn, 1938, 316, fig. 2.

South Australia, V ictoria.

SCHIZOTRICHA BUSKI (Bale, 1884)

Plumularia buski Bale 1884, 125, pl. x, fig. 3, pl. xix, fig. 34, 35 (Griffeth Point,

Vict.), and 1915, 296.

Schigotricha buski, Bedot, 1921b, 12.

Great Australian Bight, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, Lord Howe

Island; also Hawaii, Philippines, East Indies, Christmas Island, Ceylon.

ScHIZOTRICHA CAMPANULA (Busk 1852)

Plumularia campanula Bnsk 1852, 401 (Bass Strait). Jdem, Bale, 1884, 124,

pl. x, fig. 5, and 1915, 295.

Schizotricha campanula, Bedot, 1921b, 12.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales, Queensland,

Torres Strait; also New Zealand, Japan, East Indies, Red Sea. (Both the typical

and the Antenella-forms are found in Australia).

ScuizoTRicHa suLccATA (Lamarck 1816)

Plumularia sulcata Lamarck 1816, 128 (“Southern Seas”). Idem, Briggs, 1914,

306, pl. xi, fig. 1.

Plumularia aglaophenoides Bale, 1884, 126, pl. x, fig. 6.

Schizotricha sulcata, Bedot, 1921b, 153.

South Australia, Bass Strait, Tasmania, New South Wales; also Philippines.

108

SCHIZOTRICHA SECUNDARIA (Gmelin 1788-1793)

Sertitlaria secundaria Gmelin 1788-1793, 3,854 ( Mediterranean).

Antenella secundaria, Bedot, 1914, 82, pl. v, fig. 1, 7, 8.

Plumularia liechtensterni Marktanner 1890, 257, pl. vi, fig. 2, 2a.

Schisotricha liechtensterni, Bedot, 1921b, 13.

South Australia, Victoria, Bass Strait (?), Torres Strait; also Tonga, Japan,

Indochina, East Indies, Ceylon, Andaman and Mergui Islands, Chagos Archi-

pelago, Madagascar, East Africa, South Africa, St. Paul Island, Mediterranean,

North-East Atlantic from England to Cape Verde Islands, West Indies. | (Only

the Antenella-form has so far been found in Australia),

PLUMULARIA ASYMMETRICA Bale 1914

Plumularia asymmetrica Bale 1914 a, 29, pl. iv, fig. 2, 3.

Great Australian Bight.

PLUMULARIA AUSTRALIS Kirchenpauer 1876

Plumularia obliqua var. australis Kirchenpauer 1876, 49, pl. vi, fig. x (Port

Phillip, Vict.).

Plumularia australis, Bale, 1884, 143, pl. xii, fig. 7, 8, pl. xix, fig. 43, 44,

South Australia, Victoria.

PLUMULARIA COMPRESSA Bale 1882

Phonularia compressa Bale 1882, 43, pl. xv, fig. 5 (Robe, South Australia), and

1884, 142, pl. xii, fig. 9, 10, pl. xix, fig. 39, 40.

Monothecella compressa, Stechow, 1925, 243.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales.

PLUMULARIA PULCHELLA Bale 1882

Phanularia pulchella Bale 1882, 42, pl. xv, fig. 6 (Queenscliff, Victoria), and

1884, 140, pl. xii, fig. 6, pl. xix, fig. 37. Idem, Totton, 1931, 221, fig. viii.

Plumautaria flexuosa Bale 1894, 115, pl. v, fig. 6-10.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales: also New

Zealand, South Africa.

PLUMULARIA OBLIQUA (Johnston 1847)

Laomedea obliqua Johnston 1847, 106, pl. xxviii, fig. 1 (Brighton, England).

Phanularia obliqua, Bale, 1884, 138, pl. xii, fig. 1-3.

Monotheca obliqua, Stechow, 1919, 113.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania; also North-East Atlantic (England,

France), Mediterranean, Japan.

PLUMULARIA OBESA Blackburn 1938

Phonularia obesa Blackburn 1938, 315, fig. 1 (Banks Island),

South Australia.

PLUMULARIA PROCUMBENS Spencer 1891

Phouularia procumbens Spencer 1891, 130, pls. xxi-xxiii (Port Phillip, Victoria).

Great Australian Bight, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania.

PLUMULARIA ANGUSTA Stechow 1923

Plumularia setaceoides vars. a, b, d Mulder and Trebilcock, 1911, 117-118, pl. iii,

fig. 3, 6, pl. ii, fig. 9. (Point Lonsdale, Corio Bay, Torquay, Victoria), non

setaceoides Bale),

Plumularia angusta Stechow 1923, 226 (nom. nov.).

South Australia, Victoria,

109

GYMNANGIUM BIROSTRATUM (Bale 1914)

Halicornaria birostrata Bale 1914a, 49, pl. iv., fig. 5, pl. vii, fig. 6.

Gymnangium birostratum, Stechow, 1923, 236.

Great Australian Bight.

GYMNANGIUM LONGIROSTRE (Kirchenpauer 1872)

Aglaophenia longirostris Kirchenpauer 1872, 42, pl. i, fig. 19, pl. v, fig. 20

(Wilson’s Promontory, Victoria).

Halicornaria longirostris, Bale, 1884, 181, pl. xmi, fg. 7, pl. xvi, fig. 3, pl. xix,

fig. 30. Idem, Briggs, 1914, 311.

Gymnangium longirostre, Stechow, 1923, 236.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales.

GYMNANGIUM TUBULIFERUM (Bale 1914)

Halicornaria tubulifera Bale 1914b, 187, pl. xxxvi, fig. 3.

Gymnangium tubuliferum, Stechow, 1923, 237.

Great Australian Bight.

GYMNANGIUM URCEOLIFERUM (Lamarck 1816)

Plumularia urceolifera Lamarck 1816, 125 (Indian Ocean).

Holicornaria urceolifera, Bale, 1914a, 51, pl. v, fig. 4, pl. vil, fig. 5, and 1914b,

183, pl. xxxvii, fig. 5, 6.

Gymnanginm urceoliferum, Stechow, 1923, 237,

Great Australian Bight (typical form and var. scandens Bale); and Indian

Ocean.

GYMNANGIUM VEGAE (Jaderholin 1903)

Halicornaria vegae Jaderholm 1903, 301, pl. xv, fig. 1-4 (South Japan). Jdem,

Bale, 1914b, 185, pl. xxxvi, fig. 4, 5.

Gymnangium vegae, Stechow, 1923, 237.

Great Australian Bight; also Japan.

The two following species can be only tentatively assigned to the genus, as

the gonosomes are not yet known:

GYMNANGIUM ILIicIstomuM (Bale 1882)

Aglaophenia ilicistoma Bale 1882, 33, pl. xiv, fig. 4 (Queenscliff, Victoria, and

Robe, South Australia).

Halicornaria ilicistoma, Bale, 1884, 184, pl. xiv, fig. 2, pl. xvi, fig. 9.

Gymnangium ilicistomum, Stechow, 1923, 237.

South Australia, Victoria.

GYMNANGIUM SUPERBUM (Bale 1882)

Aglaophenia superba Bale 1882, 31, pl. xiii, fig. + (Griffeth Point, Victoria).

Halicornaria superba, Bale, 1884, 175, pl. xii, fig. 1, pl. xvi, fig. 4, and 1915, 324.

Gymnangium superbum, Stechow, 1923, 237.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania.

THECOCARPUS CALYCIFERUS (Bale 1914)

Aglaophenia calycifera Bale 1914b, 178, pl. xxxvii, fig. 3, 4 (Great Australian

Bight).

Thecacarpus calyciferus, Bedot, 1921a, 332.

Great Australian Bight; also ? Philippines.

110

THECOCARPUS MEGALOCARPUS (Bale 1914)

Aglaophenia megalocarpa Bale 1914a, 45, pl. iv, fig. 1, pl. vi, fig. 5.

Vhecocarpus megalocarpa, Bedot, 1921a, 333.

Great Australian Bight.

THECOCARPUS TENUISSIMUS (Bale 1914)

Aglaophenia tenuissima Bale 1914b, 179, pl. xxxvii, fig. 1, 2 (Great Australian

Bight ).

Thecocarpus tenuissima, Bedot, 1921a, 334.

Great Australian Bight, Bass Strait, Tasmania.

AGLAOPHENIA BILLARDI Bale 1914

Aglaophenia billardi Bale 1914a, 33, pl. iii, fig. 3, pl. vi, fig. 3.

Great Australian Bight.

AGLAOPHENIA DANNEVIGI Bale 1914

Aglaophenia dannevigi Bale 1914a, 41, pl. iii, fig. 4, pl. vi, fig. 4,

Great Australian Bight.

AGLAOPHENIA DIVARICATA (Busk 1852)

Plumularia divaricata Busk 1851, 398 (Bass Strait),

Aglaophenia divaricata, Bale, 1884, 162, pl. xv, fig. 7, 8, pl. xvii, fig. 6, 7, and

1915, 309-315.

South Australia (typical form and var. cystifera Bale), Victoria, Tasmania,

New South Wales, Lord Howe Island; also Philippines,

AGLAOPHENIA PLUMOSA Bale 1882

Aglaophenia plumosa Bale 1882, 37, pl. xiv, fig. 6 (Queenscliff, Victoria, and

Aldinga South, South Australia), and 1884, 153; pl. xiv, fig. 5, pl. xvii,

fig. 12. Idem, Stechow, 1925, 260.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales; also New

Zealand, South Africa,

AGLAOPHENIA RAMULOSA Kirchenpauer 1872

Aglaophenia ramulosa Kirchenpauer 1872, 41, pl. i, fig. 18 (Port Lincoln, South

Australia). Jdem, Bale, 1884, 170, pl. xviii, fig. 11. Idem, Stechow, 1932, 89,

Aglaophenia acanthocarpa Allman, 1876, 274, pl. xxi, fig. 1-4.

South Australia; also New Zealand, Kermadec Island, ? West Indies.

The following species can only be tentatively assigned to the genus, as the

gonosome is not yet known:

AGLAOPIIENIA CARINIFERA Bale 1914

Aglaophenia carinifera Bale 1914b, 181, pl. xxxviii, fig. 1, 2.

Great Australian Bight.

AGLAOPHENIA WTIITELEGGEI Bale 1888

Aglaophenia whiteleggei Bale 1888, 794, pl. xxi, fig. 8. Idem, Stechow, 1913, 99,

fig. 68-70.

South Australia (Encounter Bay, new record, coll. F. K, Godfrey), Victoria,

New South Wales; also Japan. Type locality not specified.

111

Family LAFOEIDAE

Hepetta cAccaraTa (L. Agassiz 1862)

Laodicea calcarata L. Agassiz 1862, 350 (Buzzard’s Bay, Massachusetts).

Hebella calcarata, Bale, 1915, 251.

Lafoea scandens, Bale, 1888, 758, pl. xiii, fig. 16-19.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales, Lord Ilowe Island;

also New Zealand, Pacific Coasts of Mexico and Panama, Japan, Philippines,

East Indies, Indochina, Maldive Island, Ceylon, East, South and West Africa,

Mediterranean, West Indes, Atlantic Coast of United States, Greenland.

ACRYPTOLARIA ANGULATA (Bale 1914)

Cryptolaria angulata Bale 1914b, 166, pl. xxxv, fig. 1.

Great Australian Bight.

ACRYPTOLARIA ABORIFORMIS (Ritchie 1911)

Cryptoluria arboriformis Ritchie 1911, 824, pl. Ixxxiv, fig. 1, pl. Ixxxvii, fig. 7 (off

Coogee, New South Wales). dem, Bale, 1915, 248.

South Australia, Tasmania, New South Wales.

CRYPTOLARTA EXSERTA Budk 1858

Cryptolaria exserta Busk 1858, 130, pl. xix. fig. 3-31» (Madeira).

Perisiphonia exserta, Bale, 1915, 247.

Perisiphonia filicula Allman, 1888, 44, pl. xxii, fig. 1-4.

Great Australian Bight, Tasmania, New South Wales; also Japan, Madcira,

Azores, ?Atlantic coast of France.

Family LINEOLARIIDAE

LINEOLARIA FLEXUOSA Bale 1884

Lineolaria flexuosa Bale 1884, 62, pl. i, fig. 7-9 (Williamstown, Victoria). Idem,

Blackburn, 1938, 321.

South Australia, Victoria; also New Zealand.

LINEOLARIA INARMATA Blackburn 1938

Lineolaria tnarmata Blackburn 1938, 321, fg. 4-8 (Banks Islands).

South Australia,

Family SY NTHECIIDAE

SYNTHECIUM ELEGANS Allman 1872

Synthecium elegans Allman 1872, 229, fig. (New Zealand). Jdem, Billard 1925,

129, fig. 5.

Synthecium subventricosum Bale, 1914a, 5, pl. i, fig. 3-5.

Great Australian Bight; also New Zealand, Kermadec Islands, Kast Indies,

South and East Africa.

STEREOTITECA ELONGATA (Lamouroux 1816)

Sertularia elongata Lamouroux 1816, 189, pl. v, fig. 3-3e (“Australasia”). Ident,

Bale, 1884, 75, pl. vi, fig. 7, 8, pl. xix, fig. 7.

Stereotheca elongata, Stechow, 1925, 231.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales;

also New Zealand, South Africa, and the North Sea.

STEREOTHECA ACANTHOSTOMA (Bale 1882)

Sertularia acanthostoma Bale 1882, 23, pl. xit, fig. 4 (Robe, South Australia), and

1884, 85, pl. iv, fig. 7, 8.

Stereotheca acanthostoma, Stechow, 1919, 103.

South Australia, Victoria.

Family SERTULARITDAE

THYROSCYPHUS MARGINATUS (Bale 1884)

Campanularia marginata Bale 1884, 54, pl. i, fig. 2 (Queenscliff, Portland Vic-

toria),

Thyroscyphus marginatus, Stechow, 1925, 217.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales; also

Philippines.

ParAsCYPHUS SIMPLEX (Lamouroux 1816)

Laomedea simplex Lamouroux 1816, 206 (“Australasia”).

Parasceyphus simplex, Stechow, 1925, 224.

Campanularia tridentata Bale, 1894, 98, pl. iii, fig. 3.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania; also New Zealand,

Scotland and Gough Island, South Atlantic.

DIPHASIA ATTENUATA (Hincks 1866)

Sertularia attenuata Hincks 1866, 298 (England, various localitics).

Diphasia attenuata Hincks 1868, 247, pl. xlix, fig. 1. Idem, Bale, 1884, 100, pl. ix,

fig. 2.

South Australia; also North-East Atlantic (North-West coast of Africa.

English Channel, North Sea), and Arctic Ocean.

DIPHASIA SUBCARINATA (Busk 1852)

Sertularia subcarinata Busk 18552, 390 (Bass Strait).

Diphasia subcarinata, Bale, 1884, 103, pl. iv, fig. 1, pl. xix, fig. 18, and 1914a, 7.

Great Australian Bight, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South

Wales, Torres Strait.

Hypopyxis LAnrosa Allman 1888

Hypopyxis labrosa Allman 1888, 74, pl. xxxv, fig. 1, la (off Twofold Bay, New

South Wales).

ypopyxis distans Bale, 1914b, 167, pl. xxxv, fig. 2-5.

Great Australian Bight, New South Wales.

DYNAMENA cRistonEs Lamouroux 1824

Dynamena crisiodes lamouroux 1824, 613, pl. xc, fg. 11, 12 (Moluccas). Idem,

Billard, 1925, 181, pl. vii, fig. 21, text fig. 36, 37.

? Western Australia, South Australia, New South Wales, Lord Howe Island,

Queensland; also the Fiji, Gilbert, Ellice and Marshall Islands, Japan, China,

Indochina, Philippines, East Indies, Christmas Island, Maldive-Laccadive Island,

India, Ceylon, East Africa, Seychelles, Chagos Archipelago, Madagascar, South

Africa, tropical West Africa, tropical America, both Atlantic and Pacific, and

? Iceland.

113

DYNAMENA QUADRIDENTATA (Ellis and Solander 1786)

Sertularia quadridentata Ellis and Solander 1786, 57, pl. v, fig. G (near

Ascension).

Pasythea quadridentata, Bale, 1884, 112, pl. vii, fig. 3. Idem, Nutting, 1904, 75,

pl. xiii, fig. 4-7.

Dynamena quadridentata, Billard, 1925, 194.

Western Australia, South Australia, New South Wales, Lord. Howe Island,

Queensland; also New Zealand, Loyalty Island, Hawaii, Japan, China, Philippines,

East Indies, India, Ceylon, South and South-East Africa, Ascension Island,

Azores, Atlantic Ocean, Sargasso Sea, Carolina, West, Indies, Massachusetts,

tropical Pacific America.

DyNAMENA corNicinA McCrady 1859

Dynamena cornicina McCrady 1859, 204 (Charleston, South Carolina). Idem,

Billard, 1925, 188, pl. vii, fig. 23, text-fig. 40.

Sertularia cornicina, Nutting, 58, pl. iv, fig. 1-5.

South Australia, New South Wales; also Japan, Indochina, East Indies,

Andaman Islands, Ceylon, East Africa, Mediterranean, Madeira, North-West

Africa, Nova Scotia, Massachusetts, Carolina, Yucatan, West Indies, Brazil, Cali-

fornia and Pacific coast of Mexico.

SERTULARIA OPERCULATA Linne 1758

Sertularia operculata Linne 1758, 808. Idem, Bale, 1884, 67, pl. vi, fig. 1, pl. xix,

fig. 3. Idem, Nutting, 1904, 54, pl. ii, fig. 3-5.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales: also New Zealand,

Auckland Island, Java, Indian Ocean, St. Paul Island, Kerguelen, South Africa,

Azores, North-West Africa, Atlantic coasts of Europe, Mediterranean, Arctic,

Patagonia, Magellan Strait, Falkland Islands. (‘Type locality not specified.)

SERTULARIA BISPINOSA (Gray 1843)

Dynamena bispinosa Gray 1843, 294 (New Zealand).

Sertularia bispinosa, Bale, 1884, 68, pl. vi, fig. 2, pl. xix, fig. 4,5. Idem, Nutting,

1940, 56, pl. ii, fig. 8-11.

South Australia, Victoria, ? Bass Strait, Lord Howe Island; also New

Zealand, Indian Ocean, east coast of South America.

SERTULARIA MAPLESTONET Bale 1884

Sertularia maplestonei Bale 1884, 70, pl. vi, fig. 4, pl. xix, fig. 2 (Portland, Vic-

toria), and 1914a, 16.

Sertularia bidens Bale, 1884, 70, pl. vi, fig. 6, pl. xix, fig. 1.

Sertularia pulchella Thompson, 1879, 108, pl. xviii, fig. 3, 3a.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales; also South Africa.

Madagascar.

SERTULARIA UNGUICULATA Busk 1852

Sertularia unguiculata Busk 1852, 394 (Banks Strait, Tasmania). Idem, Bale,

1884, 76, pl. vi, fig. 9-12, pl. xix, fig. 8. Idem, Totton, 1931, 203, fig. 48a.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales;

and New Zealand.

ll4

SERTULARIA RECTA Bale 1882

Sertularia recta Bale 1882, 23, pl. xii, fig. 5 (Brighton, South Australia), and

1884, 79, pl. v, fig. 1,

South Australia, Victoria.

SERTULARIA TENUIS Bale 1884

Sertularia tenuis Bale 1884, 82, pl. v, fig. 4, 5, pl. xix, fig. 16 (Williamstown, Vic-

toria), and 1913, 129,

Sertularia divergens Busk (non Lamouroux), 1852, 392. Idem, Bale, 1884, 81,

pl. v, fig. 3, pl. xix, fig. 16.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania; also New Zealand, Tahiti, Philippines,

Maldive-Laccadive Islands, ?Ceylon, East Africa.

SERTULARIA MINIMA Thompson 1879

Sertularia minima Thompson 1879, 104, pl. xvii, fig. 3-3b (Gulf St. Vincent,

South Australia). Jdem, Bale, 1884, 89, pl. iv, fig. 9, 10, pl. xix, fig. 12) 13.

Amphisbetia minima, Stechow, 1925, 230, fig. K.

Western Australia, South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales, Lord Howe

Island; also New Zealand, Kermadec Island, Suez, South Africa, Falkland

Islands, Chile,

SERTULARIA MUELLER: Bale 1913

Sertularia muelleri Bale 1913, 133, pl. xii, fig. 1-5 (Encounter Bay, South Aus-

tralia).

South Australia, Victoria,

SERTULARIA GEMINATA Bale 1884

Sertularia geminata Bale 1884, 78, pl. v, fig. 6, 7, pl. xix, fig. 15 (Queenscliff,

Portland, Victoria), and 1915, 273,

South Australia, Victoria, Bass Strait.

SERTULARIA MARGINATA (Kirchenpauer 1864)

Dynamena marginata Kirchenpauer 1864, 13, fig. 8-8c (Pacific Ocean).

Sertularia marginata, Bale, 1913, 133, pl. xii, fig. 1-5. Jdem, Totton, 1931, 204,

hg. 48b.,

South Australia, Victoria; also New Zealand, Mediterranean, East Africa,

West Africa, Cape Verde Islands, #Azores, West Indies, Brazil ? Carolina,

SERTULARIA BRUNNEA (Stechow 1923)

Sertularia sp., Thompson, 1879, 106, pl. xvili, fig. 1-1b (Gulf St. Vincent, South

Australia),

Tridentata brunnea Stechow 1923, 206 (nom, nov.).

South Australia. This species may be identical with S. ungiculata (q.v.).

SERTULARIA MINUSCULA Bale 1919

Sertularia minima var. tubatheca Mulder and Trebilcock, 1914b, 40, pl. iv,

fg. 1-1d (Queenscliff, Victoria).

Sertularia minuscula Bale 1919, 340,

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania.

115

SERTULARELLA INDIVISA Bale 1882

Sertularella indivisa Bale 1882, 24, pl. xii, fig. 7 (Williamstown, St. Kilda, Vic-

toria), and 1884, 105, pl. iii, fig. 5, pl. xix, fig. 27, and 1915, 285.

South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South Wales, lord Howe Island;

also 2Tahiti, Chatham Islands, Japan, Cuba.

SERTULARELLA PYGMAEA Bale 1882

Sertularella pygmaca Bale 1882, 25, pl. xii, fig. 9 (Queenscliff, Griffeth Point,

Victoria), and 1884, 108, pl. iii, fig. 8 pl. xix, fig. 19.

South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales; and New Zealand.

SERTULARELLA DIVARTCATA (Busk 1852)

Sertularia divaricata Busk 1852, 388 (Bass Strait).

Sertularella divaricata, Bale, 1884, 110, pl. ili, fig. 9, pl. xix, fig. 20, and 1914'a,

20, pl. ii, fig. 1-9.

Great Australian Bight, South Australia, Victoria, Tasmania, New South

Wales, Queensland; also Patagonia, Strait of Magellan, Tierra del Fuego, Chile,

Antarctica.

SERTULARELLA NEGLECTA Thompson 1879

Sertularella neglecta Thompson 1879, 100, pl. xv, fig. 1 (“Australia, probably

Bass Strait”). Jdem, Bale, 1884, 110, pl. ii, fig. 3, pl. xix, fig. 22, 23, and

1915, 287.

South Australia, Victoria, ?Bass Strait.

SERTULARELLA LATA (Bale 1882)

Thuiaria lata Bale 1882, 26, pl. xiii, fig. 2 (Griffcth Point, Victoria), and 1884,

120, pl. vil, fig. 4.

Sertularella lata, Bale, 1915, 287.

Great Australian Bight, Victoria, New South Wales, Torres Strait.

SERTULARELLA ROBUSTA Coughtrey 1875

Sertularella robusta Coughtrey 1875, 300 (Otago, New Zealand). Idem,

Trebilcock, 1928, 16, pl. vi, fig. 3-3¢. /dem, Blackburn, 1937b, 171, fig. 1.

South Australia, Victoria, ? Tasmania, ? New South Wales; also New

Zealand, East Indices, Tierra del Fuego.

The following species is not known from South Australia proper, but is

recorded from the Great Australian Bight, in longitude 127° cast, which is some-

what west of the South Australian-Western Australian border. It seems reason-

able to include it here, however, the more so as it is recorded also from Tasmania

and (with doubt) from Victoria:

Saracia stnuosa (Bale 1888)

Thuiaria sinuosa Bale 1888, 772, pl. xviii, fig. 9, 10 (Port Molle, Queensland),

and 1915, 279.

Salacia sinuosa, Billard, 1915, 204, pl. viii, fig. 20, text-fig. 48,

Great Australian Bight, ? Victoria, Tasmania, New South Walcs, Lord Howe

Island, Queensland; also East Indies.

116

The list just given includes, as has already; been pointed out, all species

definitely known to occur in the waters of South Australia, including all the Bight.

However, there are a few other forms which have been recorded both from Vis-

toria or Bass Strait, and from south-western Australia (i.¢., Western ‘Australia,

south of the Tropic), and which could therefore be regarded as likely to occur,

and to some time be discovered, in South Australia. For the sake of the student

collector this list is briefly presented below, with one gcod reference to each

species :

Order ATHECATA

Family TALOCORDYLIDAE

Halocordyle wilsoni (Bale 1913). (See Blackburn, 1937b, 176, fig. 8, 9, as

Pennaria wilsont),

Family CAMPANULARIIDAE

Campanularia ambiplica Mulder and Trebilcock 1914. (See Stechow, 1925, 209,

fig. E, as Paracalix ambiplica).

Family PLUMULARIIDAE

“Anienella” dubia (Mulder and Trebilcock 1911). (See Mulder and Trebilcock,

1911, 115, pl. ii, fig. 6, as Phumularia campanulaformis var. dubia.)

Plumularia crateriformis Mulder and Trebilcock 1911. (See Mulder and

Trebilcock, 1911, 118, pl. iti, fg. 8, 8, as P. setaceoides var. crateriformas. )

Plunularia setaceoides Bale 1882. (See Bale, 1884, 136, pl. xi, fig. 8, pl. xix,

fig. 36.)

Plumudaria spinulosa Bale 1882. (See Bale, 1884, 139, pl. xii, fig. 11, 12.)

Family SERTULARHDAE

Sertularia ligulata Thornely 1904. (See Stechow, 1925, 232, fig. L, as Tridentata

turbinata. )

Idiella pristis (Lamouroux 1816). (See Allman, 1888, p. 85, pl. xxxix, fig, 1-10,

as [dia pristis.)

DISTRIBUTION OF SOUTH AUSTRALIAN Hyproips IN OTHER WATERS

The percentages of South Australian Hydroids occurring in other waters,

both in Australia and beyond, indicate the relative affinities of other seas to those

of South Australia in this respect. In the following brief analysis on these lines

doubtful records are considered.

Of the 84 species of Hydroida definitely listed for South Australia (including

the Bight) there are: ie

16 (19%) peculiar to South Australia; 15 (18%) which range into Western

Australia, excluding the Bight; 54 (63%) which range into Victoria); 28+5

(34% ) which range into Tasmania) ; 37 (44%) which range into New South

Wales‘); 9 (11%) which range into Queensland, including Torres Strait;

25 (30%) which range into New Zealand, including Kermadec and Chatham

® Actually the figure is 53 (63%), but if Bass Strait is included it becomes 55

(65%). We take the mean of these two.

@) Actually the figure is 27 (32%), but if Bass Strait is included it becomes 30

(36%). We take the mean of these two.

©) Actually the figure is 36 (43%), but if Lord Howe Island is included it becomes

37 (45%). We take the mean of these two.

117

Islands; 16 (19%) which range into Japan; 7 (8%) which range into Pacific

coasts of North America; 4 (3%) which range into Pacific coasts of South and

Central America, excluding the Patagonian region; 20 (24%) with range into

Indo-Malaya (Philippines, East Indies, India, etc.); 6 (7%) which range into

Oceania (New Britain, Hawaii, Tahiti, etc.) ; 12 (14%) which range into East

Africa, including Red Seca, Madagascar, ete.; 14 (17%) which range into South

Africa; 12 (14%) which range into West Africa, including Ascension, Azores,

etc.; 9 (11%) which range into the Mediterranean ; 7 (8%) which range into

Atlantic coasts of Europe; 4 (5%) which range into Atlantic coasts of Canada-

U.S.A. to the Gulf of Mexico; 9 (11%) which range into the Brazil—Caribbean

region; 6 (79%) which range into the Patagonian region; 4 (5%) which range into

the Arctic Occan; 6 (7%) which range into the Subantarctic Islands (St. Paul,

Barion, Gough, Kerguelen, Macquarie, Auckland Islands}; 3 (4%) which range

into Antarctica.

LITERATURE CITED

Acassiz, L. 1862 Contributions to the Natural History ot the United States,

4 (Boston)

Attman, G. J. 1872 A Monograph of the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian

Ilydroids, Ray. Soc., London

ALLMAN, G. J. 1876 Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool., 12, 251-284

ALLMAN, G. J. 1883 Report on the Hydroida. I. Plumulariidae. Rep. Sci.

Res. “Challenger Exped., Zool., 7

Auttman, G. J. 1888 Report on the [fydroida, LI. Ibid,, 23

Bate, W. M. 1882 Journ. Micro. Soc. Vic., 2, 15-48

BALE, W. M. 1884 Catalogue of the Australian Hydroid Zoophytes. Aust.

Museum, Sydney

Bars, W. M. 1888 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., (2), 3, 745-799

Bate, W. M. 1894 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., n.s. 6, 93-117

Batz, W. M. 1913 Jbid., ns., 26, 114-147

Bate, W. M. 1914a Commonwealth Fisheries, Biol. Res. “Endeavour,” 2, (1),

1-62

Bare, W. M. 1914b Jbid., 2, (4), 166-188

Bate, W. M. 1914¢ Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., n.s., 27, 72-93

BALE, W. M. 1915 Commonwealth Fisheries, Biol. Res. “Endeavour,” 3, (5),

241-336

Batr, W. M. 1919 Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict., n.s., 31, 327-361

Bevot, M. 1914 Arch. Zool. Exp. Gen., 54, 79-98

Pepot, M. 1921a Rev. Suisse Zool., 28, 311-356

Bepot, M. 1921b Jbid., 29, 1-40

Bepot, M. 1923 Ibid., 30, 213-243

Brttarp, A. 1925 Siboga-Exped., Monog., 76

Biacksurn, M. 1937a Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., m.s., 49, 364-371

Biackpurn, M. 1937b Jbid., n.s., 50, (1), 170-181

Buackpurn, M. 1938 Jbid., ns., 50, (2), 312-328

Briccs, E. A. 1914 Proc, Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 48, 302-318

Brocu, H. 1916 Danish Ingolf Exped., 5, (6)

Brocx, H. 1918 Jbid., 5, (7)

Busx, G. 1852 Macgillivray’s Narrative of the Voyage of H.M.S, “Rattle-

snake, 1, App. 4, 385-402

Busx, G. 1858 Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci., 6, 124-130

Coucutrey, M. 1875 Trans. N.Z. Inst., 8, 298-302

Exuis, J., and Soranper, D. 1786 The Natural History of many curious and

uncommon Zoophytes collected from various parts of the Globe.

(London)

118

GmeLin, J. F. 1788-1793 In Linnacus, Systema Naturae, 1, (6), ed. xiii

Gray, J. E. 1843 In Dieffenbach’s Travels in New Zealand, 2, 292-295

Hincxs, T. 1866 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (3), 18, 296-299

Hincxs, T. 1868 A History of the British Hydroid Zoophytes, 2 vols.

(London)

JaperHo”m, EF. 1903 Arkiv. f. Zool., 1, 259-312

Jounston, G. 1847 A History of the British Zoophytes, ed. ii. (London)

Kircuenpaurr, G. II. 1864 Verhandl. Leop.-Carol. Akad., Dresden, 31, 1-16

KircHeNPAverR, G, H. 1872 Abh. Naturwiss. Verein, Ilamburg, 5, 1-52

Kircoenpaver, G. H. 1876 Ibid., 6, 1-59

Lamarck, J. B. P. de 1816 Histoire naturelle des Animaux sans Vertébres. 2,

Polypes. (Paris)

LAmouroux, J. V. F, 1816 Histoire des Polypiers coralligénes, flexibles vul-

gairement nommés Zoophytes. (Caen)

Lamouroux, J. V. I’. 1824 Description des Polypiers flexibles dans Quoy et

Gaimard. Voyage autour du monde, exécute sur les corvettes de S.M.

VP “Uranie” et la “Physicienne,” pendant des années, 1817-1820, par

M. L, de Freycinet. (Paris)

LENDENFELD, R. von 1884 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 9, 206-241, 345-353, 401-

420, 467-492, 581-634, 908-924, 980-985

Linneé, C. 1758 Systema naturae, ed. x

McCrany, J. 1859 Proc. Elliot Soc. Nat. Hist., Charleston, 1, 103-221, pl. vili-xii

MARKTANNER-TURNERETSCUER, G. 1890 Ann. dik‘. Naturh. Hofmus., Wien, 5,

195-286

Mutoprr, J. F., and Trenincoce, R. E. 1911 Geelong Nat., (2), 4, (4), 115-

124

Mutprer, J. F., and Trenicocx,.R. E. 1914a Jbid., 6, (1), 6-15

Mutprr, J. F., and Trepincocx, R. E. 1914b Ibid., 6, (2), 38-47

Nutting, C. C. 1904 American Ilydroids, II. Sertularidae. Smiths Inst.,

U.S. Nat. Mus, Special Bulletin.

Nutrine, C. C. 1915 American Hydroids, III, Campanularidae and Bonne-

viellidae. Lid.

Rarcuie, J. 1911 Mem. Aust. Mus., 4, (2), 807-869

Spencer, W. B. 1891 Trans. Roy. Soc. Vict., 2, (1), 121-140, pl. xvii-xxili

SPLETTSTOSSER, W. 1929 Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 58, 1-134

sTecHow, E. 1913 Abh. Math.-Phys. Klasse Bayr. Akad. Wiss., 3, Suppl. —

Bd. 2, Abh., 1-16

StecHow, E. 1919 Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 42, 1-172

StTecHow, E. 1923 Ibid., 47, 29-270

StecHow, E. 1924 Zool. Anz., 59, 57-69

sTecHow, I. 1925 Zool. Jahrb., Syst., 50, 191-269

THompson, D’A. W. 1879 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5), 3, 97-114

THornety, L. E. 1900 Willey’s Zool. Res., 4, 451-458

Torron, A. K. 1931 Brit. Mus. Nat. Hist., Brit, Antarctic Iexped., 1910, Nat.

Hist. Rep., Zool., 5, (5), 131-252

Trepitcock, R. E. 1928 Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., ms., 41, 1-31

WEIsMANN, A. 1883 Die Entsteiung der Sexualzellen beiden Hydromedusen

(Jena)

Wholly set up and printed in Australia by Gillingham & Cao. Limited, 106 Currie Street, Adelaide

x ee a yt ee

re < ra 5 et. 7 “i ae

rene FA,

VOL. 66 PART 2 . . 18 DECEMBER 1942

(Issued 24 March 1943)

RERPNARD-CLORLCh

HBEnNNARD- Weed EGH,

4 S| Tease Df ‘ oe Me ape ss

(E65 WELLINGTON RO. ADELAISE;

SOUTH AUSTRALIA,

TRANSACTIONS OF

THE ROYAL SOCIETY

OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

INCORPORATED

ADELAIDE

PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS

KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE

Price —- - Twelve Shillings and Sixpence

Registered at the General Post Office, Adelaide,

for transmission by post as a periodical

penile:

ees Sa

THE LIFE HISTORY OF THE

TREMATODE, PARYPHOSTCIMUM TENUICOLLIS (S. J. JOHNSTON)

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and L. MADELINE ANGEL, University of Adelaide

Summary

During routine examinations of the fluke parasitism of pond snails in the Tailem Bend swamps

carried out since April 1937, we have found a 27-spined echinostome cercaria to be one of the most

common parasites of Americanna spp. Altogether it has occurred in 655 of a total of 12,482 of the

snails examined (5-2%). The greatest numbers of snails found infected with the cercariae were 88 of

676 (in April 1939) and 194 of 1,687 (December 1941). We have obtained the cercaria from

October to May, inclusive. Amerianna pyramidata and A. pectorosa were the most common hosts,

but A. fenuistriata was also found infected.

119

THE LIFE HISTORY OF THE

TREMATODE, PARYPHOSTOMUM TENUICOLLIS (8. J. Johnston)

3y T. Harvey Jomnxston and L, Maverine ANGEL, University of Adelaide

[Read 13 August 1942]

During routine examinations of the fluke parasitism of pond snails in the

Tailem Bend swamps carried out since April 1937, we have found a 27-spined

echinostome cercaria to be one of the most common parasites of Aimerianna spp.

Altogether it has occurred in 655 of a total of 12,482 of the snails examined

(5°2%). The greatest numbers of snails found infected with the cercariae were

88 of 676 (in April 1939) and 194 of 1,687 (December 1941). We have obtained

the cercaria from October to May, inclusive. Aimerianna pyramidata and A, pec-

torosa were the most common hosts. but A. fenuistriate was also found infected.

In November 1939, two of 187 Amerianna spp. collected from the John

Warren Reservoir, South Australia, were parasitised with the same cercaria which

we also obtained from two of 41 of these snails from the River Finnis in March

1941.

Because of the number and arrangement of collar spines, we had for some

time thought this cercaria to be the larva of Paryphostomum tenuicollis (3. J.

Johnston), which we have found to be a very common parasite of cormorants,

Phalacrocorax spp., from the River Murray area,

We have several times attempted to infect snails (AAmerianna spp., Limnaca

lessoni and Planorbis ising’) by placing them in small tanks or dishes containing

eggs of Paryphostomum tenuicollis, The snails were kept in the containers for

six to eight weeks (to allow for hatching of miracidia), and were then transferred

to aquaria. The snails were tested weekly while they were alive (by isolation in

small ttibes of water), and were dissected when they died. Only one of the snails

(an Amerianna pectorosa) produced cereariae, which were of the familiar

27-spined form. The snail had been placed in contact with eggs on 15 December

1941, and further eggs were added to the tank on 3 February 1942. On 25 March

the snail commenced to give off cercariae. The other eleven Amerianna in the tank

had died within four weeks of the original infection; six Aimerianna added at the

time of the second infection were too disintegrated when found dead to show

whether any rediae had been present.

This small percentage of positive results with experimental infections is not

uncommon in our experience. We consider that the main reason is that the fluke

eggs are often not viable, from one cause or another.

Since February 1940 a 27-spined cercaria has been found in 90 of 1,299

Limnaea iessoni from Tailem Bend. The cereariae from this host tend ‘to be

slightly smaller than Cercaria Paryphostomi-tenuicollis from Amerianna spp.,

though morphologically we are not able to distinguish them. These cercariae

encyst in the same kind of fish and tadpoles, and the cysts are similar to those of

Paryphostomum tenuicollis, though they also are a trifle smaller, The size and

arrangement of the corner and shoulder spines of the collar of the metacercariae

derived from the two snail hosts are the same, and the only feature by which the

collars may have been distinguished, i.¢., the relative sizes of the spines in the two

dorsal rows, did not allow of accurate determination,

Jn the absence of experimental evidence proving the cercaria from Limnaea

to be the larva of F. tenuicollis, we have used the cerearia from Amerianna spp.

as our type. We have not previously recorded any single species of cercaria

occurring in two such different snail hosts as Amerianna and Limnaea,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

120

ADULT

The adult was described originally as Echinochasmus tenuicollis by the late

Professor S. J. Johnston (1916) from Phalacrocorax melanoleucus from New

South Wales. We have collected it, sometimes in great abundance, from P. carbo

(Tailem Bend; Ilope Valley Reservoir), P. melanoleucus, P. fuscescens and

P. sulcirostris (syn, P. ater) (all from Tailem Bend),

The following are measurements of the collar spines of one specimen (in

glycerine): corner spines breadth, 25 to 27; length of ventral inner spines,

112; ventral outer, 105%; upper inner, 118»; upper outer, 136; next spine

(which is in series with the second row of dorsal spines), 92 to 97 by 17:5 p;

shoulder spines, 107 » by 17-5 4; anterior dorsal series, 102 p by 17'5 «3 second

dorsal series, 92 to 95 » by 17°5 p.

THe Eoc

Size, about 70-84 » long by 58-63 ». The miracidium has not been observed.

Repra

Rediae when dissected from the snails seemed to fall into two distinct size

groups. The larger of these had a range (for ten specimens) of 1-1-5 mm. in

length and 120-170 » in breadth; while for the smaller group the range in length

was 300-585 » (average 415 »), and in breadth 58-84 » (average 67 p). It seems

probable that the smaller group was composed of daughter rediae, since there were

very few rediae intermediate in size between the two groups; but none of these

“daughter rediae” was seen within the “mother redia,” nor did the former contain

any structures resembling cercariae or even germ balls, so that they may have

arisen from a Jater infection.

The walls of the larger rediae have orange colouring ; the intestine is generally

a darker orange and sometimes black in parts, and extends about two-thirds of

the body length, to, or just beyond, the foot processes, The pharynx is often

situated in a small anterior prolongation, The collar consists of four prominences

connected by a slight ridge. Beaver (1937, 13) noted, for rediae of Echinostoma

revolutum, that the pharynx and gut changed in relative size as the rediae increased

in total length, that the collar became Jess conspicuous in the mother rediae, and

that the walls of rediae of the “daughter” generation contained no yellow pigment.

These observations also apply to rediae of Paryphostomuim tenuicollis.

Rediae may persist within the snail host from one season to the next; four

snails obtained in the summer or autumn of 1941 were still emitting cercariae

when retested in the spring (October), and continued to do so until they died

in November.

CERCARIA

The cercariae are evidently released from the redia some time before they

emerge from the snail, for snails which arc killed and dissected immediately atfter-

wards show numerous cercariac free in the liver. The free-swimming life is of

less than 24 hours’ duration, The swimming action is typical, though microscopi-

cally the tail appears somewhat longer than that of the average echinostome,

Size of ten specimens preserved with boiling 10% formalin: length 220-300 p

(average 250); breadth at widest poimt 117-150 (average 128); length of

tail 350-500 » (average 434 ») ; breadth of tail 38-50 1 (average 43 2).

The collar and its spines are described for the metacercaria, in which stage

the spines can be counted more satisfactorily, since it is usually difficult to do so

in the cercaria.

The cuticle is slightly roughened, but there is no noticeable spination. The

whole body, with the exception of the two suckers, stains evenly with neutral red;

the tail itself stains only faintly, but its many nuclei appear dark and granular.

121

The cystogenous cells are a characteristic feature; they contain yellowish rod-

like granules which lie parallel in from one to three groups in each cell. The cells

themselves lie roughly in four main longitudinal groups, one on each side of the

main arms of the bladder, Gland cells are not visible even with intra-vitam

staining, but in the region surrounding the oral sucker traces of ducts are

occasionally seen, On either side of the anterior end of the prepharynx, two or

three greenish refractive bodies are regularly present (see fig. 1).

Both suckers are provided with a transparent frill which is an extension of

the cuticle. The acetabulum is a deep cup and is very prominent in lateral view.

It is larger than the oral sucker. Measurements from five cercariae cleared in

glycerine were: oral sucker 42,» transversely by 38 lengthways; acetabulum

70 » by 55, the ratio of transverse diameters being 3:5, and that of lengths

about 5:7. ,

O-I1mm

Fig. 1-7, Cercaria Paryphostomi-tennicollis: 1, glycerine mount, with some details

from living cercaria incorporated, cvstogenous cells shown only in one quadrant of

body; 2, stained preparation; 3, formalinised specimen, side view; 4, “mother” redia;

5. “daughter” redia; 6, metacercaria, stained preparation; 7, cyst glycerine).

Fig. 8, Paryphosionuan tenuicollis, collar spines. Fig. 1, 6, 7, to same scale; fig. 4, 5, 8;

3, sketch. c, cystogenous cells; g, genital anlage; Le. Icbes of collar; r, refractive

bodies.

122

Prepharynx short, pharynx relatively small; walls of oesophagus composed

of seven or eight large cells with clear, uon-granular nuclei. Each crus is narrow

in the region anterior and antero-lateral to the acetabulum, but broadens out

posteriorly. The crura show the same type of cellular structure as the oesophagus,

The main arms of the bladder in the region anterior to the acetabulum con-

tain about thirty fairly large excretory granules, there being one or two across

the diameter of the tubes. The junction of anterior and posterior collecting tubes

is at the mid-acetabular level, The total number of flame cells is probably thirty,

composed on each side of two groups of three opening into the posterior collecting

tubule, with one group of three and six single flame cells opening into the anterior

tubule. The formula can therefore be expressed as probably 2 | (6 + 3) +

(3 + 3) |. No flames were seen in any of the excretory tubes. The excretory

pore opens dorsally near the posterior border of the bladder; no excretory tube

has been seen in the tail.

The reproductive anlage is indicated in fig. 2, The tail has no fin-fold.

Cysr

Cercaria Paryphostomi-tenuicollis has been found experimentally to encyst

beneath the scales and in the sub-cutaneous tissues, mainly in the head region, of

the aquarium fish, Carassius auratus, Phalloceros caudomaculatus, Barbus sp.

Gambusia affinis and Oryzias latipes; and beneath the skin of tadpoles of Pseudo-

phryne bibroni, 1t does not encyst in the molluscs, Planorbis isingi, Limnaea

lessoni, Amerianna pyramidata, A. pectorosa, A. tenuistriata or Corbiculina angasi;

in the leech, Glossiphonia sp. or in the common planarian (? Dalyellia). It has

been found as a natural infection in the following fish from the Tailem Bend

swamps: Carassius auratus, Pseudaphritis urvillit, and Tandanus tandanus,

The cysts may be round, but are generally, slightly elliptical, the average of

ten living specimens being 170 by 140 (range 160 to 184 y long, 134 to 150%

wide).

METACERCARIA

The collar and body spination have become much more definite since the

cercarial stage, but otherwise there is little further development apparent, although

the difficulty of excysting metacercariac undamaged prevented as detailed study

being made as was possible with the cercaria, The body spines extend over the

whole body, but are more prominent anteriorly. The collar spines total 27; on

each side there is a corner group of 4, followed by three or four, forming the

“shoulder,” and the remaining (dorsal) spines are arranged alternately, the two

series being uninterrupted. The corner spines are about 19 long; sometimes

one, sometimes two, of the group appear to he shorter (about 15), The first

shoulder spine is regularly smaller than any others, being about 12» long; the

uext two show a gradual increase towards the size of the dorsal spines, These

latter could not be measured accurately because of fore-shortening caused by the

position in which the metacercaria seemed to be fixed on liberation from the cyst.

Attempts to obtain the adult stage experimentally by feeding cysts to various

birds—three pigeons, a fowl and a canary—gave negative results in all cases.

RELATIONSILIPS

From the descriptions of cercariae with 27 spines to which we have had

access, Cercaria Paryphostomi-tenuicollis shows the closest resemblance to

C. Euperyphii-melis, described by Beaver in 1941. The latter appears to be

definitely larger, but in most anatomical features it is extraordinarily like our

cercaria. The rediae of the two forms are also similar in having a four-lobed

collar, though in Beaver’s ferm the collar is stated to he completely divided into

123

four lobes, while in the redia of Paryphostomuitin tenuicollis the lobes appear to be

connected. from the similarity in the life history stages it seems obvious that

the genera Euparyphium and Paryphostomum must be closely related, and indeed,

ithe general appearance of P. tenuicellis and Beaver’s figures of Euparyphium. melis

is smular. The main characters distinguishing the two genera are the presence,

in the latter, of markedly lobed testes; large, very muscular acetabulum, which

is clongated posteriorly; and the small cirrus sac which lies mainly in front of

the acetabulum.

SUM MARY

1 Paryphostomum tenuicollis is shown experimentally to have its redia stage in

Amerianna spp, Linnaea lessoni is parasitised by a cerearia which is regarded

as belonging to the same spccies.

The various stages in the life history are described.

3 The cerearia is a 27spined form which is a common parasite of Amerianna spp.

in the Tailem Bend swamps, and is also recorded from two other localities in

South Australia,

4 The cyst stage occurs in various freshwater fish, and less commonly in

tadpoles.

5 The occurrence and distribution of the adult from various species of

Phalacrocorax are listed.

6 A description of the collar spination of the metacercaria and adult is given,

We desire to make the usual acknowledgments: to the Commonwealth

Research Grant to the University of Adelaide; to Messrs. G. and F. Jaensch, and

L.. Ellis, of Tailem Bend; as well as to Mrs. E. R. Sinpson, who carried out a

preliminary study on the cercaria.

Slides of all stages described in this paper, and in others of the series dealing

with trematode life cycles, have been deposited in the South Australian Museum.

REFERENCES

Beaver, P. C. 1937 Experimental Studies on Echinostoma revolutum. Ulinois

3iol. Monogr., 15, 1-96

Braver, P. C. 1941 Studies on the life history of Euparyphinm melis. Jour.

Parasit., 27, 35-44

Jounsron, S. J. 1916 On the trematode parasites of Australian birds. Jour.

Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 50, 187-261

AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA OF THE

FAMILIES HYDROBIDAE, ASSIMINEIDAE AND ACMEIDAE

By BERNARD C. COTTON

Summary

In this paper the genera and species of the difficult families Hydrobiidae, Assimineidae and

Acmeidae are discussed, and an effort is made to decide which genera are correctly used for the

Australian species, which are valid and which are synonyms. Each genus listed is followed by the

author, date, genotype, locality and distribution. The first locality is that of the type.

124

AUSTRALIAN GASTROPODA OF THE

FAMILIES HYDROBIIDAE, ASSIMINEIDAE AND ACMEIDAE

By Bernarp C, CoTTON

[Read 13 August 1942|

Pirate 1V anp V

In this paper the genera and species of the difficult families Hydrobiidae,

Assimineidae and Acmeidae are discussed, and an effort is made to decide which

genera are correctly used for the Australian species, which are valid and which

are synonyms. Each genus listed is followed by the author, date, genotype,

locality and distribution. The first locality is that of the type.

Family ILYDROBIIDAE

Genera represented in Australia and Tasmania are Tatea, Petterdiana, Tas-

maniella, and Austropyrgus gen. nov. The species of Talea have been dealt with

in the previous part of this journal (66, (1), 81). The whole of the species of

the other three genera are here reviewed, An extensive representative series of

the numerous Tasmanian species of this family is in the May Collection, which

was purchased some years ago by Sir Joseph Verco and presented to the South

Australian Museum.

Genus PerrerpiANa Brazier 1895

Petterdiana Brazier 1895, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 105, Genotype Ampullaria

tasmanica Tenison Woods 1876, North Tasmania.

Brazieria Petterd 1888, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 76 (same genotype). nec Brazieria

Ancey 1887, Conch. Exch., 2, 22.

Pseudampullaria Ancey 1898, Bull. Mus. Marscille, 1, 147,

Distribution—Northern Tasmania.

The generic description reads: “Shell globosely rounded, imperforate; spire

small, body-whorl large; aperture very oblique, effuse; outer lip acute, inner lip

thickened; operculum horny, subspiral. Animal, ?” Conchologically this genus

is closely allied to the next, Tasmaniella, but differs in the more globose shell with

shorter spire.

Species recorded are: Petterdiana paludinea Reeve 185/, “Tasmania”

(= tasmanica Venison Woods 1876, North Tasmania = tasmaniae ‘late and

Brazier 1881, Tasmania); tasmanica Tenison Woods 1875, Goulds Country,

North-East ‘Tasmania.

Genus TASMANIELLA Ancey 1898

Tasmaniclla Ancey 1898, Bull. Mus. Marseille, 1, 148. Genotype Ammicola

launcestoncnsis Johnston 1878, North Tasmania.

Beddomeia Petterd 1888, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 73, genotype B. launcestonensis

Johnston 1878, preoce., Beddomea Nevillle 1878, Hand Jist Moll, Ind. Mus.,

1, 127, for a land snail.

Distribution—Northern Tasmania.

This genus appears to have been overlooked by Australian and Tasmanian

conchologists. Whether it will survive as a separate genus or will be placed as a

synonym of the previous onc is a matter to be decided by future study. Species

we allot to this genus are: Tasmaniella lawncestonensis Johnston 1878, Launces-

ton and South Esk River; minima Pctterd 1888, stream near Heazlewoad River,

North-west Tasmania; hullii Petterd 1888, stream near Heazlewood River;

lodderae Petterd, creek near Upper Castra, River Leven, North-west Tasmania.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

125

Austropyrgus gen. nov,

Genotype Paludina nigra Quoy et Gaimard 1935, from small freshwater

creeks, D’Entrecasteaux Channel, Tasmania.

Distribution—-South Australia, Victoria, New South Wales, and Tasmania.

Shell small, moderately elongated, pointed, whorls four and a half, convex,

typically smooth though sometimes more or less sharply carinated or even bearing

a spiral line of interrupted pointed spines, variations which might occur in the same

species in different localities or may be all represented in the one species in the

one pool; in stagnant or jstill water the shell may be black due to an external coat

of decaying vegetable matter, whereas in clear running water the shell is pale

yellowish horn-coloured and subtranslucent. Operculum thin, corneous, pauci-

spiral. Animal with a narrow foot which is expanded in front, opaque, white

shaded with very pale bluish-grey, tentacles and rostrum shaded with dark bluish-

grey; tentacles long, slender and pointed; eyes plainly visible under the lens at

the outer base of the tentacles; rostrum thick, projecting and wrinkled; radula

with central basal lobe of the rachidian tooth much produced, first lateral very

much bent bearing twelve round denticles, second lateral bearing similar denticles

which are however in this genus separated and number eleven, marginal tooth with

five obsolete denticles ; formula of denticles 9/3°3-—12-—11—-5.

Australian and Tasmanian species of this genus have been erroneously placed

in various non-Australian genera stich as Hydrobia, Bythinella, Bythinia, Potamo-

pyrgus, all of which show some conchological similarity but considerable dis-

similarity in the animal. A brief description of some of these genera, based on

their genotypes is here given to show that minute examination of the animal is

essential to the classification of certain groups of freshwater shells. The New

Zealand genus Potamopyrgus is probably the most nearly related to Austropyrgus,

Hydrobia Wartmann 1821. Genotype Hydrobia acuta Draparnaud, Europe.

Shell ovate, smooth, elongate, subperforate, whorls flattened, apex acute;

operculum corneous; animal with foot somewhat pointed behind, rostrum rather

long, tentacles somewhat tapering but blunt at the extremity, verge (male organ)

simple; radula with rachidian tooth broad with a central basal process; formula

long, tentacles somewhat tapering but blunt at the extremity, verge (male organ)

of denticles 7/1*1-6-—13-25. Distribution—Northern Hemisphere.

Bythmella Mouquin-Tandon 1855. Genotype Bulimus viridis Poiret, Europe.

Shell smooth, elongated, imperforate, whorls rounded, apex obtuse; opercu-

lum corneous with the nucleus moderately large; animal with foot rather narrow,

rounded behind, rostrum moderately long, tentacles tapering but blunt at the tip,

verge typically bifid; radula with rachidian tooth moderately long, with the infero-

lateral angles much produced, first lateral. with the body longer than broad ; formula

of denticles 9/1°1-6-—18-—0. Distribution—Europe and North America. Inci-

dentally there appear to be at least two names which have priority. They are

Microna Ziegler 1852 and Frauenfeldia Clessin 1879. Some authors quote

Bythinella as 1851, but it does not seem to have been correctly introduced as a

latinised scientific name until 1855,

Potamopyrgus Stimpson 1865. Genotype Ammicola corolla Gould 1852.

Shell short, whorls coronated with spines, imperforate, apex acute; opercu-

lum corneous; animal with foot rather short, broadest in front and strongly

auriculated, rostrum moderately long, tentacles very long slender tapering and

pointed, verge ?; radula with rachidian tooth trapezoidal, first lateral with a very

long peduncle, third lateral with summit shaped like a chopping-knife; formula

of denticles 9/4-4--11-15-—20. Distribution—New Zcaland, freshwater.

126

The species belonging to the genus lustropyrgus are as follows:

(a) Rivers of Victoria and Northern Tasmania, and Eastern New South Wales.

Austropyrgus buccinaides Quoy and Gaimard 1835, Western Port, Victoria,

brackish swamps (= zictoriae Tenison Woods 1878, Lake Connewarre, Geelong.

Victoria == angasi Smith 1882, Compasely River, Victoria) ; ruppiae Hedley 1912,

Deewhy Lagoon, a few miles north of Sydney, seems closely allied io the pro-

ceeding ; grampianensis Gabriel 1939, Dairy Creek, near Silver Band Falls, Gram-

pians, Victoria; fasimanica Von Martens 1858, North ‘Tasmania (== diemecnense

Frauenfeld 1863, North Tasmania = dulvertonensis Tenison Woods 1873, Lake

Dulverton, North Tasmania — woodsi Petterd 1888, South Esk River, North

Tasmania); petterdiana Brazier 1875, Emu Bay, North ‘Tasmania (= nigra

Gabriel 1939, Victoria); brownii Petterd 1879, stream at ong Bay, North-east

‘Tasmania; clongatus May 1920, Apsley River, near Bicheno North, East Coast,

Tasmania; maryinata Petterd 1888, stream near the Heazlewood River, tributary

of the Whyte, North-west Tasmania; snuthii Petterd 1888, Heazlewood River,

also Arthur, Waratah and Castray Rivers, on stones, North-west Tasmania ;

brasieri Smith 1882, South Grafton, Clarence River, New South Wales; petterdi

Smith 1888, Richmond River, New South Wales; /Ayalina Brazier 1875, Fastern

Creek, New South Wales, distributed about Parramatta and Chatsworth;

vertiginosa Frauenfeld 1862, “New Holland,” probably New South Wales;

schraderi Frauenfeld 1862, “Australia”? probably New South Wales. The last

three species may prove to belong to another genus, as the aperculum of at least

ane of them (australis) is calearcous. and it is quite probable that the other two

have a similar type of operculum,

(b) Rivers of South Tasmania.

Ausiropyrgus vigra Quoy and Gaimard 1835, D’Entrecasteaux Channel,

South Tasmania, widely distributed (= unicarinata Tenison Woods 1875, ? South

Tasmania — fasmanica Tenison Woods, Hobart, South Tasmania = legrandi

Tenison Woods 1875, Browns River = exigua Tenison Woods 1879, nom. nov.

for legrandi = legrandiana Brazicr 1871, Salmon Ponds, New Norfolk = wise-

maniane Brazier 1871, creeks near Ilobart; all varieties or direct synonyms and

all from South Tasmania); guunil Frauenfeld 1863, South Tasmania (== sim-

soniana Brazier 1871, Hobart, Tasmania = pontvillensis Tenison Woods 1875,

Jordon River, near Brighton, South Tasmania = dunrobinensis Tenison Woods

1875, from the Ouse, near Dunrobin) ; furbinafa Petterd 1888, River Styx, tribu-

tary of the Derwent, South Tasmania.

Ausiropyrgus pattison’ Cotton 1842 (Bythinella) River Torrens at Paradise

Park, South Australia; the Victorian species buecinoides occurs in the South-Fast

of South Australia. We have it from Eight Mile Creek, in that area.

Genus Ganria Tryon 1865

Gabbia Tryon 1865, American Journ. Conch.. 1, 220. Genotype Gabbia australis

‘Tryon 1865, New South Wales.

Gabbia iredalei sp. nov.

(Pl. iv, fe. 3,4, 5)

Shell small turbinate, smooth; whorls globose, apex obtuse and eroded in

some specimens, lines of growth slightly irregular, fine; umbilicus minute, aper-

ture oblique; operculum paucispiral, horny but slightly calcareous, with a central

nucleus.

127

flolotype—Height 7 mm., width 5:5 mm., D. 14098, S. Aust. Museum, Storm

Creek, Central Australia,

Distribution—Central Australia, Storm Creek, Oodnadatta, etc.

This species is distinguished from the New South Wales genotype by the

difference in general shape and comparatively greater width.

Family ASSIMINEIDAE

A few Australian species have been placed in the genus Assiminea the geno-

type of which is European, and other species are recorded from Asia and America.

Subgenera have been introduced for Indian and Chinese ieee while Met-

assiminea Thiele 1927, genotype M. philippinica Boettger, is recorded from the

Philippines and Australia. Australian species are here placed in the typical genus

Assiminca, though there is some doubt as to the correctness of regarding our

specics as belonging to this genus.

ASSIMINEA Fleming 1928

Assininca Fleming 1828, Hist. Brit. Anim, 275. Genotype A. grayana Fleming

1928, Naples.

Distribution—European.

Conchologically there is not much difference between the Australian and

European species, and still more remarkable is the similarity of the radula of the

genotype and A. tasmantca Tenison Woods.

Australian species are marine, estuarine and amphibious. They are here

listed.

Assiminea granum Menke 1843, Swan River, Western Australia, among

white quartz sand; this species is common in South Australia, where it is

frequently found living in the tidal influence of rivers. We have found it from

Robe, Henley Beach, Venus Bay, Beards Bay, Murat Bay, Denial Bay, American

River, Kingston, Streaky Bay also dredged specimens from 35 fathoms, off St.

Francis Island, and at localities in Western Australia such as King George Sound,

and Albany; fasmanica Tenison Woods 1876 Sorell, North ‘Tasmania, in shallow

inlets and mudflats, amphibious also from Port Phillip, Port Fairy, and Warrnam-

bool, Victoria, and coastal New South W ales, and also Port River and Gulf

St. Vracent, South Australia (== Rissoa siennae Tenison Woods 1876, North

Coast, Tasmania = 4, bicincta Potterd 1888, mouth of the River Don, North

Coast, Tasmania, “obtained living on stones and grass within the influence of the

tide in company with Tatea rufilal ris,” 1.¢., huonensis = australis Tate 1888,

Kelso, Tamar Heads, North Tasmania) ; bragicri 1875, Isthmus Bay, Bruni Tsland,

South Tasmania, “very plentiful entangled in confervoid growths on rocks”

described as a Rissoina; pagodella Hedley 1903, Manly Lagoon, New South

Wales, in brackish water.

Assiminea relata sp. nov.

(PL iv, fig. 1, 2)

Assininea affinis Mousson 1874, Cat. Godeffroy Museum, 5, 103, nom. nud.

Holotype—Height 5 mm., width 3 mm., Burleigh Ileads, Queensland,

D, 14099, S. Aust. Museum.

This species is more clongate and of a different shape from A. tasmanica,

family ACMEIDAE

About a dozen genera from various parts of the world are placed in this

family, and three, “cmea, Coxiella, and Covielladda, are represented in Australia.

128

Genus AcMEA Hartmann 1821

Acmea Hartmann 1821, Neue Alpina, 1, 204. Genotype A. truncata Hartmann

(designated Iredale 1915).

Truncatella Risso 1826, 11. N. Europe, 4, 124. Genotype T. subeylindrica Linn.

Truncatula Leach 1847, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist., 20,271. Genotype T, truncata.

Acmea vincentiana sp. nov.

(PI. y, fig. 11-13)

Truncatella marginata Cox 1868, Mon. Aust, Land Shells, 92; Verco 1912, Trans.

Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 36, 203, nec Kuster 1885.

Acmea marginata (May 1921), List Moll. Tas., 57,

Holotype—IIcight 6°3 mm., width 2:25 mm., Glenelg, South Australia,

D. 14106, South Australian Museum.

Distribution—Geraldton, Western Australia, South Australia to Victoria and

Northern Tasmania, Recent and Pleistocene.

Shell pyramidal in the juvenile, with an obtuse apex, and in the adult sub-

cylindrical with a domed apex; shining, smooth, amber-coloured or pale trans-

lucent flesh-coloured in life, with a narrow smooth semi-opaque white subsutural

band; adult whorls four to five, a little convex, finely sculptured with axial

accremental striae but otherwise smooth; aperture vertical, angularly oval,

broadened slightly at the base, peristome continuous, rather expanded; operculum

subspiral.

This species was first described and figured by Cox in 1868 from Port

Lincoln, South Australia, but he identified it as margimata Kuster 1855, a different

species described from Labuan, Borneo, The only similarity between that species

and vincentiana is the tendency to smooth whorls and lack of prominent axial

sculpture so common in this genus. The present species differs in the more

bulbous shape of the whorls, the much more strongly developed aperture and the

tendency to the formation of an opaque white band below the suture; on looking

through a large series of specimens from the Flindersian Region there seems

sufficient evidence to suspect that more than one species of “smooth” Acimca

exists.

Found in great numbers along the Southern Australian coastline as a Pleisto-

cene fossil on the raised beaches, and Recent from Western Australia to Western

Victoria and also Northern Tasmania. Other species are scalarina Cox 1868, Port

Lincoln, South Australia (== Truncatella tasmanica Tenison Woods 1876, Bass

Strait = Turbonilla tasmanica Tenison Woods 1876, King Island, Bass Strait =

? micra Tenison Woods 1878, Brighton, Victoria), Also occurs in the Recent and

Pleistocene from Geraldtcn to Victoria and is common at certain places on Kangaroo

Island; valida Pfeiffer 1846, New South Wales (= brasiert Cox 1858, Millers

Point, Sydney, New South Wales), distributed along the New South Wales and

eastern Victorian coast; ferruginea Cox 1868, Cape York, North-Ikast Australia,

distributed along the Queensland coast and Northern Territory; teres Pieifter

1856, Trinity Bay, North-East Australia, distributed along the eastern coast of

Queensland; yorkensis Cox 1868, Cape York, north and eastern coasts of

Queensland.

In life the shell of A. scalarina may be translucent, transparent or horn-

coloured, and when dead it may be white, salmon tint or bleached. The juvenile

shell is narrowly pyramidal, whorls round, apex blunt, axial ribs numerous, iading

rapidly at the periphery of the last whorl the base of which is smooth, aperture

without a definite outer lip which is broken and occasionally corresponds with the

curved axial sculpture, general shape of the aperture vertically oval, very slightly

channelled at the base; adult shell more solid and may be nearly cylindrical or

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate IV

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate V

129

slightly increasing in width with age, axial ribs extending over the base, margin

of mouth projecting with a thick inner lip reflected at the lower part to form a

slight angle with the base of the shell. The apex of the shell has a ragged margin

forming a collar, with a low smooth round dome-shaped top closing the opening

within. The eyes are behind the pedicle which is 2 mm. long, head pale pink,

pedicle lead grey, body white, operculum resembles a Haliotis shell. This species

crawls at the rate of 38 mm. to 45 mm. per minute on a dry, smooth-planed, pine

board, the movement being peculiar; the head is advanced, then the shell dragged

up with a roll to the left at the end of the movement, when the short foot is drawn

up. About 15 to 18 of these steps are taken per minute; all but two out of eighty

specimens moved away from the light.

Genus Coxterta Smith 1894

Coxiella Smith 1894, Proc. Mal. Soc., 1, 98. Genotype, Triumcatella striatiula

Menke.

Blandfordia Cox 1868, Mon, Aust. Land Shells, 94. Same genotype, preocc.,

Adams 1863,. Genotype Blandfordia japonica Adams.

Coxiella striatula Menke 1843, South-western Australia (= pyrrhostoma

Cox 1868, Sharks Bay, Western Australia), is found as far east as Streaky Bay,

South Australia, though the specimens from the last locality, judging by their

appearance, may be raised beach fossils; filosa Sowerby 1838, Mitre Lake,

Western Victoria (== striata Sowerby 1842, same locality = striatula Angas 1863,

Adelaide, South Australia = confusa Smith 1898, Adelaide, South Austraha, mom.

now. for striatula Angas 1863, preoc. by striatula Menke 1843), common in South

Australia, particularly in the South-East, Coorong, Yorke Peninsula and Kan-

garoo Island, where countless millions of shells form reefs. It is the dominant

shell in the marl found in the vicinity of the Torrens Reed Beds at Fulham, South

Australia. We have it from the stomach contents of mullet and whiting caught

off our coasts; there are specimens in the South Australian Museum Collection

from Cowangatta, near Mount Corambra, New South Wales.

Genus CoXxIELLADDA Iredale 1938

Coxiclladda Iredale 1938, S. Aust. Nat., 18, (3), 66. Genotype Paludina gilesi

Angas 1877.

Only the name and genotype is cited in the above reference. The species

differs from those of Co-riella in being short and globular in shape and is found

only in Central Australia, Far North of South Australia and Western Australia.

Coxielladda gilesi Angas 1877, shores of Lake Eyre, South Australia

(== slirlingi Tate 1894, Lake Callabonna) ; mammillata Smith 1898, on the shore

of a dry salt lake near Nannine, Murchison Goldfield, Western Australia; closely

allied to the preceeding species.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES

Pirate IV

Fig. 1, 2, Assiminca relata n.sp., x17: 1, ventral; 2, dorsal, Fig. 3-5, Gabbia tredalet

n.sp., x11; 3, ventral; 4, operculum; 5, dorsal.

Piate V

Fig. 1-3, Austropyrgus gunnit, x14: 1, ventral; 2, operculum; 3, dorsal. Fig. 4-5, Austro-

pyrgus elongatus x14: 4, ventral: 5, dorsal. Fig. 6-7, Coxiella filosa x4-5: 6, ventral; 7,

dorsal. Fig. 8-10, Cowielladda gilesi x6: 8, ventral; 9, operculum; 10, dorsal. Fig. 11-13,

Acmea vincentiana n.sp. x8: 11, ventral; 12. adult apex; 13, dorsal. Fig. 14-16, Acmea

sealarina: 14, ventral; 15, adult apex; 16, dersal.

AN EXAMINATION OF A SAMPLE OF LEIGH CREEK COAL

By W. TERNENT COOKE

Summary

In a "Record of the Mines of South Australia," issued in 1899, the Government Geologist states (11)

that the Leigh Creek coalfield had been officially visited by himself in February 1889. Since that

date the field has been explored by drilling, coal has been raised, full-scale combustion tests,

producer-gas tests, laboratory scale distillation tests have been made, and reports thereon published

(6, 31), (8, 35). Many proximate analyses, including sulphur content, have been published (6, 31),

(8, 26-48), but data relating to a more detailed chemical examination of the coal seem lacking. The

present paper aims at supplying a few such data for a sample obtained from one of the recently

drilled bores. The sample in question, designated E.1., was kindly made available to me by the

Director of Mines. About twenty pounds weight of fines were supplied; these were mixed,

quartered, and sampled in the usual manner.

130

AN EXAMINATION OF A SAMPLE OF LEIGH CREEK COAL

By W. TERNENT COOKE

[Read 13 August 1942]

In a “Record of the Mines of South Australia,” issued in 1899, the Govern-

ment Geologist states (11) that the Leigh Creek coalfield had been officially visited

by himself in February 1889. Since that date the field has been explored by drill-

ing, coal has been raised, full-scale combustion tests, producer-gas tests, labora-

tory scale distillation tests have been made, and reports thereon published (6, 31),

(8, 35). Many proximate analyses, including sulphur content, have been pub-

lished (6, 31), (8, 26-48), but data relating to a more detailed chemical cxamina-

tion of the coal seem lacking. The present paper aims at supplying a few such

data for a sample obtained from one of the recently drilled bores. The sample in

question, designated E.1., was kindly made available to me by the Director of

Mines. About twenty pounds weight of fines were supplied; these were mixed,

quartered, and sampled in the usual manner.

MOISTURE

The moisture content varies markedly according to conditions of storage,

air humidity, etc. (6, 33). The sample, when first prepared, gave a value of

19°3% by the distillation method, using toluene, and 19-4% by drying at 110° C.

Later, in the proximate analyses, the value found was 17%. Complete desiccation

by heating is slow, and the dried coal is markedly hygroscopic. A small sample

with 2% of moisture was le[t exposed in the laboratory, After six days a

moisture content of 12% was reached, and for 23 days oscillated between this

value and 10°4%. Figures for moisture content after exposure under summer

conditions at Leigh Creek would be of interest. The hygroscopic nature of the

coal suggests that it might serve as a suitable raw material for the preparation:

of active carbon for use as a drying agent and as an absorbent of vapours.

Tir AsH

The percentage found, as in the ultimate analysis, is 20°5. The ash is nearly

white in colour, as might be expected from the low iron content of the coal, but

becomes slightly darker when sirongly heated. Attack by strong hydrochloric

acid gave the values: insoluble, 49-26% ; oxides of iron, alumina, etc., 33-89% ;

calcium oxide, 7-05% ; magnesium oxide, 2°49% ; total, 92°69%. The insoluble

included 39°57% of actual SiO,, and some titania. Attack with fused alkali

carbonates, in conjunction with other estimations, gave the values:

SiO, * : - 39-30%

FeO, : : - 2:97

Al,O, , : - 35°51

TiO, - : ' - 218

PO; : - - tll

CaQ’ - , t - 6:73

MgO - : : - 3:24

Na,O : : - 6°34

KO - : 7 - +44

BOY 6 : : - 2:65

jee 2 : - 28

100-75 less 0°07% of oxygen equivalent

to 0°28% of chlorine.

Manganese also is present in the ash in small quantities,

Trans. Roy. Soc, $.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

131

Dalwood reports (9, 10) a softening point of 1,290° C, and slagging at

1,410° C. It is stated also (6, 32) that the coal clinkered badly when used on a

locomotive, and on a steam tug. “These statements are not surprising considering

the high content of bases in the ash, and clinkering would probably have been more

noticeable if the percentage of iron were not so low.

NITROGEN

Two estinations by the Kjeldahl method were made, using (a) sulphuric

acid and potassium sulphate, and (b) sulphuric acid with a little selenious acid.

The latter method of digestion is much quicker. The results were 1°07, and 1°28,

mean 1°17%.

SULPHUR

Two assays by the Eschka method gave a mean of 0°28% for total sulphur.

For the sulphur distribution four determinations were made, two by Powell’s

method (10), and two by that of the British Standards Institution (2). These

methods differ only in minor details. Results are shown in Table I.

TABLE I

Sulphur Distribution

Organic

(a) Sulphate (b) Pyritic -28~ (a + b)

S. Fe S. Fe Ss.

Percent - - - *09 *451 068 0-049 *122

Atomic ratio - - *346 1:0 2:4 1-0

CHLORINE

Using the method given under (2), two determinations gave the values 0-547

and 0°543%.

PROXIMATE ANALYSES

The restilts for the present sample are shown in Table II in the first and

second columns. For the sake of cormparison there is given in columns three and

four the average value of 21 samples from, a previous boring (8, 26).

Proximate Analyses

Moisture = - - 17°69 20:00

Volatile - - 26°68 32°42 25-50 31°90

Fixed carbon e 38-65 46-97 36°40 45°35

Ash - 7 - 16:98 20-64 18-08 22'6

100-00 100-03 99-98 100°00

Traut Minera MArrer

Using the calculations given by King (5), the ash as found, 20°5%, corre-

sponds to 19°96% mineral matter.

ULTIMATE ANALYSIS

The results shown in Table LII are for moisture-free coal, and are calculated

also for ash and moisture-free coal. In accordance with the suggestion of King

(5), one-half of the chlorine content of the coal is taken as being of organic origin.

132

Ultimate Analyses

Carbon - - - 56°65 70-82

Hydrogen - - - 3:67 4°59 C/H = 15-4

Nitrogen = - - - 17 1-46 C/O = 3:12

Organic 5S. - - - 12 “15

Organic Cl. - - - “27 34

Mineral - - - 19°96

Oxygen (diff.) - - 18-16 22°70

100-00 100-06

OBSERVATIONS

The coal is spoken of as a sub-bituminous coal, allied to that of Ipswich,

Queensland (14). Judging from the analyses and the ratios between carbon,

hydrogen, and oxygen, calculated on an ash-and-moisture-free basis, it would

seem to be rather a lignite than a bituminous coal (1), or at least to lie on, the

borderland between these two classes. Ilickling’s classification (4) would place

it in this borderland, and Seyler’s (12) (13) would place it definitely as a lignite.

as also would Wheeler’s (15). The coal forms a red mass when warmed with

nitric acid, gives a dark brown solution with hot caustic soda, has a high (and

yariable) water content (6, 33), a low calorific value (6, 34), in short has the

characteristics associated with coals of the lignite type.

As a fuel it is distinctively of higher grade than any of ‘the hitherto known

deposits in the State, and its low sulphur content is a distinct asset to its utilisation.

The chlorine content is quite high, much higher than that of Moorlands lignite (3).

and if characteristic of the general run of the coal, it may be the cause on hig scale

usage of unpleasant corrosion. Comparing figures for chlorine content of ash

and coal, it is seen that approximately 90% of the chlorine has been volatilized on

combustion.

In assessing the possible utility of the coal the following extract from a sum-

mary report on the utilization of the coal may be noted (6, 36). “.... it is felt

that special stress should be laid upon the fact that all the working trials, of what-

soever character, performed have been made in plants designed for the consump-

tion of a higher grade of coal. It is not reasonable to expect that the best attain-

able results can be secured with the use of boilers built for raising steam with

Situminous coal of normal character. The type of grates employed and the areas

of the fireboxes were not specially adjusted for this particular coal. The results

hitherto obtained may be therefore considered capable of material improvement.”

REFERENCES

1 Bonz, W., and Haus, G. W. 1936 “Coal, its constitution and uses”

2 Brrrisn SraAnparps INstiruTION 1936 No. 687 Ultimate analysis of coal

and coke

3 Cooke, W. T. 1936 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62, 9

4 Hickuinc, G. Cf. 1, 36

5 Kine, J. G. 1936 J. Soc, Chem. Ind., 55, 277

6 Munine Review, Stu. Austr. 1918 No. 29

7 Mixinc Review, Sto. Ausr. 1919 No. 30

8 Mininc Review, Stu. Aust., 1919 No. 31

9 Mrxinc Review, Sto. Aust. 1941 No. 74

10 Powrnr, A. R. 1921 U.S. Bureau of Mines, Tech. Paper 254

11. Recorps or Mines or Stu. Austr. 1899 189

12 Sevier, C. A. Proc. Sth. Wales Inst. of Engineers, 43, (2)

13. Seyrrr, C. A. 1931 Jour. Soc. Chem. Ind., 53, 395

14. Sranparps Assoc. or Aust. 1929 Coal Resources of Australia, P.S. 3, 79

15 Wueever, R. V. 1131 Jour. Soc. Chem, Ind., 53, 335

TRENDS IN THE YIELDS OF FALLOW-SOWN AND STUBBLE-SOWN

CEREALS IN SOME SOUTH AUSTRALIAN EXPERIMENTS

By D. C. WARK, M.Agr.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute

Summary

The results of rotational and manurial experiments are commonly expressed as mean yields for the

period of the experiment, but it is important to consider whether the yields have been increasing or

decreasing with time.

133

TRENDS IN THE YIELDS OF FALLOW-SOWN AND STUBBLE-SOWN

CEREALS IN SOME SOUTH AUSTRALIAN EXPERIMENTS

By D. C. Wark, M.Agr.Sc., Waite Agricultural Research Institute

[Read 13 August 1942]

The results of rotational and manurial experiments are commonly expressed

as mean yields for the period of the experiment, but it is important to consider

whether the yields have been increasing or decreasing with time.

Klages (3) determined the trends in the yields of crops in ten rotations for

23 years at the University Farm, Idaho, U.S.A. He found that the trend of

wheat and oat yields was upward for the high-yielding plots and stationary or

downward for the low-yielding plots. As there was no marked trend in the

incidence of rainfall over the same period, he concluded that the observed trends

a .

ae 30

Ee ‘

/ +c

f ‘

4 . 29

7 \

is \

/ ‘ 28

i —_~

x i \ (ra

\ i} Ne Ss

By } \ o7 =

\ os

\ ‘i ~ 2

\ F ‘ “”

\ BY —

17+ \ , \ 126 &

aa ! y. 2

he al = 2

167 25a

@ 24:

7 IAT *23

—_!

Prag

x 13

OQ Fb

3 12

i7ig 1820 -(W2l 2022 2123 2224 2325 2426 2627 2628 2729

S-YEAR MOVING AVERAGES

—— MAY-OCTOBER RAINFALL

Fig. 1

Comparison of yield of wheat on fallow at Booborowie with May-October rainfall.

Roy. Soc. §.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 194°

134

resulted from changes in soil fertility. Forster (2) determined the trends in

yields of wheat and oats in rotation experiments at three places in Victoria. He

adjusted the yields for rainfall. using the methed of partial regression. Whilst

the wheat yields in the wheat-fallow rotation remained constant, the oat yiclds in

the oat-fallow rotation had declined. The average yearly rate of decline per acre

was somewhat over half a bushel of grain at Rutherglen and at Longeronong, and

over half a hundredweight of hay at Werribee. The inclusion of a single year of

pasture in the rotation caused an upward trend of about one-third of a bushcl per

acre per year in the wheat yields at Rutherglen.

The method adopted by Forster was employed to determine whether similar

trends have occurred in South Australian experiments that have followed constant

rotations for a number of years. The experiments studied had been conducted at

3ooborowie Experimental Farm during 1917-1929 (4), at Roseworthy College

during 1905-1928 (2), and at the Waite Institute during 1926-1940 (6).

444

20 142

dig

19 138

136

18} 134

+ ier

i a

1322

el 30 ”

uu tw

3S &

fics

= 1282

st no

= Ss

=z 16 426 =

oe —

e 4 =

4 i

215 222

| i

+20

14 i

2628 2729 «2830 «(293i «3082 «OSS OIG 8385 |AE | «3637 (3638 «3739 38-40

S-YEAR MOVING AVERAGES —

— ~~ — WHEAT ON FALLOW

—+—+— WHEAT ON STUBBLE

MAY-OCTOBER RAINFALL

Fig. 2

Comparison of wheat yields at the Waite Institute with May-October rainfall.

135

In all of these experiments the yields are subject to considerable fluctuations,

since they are from a single plot under each treatment during each year. These

fluctuations have been overcome to some extent by the use of three-year moving

averages, obtained by averaging the years 1905-1907, 1906-1908, etc.; omitting

the first year of the period, and including the next year in order, for each new

average.

At Booborowie and Roseworthy the crop yields increased with increases in

rainfall. This is illustrated in fig. 1, which shows the actual yields of wheat on

fallow at Booborowie, together with the May-October raintall. Yields of oats,

barley and peas at the Waite Institute showed a similar relationship to rainfall.

Wheat yields in continuously cropped rotations showed no such relationship,

whilst the yields of wheat on fallow were lowest in the years of highest rainfall.

The relationships between May-October rainfall and the yield of wheat (a) con-

tinuously and (b) in the wheat-fallow rotation are shown in fig. 2.

In cases where the yield of the crop was related to the seasonal rainfall, the

three-year moving averages were corrected for the variations in seasonal rainfall,

the method of partial regression being used. The results obtained from each of

the three centres will be considered separately, as the relative importance of the

factors that influence yield trends differed from centre to centre.

(a) BoonorowlE

The average annua] rainfall during the period of the experiment, 1917-1929,

was 18-9 inches, of which 13-6 inches fell during the period May-October.

The trends in yields of (a) wheat, in the wheat-fallow rotation; (b) oats,

in the wheat-oats-fallow rotation; and (c) barley, in the wheat-barley-fallow

rotation will be used as the basis for comparison with longer rotations, The mean

yields of these crops and the trends in yield are shown in Table 1. The trend

in wheat yields on the wheat-fallow rotation is also illustrated in the upper

graph of fig. 3.

TABLE 1

Mean Yields and Yield Trends of Wheat, Oats, and Barley at Booborowie

(adjusted for May-October Rainfall)

Regression co-efficient

Mean yield (bushels per acre

Crop and Rotation (bush. /ac.) per annum)

Wheat in wheat-fallow rotation .... a ee ws 26°7 +0:10

Oats in wheat-oats-fallow rotation hes ante poe 26-9 — 1-98 @)

Barley in wheat-barley-fallow rotation sit Ye 16+4 — 1-04

Wheat in wheat-pasture-fallow rotation (no manure) 17°3 — 0600)

While the yield of wheat on fallow remained fairly constant when rainfall

effects had been climinated, the yields of stubble-sown oats and barley declined

by two bushels per acre and one bushel per acre respectively, for cach year of

the experiment. Superphosphate (36%) was applied to the wheat crop at the

rate of 2 cwt. per acre, and to the oat and barley crops at the rate of 1 cwt. per

acre. Where wheat was grown without fertilizer in the wheat-pasture-fallow

rotation, the yield declined by over half a bushel per acre for each year of the

experiment.

To determine the effects on the trend in wheat yields, of including oats in

the rotation, the yield of wheat in the wheat-fallow rotation was subtracted from

the yield of wheat in the wheat-oats-fallow! rotation, The yield of wheat in the

() Significant by “t” test p< 0-05,

@) p<0-01.

136

WHEAT YIELDS

— WHEAT ON FALLOW -

——-+- EFFECT OF OATS ON

WHEAT YIELDS

EFFECT OF PEAS ON

WHEAT YIELDS

BUSHELS PER ACRE

+h . a

3 *

~ O.- 7 \

427 H9 \ d

~ \ .

a wos

\, j

\ #

“I \ /

-2

719 120. 1921 2022 2123 OP24 2396 2426 2527 2628 27-29

3YEAR MOVING AVERAGES

Tig. 3

Yield trend of wheat (wheat-fallow rotation) at Booborowie.

Effects of inclusion of (a) oats and (b) peas (grazed) on the yield of wheat in

the rotation—adjusted for May-October rainfall.

137

wheat-pasture-fallow rotation was then subtracted from the yield of wheat in

the wheat-oats-pasture-fallow rotation. The mean differences were used as an

index of the effect of oats on wheat yield for each year. These differences were

adjusted for rainfall in the same manner as were the yields of the crops shown

in Table 1. The influence of oats and other crops on the trends in wheat yield

are shown in Table 2, together with the influence of pasture on oat and barley

yields.

TABLE 2

Effects of the inclusion of various Crops on the Yields and Yield Trends of

(a) Wheat, and (b) Oats and Barley at Booborowie (adjusted for May-October Rainfall)

i Mean increase Regression co-efficient

Number of in yield (bushels per acre

Crop introduced comparisons used (bush. per acre) per annum)

(a) Wheat on fallow

Oats 2 +1-9 — 0-20

Barley 2 —1-1 —0:54©)

Pasture dos 3 +0°8 + 0-00

Ryegrass (2 years) 1 +0°3 —004

Lucerne (3 vears) 1 +23 — 0-98 @)

Peas (grazed) . 1 +,2-3 —041 0)

Rape (grazed) or. oe 1 + 0-9 — 0-33 ©)

(b) Stubble-sown oats and barley

(i) Oats

Pasture tt ae _ 1 +22 + 0°65)

(i) Barley

Pasture aa ete tas 1 + 1-8 — 045

The wheat crops received a dressing of 2 cwt. per acre, and the oats, barley,

rape, and peas a dressing of at least 1 cwt. per acre of 36% superphosphate. No

fertilizer was applied to the natural pasture, ryegrass, or lucerne.

The inclusion of oats or barley appears to have caused a slight decline in

the yield of wheat from year to year. The yields maintained themselves where

a natural pasture lasting one year or a two-years ryegrass pasture had been

included in the rotation, Where the wheat was followed by three years of grazed

lucerne, the yield of wheat decreased at the rate of nearly a bushel per year,

compared with the wheat-fallow rotation. This may have been due to the removal

of soil phosphates by the unmanured lucerne; or to the depletion of more moisture

by the lucerne than was restored during the one year of fallow in five. Moisture

depletion may have been a factor in the other rotations in which declining wheat

yields occurred. The effects of the inclusion of (a) oats and (b) grazed peas on

wheat yields are graphed in fig. 3.

The inclusion of pasture for one year reduced the rate at which oat yields

were declining by over half a bushel per acre per year, This was not the case with

barley, a possible explanation being that the natural pasture acted as an inter-

mediate host for the take-all fungi, which would tend to increase the incidence

of this disease in the barley crop.

The experiment included a series of plots under the wheat-pasture-fallow

rotation, in which a range of dressings of superphosphate (36%) were applied

to the wheat crop. Jn Table! 1 it was shown that the yield of wheat declined at

the rate of over half a bushel per acre per annum where no phosphate was applied,

to the wheat in this rotation. The effects of increasing dressings of superphos-

phate are listed in Table 3. The cffect of 2 cwt. per aore, together with the trend

in yield of unmanured wheat, is shown in fig. 4.

BUSHELS PER ACRE

138

YIELD OF WHEAT-NO MANURE ~

———-+~ EFFECT OF SUPER —2 CWT. PA.-

9 1820. 1921 2022 21-23

22-24 23-25

24-26 «626-27 §=626-28 = 27-29

S-YEAR MOVING AVERAGES

Fig. 4

Wheat-pasture-fallow rotation at Booborowie.

(a) Yield trend of wheat—no manure.

(b) Effect of 2 ewt of 36% superphosphate

per acre on yield trend of wheat—adjusted for May-October rainfall.

139

TABLE 3

The effect of Superphosphate (36%) on the Yield Trends of Wheat in

Wheat--Pasture-Fallow Rotation at Booborowie (adjusted for May-October Rainfall)

— Mean increase in Regression co-efficient

Rate of application of wheat yield Chushels per acre

superphosphate (bushels per acre) per annum)

& cwt. per acre .... bai _ si 11-9 + 0-290)

1 cwt. per acre .... a Aan rash 12°5 + 0-58

2 cwt. per acre .... Abn ee ol 12-0 + 0:70 @)

3 cwt. per acre .... pee ae dee 11-5 + 0:59 ©)

The difference between the wheat yields on the manured and unmanured

plots increased with time. Where the dressing was 1 cwt or more per acre, the

amount of increase per year was about equal to the yearly decline in the yield of

the unmanured wheat plot. In other words, the yield level for dressings of 1, 2,

and 3 cwt. per acre of 36% superphosphate remained constant with time.

(b) Ros—Ewortuy

The average annual rainfall during the period under review (1905-1928) was

17-3 inches, of which 14-3 inches fell during the months April-November.

In the rotation experiment the wheat-fallow rotation was continued for

twenty-three years and the wheat-sorghum rotation for seventeen years. In

addition, the wheat-fallow rotation was continued for twenty-two years in a

manurial experiment, in which dressings of (a) 36% superphosphate (2 cwt. per

acre), (b) basic slag (2 ewt. per acre), and (c) farmyard manure (14 tons per

acre) were applied to the wheat crop.

The yields were corrected for the April-November rainfall, and the trends in

yield which are shown in Table 4 were calculated from the three-year moving

averages,

TasL_e 4

Mean Yields and Trends in Vield of Wheat at Roseworthy

(adjusted for April-November Rainfall)

Regression co-efficient

Mean Yield (bushels per acre

‘Treatment (bushels per acre) per annum)

Wheat, fallow (super, 2 cwt. per acre) oe 3 17-8 —0:49 ©)

Wheat, sorghum (super, 2 cwt. per acre) .... tris 14:9 — 0-29

Wheat, fallow (no manure)... pea She oe 13-2 — 0+58 ©)

Wheat, fallow (super (2 cwt. per acre)... spiys 19-4 — 0-58 ©

Wheat, fallow (basic slag 2 cwt. per acre) .... 2h; 17-0 — 0-46 ©

Wheat, fallow (armyard manure, 14 tons per acre) 15-7 — 0-54

The yield of wheat in the wheat-fallow rotation declined by about half a

bushel per acre per year, irrespective of the manurial treatment. The decline in

yicld was somewhat less under the wheat-sorghum rotation, in which the sorghum

was grazed.

The average rainfall during the period concerned (1926-1940) was 23-9

inches per annum.

The yields were corrected for rainfall as follows:

Wheat on stubble May-October rainfall

Wheat on fallow no correlation with rainfall

Oats - - ~ May-October rainfall

Barley - - - effective rainfall (5), falling between break of

season and beginning of summer dry period

Peas - - Fe total rainfall

140

These were the rainfall periods most closely associated with the yields in

each case.

Three-year moving averages were used to determine the trends which are

shown in Table 5.

TABLE 5

Mean Yields and Trends in the Yield of Wheat, Oats, Barley, and Peas

at the Waite Institute

Regression co-efficient

Mean yield ‘ (bushels per acre

Crop and rotation (bushels per acre) per annum)

Wheat continuously — - - - - 15-3 — 1-35

Wheat in wheat-fallow rotation - - 34-1 — 0-36

Oats in wheat-oats-fallow rotation - 46-9 — 3:40 ©)

Barley (mean of 2 rotations) - - 46-6 — 2-19@)

Peas (mean of 4 rotations) - - - 25-3 + 0-17

All the sown crops received a dressing of 2 cwt. per acre of 45% super-

phosphate.

As at Booborowie, no significant decline occurred in the yield of wheat, but

stubble-sown oats and barley decreased in yield during the course of the experi-

ment (1926-1940). For example, the unadjusted oat yield (mean of two plots)

varied from 68 bushels in 1926 to 15 bushels in 1935, but has since increased to

30 bushels in 1940. This latter increase may have been due to hand weeding.

The influence of other crops on the yield of wheat and oats is shown in

Table 6.

TaBLe 6

Effects of the inclusion of other Crops on the Mean Yields and Yield Trends

of Wheat and Oats at the Waite Institute

Mean increase Regression co-efficient

Number of in yield (bushels per acre

coniparisons (bushels per acre) per annum)

(a) Wheat on continuously cropped land

Effect of peas - - - % 1 11-2 + 0-08

Effect of oats 1 ‘Rotations 1 3-6 + 0-18

Effect of barley f include peas 1 6+0 + 0-40 ©)

(b) Wheat after fallow wt) !

Effect of peas - - - - 1 5°6 + 0-90 ©)

Effertofoats = - - - - 1 2-9 + 0°35

Effect of barley g - - 1 5-0 + 0-69 ©)

Effect of ryegrass - - - 2 6:3 + 0-62

Effect of ryegrass - - - 1 ing 10-4 + 2-06)

The ryegrass was treated as a hay crop in the early years of the experiment,

but since 1938 it has been grazed.

The inclusion of barley appears to have checked the decline in yicld of wheat

on continuously cropped land. It must be remembered that the comparison is

between the wheat-barley-peas rotation and the wheat-peas rotation, The effect of

barley in a rotation without a legume may have been quite different. Peas, oats,

or harley, in the rotation at the Waite Institute have maintained or increased the

yield of wheat on fallow, whereas at Booborowie, oats or barley in the rotation

caused the wheat yields to decline with time. These results at the Waite Institute,

together with the negative correlation between the yields of wheat on fallow and

seasonal rainfall, suggest that a fallow every sccond year conserves too much

moisture under Waite Institute conditions.

That the fertility of the soil is declining under these rotations is shown by

the fact that the yields of stubble-sown oats and barley have decreased rapidly.

141

As the yield of peas has not declined, the loss of fertility appears to have been

largely due to the exhaustion of available supplies of nitrogen. Stubble-sown

cereals at the Waite Institute are known to respond to nitrogenous fertilizers, and

soil nitrates accumulate during fallow periods (6).

A single year of ryegrass maintained the yield of wheat on fallow and checked

the rate of decline in yield of oats on stubble.

Discussion

At Roseworthy, though at neither of the other centres, the yield of wheat

declined under the wheat-fallow rotation. This decline occurred imder the only

four manurial treatments included,

At Booborowie and the Waite Institute, the yields of stubble-sown oats and

barley declined at a significant rate even though the dressings of superphosphate

seem adequate. The introduction of a year of natural pasture at Booborowie, or

of a year of ryegrass at the Waite Institute, decreased the rate at which the yield

of oats or stubble declined. The take-all factor probably prevented natural pasture

having a similar effect on the trend of barley yields at Booborowie, the only centre

at which two host plants for the take-all preceded a year of pasture,

The declining fertility, as evidenced by the gradually decreasing yields of

stubble-sown cereals, appears to be linked with the depletion of soil organic matter

and available nitrogen on land under a rotation of the whceat-oats-fallow type.

Stubble-sown crops respond to inorganic nitrogenous fertilizers at the Waite

Institute, suggesting that the nitrogen supply is an important factor in the growth

of these crops on soil adequately supplied with phosphate.

A single year of natural pasture at Booborowie or of ryegrass at the Waite

Institute reduced the rate at which oat yields declined, suggesting that these crops

restored some organic matter to the soil, Wood (7), working with Waite Institute

soil, showed the mineralizable nitrogen to be much higher after a grazed pea crop,

even where the latter had been grazed. Thus the introduction of grazed legumin-

ous crops or of pastures rich in trefoils or clovers might further reduce the rate

of mtrogen depletion and thus tend to overcome the decline in crop yields. A

study of rotations in which stubble-sown crops are followed by pasture or grazed

legumes would be necessary to determine the extent to which fertility could be

maintained by these practices.

The inclusion, at Booborowie for three years, of a lucerne pasture caused a

downward trend in the yield of wheat. Two factors may have been responsible

for this decline, namely, the depletion of soil moisture reserves and the uptake of

soil phosphate by the lucerne plant—the land having received no fertilizer while

under lucerne.

The effect of dwindling phosphate supply was demonstrated at Booborowic ;

yields of wheat in the wheat-pasture-fallow rotation declining on land that had

received no fertilizer. It would be interesting to know whether the yield of wheat

would decline in a rotation containing lucerne top-dressed with stperphosphate.

REFERENCES

(1) Birxs, W. R., and Core, T. A. 1931 S.A. Dept. of Agric., Bull. 247, 84

(2) Forsrrr, H. C. 1939 Journ. of Dept. Agric., Vict., 37, 130

(3) Kraces, K. IL, W. 1938 Journ. Amer. Soc. of Agron., 30, 624

(4) Scott, R. C., and Bristow, E, A. 1931 S.A, Dept. of Agric., Bull. 247, 227

(5) Trumpre, H.C. 1937 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 61, 41

(6) Warre Instirute Reports 1925-1932, 1933-1936, 1937-1938, 1939-1940

(7) Woop, H. L. The Mineralisable Nitrogen of the Soil in Relation to Systems

of Crop Rotation. Thesis—Adelaide University

ADDITIONS TO THE ACARINA-PARASITOIDEA OF AUSTRALIA

PART I

By H. WOMERSLEY, F.R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

Summary

Hitherto only a few species of Acarina have been recorded from Australia as belonging to the

family Parasitidae (Gamasidae) in the wide sense of Vitzthum (Handbuch der 2001. 1931).

142

ADDITIONS TO THE ACARINA—PARASITOIDEA OF AUSTRALIA

PART I

By IT. Womersey, F-R.E.S., A.L.S., South Australian Museum

[Read 13 August 1942]

INTRODUCTION

Hitherto only a few species of Acarina have been recorded from Aus-

tralia as belonging to the family Parasitidae (Gamasidac) in the wide sense of

Vitzthum (Handbuch der Zool. 1931).

In his “A Synopsis of Australian Acarina,” Rec. Aust. Museum, 1916, 6, (3),

173, Rainbow only lists one species, Gamasus flavolimbatus 1. Koch, Verhandl.

K. Zool, Ges., Wien, 1867, from Queensland, which might belong to this family.

Unfortunately the original publication is not available to me, and as the species

has not been recorded since, | am as yet unable to express any opinion as to its

status.

In Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1916, 40, Banks described a number of Acari

from ants’ nests in Tasmania, collected by A. M. Lea, amongst which were three

species referred to the genus Parasitus Latreille. These were P. Iyratus, P. dis-

paratus and P. inversus., Of these species there are, in the South Australian

Museum collections, mounted specimens labelled in Iea’s handwriting as the first

two species and therefore presumably mounted by him on their return from

Banks. It has now been possible to remount these speciinens for more critical

examination with following results.

Parasilus lyratus, two females, although agreeing with Banks’ description

and figures in gencral are yet inaccurately drawn in many important details ;

they are not a Parasitus but belong to the genus Hypoaspis, of the Laelaptidae.

Parasitus disparatus, six females, five of which do not agree with Banks’ descrip-

tion and figures of this species, but do agree with those of Parasilus inversus,

specimens of which, according to I.ea’s notes, were not returned to the South

Australian Museum. They are also not a Parasitid but another species of

Hypoaspis. The sixth specimen, however, may be disparatus insofar as it has

clavate dorsal setae as figured by Banks, but the configuration of its ventral shields

is again that of the genus [7 ypoaspis.

The species described by Banks 1916 as Cyrtolaclaps femoralis on re-examina-

tion of the material in the South Australian Museum and comparison with fresh

material, proves to be a Gamasiphis.

In the present paper, the families as defined by Oudemans 1939 have been,

adopted and species belonging to the Parasitidae, Neoparasitidac, Gamasolaelap-

tidae, Pachylaelaptidae and Macrochelidae are recorded from Australia as

follows:

Parasitidae—

Parasitus americanus Berl. 1888.

Pergamasus crassipes Latr. 1746 v. australicus nov.

2 v. longicornis Berl. 1906

? barbarus Berl. 1905

”

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

143

Neoparasitidae—

HAydrogamasus dentatus n. sp.

FA relatus n. sp,

%, relictus M1. sp.

ov. major nv.

2a ausiralicus 1. sp.

Gasmasiphis femoralis (Banks 1916)

Austrogamasus gracilipes (Banks 1916).

Gamasolaclaptidae—

? Digamasellus concina n. sp.

? i punctatus n. sp.

? 7 tragardhi n. sp.

Pachylaelaptidac—

Pachylaelaps australicus n. sp.

Macrochelidae—

Macrocheles vagabundus Berl. v. australis Berl, 1918

. coprophila n. sp.

Nothrholaspis ? monttvagus Berl. 1887

Geholaspis sp.

Euepicrius filamentosus n.g., n. sp.

Family PARASITIDAE Oudemans 1902

Tijdschrit v. Entom. 1902, 45, 6.

Female epigynial shield triangular with a pointed, anteriorly. directed apex,

strongly chitinised, posterior margin straight or almost so, usually with a single

pair of setae; sternal shield with three pairs of setae and consisting of the

coalesced jugular and coxal shields; metasternal shield usually, present and free;

prae-endopodal shields free. Ventral and anal shields coalesced and, sometimes,

partially so with the dorsal. Fork of palpal tarsus three-pronged,

Oudemans (Zool. Anz., 126, 21, 1939) refers to this family only the genera

Amblygamasus Berl, 1903, Hugamasus 1892, Holoparasitus Ouds. 1936 (= Olo-

gamasus Berl. 1906 non 1888), Parasitus Latr. 1795 (= Carpais Latr, 1796 =

Gamasus Latr. 1802), Pergamasus Berl. 1903, Sessiluncus G. Can 1898 and

Trachygamasus Berl. 1906.

These genera may be separated by the following key.

Key To THE GENERA OF PARASITIDAE

1 Claws of leg I sessile. Dorsal shield entire. Gen. Sessilunenus G. Can, 1898

Claws of all legs pedunculate. 2

2 Metasternal shields wanting or ? fused with sternal shield. Claws of leg I on a long

2-segmented peduncle. Dorsal shield divided by a fine suture.

Gen. Trachygamasus Berl, 1906

Metasternal shields distinct and separated from sternal shield. All claws on a simple

peduncle. 3

3 Dorsal shield divided into two. 4

Dorsal shield entire. 5

4 Labial cornicles of @ with distinct basal segment. Gen. Parasitus Latr. 1795

Labial cornicles of @ sessile, without basal segment. Gen. Enugamasus Beri. 1892

Ventrianal shield posteriorly coalesced with dorsal.

Gen, Holoparasitus Oudms. 1936

(= Ologamasus Berl. 1906 non 1888)

Ventrianal shicld entire, free from dorsal. 6

6 Leg II with practically unarmed femur ; processes on genu and tibia backwardly directed.

Gen. Amblygamasus Berl. 1903

Leg Il with strong femoral processes directed forwards.

Gen. Pergamasus Berl. 1903

144

Genus Parasitus Latr. 1795

Mag. encyclop., 3, (13), 19.

= Gamasus Latr. 1802 Sonnini’s Buffon Ins., 3, 64.

Shape a more or less elongate; oval. Dorsal shield in both sexes divided by

a line or narrow suture, well chitinised. Femur of leg II of male with a strongly

developed calcar and a small axillary tubercle, genu and tibia also with processes.

Movable chela of mandibles with a more or less fused calcar process, Labial

cornicles with a distinct basal segment. Epistome three- or five-spined. Deuto-

nymph with the dorsal shields well separated, posterior subtriangular. In female,

prae-endopodal and metasternal shields separated, latter large and distinct. Claws

on all legs on Jong simple peduncles.

PARASITUS AMERICANUS Berlese 1888

Gamasus americanus Berl. 1888, Acari austro-americani estr., 23; 1906, Redia, 3,

fase. 2, 138, tab. II, fig. 7, X, fig. 6, XV, fig. 2, 14,

(Fig 1, A-K)

Adult—Length to 1,000» (Berlese 1,120), width 650». Colour brownish-

_yellow with very fine mottling of brown spots. Shape elliptical oval, with slight

shoulders. Dorsal shield covering the whole body, divided into two by a suture.

Dorsal chaetotaxy as in fig. 1, A, the large scapular setae to 150 » long and blunt-

tipped, the longer dorsal blunt setae to 78 , the finer pointed sctae to 65 p.

Tig

@; D, mandible 9; F, same ¢g; F, labial cornicles 9 ; G, labial cornicle ¢ ;

H, epigyne @ ; I, genital foramen @ ; J, leg IL @ ; K, deutonymph, dorsal.

»A-K Parasitus americanus Berl.: A, dorsum 9 ; B, venter 9 ; C, epistome

Mandibles as figured, @ movable chela with four strong teeth in distal half,

fixed chela with 7-9 smaller teeth; $ movable chela with the calcar process fused,

apically with two blunt rounded teeth at the apex, fixed chela without distinct

teeth. Epistome trispinous as in fig. 1 C, usually with the median prong bluntly

145

pointed but often apically truncate as figured by Berlese. Labial cornicles in ¢

with distinct basal segment.

Legs— ?, I and IV long and slender, 1,160 » and 1,250» respectively, II and

III shorter and thicker, 660% and 750 » respectively, all legs unarmed; ¢, I and

TV 1,085, and 1,170, respectively, If and IIT 750, and 780» respectively ;

lee II armed with processes as in fig. 1, J; jugular shields fused with the sternal

shield. Peritreme long and slender. Genital opening of @ under the front edge

of sternal shield; of @ as figured (fig. 1, H), epigynium apparently without setae ;

endogynium internally unarmed, posteriorly with a single transverse row of long

fibrils, Anus small, posterior-ventral.

Deutonymph—Dorsally, as figured (fig. 1,K). Length 920», width 580 n.

With anterior and posterior shields, posterior shield short, 335 » long. Posterior of

the second dorsal shield are twelve small ovoid platelets from which arise single

setae, 52 long. Otherwise as in adult without sexual characters.

Loc—A very common species occuring in manure and on cultivated ground,

etc. Western Australia; Perth, August 1931 (H. W.), adult and nymph. South

Australia: Glen Osmond, March 1933, August 1934; Mount Barker, June 1934;

Long Gully, August 1938; Adelaide, July 1942,

Remarks—Originally described by Rerlese from Paraguay, from female and

nymph only, this species is probably almost cosmopolitan in agricultural areas.

Genus PerGamasus Berlese 1906

= Gamasus ex. p. auct., subgen. Gantasus ex. p. Berlese. Mesostigmata.

Pergamasus Berl, 1906, Redia, 3, fase. 1.

Parasitidae with the epigynial shield triangular and separated from the fused

ventrianal shield; metasternal and parasternal shields well developed, former with

one pair of hairs and one pair of pores, Prae-endopodal shields well developed

and distinctly separated from the sternal shicld. Jugular shields coalesced with

sternal. Sternal shield with three pairs of setae and two pairs of pores. Endo-

gynium various, armed or not with teeth, pockets and median process.

Legs generally long, especially I and IV, and all with long caruncle and a

pair of claws; leg II of male on femur armed with prominent blunt processes.

Cuticle of shields with scale-like reticulations.

PrrcamaAsus crassipes (L.) Latr.

Acarus crassipes L. 1746, Fauna Suec. 1969, idem 1735, Syst. nat., Ed. 1.

Hermann 1804, Mem. Apt., tab. 3, fig. 6.

Acarus testudinarius Hermann 1804, Mem. Apt., tab. 9, fig. 1.

Gamasus quinquespinosus Kramer 18/6, Gamasiden,

Gamasus (Pergamasus) crassipes Berl, 1884, A.M.S. it. Rept., fase. 13, fig. 7, 8;

1906, Redia, 3, fase..1, 229 tab. V. fig. 11, 18, VIIT 9, XT 5, X VAT 7.

var, australicus nov.

(Fig. 2, A-I£)

Femalc—As in the typical form but differing in the detailed structure of the

endogynium. Colour dark brownish-yellow. Length 1,170 », width 670». Dorsal

and ventral setae long, fine and pointed. Mandibles as in fig. 2E. Epistome

(fig. 2B) five-spined, the median the longest and tapering rather suddenly for the

posterior fourth, Palpi as in fig. 2C. Endogynium with two large pockets with

a median bifid process which sometimes appears asymmetrical or even simple;

anterior walls of vagina with denticles. Epigynial shield with concave sides, so

that it perceptibly narrows before the halfway.

146

Loc-——South Australia: Mount Barker, 24 June 1934, two spec. (CH, W.);

Gien Osmond, May 1935, one spec. (R. V. S.); National Park, Belair, January

1938 one spec., (11. W.).

Fig. 2, A-E Pergamasus crassipes v. australicus w.v.: A, venter @ ; B, epistome

9; C, tip of palp; D, cpigyne and metastcrnal shields; E, mandible 9.

Remarks—In the absence of males, the above specimens are referred with

some uncertainty to a variety of the European P. crassipes, for Berlese gives

several species with somewhat similar epigynial structures and epistomes, I*rom

the typical form it differs in the teeth on the wall of the vagina.

var, LONGICORNTS Berlese 1906

Redia, 3, fase 1, 232.

(Fig. 3, A-I)

Length 1,670», width 100%. Legs: 2, I 2,170, II 1400,, II 1420p,

LV 2,100; 8,1 1,420, II 900», ITI 1,000», 1V 1420p. Teg 11 of male with

pronounced processes on femur and tibia as in fig. 3 H-I. Endogynium without

pockets or teeth on vaginal wall but with a pair of blunt Jobes. Epistoma with

five short equal teeth.

147

Loc—One male and one female from Hobart, Tasmania, July 1937

(J. W. E.) ; one female, Mount Gambier, South Australia, January 1941 (H. W.).

Fig. 3, A-l Pergamasus crassipes v. longicornis Berl.: A, epigyne and metasternal

shields 9; B, epistome 9; C, prae-endopodal shields ¢@; D, prae-endopodal

shields and genital foramen ¢ ; FE, mandible 9; F, same g; G, labial carnicles

&@: HR-l, leg IT @.

eemarks—These specimens agree with Berlese’s figure of the second leg of

the male and in the endogynium with the figure given by Tragardh (Entom.

Tidskft. 3-4, 1938, 149).

PERGAMASUS ? BARBARUS Berlese

Acari nuovi Mater. pel. Manip., V, 1905; Redia, 1908, 2, fase. 2, 233, 1905, 3,

fase. 1, 2, 5, tab. XV, fig: 1, 9.

(Fig. 4, A-C)

Large, brownish-yellow, well chiunised. Length 1,420», width 9204. T.egs

T 1,420 » 11 920 w, ILL 925 w, IV 1,130. Dorsal setae fine and to 80 in length.

The dorsal and ventral shields with fine reticulations. Epistome with five spines,

the median of which is but little longer than the others (fig. 4B). Prae-endopodal

148

shields as in fig. 4 A with almost parallel anterior and posterior margins. Sternal

shield with three pairs of setae. Metasternal shields distinct with the usual pair

of setae. Epigynial shield as in fig. 4C. Endogynium with a pair of ‘pockets

with a short bifid process between. Vagina without any armature.

Fig. 4, A-C Pergamasus ? barbarus Berl.: A, venter 9 ; B, epistome 9 ;

C, epigyne and metasternal shields 9.

Loc—A single female from moss, National Park, South Australia, January

1938 (H. W.).

Remarks—This specimen is referred to Berlese’s species from Europe,

mainly on comparison of the epigynitm and epistome, as figured in his mono-

graph of the genus “Gamasus” in Redia 1905.

Family NEOPARASITIDAE Oudemans 1939

Zool, Anz, 1939, 126, (1-2), 21.

Fork of palpal tarsus three-pronged. Dorsal shield entire. Epigynium not

triangular and not with anterior pointed apex, but gradually or suddenly extending

into a membraneous edge which reaches the sternal or metasternal shields,

posterior margin variously shaped.

In this family Oudemans (loc, cit.) includes the genera Beaurienia Ouds.

1929, Epicriopsis Berl. 1916, Gamasiphis Berl. 1904, Hydrogamasus Berl. 1892,

Megaliphis Willm, 1937, Neoparasitus Oudms. 1901, Ologamasus Berl. 1888

(= Ologamasellus Berl, 1914), Poecilochirus G. and R, Can. 1882 and Sphaero-

seus,

149

Genus Hyprocamasus Berlese 1892

A.M.S. it. Rept., fasc. 68, fig. 5 (type Gamasus littoralis G. & R. Can, 1885 =

G. salints Laboulbene 1851).

Neoparasitidae with the dorsal shield entire in adults of both sexes, Ventral,

in @ the sternal shield has four pairs of setae, i.e., it consists of the coalesced

jugular, coxal and metasternal shields, and is also fused with the first, second

and third endopodal shields; the prae-endopodal and fourth endopodal shields are

free; epigynium free from the sternal and fused ventrianal shields, with one pair

of setae and rounded anterior margin: in ¢ the sternal shield has five pairs of

setae and is separated by a suture line from the ventrianal; the prae-endopodal

shields are free, the jugular, first, second and third endopodal and metasternal

fused with it; the ventrianal shield fused with the dorsal shield; the genital orifice

is under the anterior margin of the sternal shield, Epistome triangular with a

nucronal apex or with a single long median mucro, Mandibles in ¢ with a free,

slender or stouter process on the movable chelae. All legs with caruncle and

claws, leg I] of male thicker than the others and with process on the femur, and

sometimes on genu, tibia or tarsus.

Hydrogamasus dentatus n. sp.

(Fig. 5, A-O)

Female—Length 750, width 420. Dorsal shield strongly chitinised with

fine reticulations which posteriorly resenible scaling; dorsal setae fine, anteriorly

65 p long, increasing to 110 » posteriorly. Epistoma as in fig. 5 B, with a median

mucro somewhat longer than depth of base and apically tridentate with the

median tooth about one-fourth the length of mucro, base with sides almost straight

at 45° and with 6-8 fine short teeth. Mandibles as in fig. 5G; movable chela with

three inner teeth, fixed chela with five teeth, two small ones after the fairly long

“pilus dentarius” and three stronger ones before it. Vabial cornicles as in

fig. 51. Palpi as in fig. 5D, the second segment with a strong ciliated seta and

third scgment with a spathulate sensory seta as well as a ciliated seta which is

somewhat longer than the one on the previous segment, remaining setae simple;

sensory fork on tarsus three-pronged, the inner prong shorter than the others.

The prae-endopodal shields as in fig. 5 H, with the inner end acutely angular,

anterior margins almost straight and outwardly diverging. Sternal shield reach-

ing to posterior edge of coxae HI, the apex of the anterior arms split off by a

suture (fig. 5H); the first and fourth pairs of setac corresponding to the fused

jugularia and metasternalia are much finer than the second and third pairs.

Epigynial shield separated from the sternal and ventrianal, with the pair of setae

situated in the postero-lateral angles. Ventral and anal plates fused, large, with

the anterior margin almost straight and extending to the outer margins of

coxae 1V, lateral and postcrior margins rounded (fig. 5 A), with 12 fine setae in

addition to the two adanal and one postanal setae. Between the anterior margin

of the ventrianal plate and coxae IV are two pairs of minute inguinal plates, one

at the extreme outer corner of the ventral plate, the other close in to the postero-

lateral corners of the genital plate. Legs: I 750», IT 400», II 500p, IV 750 p;

TL stouter than the rest; claws small and caruncle short; trochanter of IV with a

long anterior process on posterior edge, and a short one on anterior edge;

trochanter Il] without such processes (fig. 5K); tarsi about eight times longer

than wide at the base.

Male—Dimensions as in female. Epistome, prae-endopodal and dorsal shields

as in female. Ventrianal shield fused with the dorsal shield. Stcrnal shield with

five pairs of setae, all of which are rather short, fine and uniform. Mandibles as

in fig, 5-F, movable chela with a single large median tooth and strong stout curved

150

calcar process which is only fused basally and reaches almost to tip of chela; fixed

chela with three teeth, the basal one very blunt aud flattened. Palpi as in female.

but second segment on the inner apical angle with a stout pitted sensory peg.

Labial cornicles pedunculate, not sessile as in female. Legs: II much stouter

than the rest; femur with a stout apophyjsis and a small axillary tubule, genu

inwardly with a short flat process, tibia cn inside with a stout forwardly directed

spine-like process. Trochanter IV as in female.

Fig. 5, A-O Afydrogamasus dentatus n.sp.: A, venter Q ; B, epistome @ ; C, prae-

endopudal shields and g genital foramen; 1), palp ¢; E, leg IL g ; F, male man-

dible; G, same 9 ; H, prae-endopodal and sternal shields 9 ; I, labial cornicles ¢@ ;

J,same @ ; K, trochanters III and [IV 9 ; L, deutonymph, dorsal; M, same ventral;

N, protonymph, dorsal; O, same, ventral.

Deutonymph—Length 105, width 58. Dorsally with two plates as in

fig. 5 L. Ventrally (fig. 5M) with the prae-endopodal shields only just indicated,

sternal plate reaching to just past coxae IV, slightly tapering to coxae III, thence

more abruptly, with four pairs of setae. Behind coxae IV lies a transverse row

of eight small plates, the extreme ones being roughly triangular, the others

elongate and narrow. Anal plate small, wider than long. There are 12 setae on

the venter, with another pair between the coxac 1V and the apex of the sternal

plate. Peritreme only reaching to coxae IT.

151

Protonymph—Length 65 », width 39. Dorsal plates two as in fig. SN,

widely separated, with two pairs of small accessory plates in betwecn. Ventrally

(fig. 5O) sternal plate with three pairs of hairs, Anal plate smaller than in

deutonymph. Venter with only eight hairs.

Loc—-Common in moss from the Mount Lofty Ranges, Belair, Long Gully,

Waterfall Gully, South Australia in August and September 1938. Also one

specimen from moss from Brisbane, October 1934.

Hydrogamasus relatus n. sp.

(Fig. 6, A-M)

Female—Length 670 p, width 335. Dorsal shield strongly chilinised with

fine reticulate lines; dorsal setae fine, uniformly 40, long, Epistome as in

fig. 6G, H, with a simple median mucro, sides of base almost horizontal, with

some fine tecth. Mandibles (fig. 6B): movable chela with three teeth, fixed

chela with four teeth. Labial cornicles sessile (fig. 6,1). Palpi as in H. dentatus.

Prae-endopodal shields as in fig. 6M. Sternal shield as in fig. 6M, the second

and third pairs of setae longer and stronger than the first and fourth pairs (apical

portion of anterior lobes, and fourth endopodal shield not shown). Legs: I 580 2

long, II 420 », TIL 420», 1V 500; LE and 1V somewhat thicker than [ and III;

Fig. 6, A-M Aydregamasus relatus n.sp.: A, mandible g ; B, same @; C, palp 4;

D, leg IL g ; FE, labial cornicles 9 ; F, same a ; G, H, epistome; I, prae-endopodal

shields and male genital foramen; J, apex of ventrianal and base of epigynial shields

@, showing inguinalia; K, trochanter IIT and IV @; L, same 9; M, sternal

shield ¢.

152

trochanter IV at most with indistinct posterior spine-like process; trochanter ITI

with longer tooth. The outer inguinal plates situated within the outer corners of

the ventrianal shield.

Male—As in female and in male of H. dentatus. Mandibles: process of

movable chela long and slender and reaching tip of chela which has only a single

median tooth; fixed chela with three teeth. Palpi apparently without the sensory

apical peg. Labial cornicles pedunculate. Legs: [1 with a strong apophysis and

an axial knob on the femur, an inner boss on the genu and an inner blunt spine-

like process on tibia; trochanters without pronounced teeth.

Loe.—Glen Osmond, South Australia, in moss, June and July 1934 (three

9@,one ¢).

Hydrogamasus relictus n. sp.

(Fig. 7, A-Iy)

Female—I.ength 750», width 370%. Not so heavily chitinised as in preced-

ing species, with usual reticulations on the dorsal and ventral shields; dorsal setae

anteriorly 40 » long, increasing to 65m posteriorly. Epistome with simple median

mucro, with sides of base at an angle of about 45° and with fine serrations.

Mandibles (fig. 7G): movable chela with three teeth, fixed chela with five teeth.

Fig. 7, A-L) /iydroyamasus relicius n.sp.: A, dorsal @ ; B, venter 9; C, labial

cornicles 9 ; D, epistome ¢@ ; E, mandibles 4 ; F, same, another view; G, same 9 ;

FH, palpi ¢; I, labial cornicle @; J, leg I] g; K, trochanters II] and IV 9;

L, prae-endopodal shiclds and g genital foramen.

Labial cornicles (fig. 7 C) sessile. Palpi as in preceding species. Prae-endopodal

shields as in fig. 7B, anterior and posterior margins almost parallel, Sternal

shield as in fig. 7 B, the second and third pairs of setae only slightly stronger than

first and second pairs. Legs: I 585 y, 11 420, TIL 370, TV 550q4; Ll and 1V

somewhat stouter than I and II]; trochanters I] and IV without any pronounced

apical teeth. Outer inguinal shields within the antero-lateral corners of ventrianal

shield.

Male—Dimensions gencrally as in female and general features as in

H. dentatus 8. Mandibles: process of movable chela short, only two-thirds length

153

of chela and much bent and stout; fixed chela with only a single median tooth,

movable chela with two small and two large teeth (fig. 7E,F). DPalpi apparently

without the apical sensory cone of H. dentatus, Labial cornicles. pedunculate.

Legs: lengths approximately as in female, Il with strong curved apophysis and

two axillary lobes on femur, two large lobe-like protuberances on genu, and inner

stout spine on tibia; trochanters without pronounced teeth.

Loc—Queensland: in moss, Brishane, October 1934. South Australia: in

moss, Adelaide, 1935; Glen Osmond, in pine needles, 1935.

var. major n. v.

Differing from the typical form only in the size. Female: length 1,000 p,

width 500»; dorsal setae 55 » to 115 »; legs I 835 », IL 635 pw, IIT 520». TV 920 x.

Loc-—Victoria: Sassafras, December 1931, in moss, 1 @ (H.G.A.). New

Zealand: Bourke’s Bush, Waimamaku, Auckland, October 1938, two @ 9

(E. D. P.).

Hydrogamasus australicus n. sp.

(Fig. 8, A-R)

Female—Length 835 p, width 470%. Shape ovoid but posterior half more

tapering than in preceding species. Usual fine reticulations on dorsal and ventral

shields. Dorsal setae 48-50 » long, fine. Epistome with a median mucro which

is only faintly tridentate apically, sides of base concave with at most indistinct

crenulations, Mandibles as in fig. 8G, movable chela with three tecth, fixed chela

with two small teeth in front of “pilus dentarius” and three strong ones behind.

Labial cornicles sessile. Palpi as in preceding species, DPrae-endopodal shields

as in fig. 8B with almost parallel anterior and posterior margins. Sternal shield

(fig. 8B) with four pairs of setae, second and third pairs stronger than first and

fourth pairs, apices of anterior arms separated. Legs: I 800 yh, I] 600 mw, IIT 550 p,

IV. 750 » long, II and IV stouter than I and IIL; trochanters III with a posterior

apical lobe-like tooth, IV with a short anterior apical tooth. Lateral inguinal

plates well outside of the antero-lateral corners of the ventrianal shteld

(fig. 8B),

Male—Size and dimensions as in female, and general features as in

H. dentatus, Mandibles: process of movable chela stout and much bent over the

correspondingly bent chela, movable chela with one tooth; fixed chela with three

teeth (fig. 8H). Palpi on the second segment without the apical peg of

HI, dentaius, Labial cornicles pedunculate. Legs: lengths approximately as in

female, IT with strong blunt process and a special seta on the inner apical angle,

but no axillary tubercles on femur, genu with two short blunt processes, and the

usual spine on the tibia (fig. 8 N); trochanters without pronounced teeth,

Deutonymph—Length 700», width 420. Dorsally with two shields as in

fig.8Q. Ventrally with the prae-endopodal shields not in evidence; sternal shield

reaching posterior margin of coxae TV, sides tapering from between coxae II and

Ill, with four pairs of setae. Behind coxae IV laterally are a pair of small disc-

like plates. Anal plate small, somewhat quadrate. There are eight pairs of setae

on the venter with another pair between apex of sternal shield and coxae IV.

Peritreme only reaching to coxae II,

Loc.—Queensland: Brisbane, in moss, October 1934, three $ $, two @ 9,

one deutonymph.

The above species of Hydrogamasus are all very closely related, differing

only in minute details. They may be separated by the following key, which for

comparison includes the Antarctic species FH. antarcticus Tragardh.

Fig. 8, A-Ro Hydrogemasus australicus u.sp.: A, dorsum @; B, venter 9; C,

epistome 9 ; D, E, epistome g; F, palp g; G, mandible 9; H, same g¢ ;

I, labial cornicle g ; J, same @; K, trochanters III and IV 9; L, same ¢;

M, prae-endopodal shields and male genital foramen; N, leg IT g ; O, tarsus leg III;

P, same, leg IV; Q, deutonymph, dorsal; R, same, ventral.

Key ro rit Anrarcricus Group or THE Genus Hyprocamusus

363

Tarsus of second leg with an outer short blunt process near the base. Movable chela

of mandibles with one tooth, and long slender process: fixed chela with 2 teeth.

Epistome triangular with median mucro nearly half the length, edges laterally with

about 10 small teeth. AQ, antarcticus Tragdh.

Tarsus of sccond Ieg without process. Epistome not such a triangle, median mucro

longer.

Process on movable chela of mandible long and slender, parallel-sided, and reaching

tip of chela. Movable mandibular chela with 1 tooth, fixed chela with 3 teeth.

A. relatus n.sp.

Process of movable chela of mandibles stouter.

Chelae of mandibles subequal in length.

Movable chela of mandibles much shorter than fixed; process as Jong as, and over-

lapping chela; movable chela with 1 tooth, fixed chela with 3 teeth.

Hl. australicus 1. sp.

155

4 Process of movable chela only two-thirds length of chela; movable chela with

1 tooth, fixed chela with 2 small teeth in front of “pilus dentarius,’ and two equally

small teeth behind. IT, relictus n. sp.

Process of movable chela reaching almost tip of chela: movable chela with 1 tooth,

fixed chela with 3 large teeth. AT, dentatus n. sp.

2 2

1 Trochanter IV with prominent posterior apical tooth, Mucro of epistome apically

tridentate, as long as base. base with sides finely toothed and forming an angle of

45°; movable chela of mandibles with 3 tecth, fixed chela with 5 teeth.

H. dentatus n. sp.

Trochanter IV at most with indistinct posterior teeth. 2

2 All trochanters without distinct apical teeth. 3

Trechanter III with either an apical anterior tooth, or an apical posterior blade-

like tooth. 5

3 Mucro of epistome about half the height of epistome and its sides almost in line

with the sides of base, which in the distal half have 8-10 small teeth.

HI. antarcticus Vragardh

Mucro about three-fourths length of epistome, its sides forming a distinct angle

with the sides of the base; apically the sides of mucro have a mintte tooth, and the

sides of the base only very fine serrations, 4

4 Length to 750 y. HA. relictus n. sp.

Iength to 1,000 y. H. relictits v. major nv.

5 Trochanter III with an anterior apical blunt tooth, Lateral inguinalia within the

angle of the ventrianal shield. H. relatus un, sp.

Trochanter III with a posterior blade-like apical tooth. Lateral inguinalia outside

of the angle of the ventrianal shield. A. australicus n. sp.

Vitzthum 1929 (Tierwelt Mitteleuropas, Bd. II, Acari, 17) in his key to

the Parasitidae defines the genus [7 ydrogamasus as follows: “Riickenschild ein-

heitlich, auch bei den Jtigendstadien, ohne seitliche Einschnitte.”’ Halbert 1920

(Proc. Roy. Irish Acad., 35, B7), however, has shown that in the deutonymph

and protonymph stages of H. littoralis G. & R. Can, (= salinus Laboulbene)

there are two dorsal shields present. Similarly, 1 have described and figured

(Aust. Antarct. Exped. Sci. Repts., vol. x, pt. 6, 1937) the deutonymph of

H. antarcticus Tragdh. from Macquarie [sland with two dorsal shields, and in

the present paper the deutonymph and protonymph of H. dentatus and deuto-

nymph of H. australicus are also shown to have two dorsal shields. According

to the figures of IJ. litloralis (Berlese, Redia, fasc. 68, No. 5, 6) the jugularia

(prae- endopodal shields of Tragardh, Arkv. f. Zool, 7, No. 28, 20, 1912) consist

of two pairs of sinall plates, none of which bear setae, and are therefore not true

jugularia in Tragardh’s sense. Similarly, Berlese, in describing H. silvestrit

(Zool. Anz., 1904, 27, 28). refers to the two pairs of jugularia (prae-cndopodal

shields) of both FZ, l#toralis and H, giardi (Berl. ct Troues.). In all the species

described since littoralis and giardi, only a single pair of prae- endopodal shields

occurs. This difference alone seems to suggest that these later species should con-

stitute at least a new subgenus. In addition, the epistome of H. littoralis is

triangular with three teeth, the median of which does not form a distinct mucro

as in the group of species of which antarcticus may be taken ag typical,

Hydrogamasus silvestri Berl, 1904, from Italia, is also unique amongst the

known species of this genus in the unusual and more complicated structure of

the epigynium and should probably have a new genus erected for it.

Genus GamaAsipHis Berlese 1904

Acari nuovi, Maniplus 2, in Redia, vol. i, fase. 2, 1903, 261 (Genotype

G. pulchellus Berlese); Tragardh 1907, Swedish South Polar Exped., Bd. v

Liefy. II, Acari, 10.

156

Neoparasitidae with the dorsal shield entire in both sexes. Female with the

ventrianal shield posteriorly coalesced with the underlapping dorsal shield;

sternal shield with four pairs of setae, i.¢., consisting of the fused jugular, coxal

and metasternal shields, the third pair of sternal setae situated much nearer the

median line than the others, fourth endopodal shields free ; epigynium with rounded

anterior margin fitting under the posterior margin of sternal shield, with one pair

of posterior setae; ventrianal shield large, separated from the epigynium and from

the dorsal shield for about four-fifths of its length by a gradually narrowing

suture; peritremal shields coalesced with the parapodial shields which extend

well beyond coxae IV; in the angle between ventrianal, epigynial and ‘:parapodial

shields is a conspicuous round shield. Prae-endopodal shields a single pair in

both sexes, Male with the ventrianal shield separated from the sternal by a thin

suture; sternal shield with five pairs of setae, all four endopodal plates fused with

it; ventrianal separated from parapodial shields by a narrow suture and from

dorsal shield for four-fifths of its length by a gradually narrowing suture, or the

ventrianal entirely fused with the epigynial and dorsal shields; mandibles with a

strong but free process on the movable chela; femur of leg I] with a strong

curved apophysis. Epistome in both sexes with long median mucro and two short

lateral teeth.

GAMASIPHIS FEMORALIS (Banks 1916)

Cyrtolaelaps femoralis Banks 1916, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., xl, 228.

(Fig. 9, A-K)

Colour yellowish-brown, Shape oval, rounded behind,

Female—Length to 835», width 500». Epistome with long stout median

mucro and two lateral mucrones about one-quarter length of median. Mandibles

(fig. 9,1"): movable chela with three blunt rounded teeth in front of “pilus

dentarius” and three large rounded teeth behind. Prae-endopodal shields strongly

chitinised anteriorly and posteriorly but the intermediate horizontal strip mem-

braneous, suggesting the division into two shields. Sensory organ on palp III as

in fig. 9, IK. Ventrianal shield with twelve setae, short and fine, in addition to

the adanal and postanal setae. Legs: 1 665», II 500, II] 420 yp, IV 635 p; all

tarsi with short caruncles and claws.

Fig. 9, A-K Gamasiphis femoralis (Banks): A, venter ¢; B, venter 83

C, epistome ¢; D, same 9; E, mandible; F, same 9; G, labial cornicles

@: H. same g; I, prac-endopodal and sternal shields 9; J. leg II ¢;

K, palpal fork.

157

Male—As in female, length to 750», width 470. Epistome as in female.

Mandibles (fig. 9,E): movable chela strongly curved in apical half, with one

median blunt tooth, and with strong calear process apparently fused for basal

two-thirds then free and following curve of chela, and at the extreme tip

bifurcate; fixed chela with one tooth beyond “pilus dentarius” and two behind.

Ventrianal shield separated from dorsal shield for almost the same distance as

in the female, Prae-cndopodal shields as in female. Legs: lengths as in female,

Il with a stout apical inner process on femur, a similarly placed small blunt lobe

on genu, and a small tooth on tibia. Vorsal setae in both sexes 60-80 » long, fine,

but apically with a pair of setae 120» long.

Loc—Tasmania: Evandale Junction, with Ectatonma metallicium (A. M.

L.). South Australia: Adelaide, 1935, in moss (H. W.); National Park, Belair

and Long Gully in moss, September, 1935, (H. W.).

Remarks—There is no doubt that Banks’ Cyrtolaelaps femoralis, the single

specimen of which is in the collection of the South Australian Museum, 1s errone-

ously placed, A comparison of Banks’ figures, especially of the sternum and

epigynium, with the present figures from mew material will prove this.

Genus Austrogamasus nov.

Neoparasitidae—Female with entire dorsal shield which postero-laterally

underlaps the venter. Legs long and slender ; tarsi with short caruncle and paired

claws. Fork on palpal tarsus three-pronged. Epistome rounded with numerous

short spines or teeth. Prae-endopodal and fourth endopodal shields free.

Sternum with three pairs of setae. Metasternal shields absent, but represented by

the usual seta and pore. Genito-ventral shield elongate, posterior margin squarish

and adjacent to anal shield, with only a single pair of setae definitely on the shield.

Male unknown.

This genus ventrally closely resembles Gymmnolaclaps of the |aelaptidae and

the species might almost be placed there but for the three-pronged fork on the

tarsus of the palpi.

AUSTROGAMASUS GRACILIPES (Banks 1916)

(Fig. 10, A-E)

Cytolaelaps gracilipes Banks 1916, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 40, 228.

Female—Shape oval, but tapering rapidly posteriorly. Colour, deep orange-

brown. Strongly chitinised. Length 920, width 635 », Dorsal shield covering

entire dorsum and, behind coxae IV, underlapping the venter; dorsal setae

(fig. 10, A) long, and fine, 65. Venter; tritosternum with short base, prae-

endopodal shields present, but lightly chitinised and indistinct; sternal shield

barely extending to middle of coxae III, with three pairs of setae; metasternalia

only represented by a seia and pore; fourth endopodal shields free and distinct ;

epigynial and ventral shield coalesced, with a single pair of sctac on level of

posterior edge of coxae IV, elongate with only slightly convex sides, and

reaching apex of anal shield, with truncate end, there are three other pairs of

setae which are hardly on the shield; anal shield sub-rotund with anus in posterior

half and the usual circumanal setae; behind coxae IV and on each side of genito-

ventral shield are three small inguinalia, the outer ones of which are elongate;

peritremal shields narrow and posteriorly only reaching coxae IV.

Mandibles as in fig. 10,D. Epistome rounded medially, more flattened

laterally, with small fine teeth extending right across.

Loc. (two fernales)—Victor Harbour, South Australia, May, 1939 (J. 5. W.).

Recorded by Banks 1916 (as Cyrtolaclaps) from Sydney and Liverpool, New

South Wales, and from [al Lal, Victoria, as in association with the ants Ponera

Wilirag

, We ]

Fig. 10, A-E Alustrogamasus yracilipes (Banks): A, dorsal; B, ventral,

C, epistome; D, mandible; FE, fork of- palpal tarsus.

lutea, Camponotus nigriceps, Ectatumma metallicum, and Polyrachis hexacantha,

collected by A. M. Lea.

Family GAMASOLAELAPTIDAE Oudemans 1939

Zool. Anz., 1939, 126, (1-2), 22, nom. noy, for Metaparasitidae Oudemans, 1906,

As in Neoparasitidae, but with two dorsal shields.

In this family Oudemans (/oc, cit.) includes the genera Digamasellus Berl.

1903, Eurvparasitus Ouds. 1901, Gamasodes Ouds. 1939, Gamasolaclaps Berl.

1903, Haloluelaps Berl. et Trt. 1889, and Rhodacarellus Willm. 1936.

Genus DicAmMaAsriius Berlese 1905

Redia 2, 234.

Dorsal shicld divided. sternal shield consisting of fused jugularia, coxal and

metasternal shields; prae-endopodal shields present (sometimes two pairs or sub-

divided) or ? absent; fourth endopodal shields free. Epigynial shield separated

from sternal, and ventrianal with rounded anterior margin and straight posterior

margin. Ventral and anal shiclds coalesced. large, occupying most of venter.

Epistome with a single mucro or trispinous. [.cg I with claws much smaller than

rest and on distinct but short peduncles. Tork on palpal tarsus three-pronged.

Male with calcar appendage on movable chela of mandibles, and leg II strongly

armed.

159

Owing to lack of literature, particularly Berlese’s description of the type

species Gamasus pusillus, 1 am a little uricertain as to the placing of the following

species in this genus, and the above generic characters are largely drawn irom the

material before me.

? Digamasellus concina n. sp.

(Fig. 11, A-M)

Colour yellow-brown, well chitinised. Length to 630 », width to 450 pg.

Dorsal shields two, separated by a narrow sulure, anterior shield with the front

Fig. 11, A-M) Digaimaselius concina n.sp.: A, dorsum 9 ; B, venter; C, labial

cornicles 9 ; D, epistome @; E, palp 9; F, mandible 9; G, tip of leg 1

9; H, tip of leg 111 9; 1, sternal shield g ; J, epistome g¢ ; K, mandible ¢ ;

L, leg IT g; M, dorsal setae

160

portion of its lateral margins adjacent to body margins, posterior with margins

well separated from body margin, both shields with reticulations. Epistome

trispinous with long median mucro and short lateral mucrones.

Female—Sternal, genital and ventrianal shields with fine reticulations. Prae-

endopodal shields either divided or in two pairs, consisting of a large anterior

rectangular pair, and a posterior linear pair. Ventrianal shield with 10 setae

besides the adanal and postanal setae. Palpi as in fig. 11 E, femur with two long

strong setae, tibia with an outer ciliated seta. Median mucro of epistome simple.

Labial cornicles as in fig. 11,C. Mandibles (fg. 11 F); movable chela with

three prominent teeth and a series of small teeth between apex and first tooth and

between first and second teeth; fixed chela with two large basal teeth, then a series

of small teeth and another large one before apex. Dorsal setae of two kinds,

long straight, somewhat clavate, ciliated setae, 46 » long, and shortly curved, only

indistinctly ciliated setae 30, long, arranged as in fig. 11,A. Legs I 585 uy,

IT 420», IIT 410», TV 500» long (hg. 10,G,H).

Male—-Very similar in dimensions and dorsal shields to female, Epistome

with median mucro apically tridentate. Mandibles; movable chela with calcar

process free in apical half, with a single median tooth; fixed chela with a sub-

basal and a median large tooth, then a series of fine teeth and a large tooth before

apex. Sterno-genital shield separated from ventrianal, with five pairs of setae.

Prae-endopodal shields in two pairs, the anterior pair more or less rectangular,

posterior pair pear-shaped with bases inwards. Leg II thickened, as in fig. 11 L.

with a strong inner subapical calear process, and a small stout inner spine-like

process on gent.

Loc.—In moss, Long Gully, South Australia, August 1938 (7 29,1 8).

? Digamasellus punctatus n. sp.

(Fig. 12, A-L)

Colour yellowish-brown, well chitinised. Length both sexes to 700 2, width

to 400. Dorsal shields two, well separated by a suture a little posterior of the

middle, anterior only adjacent to body margin at the front end, posterior shield

well separated from body margin but nearer apically than at sides, both shields

strongly rugose with uniform, ciliated, somewhat bushy setae. Epistome with a

simple median mucro, but base laterally with numerous pronounced small teeth.

Female—With only one pair of prae-endopodal shields as in fig, 12 B, sternal

shield consisting of coxal, jugular and metasternal shield combined, with only

indistinct reticulations; fourth endopodal shields free; ventrianal shield large,

with twelve setae besides the adanal and postanal setae, laterally of the anterior

corners of ventrianal shield are a pair of small elongate shields; epigynial shield

as in fig. 12,B. Palpi (fig. 12,J), on tibia with two unciliated sensory setae as

figured. Epistome as in fig. 11,D. Mandibles (fig. 12,C); movable chela with

three large teeth, fixed chela with five teeth. Legs I 585 nh, I] 420y, 1II 340 p,

TV 500 » long, claws of I very small and on very short but distinet peduncle.

Male—Size and dimensions of shields and legs as in female. Ventrianal

shield (fig. 12, E) very wide, occupying almost whole of venter. Epistome as in

fig. 12,G. Only one pair of prae-endopodal shields. Mandibles (fig. 12,:T);

movable chela with one median tooth, and the calear process shorter than chela

and apically free, fixed chela with three teeth. Leg II (fig. 12, K) with femoral

process and apical spine-like tooth or geni.

Loc.—South Australia: Adelaide, June, 1935 (1 @); National Park, Long

Gully and Belair, August 1938 (2 ¢ 2,64 ¢).

161

i , y _£

Fig. 12, A-L Digamasellus punctatus n.sp.: A, dorsum 9; B, venter 9; C,

mandibles 9 ; D, epistome 9 ; E, venter ¢; F, mandible g; G, epistome ¢ ;

H, same of another specimen; I, right labial cornicle ¢@; J, palp @; K, leg IL 9;

L, anterior end of sternal shield ¢.

? Digamasellus tragardhi n. sp.

(Fig 13, A-F; 134, A-D)

Female—Shape a rather broad oval, Length 580, width 370». Dorsal

shield strongly chitinised, subdivided by a suture at midway. Dorsal and ventral

shields with fine reticulations. Dorsal setae as in fig. 13, A, F of two kinds, some

including the scapula setae rather clavate and bushy 40 » long, the others strongly

curved and scythe-shaped, 50 long. Prae-endopodal shields in three pairs

(fig. 13, B); sternal shield consisting of jugular, coxal and metasternal shields

coalesced ; fourth endopodal shields free. Epigynial shield with rounded anterior

margin and straight posterior margin, with two setae placed laterally and well

forward of the posterior margin. Ventrianal shield large with 12-14 setae besides

the adanal and postanal setae. Epistome five-spined with the median mucro much

the longest. Mandibles as figured, fixed chela with seven teeth, movable chela

with three teeth. Fork of palpal tarsus three-pronged ; the lowest prong very small

as in the previous species. All legs short and thick, claws of leg I small, on short

but distinct peduncle; some of the dorsal setae on femora of all legs moderately

stout, length of leg I 500 ~, TI 420», TIT 385 p, TV 520 p.

Male—As in female with relatively short thick legs. Length 585 4, width

420 ». Dorsal shields and chaetotaxy as in female. Mandible as in fig. 13a, B,

162

movable chela with strong curved calear process and overlapping tip of chela.

Epistome (fig. 14,A) quinquispinous. Sternal shield (fig. 14,C) with five

pairs of setae and three pairs of pores; genital foramen large, prae-endopodal

shields divided into three pairs. Leg LL with stout apophysis on femur and small

one on genu (fig. 14, D).

Loc.—A single 2 from moss, Adelaide, June 1935; five é é in moss. Bridge-

wate, South Australia, Augusi 1942 (J. S. W.).

Remarks—TVhis interesting species is doubtfully placed in this genus, from

the other species of which it differs in the short thick legs, especially I, and the

five-spined epistome.

Fig. 13 A-F Digamasellus trégdrdhi n.sp.: 9, A, dorsum @; B, venter 9;

C, epistome @ ; D, mandible; E, fork of palpal tarsus; F, dorsal setae.

Fig. 13a, A-D Digamasellus trégdrdhi n.sp. g : A, epistome; B, mandible;

C, sternal shield; D, leg IL.

165

? Digamasellus semipunctatus n. sp.

(Fig 14, A-B)

Description—Strongly chitinised yellowish species, shape egg-like. Length

850 », width 500». Dorsal shields two, distinctly separate, anterior with irregular

rugosities or punctures, posterior with reticulate lines. Dorsal setae on shields

uniformly ciliate and clavate, 65» long, except the apical pair on the posterior

shield which are similar but shorter. The setac outside the anterior shoulders

of the posterior dorsal shield are similar to those on the shield, but all the others

(cf. fig. 14, A) are short, simple and curved. Prae-endopodal shields simple;

Fig. 14, A-B Digamasellus semipunctatus n.sp.: A, dorsum; B. venter.

sternal shield with four pairs of setae, the second and third pairs much stronger

than the first and fourth; fourth endopodal shields free. Epigynial shield as in

fig. 14, B with strongly chitinised sclerite on anterior wall of the vagina, with one

pair of setae subpostero-lateral, Ventrianal shield large, subtriangular with teu

simple fine setae and two ciliated setae, in addition to the circumanal setae, the

postanal one of which is also ciliated. Between the epigynial and ventrianal

shields is a transverse row of four smal narrow horizontal shields, and outside

of these is a pair of strong, rather large metapodial shields. The setae outside

the ventrianal shield are small, fine and curved.

Legs, normal for the genus, the tarsi of leg I with a well-developed, although

short peduncle.

The epistome is similar to that of D. concina,

Loc.—A single @ from moss, Bridgewater, South Australia, August 1942.

164

Remarks—This species is not only much larger than the others, but also

differs from D. punctatus n. sp. (with which it agrees in having only one kind of

setae on the dorsal shields) in that only the anterior dorsal shield has rugose

punctures, the posterior having only reticulations. The above four species may

be separated by the following key.

Key To THE AUSTRALIAN Species or DiGAMASELLUS

1 Dorsal shields with only one kind of setae.

Dorsal shields with twc kinds of setae,

to BY

2 Both anterior and posterior dorsal shields rugosely punctate. Size, to 700 y.

D, punctatus n. sp.

Only anterior dorsal shield rugosely punctate. Size, to 830 y.

D. punctatus nv. sp.

3 Legs of normal build. Epistome trispinous. D. concina n. sp.

Legs short and thick, especially I. Epistome quinquispinous D. trtigardhi un. sp.

Family PACHYLAELAPTIDAE Vitzthum 1931

Result. Sci. du Voyage aux Indes. Orient. Neerlandaises 2, 1931, fase. 5; Hand-

buch der Zool., 3, (2), Acari, 1931.

Here Vitzthum (loc. cit.) includes the genera Pachylaelaps Berlese 1888.

Onchedellus Berl. 1904, Megalolaelaps Berl. 1892, Pachyseius Berl. 1910,

Olopachys Berl. 1910, Llaphrolaelaps Berl. 1910, Sphaecrolaelaps Berl. 1903,

Brachylaelaps Berl, 1910, Platylaelaps Berl. 1904, Paralaelaps Tragardh 1910,

Pachylaella Berl. 1916, Beauricura Ouds. 1929, Neoparasitus Ouds, 1901,

Of these Oudemans 1939 places the last two genera in the family Neo-

parasitidae.

Genus PAcHYLAELAPS Berlese 1888

A.M.S. ital. Rept. 1888, fase. 51, No. 10,

Ventral shield of female coalesced with epigynial. No prae-endopodal

shields. Sternal shield with four pairs of setae, ¢.¢., it consists of the fused

jugular, coxal and metasternal shields, and is only slightly differentiated from

the epigynial. Anal shield free. Parapodial shield large and produced beyond

coxae IV, where it lies closely adjacent to the ventri-epigynial shield. Epistonie

with a wide apex with many teeth. In male all ventral shields coalesced. Dorsal

shield entire in both sexes. Leg IL thicker than the rest in both sexes, tarsus I

with two stout spines; leg TV of ¢ with long flexible appendage to movable chela.

Pachylaelaps australicus n. sp.

(Fig. 15, A-K)

Broadly oval, well chitinised brownish-yellow, Length of @ to 900 py, width

to 590 »; length of @ to 850», width to 550%. Dorsal shield entire in both sexes,

with pronounced hexagonal reticulations, with chaetotaxy as in fig. 15, A; setae

50-75» long. Venter @; all shields with pronounced reticulations, no prae-

endopodal shields, sternal shield as in genus, posterior margin strongly concave,

but only indistinctly separated from epigynial-ventral shield, parapodial shield

large, posteriorly reaching well beyond coxae IV and its inner posterior margin

ovetlapping lateral edge of ventri-epigynial shield, anal shield broadly triangular,

outside of posterior prolongation of parapodial shield is a pair of clongate small

plates as in P. imitans Berlese, Venter of @ as in fig. 15,1, legs comparatively

short, and II] stouter than the rest in both sexes; J slender with small tarsal claws

en short caruncle, and II apically with two stout spines, and in female with two

other stout ventral spines, the caruncle arising from between the apical spines;

in male leg II with strong blade-like truncate calear process on femur, Palpi

Fig. 15, A-K Pachylaclaps australtcus 1. sp.: A, dorsum 9; B, venter 9 ;

C, palp 9 ; D, leg IL 9; E, epistome; F, mandibular chelac; G, leg 1 9 ; H, right

labial cornicle @ ; I, venter g ; J, mandible ¢; K, palp of ¢.

(fig. 15, C, K) with tarsal fork three-pronged and prominent, tarsus in 3 also

on inner side with a stout square-ended process (fig. 15, K) somewhat different

in shape from P. imitans. Epistome in general shape typical of genus, with four

major apical teeth, each of which is apically subdivided into four small teeth

(fig. 15,E). Mandibles ¢ ; movable chela with two subapical teeth, fixed chela

with two subapical teeth; in ¢ movable chela without tecth and with a long calcar

process as in fig. 15, J, fixed chela with one recurved subapical tooth.

Loc.—In garden soil, Glen Osmond, March, 1933. Four @ @, three 6 6

(CH. W.).

Remarks—This species appears to be very close to P. tmitans Berl. 1920

(Redia 15, 184), as redescribed and figured by Beier 1931 (Sitzbericht Akad.

Wissenschaft, Wien: Abt. 1, Bd, 9u. 10 Hft., 140), but differs in the structure

of the epistome, the palp and leg II of the male, and in the dentition of the

mandibles.

Family MACROCHELIDAE Vitzthum 1931

Handbuch der Zool, 3, (8), Acarina, 1931.

Legs I without ambulacra and claws, exceptionally with ambulacra in

Neopodocinum Oudms. Prae-endopodal shields present or absent. Epistome

variable, usually fish-tail-shaped with an anterior fork. Female sternal shield

usually with three pairs of setae and two pairs of pores corresponding to the

coalesced jugular and coxal shields, sometimes with four pairs of setae and three

pairs of pores, i.e., embracing the metasternal shields which are otherwise free;

epigynial shield free, with rounded anterior margin and one pair of setae, often

contiguous with the fused ventral and anal shields ; ventri-anal shield usually large

and occupying most of the venter with a variable number of setae. Male sternal

shield with the genital opening under its anterior margin, with four pairs of

166

setae. Male with a calear process on the movable chela of the mandibles and

with the second leg and sometimes the fourth Jeg armed with processes.

In this family Vitzthum (loc. cit.) includes the genera Neopodociniiuimn

Oudms. 1902, Podocinum Berl, 1882, Geholaspis Berl.19 18, Coprholaspis Berk.

1918, Nothrholaspis Berl. 1918, Macrocheles (atr, 1829, Holostaspella Berl. 1904,

Macrholaspis Oudms. 1931, Prholaspina Berl. 1918, Gamasholaspis Berl. 1904,

Calholaspis Berl, 1918, Parholaspis Berl. 1918, Holaspulus Berl. 1904, Helocelaeno

Berl. 1910, Trichocelaene Berl. 1918, Evholocelaeno Berl. 1918, and Vrigon-

holaspis Vitz, 1930,

Genus MacrocHeres Latreille 1829, Berlese 1918

In Cuvier R. Anim, ed. 2, 4; 282; Berlese 1918, Redia 13, fase. 1, 172.

= Ffolostaspis Wolenati 1857, Berlese 1887, A.M.S. ital. Rept., fasc. 44, No. 2.

As in the family; leg | not much if at all longer than body. Dorsal shield

not longitudinally carinate with depressed median area, well chitinised, entire.

Sternal shield with three pairs of setae, Metasternal shields free and conspicu-

ous. Ventrianal shield large, adjacent to posterior margin of epigyial shield, with

three pairs of setae besides the circumanal setae. Sternal shield without definite

median transverse lines, with small reticulate lines of rugosities which are more

pronounced on posterior half. Epigynial, ventrianal and dorsal shield with

hexagonal reticulations. Sternal shicld without porous areas.

Fig. 16, A-F Maecrocheles vagabundus vy. australis Berl.: A, dorsum; BR, venter;

C, epistome; D, mandible; F, palpal tarsus; F, outer dorsal seta.

MACROCHELES VAGABUNDUS Berl, 1889, var AusTRALIS Berl, 1918

(Fig. 16, A-F)

Female—Dark yellowish-brown strongly chitinised. Length to 1,200 p,

width to 7004, Venter: prae-endopodal shiclds wanting; sternal shield with

the median transverse and oblique lines represented by small rugosities, posterior

167

half with rather stronger rugosities (fig. 16,B); epigynial and ventrianal shields

with fine reticulate hexagonal lines; endogynium with the usually rod-like lateral

sclerites ; ventrianal shield large, subpentagonal, with three pairs of setae, besides

the adanal and postanal setac; fourth cndopodal shields free. Epistome as in

fig. 16,C. Mandibles with only a single subapical tooth on each chela. Legs I

and IV somewhat stouter than | and III; £ 820 »j II 670, TIT 750», TV 1,080 »

long. Dorsal setae arranged as in fig. 16, A, all except the two median transverse

rows of 4, 40» long and apically penicillate (cf. fig. 16, 1°), median ones fine,

pointed, and 20 «w long.

Loc.—<A fairly common species generally found attached to flies, principally

species of Musca, as in all the following records:—New South Wales: Upper

Orara via Karangi, April, 1937 (M. A. H.); Tweed River, February, 1928

(T. FF.) ; Sydney, 1909 (T. H. J.); Bathurst, May, 1942. Queensland: Bris-

bane, May, 1941; Bustard Head, June, 1942. It was originally recorded by

Berlese from “Sydney, Australia.”

Remarks—In most species of Macrocheles and allied genera, males are

extremely rare, and all my material is of the female sex.

In the male as originally described by Berlese the femora of leg II and the

trochanters of leg IIT and IV are shown as armed with processes and tubercles.

Macrocheles coprophila n. sp.

(Fig. 17, A-E)

Fig. 17, A-E Macrocheles coprophila n.sp., 9: A, dorsum; B, venter;

C, epistome; D, mandible; E, palpal fork.

168

Female—Y ellowish-brown, moderately chitinised. Length to 1,000», width

to 700, Venter: prac-endopodal shields wanting. Sternal shield without the

median transverse and oblique lines but with a number of irregular transverse

rows of minute rugosities (cf. fig. 17,B). Epigynial and ventrianal shields with

similar lines of minute rugosities; endogynium with the usual lateral sclerites.

Ventrianal shicld only moderately large, about half ag wide again as the base of

the epigynial shield, subtriangular and longer than wide and with three pairs of

setae besides the circumanal setae. Fourth endopodal shields free. Metasternal

shields also free and conspicuous. Mandibles (fig. 17,D) with one subapical

tooth on each chela. T[pistome as in fig. 17, C,

Dorsal shield with fine hexagonal reticulations and setae as arranged, uniform

and simple, 40 « long; shield not completely covering abdomen, tapering for the

posterior two-thirds; the cuticle outside of the shield longitudinally and finely

striated. Legs 1 780», TI 720 w, IIL 7350», TV 1,000 » long.

Loc—Two females from manure heap, Bathurst, New South Wales, May

1932 (S. L.A,).

Genus Noruriotaspis Berlese 1918

Redia, 1918, 13, fase. 1, 169.

Sternum variously and densely rugose, rugosities not reduced, transverse

median line sometimes obsolete; porous areas sometimes present. Body and legs

with scaly secretions. Dorsal setae penicillate.

NoTHRHOLASPis ? MONTIVAGUS Berlese 1887

Holostaspis montivagus Berl. 1887, A.M.S, ital, Rept., fasc. 44, No. 4.

(Fig, 18, A-E)

Strongly chitinised dark-brownish species, the body and legs generally

covered with a scaly secretion. Female: length to 1,400,”; width to 830 pn.

Venter: prae-endopodal shields wanting; sternal, epigynial and ventrianal shields

strongly rugose with the rugosities in clusters (fig. 18, B); sternal shield with

three pairs of setae and two pairs of pores, reaching middle of coxae IV; meta-

sternal shields free and distinct, but almost enclosed by the angle of sternal,

epigynial and fourth endopodal shields. Ventrianal shield with a flattish anterior

margin and then almost evenly rounded, about as wide as long, with three pairs

of setae besides the circumanal setae. Fourth endopodal shields free. Epistome

as in fig. 18,C. Mandibles (fig. 17, D:), each chela with two blunt teeth. Legs,

I 1,000 u long, II 950m, IIL 950p, IV 1400p. Dorsal shield entire, with fine

reticulate hexagonal lines, except in the middle where the rugosities are as in

fig. 18, A; setae mostly with coarse ciliations (fig. 18, E), 90 » long, the median

setae 120 » long and not or only indistinctly ciliated.

Loc-——Common under boards and rubbish, etc., on cultivated land. South

Australia: Glen Osmond, May 1932 (one specimen),; Adelaide, July 1942 (many

female specimens). Western Australia: Perth, February 1932 (one specimen).

Remarks—As only Berlese’s brief description and figures are available to me,

the identification of my material with this species is somewhat uncertain. It

closely resembles it in the ventral and dorsal shields and the mandibles, but appears

to differ in that the arms of the fish-tail portion of the epistome are not anteriorly

ciliated as Berlese’ figures.

Genus GeHoLAsPis Berlese 1918

Redia 1918, 13, fase. 1, 145.

As in Macrocheles but with five pairs of setae on the ventrianal shield besides

the circumanal setae.

169

Fig. 18, A-E Nothrholaspis ?montivagus Berl: A, dorsal view ¢g ; B, ventral

view 9; C, epistome; D, mandible; E, lateral dorsal scta. F-H Geholaspis sp.:

F, ventral view g¢ ; G, mandible; H, dorsal seta irom posterior end.

GEHOLASPIS sp.

(Fig. 18, F-H)

Male—Length 900», width 420, Sternal, epigynial and ventrianal shields

all coalesced, sterno-epigynial portion with four pairs of setae and irregularly

finely rugose, ventrianal portion with five pairs of setae besides the adanal and

postanal setae. Dorsal shield and epistome unobservable owing to damage, but

dorsal setae mostly simply, about 30» long, with posteriorly a pair, apically

ciliated and about 40-50 long (fig. 18,A). Mandibles as in fig. 18, G, fixed

chela with stout bent process. Legs, If and IV much stouter than I and ILI,

1 580 » Jong, TE 500%, ILL 420 p, TV 850 yw; leg IT with stout, short, curved process

on femur, and a smaller one on genu and on tibia, leg TV with a pair of processes

on femur.

Loc.—A single male specimen taken by Mr. S. L. Allman from a dahlia bulb

at Bathurst, New South Wales, November 1932.

Remarks—Owing to having only a single male and because the preparation

became seriously damaged during study, it is not possible at present to place this

species other than in the genus.

170

Genus Euepicrius nov.

Broadly rounded. Dorsum with a narrow suture beyond the middle. Anterior

legs long, without ambulacra or claws in both sexes. Palpal tarsus with three-

pronged fork. LEpistome triangular with median short broad triangular tooth and

laterally three to four small short teeth, Mandibles of ¢ with long slender calcar

process on fixed chela. Legs IL of é armed. Venter: no prae-endopodal shield;

sternum with four pairs of setae and three pairs of pores; epigynial free with

rounded anterior and straight posterior margin, with one pair of setae; ventrianal

shield occupying the whole of the venter and only indistinctly separated from the

parapodial shields. Peritreme long and corrugated. Type Euepicrius filamen-

tosus Nl. sp.

Euepicrius filamentosus hn. sp.

(Fig. 19, A-J)

Description—Broadly rounded species, with the dorsal shields strongly

rugose, and strongly chitinised, yellow to brown in colour. Length, ¢@ 580 p,

8 500%; width 2 420p, 6 420. Dorsally with long filamentous setae (fig. 19,

A) reaching ca. 100-120, posteriorly with a pair of stout ciliate setae 70 p. Legs,

I longer than body, antenniform, @ 750, long, ¢ 720 ,, tarsus without claws;

IT @ 500, 6 350, femur with long calear process; II] @ 480 py, 6 350y;

IV ? 580y, 6 550. Epistome (fig. 19,1, F) similar in both sexes. Labial

gow

Fig. 19, A-J Euepicrius filamentosus n.g. et n.sp.: <A, dorsal view 9; B,

ventral view of @ ; B:, end segments of leg I; C, g sternal shield; D, @ man-

dible; E, epistome ¢ ; F, epistome 9 ; G, labial cornicle; H, 4 leg II; I, palp;

J, fork of tarsus of palp.

171

cornicles as in fig. 19,G. Palpi with sensory spathulate seta on genu. Mandibles

as in fig. 18, D, fixed chela of 6 with a long, slender bent process.

Venter: @ (fig. 19,B) no prae-endopodal shields, sternal shield with four

pairs of short setae, the threc anterior pairs situated well towards the medial line,

and representing the fused jugular, coxal and metasternal shields; fourth endo-

podal shield not visible; genital shield round anteriorly, straight posteriorly with

one pair of setae; ventrianal shield large, occupying whole of venter and separated

from the parapodial shiclds only by a fine oblique line: 4 sternal shield as ‘in

fig. 19,C. Ventrianal shield in both sexes with long filamentous setae.

Loc-—South Australia, in moss, Glen Osmond, June 1933, July 1935; Long

Gully, August 1938. Also one female from Waimamaku, New Zealand, October

1938 (KE. D. P.).

Remarks—Vhe generic name is given on account of the, at first glance, super-

ficial likeness to the genus Epicrius, especially in the long anterior legs without’

claws. In the presence of a distinct peritreme, three-pronged palpal fork and the

structure of the ventral shields it must be placed in the family Macrochelidae.

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FROGS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and E. R. SIMPSON, University of Adelaide

Summary

Oswaldocruzia limnodynastes n. sp.

From intestine, Limnodynastes dorsalis, Adelaide.” Female, 6-7 to 9-5 mm. long; breadth -12 mm.

for worms 6-7 to 7 mm. long, -15 mm. for worms 9-5 mm. long. Male, 3-8 mm. long, -1 mm. broad.

Body filiform, tapering at both ends in female, but tail truncate in male; tail of female ending in

spine 18 w long. Cuticle with about 24 longitudinal striations (as in 0. malayana) visible under oil

immersion together with much finer longitudinal markings between the larger. Lateral membranous

wings absent; cephalic cuticle inflated, with fine transverse striations, inflated region broader

anteriorly but tapering posteriorly to end at -1 mm. from the head end of a worm 6-7 mm. long.

Transverse striations not observed caudad of inflated area. Four minute submedian head-papillae;

cervical papillae absent.

172

SOME NEMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN FROGS

By T. Harvey Jonnsron and E. R. Srmprson, University of Adelaide

[Read 10 September 1942]

Oswaldocruzia limnodynastes n. sp.

(Fig. 1-4)

Irom intestine, Limnodynastes dorsalis, Adelaide.) Female, 6-7 to 9-5 mm.

long; breadth -12 mm. for worms 6°7 to 7 mm, long, -15 mm. for worms 9°5 min.

long. Male, 3:8 mm. long, -1 mm. broad. Body filiform, tapering at both ends in

female, but tail truncate in male; tail of female ending in spine 18 Jong. Cuticle

with about 24 longitudinal striations (as in O. malayana) visible under oil immer-

sion together with much finer longitudinal markings between the larger. Lateral

membranous wings absent; cephalic cuticle inflated, with fine transverse

striations, inflated region broader anteriorly but tapering posteriorly to end at

‘1 mm, from the head end of a worm 6:7 mm. long. Transverse striations not

observed caudad of inflated area. Four minute submedian head-papillae ; cervical

papillae absent,

Mouth with three insignificant lips devoid of papillae or special chitinization.

Oesophagus *43 mm. long, 18 » broad in region of nerve ring in female 6°7 mm.

long; cylindrical anteriorly, posterior portion conical. Intestine dilated just in

front of conical rectum. Kectal glands, probably three, at sides of narrow junction

of intestine and rectum. Anus +2 mm. from tip of tail in female 8-4 mm. long.

Nerve ring inconspicuous, *18 mm. from anterior end of worm 6:7 mm.

long, in vicinity of excretory aperture, Latter on very slight elevation, -27 mm.

from head end of female 6°7 mm. long, Excretory sac 90» long, 45» broad,

opening about 25 from its anterior end into small tube leading to pore. The

¥-shaped gland of O. insulae Morishita (1926) and the corresponding organ

(Travassos 1917) in O. leidyi appear to be much more ornate than the simple sac

of O. limnodynastes,

Female—Ovaries arising anterior to genital pore; divergent, one extending

anteriorly almost to pharynx and then returning as oviduct, posterior ovary

travelling caudad to region of rectum to become the oviduct which bends forwards

as uterus. Vulva a transverse slit, 404 long, in anterior part of posterior third

of body, with slightly protruding lips. Vagina thin-walled, divergent, each arm

40 » long and continuous with short ovejector, Latter of two portions, proximal

part puckered and corresponding to the funnel of O. leidyi as described by Steiner

(1924), distal part with faint longitudinal striations suggesting muscle fibres;

distal portion leading through four valves with longitudinal striations into vagina.

Valvular region with small lumen and very thick walls, area just behind valves

slightly bulbous and with faint transverse striations suggestive of sphincter fibres;

on outer side of bulb a row of large cells with distinct nuclei, these cells ‘being

probably secretory and representing the “varnish gland” of O. leidyi (Steiner

1924) and O. pipiens (Walton 1929). A vulvar dilator muscle was seen in the

same position and with the same relations as that of Q. leidyi. Eggs 36 by 25 p,

in morula stage on arrival in uteri. Oviduct walls more granular at junction with

uterus, this part perhaps serving as a shell gland.

Male—Testis enlarged posteriorly before entering vesicula seminalis ; ejacu-

latory duct and rectum forming partly chitinized tuba opening at base of genital

cone, Spicules short, 95 in length, shape difficult to determine because of

(2 O. limnodynastes has also been identified from matcrial collected from Hyla aurea

from Sydney and Melbourne.

Trans, Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 Decemher, 1942

173

presence of spines and projections; distal portion apparently ending in three

spines, one strongly chitinized and forming base of somewhat trowel-shaped

spicule, the other two spines supporting its sides; proximal part characteristic,

forming short handle of the trowel and provided with median spine. Accessory

piece slightly curved, slipper-shaped, 45 2 long, Gubernaculum absent.

Bursa with two lateral and a small median dorsal lobe. Latter supported by

dorsal ray ending in four branches, the arrangement resembling that of O. pipiens

(Walton 1929). Each lateral lobe with six rays; ventro-ventral and latero-ventral

close together and reaching edge of bursa; externo-lateral slightly broader than

the others and curved ventrally; median and postero-lateral rays together and

reaching edge of bursa; externo-dorsal arising from base of dorsal ray, Three

pairs minute preanal papillae. Genital cone chitinized, 12 » long.

Our specimens fall within the genus Oswaldocrusia Tray. 1917, as emended

by Morishita (1926), because of the filiform body, expanded head, transversely

striated cuticle, form of bursa, ventral rays nearly equal and adjacent, medio-

and postero-lateral rays parallel and curving dorsad, externo-dorsal ray arising

from the base of the thick, straight dorsal ray which divides into four branches

at its extremity, spicules equal similar and branched and absence of eubernaculum

and prebursal papillae. The presence of an accessory piece ig not usually men-

tioned by authors, though Baylis (1933) stated that in O. malayana it was narrow

and canoe-shaped but was not heavily chitinized, Travassos (1937) transferred

the latter species to Trichoskrjabinia, he latter author reviewed the genus

Oswaldocrusia (1937) in his monograph of the Trichostrongylidae,

Spironoura hylae n. sp.

(Fig. 5-7)

From intestine, Hyla aurea, Sydney. Slender elongate worms; female

12-18 mm, long by *45 mm.; male 13-13°5 mm. by *33-°38 mm, Mouth with three

lips, each with two papillae; pulp of each papilla expanding just below surface as

though to subtend two, instead of one, papillae, the condition thus being inter-

mediate between that of Spironoura which has two inner and two outer papillae

on each lip, and that of Zanclophorus which possesses two papillae on each lip.

Buccal cavity with three chitinous plaques similar to those described bys

Seurat (1918) for S. lambdiensis; two horse-shoe-shaped cuticular supports at

each corner of cavity, Short anterior gullet or pharynx; oesophagus long,

1:84-2-1 mm. in male; oesophageal bulb differentiated into anterior somewhat

pyriform portion and posterior spherical region, separated by deep constriction.

Several valves at oesophageo-intestinal aperture. Intestine ‘slightly dilated at

anterior end; rectum narrow with chitinized walls and receiving rectal glands;

large anal dilator muscle. Simple sac-like excretory vesicle with narrow duct

opening on mid-ventral surface, ‘67 mm, from anserior end in male specimen

13 mm. long, Nerve ring -4--43 mm. from anterior end in female, *37 mm, in

male.

Female—Vulva near commencement of posterior third of body length; lips

protruding slightly. Vagina lined by large columnar cells; sphincter near vulva;

vagina passing forwards, widening somewhat just before junction with the two

uteri. Latter lined by flattened cells; opposed, cach uterus bent on itself in a

number of U-shaped loops in anterior and posterior parts of body; circular muscle

at junction of uterus and oviduct. Each ovary forming long loop in anterior

region of body, anterior ovary and uterus remaining there, the other ovary pro-

eceding a short distance caudad from vulva to join oviduct, the posterior uterus

making its way forwards to enter the vagina anteriorly to the vulva. Both ovi-

ducts U-shaped. Eggs 54 by 43 j, little development before being laid.

174

Male—Testis arising in posterior half of body, extending forwards nearly to

oesophagus before bending back to become vas deferens, Preanal sucker just in

front of oblique muscles of tail. Spicules 2 mm, long, curved, similar, flattened

laterally, much broader at distal end, ventral side with two thickened ridges that

are more heavily chitinized at the free end of the spicule. Accesscry piece shaped

like an open trough with the four corners prolonged into spines. Papillae ten pairs

including four preanal pairs; single median pre-anal papilla.

The species agrees with Spironoura in having a pharynx and oblique muscle;

in the characteristic preanal sucker; and in the absence of cuticular fringes on the

lips. It differs from Spironoura but agrees with Zanclophorus in the number of

papillac on cach lip, the presence of horse-shoe-shaped cuticular ridges at the

corners of the mouth, the presence of cuticular plaques in the vestibule, the length

of the spicules, and the presence of a fairly well developed accessory piece. hese

facts suggest that Zanclophorus should be regarded as a synonym of Spironoura

whose generic diagnosis would then require some emendation,

Cosmocera limnodynastes n. sp.

(Fig. 13-15)

Small worms from intestine of Limnodynastes dorsalis, Adelaide. Female

4°25 mm. long, 485 » broad; male 1-6 mm. long, 185 4 broad. Mouth with three

insignificant lips, dorsal less prominent than ventro-laterals; each lip with two

small papillae. Ventral wall of pharynx prolonged between ventro-lateral lips to

resemble a fourth lip,

Mouth opening into small vestibule about 15m long. Odcsophagus simple,

straight, dilated posteriorly to form bulb with valvular apparatus in centre.

Oecsophagus and bulb 430, long in female; 310» long and 27 » broad in male;

bulb 53» long and 59» broad in male; its opening into the anterior swollen part

of intestine guarded by valves. Rectum lined with chitin; three large rectal

glands present.

Nerve ring 8°75 broad, 149, and 162, from anterior end in male and

female respectively, Excretory pore on same level as oesophageal bulb; 431 p

from anterior end in female, 306 in male, Two longitudinal excretory canals

joining ventrally to form terminal vesicle opening on slight prominence on mid-

ventral surface; terminal region of canals and the vesicle itself surrounded by

group of large cells. Excretory pore with circular and longitudinal muscle fibres.

Female—Ovaries arising in anterior part of body and passing forwards to

about 300 ~ from anterior end, then turning back to travel posteriorly. One enters

its uterus in region of vulva; the other forming with the posterior uterus a

U-shaped loop near the rectum. Uteri large, with eggs in all stages of develop-

ment; coiled embryo present in the more mature eggs. Vagina 250, long;

2:1 mm, from anterior end of a worm 3°8 mm, long. Eggs 144 u long, 94 » broad.

In their general outlines the genitalia of the female resemble those of C. com-

mutata (Travassos 1931),

Male—Tail curved ventrally, ending in short spine; numerous papillae and

plectanes. Latter in two rows of five each, preanal in position; also a single

median plectane just anterior to cloacal opening; each plectane strengthened by

chitinous tooth and bearing rosette consisting of ring of small teeth at its

extremity. Row of papillae on each side of plectanes; five pairs of papillae near

spicule. two of these surrounding anus. Post-anal papillae arranged in two series,

one series on either side of mid-ventral line, and the other irregularly scattered

over the surface; size of papillae decreasing as they proceed caudad. Gubernacu-

lum large, 0-11 mm. long, shaped like a spicule with a grooved ventral surface in

which spicules glide. In hoth the specimens examined it protruded from the sur-

face of the body and its free end was pointed. Walls of cloaca chitinized: and

175

Terrlstliuietnne

Fig. 1-10

Fig. 1-4, Oswaldocrusia limnodynastes: 1, female; 2, head (to same scale as fig. 3);

3, tail of male; 4, dorsal ray. Fig. 5-7, Spironoura hylae: 5, anterior end; 6, head;

7, tail of male. Fig. 8-10, Rhabdias hylac; 8, worm from lung; 9, head; 10, tail.

176

especially thickened just below anus, to constitute an accessory piece. Spicules

slender, resembling simple curved rods; 2:4 » broad; length not ascertained with

certainty but lying somewhere between 50» and 75,. In general configuration,

gubernaculum and spicules resembling those of C. comnutata as figured by

Travassos (1931).

Cosmocerca australiensis n. sp.

(Fig. 16)

Females from intestine of Limnodynastes dorsalis, from the vicinity of

Adelaide. Since no males are available, classification is difficult, the distinctions

between sub-families being based upon characters possessed by the male. The

specimens belong to the Cosmocercinae (Railliet 1916) and most closely resemble

members of the genus Cosmacerca, ‘(hey differ from the allied Cosmocercella in

the extreme anterior position of the vulva and in the absence of typical papillae,

only two labial papillae being present in this species; and from Apiectana in the

anterior position of the vulva and in the absence of two divisions in the oeso-

phagus. They are accordingly grouped provisionally under Cosmocerca.

Worms short, 7°5 —~9 mm. long, 380 — 480, broad. Cuticle trans-

versely striated. Tail ending in long spine about 1-0 mm. in length. Oesophagus

(including bulb) 353 long, 47 » broad; slightly dilated just anterior to, and

constricted just before entering, bulb; latter 99 » long, 126 w broad, with valvular

appartus in centre; its opening into intestine guarded by valves. Intestine simple,

unterior part slightly swollen. A number of rectal glands; well-developed post-

anal dilator muscle,

Terminal excretory vesicle circular, supported by chitinous thickenings ; open-

ing immediately anterior to vulva. Nerve ring 150» from the anterior end.

Ovarics divergent, arising near mid-body; posterior ovary procecding caudad,

to give rise to oviduct; anterior ovary passing forwards into vicinity of vagina to

become convoluted, its oviduct proceeding caudad to region of rectum, whence,

turning back again, it runs alongside the other oviduct. The two travel cephalad

and open into the large uterus, which contains eggs in the morula stage. Vagina

divided into proximal glandular and distal muscular portion; vulva at 573 » from

anterior end. Eggs ellipsoidal, 137 » by 36 p.

Cosmocerca propinqua n. sp.

(Fig, 11-12)

J°emales from intestine of Limnodynastes dorsalis, Adelaide. It is closely

allied to C. australidnsis, and differs from it in the following characters:

Worms shorter, measuring 5 mm, long, 369 » broad; oesophagus 480 p long,

43 » broad, its bulb 108 » long, 126 » broad; nerve ring 126» from anterior end,

Excretory vesicle oblong; chitinous rim surrounding the excretory pore.

Ovaries arising near mid-body and passing posteriorly where they enter the

oviducts; latter proceeding cephalad, becoming convoluted and then, passing

caudad, opening into uterus posteriorly. Uterus extending from region of ovaries

to beginning of tail; anteriorly passing into thick-walled vagina. Vulva forming

marked projection on ventral surface of body. 290 from anterior end, well in

front of oesophageal bulb, and in this feature especially differing markedly from

C. australiensis,

Rhabdias hylae n. sp.

(Fig, 8-10)

From lung, Hvla aurea from Sydney (type host and locality) and from Mel-

bourne; H. caerulea from Brisbane; and Limnodynastes tasmaniensis from

Adelaide. The following account is based on material from H. aurea from Sydney.

Length 6°5-7-8 mm.; breadth +34--37 mm, Cuticle with faint longitudinal

177

striations and with annular ridges at regular intervals. Excretory pore probably

immediately behind nerve ring. Mouth terminal with six very low, scarcely

discernible lips. Buccal capsule 11 long. Ocsophagus *38-'46 mm. long,

maximum breadth 36-46 (near nerve ring), muscular, slightly swollen just in

front of nerve ring, club-shaped toward posterior end. At junction of buccal

Fig. 11-16

Fig. 11-12, Cosmocerca propinqua. Fig, 13-15, Cosmocerca limnodynastes. Fig. 16,

Cosmocerca australiensis,

capsule and oesophagus eight tooth-like structures seen in some specimens.

Intestine dark brown; constricted near its posterior end, then swollen, then con-

stricted suddenly into narrow rectum with well-chitinized wall. Anus at

-34--4 mm. from posterior end, Nerve ring at -17--18 mm. from anterior end;

a more anterior ring at about 36 » from head end.

178

Vulva at 3°25-3'85 nm. from anterior end, i.e., almost at mid-length of body,.

immediately in front of it in measured specimens. Ovaries long, divergent,

extending for greater part of length of body; bending back on themselves to lead

into V-shaped receptaculum with thickened walls and then into widened uterus.

The two uteri unite close to vulva. Eggs elliptical, 10 by 55, with broadly

rounded ends; with advanced embryos. Larvae common in lungs and digestive

tract, especially rectum.

The occurrence of lung worms in Australian frogs has already been recorded.

Haswell (1891) referred to the presence of Rhabdonema sp. in Hyla aurea in

New South Wales. T. H. Johnston (1916) mentioned that Rhabdonema occurred

in Hala caerulea in Brisbane, and that Rhabdias sp. (1938, 151) was found in

fH, aurea in New South Wales and in Victoria. S. J. Johnston (1912) reported

that lung worms occurred in the following species of Irogs in New South Wales:

Hyla aurea, H. peroni, Limnodynastes peront, and L, tasmaniensis, Since we

have recognised Rhabdias hylae from species of [Tyla ranging from Brisbane to

Melbourne as well as in L, tasmamensis in Adelaide, it is very probable that the

lung worms referred to by S. J. Johnston as occurring in frogs from the coastal

region of New South Wales belong to R. hylac, and we have accordingly listed

them under that name.

Chu (1936) gave a detailed account of his studies on the life history of

R. fuscovenosa var, calanensis, a reptilian parasite in U.S.A., and indicated that

eggs from the parasitic phase could undergo direct development or could give rise

to a free-living sexual generation such as occurs in most species of Rhabdias from

frogs so far investigated. Ile stated (1936, 140) that both types of life cycle were

known to oceur in KR. ranac. One of us (T. 1. J., 1931, 151) reported that the

lung worm of Hyla aurea produced a free-living sexual generation. Travagsos

(1930) suggested the subdivision of Rhabdias and allocated the known species.

Our form belongs to Rhabdias as restricted by him.

PllySALOPTERA CONFUSA Johnston and Mawson

This nematode, in its adult stage, is common in the tiger snake, Notechis

scutatus, in the Murray River districts of South Australia, where its presence was

reported by Johnston and Mawson (1942, 90-91), who recorded finding the

encysted larval stage in the viscera of the following frogs :—Linmnodynastes

dorsalis (including its variety dumerili) from the Adelaide district and from the

Tailem Bend swamps, S. Aust.;Hyla peroni from the latter locality; and Hyla

aurea from Sydney, New South Wales. We now record the finding of these larvae

in their characteristic dark brown cysts in the submucosa of the stomach of Limno-

dynastes tasmantensts and L, dorsalis from Sydney, and from Ayla caerulea {rom

Brisbane. These records were not unexpected, since Johnston and Mawson

(1942 a, 115) have recently reported the presence of the adult stage in the black

snake, Pscudechis porphyriacus in the coastal region of New South Wales. Frogs

form an important part of the food supply of this snake, as well as of the tiger

snake.

Acknowledgment is made of assistance afforded by the Commonwealth

Research Grant to the University of Adelaide.

Hosr List

Hyta AureA—Rhabdias hylae (Sydney; Melbourne); Spironoura hylae (Syd-

ney); Oswaldocrugzia limnodynastes (Sydney; Melbourne).

Hyia peront—Rhabdias hylae (coastal region, New South Wales).

HYLA CAERULEA—Rhabdias hylae (Brisbane) ; Physaloptera confusa, encysted

larvae (Brisbane).

179

LIMNODYNASTES boRSALIS~-Rhabdias hylae (New South Wales); Oswaldo-

crusia limnodynastes (Adelaide); Cosmocerca limnodynastes (Adelaide) ;

C. australiensis (Adelaide) ; C. propinqua (Adelaide) ; Physaloptera confusa

encysted larvae (Sydney).

LIMNODYNASTES PERONI—Rhabdias hylae (New South Wales).

LIMNODYNASTES TASMANIENSIS—Rhabdias hylae (Adelaide; New South Wales) ;

Physaloptera confusa, encysted larvae (Sydney).

REFERENCES

Bayuis, IT, A. 1933 Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (10), 11, 615-622

Cuu, T. C. 1936 Jour. Parasit., 22, 140-160

Haswetn, W. A. 1891 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S:W., (2), 5, (1890), 661-666

Jounston, S. J. 1912 Proc. Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 37, 285-362

Jounston, T. H. 1916 Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 28, 31-79

Jounston, T. H. 1938 Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 62, 149-167

Jounston, T. IL, and Mawson, P.M. 1942 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 67,

90-94

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M. 1942a Rec. Aust. Mus., 21, (2), 110-

115

Morrsuitra, K. 1926 Jour. Fac. Sci., Imp. Univ. Tokyo, (4), 1, 1-32

Sterner, G. 1924 Jour. Parasit., 11, 1-32

Travassos, I. 1917 Brazil Medico, 31, 73

'Travassos, L. 1921 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz., 13, 1-135

Travassos, 1. 1930 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz., 24, 161-181

Travassos, L. 1931 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz., 25, 237-298

Travassos, L. 1937 Instit. Osw. Cruz., Monogr., 1, 1-512

“Warton, A.C. 1929 Jour. Parasit., 15, 227-240

FURTHER NOTES ON THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE INSECT HEAD

By J. W. EVANS

Summary

In a recent paper (Evans 1942, a), in which a description was given of a larval Mecopteron, thought

to be the larva of Nannochorista sp., a figure was included of a generalized insect head. The

attempted reconstruction was based on the sutures of the head of the larva which formed the subject

of the paper and on the information given by Imms (1925, 20).

180

FURTHER NOTES ON THE MORPHOLOGY OF THE INSECT HEAD

By J. W. Evans

[Read 10 September 1942]

In a recent paper (Evans 1942, a), in which a description was given of a

larval Mecopteron, thought to be the larva of Nannochorista sp., a figure was

included of a generalized insect head. The attempted reconstruction was based

on the sutures of the head of the larva which formed the subject of the paper and

on the information given by Imms (1925, 20).

Shortly after the publication of this paper, a copy was received of one by

Ferris (1942), entitled “Some observations on the Head of Insects.” In this

stimulating work, which merits the close attention of everyone interested in insect

morphology, the author rejects Snodgrass’ (1935) contention that the majority of

the various sutures which appear on the insect head capsule have no relation to

original metamerism, Commencing with the head of a Symphylan, he proceeds

tc show how certain sutures present in this form, in particular the suture between

the mandibular and antennal segments, are retained in the heads of insects.

Finally, he arrives at the conclusion that “The various sutures on the insect head

have a definite relation to, and are an expression of, primitive segmentation.” At

the end of the paper is given a reconstruction of a type of a generalized head as

visualized by the author. This type differs very considerably from the one pro-

posed earlier by Snodgrass.

A cursory study of Ferris’ contribution made it clear that my own attempted

reconstruction was based on certain misconceptions. At the same time Ferris’

views were not found to be entirely satisfying, nor, in spite of his claims to have

achieved consistency, entirely consistent. It was apparent, for insiance, that he

had made the identical mistake, for the perpetration of which he so severely

castigates other authors—the mistake in question being the calling of the same

suture by different names im different figures. Further study revealed the reasons

for the discrepancies observed, and it is the purpose of this paper to suggest an

alternative and, it is believed, a more consistent explanation for certain of the

points raised by Ferris. At the same time, full acknowledgment is made of the

very noteworthy and considerable addition to our keowledge of the insect head

which he has made available. The alterations in interpretation suggested in the

paragraphs that follow are an attempt to change one brick for another rather than

to pull down the whole structure.

EXPLANATION OF FIG. 1-6

Fig. 1, head of a larval Mecopteron (Nannochorisia sp.?) in facial aspect; fig. 2, head of

an adult Staphylinid Beetle, in ventral aspect; fig. 3, head of a nymph of Archichauliodes

dubittatus (Neuroptera, Corydalidae), in facial aspect; fig. 4, head of a nymph of

4. dubittatus in ventral aspect; fig. 5, head of a gencralized insect in facial aspect;

fig. 6, head of a generalized insect in veniral aspect.

wlbbreviations—atp, anterior tentorial pit; c, clypeus; cs, coronal suture; eps, epistomal

suture; es, epicranial suture; {, frons; fs, frontal suture; lb, labrum; Iso, labial somite;

maso, maxillary somite; mdso, mandibular somite; ocs, occipital suture; pgs, postgenal

suture; pmas, premaxillary suture; pmds, premandibular suture; ptp, posterior tentorial

pit; sos, subocular suture.

Trans. Roy. Sac. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

182

Discussion

In the head of the Symphylan Scutigerella tumaculata (Newport) Ferris has

traced the full course of a suture which lies between the mandibular and antennal

segments, This suture, which he terms the great suture, and which is not developed

in such local Symphylans as have been examined, arises from just anterior to the

prunary articulation of the mandible. It passes behind the post-antennal organ

crosses the head above the antennae, and then, together with the corresponding

suture from the other side of the head forms an inverted V on the face of the

head. The V-suture, called by Ferris the postfrontal suture, is homologised with

the frontal, postfrontal or epicranial sutures of various authors. ‘That part of

the rest of the great suture which is on the face of the head is termed the temporal

suture, and the posterior part the premandibular suture,

It is agreed that the median facial V of the great suture of Scutigerella is

homologous with the suture of insect heads called by Fetris the postfrontal, and

in the present paper, the epicranial suture, It is questioned whether a single one

cf the sutures of the insect head, indicated as temporal and premandibular sutures

in his figures, is homologous with the temporal and premandibular sutures of

Scutigerella, instead, it is suggested that the sutures called postgenal sutures in

fig. 1 (a Mecopteron larva) and in fig. 2 (a Corydalid larva) are homologous with

the temporal sutures of Sciligerella, and that the sutures labelled premandibular

sutures in fig. 2 (an adult Staphylinid beetle) are homologous with the pre-

mandibular sutures of Scutigerella.

If this interpretation is accepted, then that part of the head lying between the

postgenal and occipital sutures on the face of the head belongs to the mandibular

segment. The part of the dorsal surface of the head posterior to the occipital

suture consequently belongs io the maxillary segment, In certain insects the

occipital suture extends on to the ventral surface of the head, where it may remain

distinct (fg. 2). or lose its identity for part of its course (fg. 4). This suture,

which is called the premaxillary suture in fig. 2, 4 and 6, is identical with the one

termed the premandibular suture in the majority of Ferris’ figures, whilst the

occipital suture is called by him either the temporal or temporal + postfrontal

suture.

It follows that. as a result of these inconsistencies, others must be expected.

Thus Applegarth (1939), who figured the head of the larva of the Mccopteron

Apterobittacus apterus, called a transverse fold lying between the pits of the

anterior arms of the tentorium, the epistomal suture. In view of the position of

the fold between the pits, it is hard to understand how any other interpretation

could be possible, and that it was most certainly correct is shown by the presence

of a well-developed epistomal suture in an identical position in fig. 1. Yet Ferris

is forced to consider that Applegarth made an error of interpretation, and in his

fig. 21, illustrating the head of a Corydalid larva, in which the epistomal suture is

not developed, he terms a suture which is most certainly his postfrontal suture

(the epicranial suture of the present paper) the clypeofrontal suture! On the

opposite page, in his fig, 22, illustrating the head of a Neuropteron belonging to

the family Polystoechotidac, the identical suture is labelled, here correctly, the

postfrontal suture.

A further attempt is made in fig. 5 and 6 to reconstruct the head of a

generalized inscct. It will be noticed that the head figured is prognathous though

the reconstructions of both Ferris and Snodgrass are of hypognathous insects.

A prognathous form has been chosen because it would seem that insects with such

heads retain more primitive characteristics than ones with hypognathous heads.

©) The identity of the beetle figured is unknown. Two specimens of the particular

species were discovered in the collection of the Tasmanian Department of Agriculture,

bearing the label “Brazil.”

183

LABIAL SEGMENT

In fig. 6 the postmentum is represented as medially divided, not merely

because it must have been so at one time, but because it actually is in the head of

the larva, the dorsal surface of which is illustrated in fig. 1. The small rect-

angular plate lying at the posterior apex of the submentum is called by Ferris the

jugular sclerite. It is hard to resist the conclusion that this represents the sternum

of the labial segment. The tergum of the labial segment seldom, if ever, extends

on to the dorsal surface of the head, and it is believed that the narrow band

posterior to the occiput in the larva of Archichauliodes (fig. 3) is of an apodemal

nature rather than part of the labial somite.

PREMANDIBULAR AND POSTGENAL SUTURES

True premandibular sutures are rarely retained in insccts, likewise postgenal

sutures. The latter have already (Evans, 1942,a) been shown to occur in certain

Homoptera, Dermaptera and in Perlid nymphs.

PosiTioN OF TILE OcELLI

Terris asserts that he has seen no insect in which the median ocellus lies

between the arms of the frontal sutures as shown in Snodgrass’ reconstruction

of a generalized insect. Yet in the Psyllid Paurocephala magnifrons figured in

Crawford (1914), and in fact in all Psyllids, and in certain Fulgoroids, such a

condition exists. The explanation given previously (Evans, 1942,a) to account

for the apparent position of the lateral ocelli, either anterior to or posterior to the

frontal sutures, is as follows: When all three ocelli lie anterior to the transverse

suture, as in certain Dermaptera, epicranial and postgenal but not frontal sutures

are retained, When, on the other hand, postgenal sutures are lost and epicranial

and frontal sutures retained, the lateral ocelli are separated from the median

ocellus. ‘The latter condition occurs in such Fulgoroids as retain a median occllus.

In Psyllids, postgenal, as well as frontal and epicranial sutures, are present

(Evans, 1942, b).

SUBOCULAR SUTURES

Attention has been drawn on a former occasion (Evans, 1942, a) to the

suture called the subocular suture in fig. 5. he identical suture, which may be

seen also in fig. 1 and 3, is not homologous with the subocular suture of Snod-

grass. It is suggested that this suture separates the premandibular segment, of

which the genac, but not the eyes, may be part, from the antennal segment. A

search has not been made to determine whether it is retained in several, or in only

a few, insect types. IL is, however, retained in some, and is for instance, homo-

logous with the suture lying just posterior to the antennae in the nymphs of

Tartessus (Jassoidea), illustrated in Evans, 1941. In the majority of leaf-

hoppers the suture is replaced by the post-antennal ledge,

EpistoMAL SUTURE

Agreement is expressed with Ferris that the epistomal suture, termed by him

the clypeo-frontal suture, represents the segmental line between the antennal and

pre-antennal segments. Though lost in Archichauliodes (fig. 3), its former posi-

tion may be determined by the position of the pits of the anterior arms of the

tentorium.,

SUBGENAL SUTURES

Agreement is also expressed with Ferris that subgenal sutures, as defined by

Snodgrass, do not exist. Although the inflection of the cuticle between the

margins of the epistomal suture may continue laterally on each side of the head,

184

as shown in fig. 5, the actual suture itself does not extend beyond the margins of

the frons and clypeus. The inflection is doubtless a secondary development which

followed the acquisition of the anterior mandibular articulation. In certain of

the Homoptera (Ulopids, a few Iedrids and Fulgoroids) the genae are separated

from the maxillary plates by a suture, which has been called previously the sub-

genal suture (Evans, 1939), The suture in question marks the position of the

attachment of the maxillary plates to the head-capsule, and is not homologous

with the subgenal suture of Snodgrass.

ANTE-COXAL Pieces oF ‘tHe MANDIBLES

In the larva of Archichauliodes, small triangular sclerites occur on each side

of the clypeus immediately above the mandibles. Comstock (1920), who termed

these sclerites the ante-coxal pieces of the mandibles, believed them to be of

clypeal origin. The evidence obtained from the head of the larval Mecopteron,

illustrated in fig. 1, suggests that they are part of the antennal segment. Accord-

ing to Tiegs (1940) the clypeo-labrumi is part of the pre-antennal segment,

TENTORIAL Pits

Ferris’ suggestion that the pits of the anterior arms of the tentorium belong

to the antennal segment, or to the intersegmental fold between the antennal and

clypeal segments, is accepted. The pits of the posterior arms of the tentorium are

doubtless invaginations of part of the maxillary segment and always lie on the

maxillary segment, close to the margin of the labial segment,

REFERENCES

AppLecarti, A. G. 1939 Microentomology, 4, (4), 109

Comstock, J. H . 1920 An Introduction to Entomology

Crawrorp, D, L. 1914 U.S. Nat. Mus., Bull, 85

Evans, J. W. 1939 Pap. Roy. Soc. ‘Fas., 19

Evans, J. W. 1941 Psyche, 48, 113

Evans, J]. W. 1942a Pap. Roy. Soc. Tas., 31

Evans, J. W. 1942b Pap. Roy. Soc. Tas., 37

Ferris, G. F. 1942 Microentomology, 7, (2); 25

Imus, A. D. 1925 A General Textbook of Entomology, London

SNopcrass, R. EF. 1935 Principles of Insect Morphology, N.Y.

‘Times, O. W. 1940 Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci., 82, (1), 1

THE GEOLOGY OF THE EDEN-MOANA FAULT BLOCK

By R. C. SPRIGG, B.Sc.

Summary

This region, commencing near Marino and extending eastward towards Eden and southwards to

Moana, comprises pproximately 55 square miles. During recent years, Sir Douglas Mawson has

critically investigated the Adelaide Series in the Flinders Ranges, and it is now of special interest to

study, in detail, the corresponding succession in the southern areas of the State.

185

THE GEOLOGY OF THE EDEN-MOANA FAULT BLOCK

sy R. C. Sprice, B.Sc.

{Read 10 September 1942]

(Witit Mars)

INTRODUCTION AND Previous INVESTIGATIONS

This region, commencing near Marino and extending eastward towards Eden

and southwards to Moana, comprises approximately 55 square miles.

During recent years, Sir Douglas Mawson has critically investigated the

Adelaide Series m the Flinders Ranges, and it is now of special interest to study,

in detail, the corresponding succession in the southern areas of the State.

Primarily, the mapping which constitutes the basis for the present contribu-

tion, was undertaken to obtain more accurate data concerning the thicknesses of

certain beds of the Upper Adelaide Series near Adelaide, and to elucidate further

the geological structure of older rocks in this area.

Lately, attention became directed to the Hallett Cove section by the reported

discovery (Segnit 1940) of Sturtian Tillite on the sea coast about half a mile north

of Black Cliff. Its correctness was considered doubtful, as this coastline has been

traversed many times by geologists with a wide knowledge of glacigene beds,

including Professors Howchin, David, and Mawson. Howchin has not, with all

his wide experience of, the Sturtian and Permian Tillite in South Australia and

the Pleistocene Till in North Britain, recorded Sturtian Tillite here.

The Geology Club of the University visited the locality later in 1940, and

upon imspection unanimously rejected Segnit’s pronouncement (see Mawson

1940),

Older rocks exposed on the block form part of Howchin’s original type series.

Howchin (1929), however, did not fully unravel the sequence of the upper beds,

labelling them simply as “Cambrian Slates and Quartzites,” the “Transition” or

“Purple Series.” IIe devoted many years to establishing the stratigraphical suc-

cession of the Adelaide Serics in the neighbourhood of Adelaide, and his achieve-

incnt is a very notable contribution to South Australian geology. His discovery

and recognition of the Sturtian Tillite is of world-wide interest.

Other geologists, David (1896 and 1928) and Ilowchin (1896), have

investigated problematica found at certain horizons in these beds. At present

these findings are regarded cautiously. Reference will be made to them when

discussing the Brighton limestones and the underlying argillaceous limestones.

Mawson (1907) drew attention to the significance of the laminations in the

slates associated with the Sturtian Tillite, and discussed the petrological features

of the fluvio-glacial grits and slates (Mawson 1914).

Woolnough’s (1904) petrological examination of the quartzites of this arca

indicates ihe amount of detailed work necessary for the whole series. Ilowever,

the scope of the present paper excludes all but fleeting references to intimate

nucroscopic structure.

Segnit’s work excepted, the only geological mapping of this area executed

prior to the present contribution was of several small areas—one by Basedow

(1904) of Tertiary beds overlying Tapley Hill slates around Happy Valley

Reservoir, and another by R. Lockhart Jack (1926). Jack’s mapping was under-

taken in connection with the quarrying of Brighton limestone near Reynella.

Since then additional exposures showing more structural detail have made possible

more accurate mapping. Howchin mapped the outcrop of Sturtian ‘illite.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

186

Segnit’s findings are not discussed at any length, as they show practically

no coincidence with the writer’s in detail or in broader features. Relying too

much it seems upon hand specimens in recognising horizons, he has arrived by

this, or other means, at remarkable and incorrect conclusions. For example, a

purple slate bed, in which faulting accompanied by irregular concentrations of

calcium and magnesittim carbonates in the more calcareous portions, and included

peculiar intraformational breccias have given the rock a somewhat heterogenous

appearauce, is considered Sturtian Tillite. Mawson has shown the error of this

by pointing out that sedimentary conditions accompanying the deposition of the

purple slates (red beds) and Sturtian Tillite are widely different.

Elsewhere the Brighton limestone is described as a Cambrian Archaeo-

cyathinae bed, although no fossils are produced in evidence. Comparison with

accepted Archaeocyathinae horizons shows neither macroscopic nor microscopic

similarity.

Under such circumstances it is considered that, beyond passing reference, it

is unnecessary to encumber the present publication with detailed explanations

and refutatives where views concerning the subject matter differ so widely.

PHYSIOGRAPHY

According to Fenner’s Fault Plan (1931), the area under discussion is the

southerly extension of his combined Belair-Sturt Block. Detailed work has shown

that his plan is subject to modification, The Sturt Fault, which is shown as

terminating in the Coromandel Valley area, actually continues to Moana.

Fenner has made this latter portion part of his Mount Lofty Fault. To prevent

confusion, therefore, Fenner’s nomenclature is not used; the area under review

receives the name of the Eden-Moana Block, and that adjacent and to the east,

the Clarendon-Ochre Cove Block.

‘The Eden-Moana Block dips chiefly to the south. From over 630 feet above

sea level in the vicinity of Sturt Gorge, the stirface descends nearly to sea level at

Moana, Viewed from the Adelaide Plains, the westerly extensions of the block

from Eden descend gradually from 650 feet to 350 feet just south of Marino.

Here the gradient increases rapidly as the sea is approached, ‘The cliffs, save

where streams discharge into the sea, average 50-100 feet in height.

Generally, topography is subdued, but where streams have cit through the

older rocks, youthful characters are strongly developed. This is particularly

noticeable where the River Sturt passes through the northerly scarp of the block

on to the Adelaide Plains. The Morphett Vale and Hallett Creeks have their

sources on the scarp face of the Clarendon-Ochre Cove Block. Their head-

waters are mattre, but passing into Tertiary sediments became still more sub-

dued. Near the coast, however, the exposure of underlying Adclaide Series rocks

results in youthful incised channels. Where Hallett Creek traverses the Ter-

tiaries at the “back’ of the block, Happy Valley Reservoir has been constructed.

The largest stream is the River Onkaparinga which discharges from the

Clarendon-Ochre Cove Block, where in its last few miles it displays decidedly

youthful characters. Continuing on to the Eden-Moana Block it immediately

assumes senescent features, wandering by a serpentinous course in a low, wide

flood plain. Comparison of earlier Lands Survey maps with the latest observa-

tions, indicates recent changes in the lower reaches. Further south Pedlar Creek

traverses the block in a low, wide, well alluviated valley much choked by drift sand.

As the general surface of the block approaches base level in the south, the

transverse streams progressively exhibit older characters. Their valleys are now

incised on a new topography consequent upon the block faulting. The severity of

these differential movements was insufficient to divert the streams along the

obviously easier path along the “back” of the block.

187

The variation of the nature and attitude of rocks exposed along the thirteen

miles of coast has resulted in diverse scenery. The arkosic grit formation just

south of Marino Rocks reaches the cliffs almost horizontally before plunging on

to the wave cut platform at a high angle of dip. The horizontal disposition of

the beds has resulted in vertical cliffs which recede by undermining. Further to

the south toward Black Cliff where steeply dipping beds have not been pierced,

the cliff form is typical of undermining and consequent sliding of material down

dip slopes. Practically vertical strata form the cliffs south of Hallett Cove, pro-

ducing sea-stacks of resistant quartzites interbedded with more flaggy material

south of Curlew Point, where wave action has eroded and collapsed a sea cave in

flaggy beds weakened by crumpling.

Younger beds, dominantly unconsolidated clays of several ages, have pro-

diced at Hallett Cove a well-known feature—a more or less sheltered cove or

small bay—the result of greater marine advance. Southerly shore currents have

built up a short “spit” of boulders made up of the waste products of cliff retreat

and Permian glacial till rewash. Along the foreshore sand dunes have formed;

this feature is seen only once between Seacliff and Rocky Point.

At Christie’s Beach, sand dunes, brown outwash clays with lenticular gravel

beds and alluvium dominate cliff scenery. These soon give place to Oligocene

clays dipping slightly south-west and overlain in turn by Miocene marls and

Pleistocene sands and clays. These latter form the promunent Witton Bluff, but

sand dunes appear at the mouth of the Onkaparinga, At Port Noarlunga a reel

of sandy limestone with triturated fossil remains destroys ihe main force of

incoming waves. South of the Onkaparinga mouth, Miocene marls overlain by

Pleistocene clays and silts form cliffs about 60 feet high. The Miocene beds

slowly pass below sea level, but reappear again south of Pedlar Creek, where they

abut against the Clarendon-Ochre Cove Block.

‘The entrance of Pedlar Creek into the sea is largely obscured by sand dunes.

GENERAL GEOLOGY

The “undermass” of the area consists of a conformable sequence of upper

beds of the Adelaide Series. To the south these are overlain progressively by

younger “‘overmass” beds.

The older series have been folded, and affected by faulting of two widely

separated periods. The overmass of Tertiary beds has experienced only the later

period of faulting, which appears to be still in progress. Slight fault-folding of

the Tertiaries accompanies this later Kusciusko Period of deformation.

In the Hallett Cove area, the Adelaide Series rocks were reported by Segnit

to be intensely folded and faulted, but his map with its remarkable north-south

strike of beds shows practically no folding and little indication of the true struc-

ture. For example, faults are used to explain Howchin’s “Great Anticline” in

Hallett Creek, about one mile from the coast. Confusion between regional

cleavage and bedding planes renders these field observations valueless. The

absurdity of the fault mosaics can readily be seen on drawing sections through

them. Hade or throw is never indicated, and as most of the faults are shown

along bedding planes, they could not therefore account for one foot of displace-

ment, although a minimum of 10,000 feet is suggested by some of the infaulted

blocks. In actuality none of these 14 faults exists. Such work is vitiated by

incessant false preconceptions of complexity.

Observations made for this present paper show the Upper Adelaide Series

to be thrown here into a major anticlinal fold with only minor crenulations, pitch-

ing south, and except in the Sturt Gorge where considerable overthrusting has

occurred, the folding and faulting is “normal.” The eastern limb of the major

188

anticline has suffered “minor” folding, while the western has undergone less

“minor” folding and instead is drag folded.

With the exception of an inlicr of Permian till at Hallett Cove the overmass

is wholly Tertiary to Recent.

THE UPPER ADELAIDE SERIES

The lowest beds consist of pre-glacial slates and quartzites, and are not con-

sidered in this paper, as the sequence is much faulted, overthrusted and folded,

and must await the completion of more detailed mapping in progress north of

Sturt River.

The next stratigraphical unit is the Sturtian tillite, a datum horizon of our

Proterozoic formation, It should overlie the slates and quartzites conformably,

but in Sturt Gorge as a result of an overthrust it appears to underlie them. Jt was

here that Howchin first reported tillite of this age in South Australia. The

tllitic nature of the unit is unmistakable. A fine-grained groundmass (now slaty)

contains assorted erratics of a wide range.

The waning of the Sturtian ice age is exemplified by intercalations of fluvio-

glacial grits in tillite, which finally are replaced by impure limestones and laminated

slates, The overlying series of finely laminated slates grades almost imperceptibly

into laminated and banded slaty limestones, and then into banded siliceous Jime-

stones. Howchin terms this the Tapley Hill Serics. In spite of this gradual

transition, an arbitrary division can be made into banded calcareous. slates

and laminated slates.

The transition into the overlying Brighton limestone is again only gradual.

Thus the completion of a normal sedimentary cycle is perfectly exemplified. The

series is dominantly “grey,” in strong contrast to the “red beds” (chocolate series)

that overlie them conformably. The Brighton limestone becomes dolomitic towards

the top, the result of metasomatism during the succeeding warmer period of “red

bed” deposition,

Howchin’s “chocolate” or “purple slate” series often present a decidedly

tuffaceous appearance, but decision as to origin must await detailed petrological

examination. Curiously, the coarser sediments are dominantly grey-white in colour,

Calcareous beds are uncommon but do occur, and calcium carbonate forms the

matrix for some quartzites.

The chocolate series is overlain conformably by grey-white pre-Archaeo-

cyathinae quartzites, the upper limit of which lies below sea level on this blocls.

THE SEQUENCE

The following log of strata begins with the youngest stratigraphical unit.

Thicknesses are given in feet,

Pre-ARCHAEOCYATILINAE QUARTZITES AND SLATES

1 Grey-white quartsite and flaggy shales. 1,150 feet in thickness.

190 feet Flaggy shales and thin flaggy quartzites. The latter vary in

thickness from a few inches to one foot.

78... No ottcrops observed.

o,, solid quartzite.

21 ,, Flaggy shales and quartzites,

12. .,, Quartzite.

73>, Flaggy shales and quartzites.

63 ,, Flaggy shales and quartzites, the latter being thin and infrequent.

102... = Quartzite,

27, Flagegy shales.

40 ,, “Fused” quartzite.

189

26 feet Flaggy shales; a few thin quartzites.

220

“Fused” quartzite, poorly laminated and cross-bedded, with clay

gall impressions and ripple marks; minor flaggy bands.

Flaggy shales with few thin quartzite bands.

Cross-bedded quartzites.

Flaggy quartzite.

Solid quartzite.

Flaggy quartzites and shale.

Solid poorly laminated quartzite.

Flaggy quartzites and shales.

Laminated quartzite.

Flaggy quartzite,

Solid quartzite with clay gall impressions and cross-bedding,

Thin flaggy quartzite with shaly partings poorly laminated.

Banded sandy cross-bedded purple ferruginots quartzite,

Tre CrocoLATE SERTES

2 Alternate chocolate slates and chocolate quartgites, approximately 2,250 feet.

450 feet Alternate flaggy quartzites and hard slates, chocolate- to grey-

360

1300

coloured. In the lower section, poorly laminated quartzites are

dominant.

Mainly greenish-grey quartzite; some slaty bands. The beds are

occasionally chocolate-coloured; laminations and cross-bedding

are frequent.

Grey quartzites.

Purple slates and purple quartzites alternating in very regular

bands about one foot in thickness. Very remarkable periodicity.

Purple quartzite mainly, with purple slates somewhat laminated

About 300 feet above the base, the quartzites contain thin green

quartzite bands.

Massive grey-white quartsites. 300 feet.

300 feet Massive grey-white quartzites.

4 Chocolate slates (Segnit’s “Tillite’), approximately 140 feet.

140 feet

Chocolate slates and siltstones with minor sandy bands, Intra-

formational inclusions and calcareous and dolomitic chocolate

slates with yellow material. These latter have an increased per-

centage of calcium and magnesium carbonates, and occur in the

upper portions of the bed in some localities.

5 Massive Quartsites. 270 feet.

100 feet Dense pink and grey quartzite.

”

Sandy flaggy quartzite.

Purple phyllitic slates, well laminated.

Thin flaggy slates.

Laminated grey phyllitic slates,

laggy quarizite.

Banded micaceous sandstone,

6 Chocolate and grey slates, 300 feet.

70 feet Laminated grey slates, phyllitic in places.

”

BE)

£3

Gritty felspathic banded and cross-bedded limestone and flaggy

to massive and, at times, banded quartzite.

Well laminated slates; at times phyllitic.

Quartzite.

Grey laminated phyllitic slates,

Quartzites,

Laminated grey slates, at times phyllitic.

190

7 The Arkoses, 180 feet.

6 fect Dense, fine-grained quartzite at times sandy and micaceous.

”

Felspathic grit with pebbles.

Quartzite with haematite laminations.

Flagey quartzite with sandy partings.

Felspathic gritty quartzite.

Quartzite.

Arkosic gravelly band and quartzite,

Sandy quartzite.

Grey sandy arkosic wavy banded limestone.

Quartzite gritty and felspathic ncar the top.

Purple quartzite with a gravel (quartz and felspathic grains)

band.

& Flaggy quartsites. 200 feet.

200 feet

Flagey quartzite.

9 Chocolate and grey flaggy quartzite and slates. 500 feet.

135 feet

”

Purple banded siliceous slates to purple banded quartzite,

Flaggy grey quartzite.

Purple siliceous slates and some purple quartzite.

Flaggy grey quartzites.

Siliceous purple slates with included reddish chocolate intra-

formational flakes.

Grey flaggy quartzites.

Chocolate siliceous slates.

Chocolate siliceous slates with a flaggy chocolate quartzite near

the top.

Grey quartzites to chocolate siliceous slates.

10 Chocolate siliceous slates with chocolate “flakes.” 630 feet.

280 feet

350

”

Banded chocolate slates with reddish chocolate intraformational

“flakes.”

Purple and chocolate banded siliceous slates with chocolate

“flakes,” passing into calcareous slates at the base.

Ture BricgutTon LIMESTONES

11 Buff dolomite and pink and blue limestones. 100 feet.

50 feet

(max.) Buff dolomite passing below into greyish dolomitic

limestones in some localities. Oolitic structure not well developed.

(max.) DPinkish oolitic slightly dolomitic limestone. Dolomi-

tization varies with the locality. Underlain by solid blue and

greyish limestones (as high as 97% Ca CO,,), becoming more

siliceous and banded towards the base. Oolitic structure not as

plentiful as in the pink band.

Tue Tapitey HILt SLATES

12 Banded slaty limestones.

3000 feet This formation grades more or less imperceptibly into the

Brighton Limestone above and the laminated Tapley Ilill slates

below, In its upper portion, the bed is a siliceous limestone with

fairly regular calcareous slate bands, probably of shallow water

origin as cross-bedding is common, Calcium carbonate diminishes

as one descends in the scries, the beds becoming very calcareous

slates. Towards the hase laminations appear associated with the

banding, which itself is diminishing.

A band of chocolate “hieroglyphic” limestone 5 to 10 [eet in

thickness appears some 50 feet below the Brighton limestone.

Blue intraformational limestone is associated with this horizon

and covers a greater vertical range.

191

13. Laminated slates.

7500 feet Well cleaved finely laminated slates, poorly calcareous at the

base, but CaCO, percentage increases above. Very uniform,

with only occasional thin bands of poorly laminated blue-grey

limestones. No arenaceous sediments have ever been recorded

in this considerable thickness of sediments.

Tue SturtiAN TILLITE AND Assocrarep Priases. 1,200 aby

14. Glacials, fluvio-glacials and limestones, 200 feet.

4-10 feet Limestone usually in small bands in laminated slates.

30 —"n, Boulder tillite.

24 ,, Sandstone quartzite to fluvio-glacial sandy grits. Occasionally

the sandstone exhibits poor lamination.

9 ,, Tillitic sandstone quarizite.

6 ,, Tillite.

12. ,, = Tillitie grit.

86 ,, Tillite.

15-30 ,, Gravelly to gritty quartzite and grit.

15 Tillite. 1,000 + fect.

60 feet Tillite: numerous large boulders in a slaty matrix.

10+,, Laminated slate with minor tillitic bands.

60 ,, Tillite with plentiful boulders measuring up to 4 x 3 feet.

Abundant erratics of granites, gneisses, quartzites and some

dolomite.

20 ,, Laminated and banded slates with thin tillitic bands.

15+,, Boulder tillite. Reduced by faulting.

300 ,, Tillite with perhaps a grey quartzite band about 15 feet thick near

the lower limits. This may be a repetition of the following

quartzite by faulting or more probably by isoclinal folding.

15 ,,. Grey quartzite with calcitic base.

500+,, Boulder tillite, reduced by overthrust faulting.

PRE-GLACIAL QUARTZITE AND SLATES SERIES

These beds are not considered in this paper.

A DISCUSSION OF THE MAJOR SEDIMENTARY FRATURES

Tite SturRTIAN TILLITE AND ASSOCIATED /LUVIO-GLACIALS

The importance of securing an accurate estimate of this datum bed has

increased considerably with further studies of the tillite in the Flinders Range by

Mawson (1939), but, unfortunately, in the Sturt Gorge, overfolding and over-

thrusting has reduced the observable thickness and, therefore, the reliability of

one’s estimates. Howchin’s estimate of 1,000 feet is a minimum; a figure

approaching 1,500 feet is more probably correct.

The base of the tillite, obscrved in a railway cutting near the Metropotitan

Brickworks, passes abruptly into solid quartzites, “This transition is not seen in

Sturt Gorge, as it is overridden by overthrusted pre-glacial laminated, fissile and

flaggy quartzites.

The tillite typically possesses a slaty or phyllitic base, containing a varied

assortment of sedimentary, metamorphic and igneous erratics, which show signs of

considerable stress and are elongated in the direction of slaty cleavage. :

At an uncertain distance (more than 500 feet) above the base, an even-

grained, fluvio-glacial quartzite, with sharp grains of quartz and felspar embedded

in a matrix of calcite, appears (see p. 198). Above this a second quartzite band

192

occurs, having approximately the same dip and strike. Whether this is the same

bed repeated in a close fold or by faulting, cannot be asserted. The former is

more likely.

Above this approximately 300 feet of tillite occurs, overlain by a laminated

fluvio-glacial bed, 20 fect in thickness. At intervals the slaty matrix contains

thin bands of tillitic material. An overthrust fault to the west along cleavage

renders stratigraphical relations to the next horizon uncertain. A second fluvio-

glacial band (10 to 20 feet in thickness) follows an interval of 60 feet of tillite.

The possibility of these two inter-glacial horizons being coincident with two

occurring to the west is regarded cautiously as normal faulting alone could be

responsible for this, and the strong fault observed between them is undoubtedly

an overthrust,

Another 60 feet of characteristic tillite is overlain by coarse arkosic grits and

gravels, In thickness it varies considerably, but discrepancy may be duc to

imperceptible mergence into gritty glacials und to bad exposures.

More tillite follows occasionally displaying fluvial characters; the appearance

of several limestone bands and laminated slates marks the conclusion of glacia-

tion. One limestone band analysed 66°3% calcium carbonate and 0-63% mag-

nesium carbonate. For an analysis of the tillite and one of the grit bands see

Mawson 1914.

Tre Taptey Hint Sirates anp BANnven Siuiceous |.iMESTONES

In this remarkable series of more or less calcarcous slates, no arenaccous

intercalations have yet been discovered. Regional cleavage in the lower slates is

perfect, but that of the more calcareous upper beds is poor.

The slates exhibit perfect lamination, which suggests annual deposition

(Mawson, 1907). The laminae pairs are not varves, as can be observed readily

in thin section; the nature of the variation, of alternate layers is not one of grain

size, but dominantly of chemical composition and consequently colouration, An

analysis of the rock is cited by Mawson (1914).

Higher in the series, calcium carbonate percentage increases with con-

conutant loss of fine Jamination and the institution of coarse banding. ‘The slates

were deposited in quiet and relatively deep waters, for current ripples are absent

here. Cross bedding and the intraformational and edgewise conglomerates present

in the upper calcareous slates and slaty limestones suggest shallower conditions,

resultant upon a shallowing of the geosynclinal lake owing to continued sedimenta-

tion, ‘The contention that these beds were deposited in a lacustrine environment

is supported by the lack of marine fossils, which might be expected at this age,

and the presence of laminations tmdisturbed by animal life.

A notable feature of corresponding beds measured by Mawson (1939) in

the Flinders Range is the inclusion of a chocolate intraformational limestone, the

“hieroglyphics” horizon. An identical, although much thinner band of this

limestone was discovered east of Hallett Cove hy the author, about 50 fect strati-

graphically beneath the blue limestone of the Brighton horizon. The oolitic lime-

stone therefore which persistently overlies the “hieroglyphics” limestone in the

Flinders Ranges must be the equivalent of the Brighton limestones. The choco-

late “hieroglyphic” limestone is only 5 to 10 feet in thickness, but blue intra-

formational limestone has a considerablie vertical range.

An interesting variation in sedimentary’ conditions, in particular the com-

mencement of “red bed” conditions, is noticeable in these two widely separated

regions. In the Flinders Ranges, chocolate beds occur for a considerable distance

below the “hieroglyphics” horizon, whereas in the Hallett Cove region chocolate

colouration is not marked until immediately above the Brighton dolomitic

limestones.

193

THe Bricuton LIMESTONES

This horizon cannot be considered as a well-defined sedimentary unit; the

transition from the banded limestones below is only gradual.

At Reynella, the pure limestone passes below into siliceous banded limestone

and another small band of fairly high-grade limestone. Normally in quarrying,

this latter band cannot be removed economically, although sometimes it is

removed during ‘benching’ operations; it is not included in the thicknesses given

for the Brighton limestone. Difficulty experienced in separating these two

horizons reflects itself in quarrying, as hand separation of the good blue limestone

from the fresh, more siliceous material is often difficult, Consequently, frequent

analyses are necessary.

The highest grade limestone, the blue band, Howchin (1929) found to. be

about 15 feet in thickness at Brighton At Reynella it exceeds 50 feet, This

variation is consequent upon “similar” folding, which has caused an increase of

thickness adjacent to the axial planes, and a corresponding thinning along the

limbs of the fold. This transference of material is reflected in the directional

elongation of ooliths. In the South Australian Portland Cement Company’s No. 4

quarry at Reynella, the good blue limestone is at least 50 feet thick on the roof of

an anticline. In the ‘“Reehive” quarry which was opened on the west limb of a

shallow anticline, only 25 feet of blue limestone was found. At One Tree Hill

near Howchin’s “great” anticline, the limestone was found to be: 50 feet thick on

the crests of folds but only 20 feet thick on the most westerly limb, This lime-

stone analyses from 86 to 95% calcium carbonate and from 1 to 5% magnesium

carbonate.

It passes almost imperceptibly into pink limestone, which ITowchin has

erroneously alluded to as the main horizon quarried for cement manufacture. He

records a thickness of 15 feet, evidently quoting measurements from the Brighton

Quarries, where it forms a fairly well-defined horizon. In the Reynella Quarries,

however, the band in some places is hardly recognisable, being a light pinkish and

bluish indefinitely mottled limestone, varying in thickness. Occasionally, it

appears to merge into a white limestone (analysing a maximum of 13% magnesium

carbonate) which has been noticed only in the Reynella area.

Oolitic structure is common in the pink-coloured limestone, less so in the

blue. Microscopically, the ooliths are seen to possess concentric structure and not

radial as might be expected in such pure limestone. Oolitic structtre is prevalent

in limestones overlying the “hieroglyphics” horizon in the Flinders Ranges. As

has been noted, sedimentary conditions in the two widely separated areas are strik-

ingly similar.

Poor intraformational breccia structures are sometinies observed in the lower

portions of the Brighton limestone, but their occurrence is of less importance than

in the ‘hieroglyphic” band. Some of these flake patterns viewed in cross sections

suggested to Professor David (1927), who carried out research on these beds,

various fossil invertebrates. As the identifications were made only on outlines

seen in two dimensions, the discovery cannot be given much eredence.,

The buff-coloured dolomitic limestone overlying the pink and blue bands is

stated by Howchin to be also 15 feet in thickness, but in the Reynella vicinity it

ranges to at least 50 feet, due mainly to geological structure, Depth of dolomiiti-

sation varies considerably; it occurred probably soon after deposition in con-

sequence of subsequent warmer conditions. An average analysis gives calcium

carbonate 41% and magnesium carbonate 29%.

The Brighton limestone outcrops near Halletr Cove have been designated as

Cambrian Archaeocyathinae series by Segnit, No fossils were found and it was

on grounds of lithological similarities alone (of which there seem none of any

194

importance) that his assertion is made. Jt will be remembered that Ilowchin

discovered ring-like markings which he considered as possibly Archaeocyathinae

in a limestone outcropping on the Willunga scarp. Madigan (1927) satisfactorily

proved that this bed was the Brighton horizon and that Howchin’s theory was

incorrect.

The Brighton limestones series, as a whole, indicates (with minor diver-

gences) a gradual increase of magnesium carbonate from below upwards, while

calcium carbonate decreases. Partial analyses are listed below of samples of the

more important bands. Colour is a fair indicator of grade, but not infallibly,

Calcium Magnesium

Carbonate Carbonate

Yo %

Buff dolomitic limestone - - - 41 29

Light grey oolitic limestone - - 62 25

Mottled pink oolitic limestone - - 48 21

Pink limestone - - “ - 8&6 4-5

White magnesium limestone ~ - 80 13

Light grey limestone = - - 90 27

Dark grey blue limestone (best for cement

manufacture ) < - - 91 2°3

THE Cnocorate Series (llowchin’s “Transition” Series)

Tfowchin (1929) regarded these beds as early Cambrian in age, or more

correctly as beds deposited during the transition from Proterozoic to Cambrian.

Until fossils are discovered in this ‘red bed” serics, Mawson (1939) has

suggested that ihe base of the Canibrian be fixed tentatively at the base of the

Pound quartzite which immediately underlies the Archacocyathinae beds. An

entirely satisfactory ruling may not be forthcoming for some time; facts having

an important bearing on the discussion continue to appear.

In this area the chocolate series is well defined, beginning without any un-

conformity after the conclusion of the deposition of the Brighton limestone, but

in the Flinders Ranges chocolate beds have been recorded below the “hiero-

glyphics” limestone horizon (Mawson, 1939),

The succession includes sediments ranging in grain size from that of gravels

with rare pebbles up to one and a half inches in length, through sands and silts,

to muds; calearcous intercalations are uncommon. The dominant colour is choco-

late, but thick white quartzites are also prominent.

The lowest member of the series is a calearcous chocolate slate, passing above

into peculiar beds to which, in the field. the cumbersome title “Chocolate siliccous

slates with reddish chocolate chips” has been applied. Although these beds occur

over a thickness of 1,150 feet of strata, their occurrence in the upper 500 feet is

sporadic. ‘his rock invites close petrological research, as it has many suggestive

sinilarities with volcanic tutfs. Mawson (1939) has noted at Brachina Creek

undoubted tuff beds overlying the “hieroglyphics” limestone, and, in addition,

characters reminiscent of tuffs and perhaps loessial deposits in beds much higher

in the succession. A similar gradation occurs in the area under review.

Immediately above the lower (?) tuffaceous series in the Hallett Cove area,

there follows a well-developed series of grey- white flagey quartzites, which

exeinplify drag lolding to perfection. A specimen from one such drag-folded

quartzite was sectioned by Dr. Woolnough (1904). Some of the beds are ripple-

marked,

Overlying these are Howchin’s celebrated arkoses, which far from homo-

geneous, vary from chocolate and grey, sandy, micaceous and arkosic quartzites,

to pebbly arkosic grits. One coarser arkosic wnit has a calcareous base which

195

weathers, leaving sandy and occasionally cross-bedded bands in strong relief.

A similar but finer-grained sandy limestone, overlying this, analysed calcium

carbonate 67°7%, magnesium carbonate 3-2%, and 25% insolubles.

Arkosic gravels are rare, but quartzite pebbles have been found ranging to

one and a half inches in length. A petrographic description of the arkoses is given

on p. 200 in this paper.

These beds are succeeded by over 300 feet of chocolate and grey slates, which

are ai times laminated and include some quartzites, overlain in turn by 270 fect

of massive flaggy grey quartzites with a few slates.

The next stratigraphical unit has been designated by Segnit as Sturtian

Tillite. The possible occurrence of this datum horizon of the Middle Adclaide

Series in the Hallett Cove locality seemed highly improbable, and subsequent

investigations show that this new theory is totally incorrect. The rock possesses

no characters directly attributable to ice deposition.

In a note to the Royal Society in September 1940, Mawson summarises the

situation thus: “Where older tillte is shown, [ found mainly sandstone and shales

which are gritty and arkosic in their upper limits, In one or two places small

fragments of rock unhomogencous with the main body are embedded in it, but

these can well be accounted for as of intraformational origin, and, in other cases

as scattered spots in the rocks. which have suffered subsequent chemical change,

the original red colour having been bleached to yellow. I could find nothing in

the nature of true tillite, Indeed, the prevailing colour of the rock is good

evidence that this is not a glacial bed.”

‘The main outcrop of this bed occurs in the sea cliffs south of Marino. It is

of supreme significance to realise that the wave-cut platform here is the locus of

a compound Palaeozoic fault hading to the east. The fault zone is extensive,

although downthrow does not exceed 20 feet, and contains quartz stringers and

remarkable crush breccias in its northerly extensions. Where it cuts the bed under

discussion the fault zone becomes even more broken, being more in the nature of

a general disruption of the rock, which outside this zone is a normal well-laminated

slate. Thin dolomitic bands have heen shattered, and owing to the broken nature

of the rock irregular splashes and vughs of calcite and dolomite have formed. It

is these, together with intraformational structures, which have given the rock a

faintly tillitic appearance.

A pseudotillitic specimen was selected for examination; it has a dolomitic

slaty base in which homogeneous golden fragments of a material more dolomitic

than the base are embedded. A partial analysis of the yellow dolomitic fragments

is CaCO, 45%, and MgCO, 36°7%. The base analysed 29-0% CaCO,, and

17°9% MgCO,. Such a composition could not be expected in a normal tillite

unless ice was eroding almost wholly calcareous and dolomitic beds over a

tremendous area. In a typical analysis of the Sturtian Tillite quoted by Mawson

(1914) the percentages of CaCO, and MgCO, are 3:°14% and 2°699% respec-

tively. Thus it is readily’ evident that there is no resemblance in composition.

Jn addition, the Sturtian Tillite is always dominantly grey in colour, never purple

as is this unit.

Diligent search, both in the field and in micro section, has failed to reveal any

composite grains. This fact is in itself convincing,

Any claim that geographical separation could account for the obvious. dis-

erepancies between the bed and the recognised Sturtian Tillite is illogical, as the

latter bed is relatively constant in character over arcas of thousands of square

miles separated by considcrable distances. Further, there ig no correlative evi-

dence for tillite at this horizon elsewhere in this State, nor is there the slightest

evidence for the displacement by faulting of a block of Sturtian Tillite to this

locality.

196

Thus colour, composition,, restriction of fragment type, absence of composite

grains, obvious water sorting in almost the entire bed except at the fault described,

general appearance and field evidence, prove beyond all reasonable doubt that the

bed is not tillite.

The overlying bed of massive grey- -white quartzites attains 300 feet 4 in thick-

ness; it includes several minor purple slate bands. It is succeeded by purple

quartzites and purple slates. often well laminated. North and south of Hallett

Cove the lower beds (dominantly quartzitic) include green bands of chloritic

quartzite. ‘These, though thin (usually one-quarter of an inch in thickness), are

remarkably persistent, being constant in appearance over the full extent of observ-

able outcrops from Black Cliff to Morphett Vale Creek, At Black Cliff they

formed sappage planes during drag folding, and consequently considerable green

blatter has been formed (see p. 203).

For a thickness of 360 feet the purple slates and quartzites display extra-

ordinarily regular periodicity, as yet to be investigated.

Grey and greenish-grey quartzites, overlain by chocolate and grey alternate

slates and quartzites, complete the purple series.

PRE-ARCHAEOCYATILINAE GREY QUARTZITES

This sequence of grey-white “Sused” and flaggy quartzites and flaggy slates

forms a prominent feature along the coast south of Curlew Point. The beds which

dip almost vertically, correspond closely and were deposited contemporancously

with outcrops at Ochre Cove and the quartzites and slates mapped by Madigan

(1927) on the Willunga Scarp. ‘This is important, as it indicates the proximity

of Archaeocyathinae limestones just seaward of Rocky Point and Ochre Cove.

Minimum thickness of the unit is at least 1,150 feet, and according to the

expected ratio of increase from the succession at Willunga Scarp (see fig. 1)

should approximate 2,000 feet. This seems to indicate that this horizon is the

equivalent of Mawson’s Pound Quartzite (maximum 3,000 feet at Wilpena

Pound). Clay gall impressions which are so commen in both these formations

have no. stratigraphical significance. They occur im many Adelaide Series

quartzites.

EVIDENCE AS TO THE RELIABILITY OF THE ESTIMATES OF

BED THICKNESSES

That faulting has had little or no effect in accantuating or reducing the

observable thicknesses of strata in this area other than in the case of the Sturtian

Villite, is conclusively proved by a comparison of Madigan’s (1927) Willunga

Scarp table of strata with that of this locality,

It has long been realised that Willunga and Mypenga are progressively nearer

the southerly shore-line of the ald geosynelinal basin in which the Adelaide and

Canibrian Series were deposited. ‘(he continued wedging of the tillite southwards

is important evidence im this respect.

Howchin estimated the thickness of Sturtian Tillite at approximately 1,000

feet near Eden, The author agrees with this as a minimum estimate (the true

thickness probably approaches 1,500 feet), but the occurrence of considerable

overthrust faulting here demands caution. Jlowchin, when mapping the tillite

and associated beds near Noarlunga (on the Clarendon-Ochre Cove Block) did

not estimate the thickness of tillite. Madigan (1927) observed a thickness of

150 feet of tillite near Willunga, but this has dwindled to 7& feet near Myponga.

Hence graphing the distance south of Adelaide against tillite thickness would

show a steady thinning of the bed to the south. In support of this, the extensions

of the Sturtian illite in the middle-and far north of this State as measured by

Mawson (1939) and others show expected enormous increase in thickness.

197

CORRELATION TABLE

WILLUNGA SCARP SECTION (masican}

WHITE QUARTZITES{

& SHALES

PURPLE SLATES

BRIGHTON

LIMESTONE

1250 QUARTZITES & SLATES

TAPLEY HILL SECTION

i150

roa

900 ARENACEOUS SLATES

490 QUARTZITE

1607 SLATES

60 ~ QUAATZITE

JOO SLATES

4.20 “QudéaTzites ~~

Sy ™ ~~

600 SLATES SN

SS ™ <

38 LIMESTONES NS

A SoS ae

QUAATZITE & SLATES

ALTERNATE CHOCOLATE

SLATES & QUARTZITE

QUART ZITE

CHOCOLATE SLATES

QUARTZITES

CHOCOLATE AND GREY

SON, : “| 178 ARKOSIC BEDS SLATES

TAPLEY HILL SD 265 QUARTZITES

Tv Cc i T

SLATES & 3000 SLATES CALC. IN ant CHOCOLATE AND GREY

LIMES TONE ~ 519 QUARTZITE & SLATE

STURTIAN TILLITE

§5Q TILLITE

CHOC SILICEQUS SLATE

LIMESTONES

3,000 BANDED SLATY LIMSTONE

7,509 LAMINATED SLATES

200 FLUVIOGLATIALS

hOOCSTELLITE

198

Similar thinning of post tillite beds is evident when the author’s measure-

ments are compared with those of Madigan’s Willunga Scarp section (see fig. 1).

A. very approximate estimate of the thickness of the Tapley Hill slate series near

Noarlunga (deduced from Howchin’s map, sections and descriptions) is 5,000 feet.

Comparison of this figure with Madigan’s 3,000 feet at Willunga and the author’s

10,500 feet at Tapley Hill show expected variation with distance north and south,

PETROLOGICAL NOTES

The following selection of described rocks from the Adelaide Series is far

from comprehensive, but serves merely to illustrate certain inyportant points or

features,

Pevvio-GLaciaL Quartzite (Sturtian Horizon)

The specimen was collected in the Sturt Gorge to the west of the main over-

thrust. Macroscopically it is a light-grey, fine, even-grained quartzite with a

rather flat fracture. It will not scratch easily, and therefore appears to consist

largely of quartz. No laminations are discernible in the hand specimen.

In thin section, fine, somewhat angular quartz and felspar grains are seen set

in a ground mass of granular calcite. The angularity of the grains and the

presence of felspar, in addition to stratigraphical relations, indicate fluvio-glacial

origin. Ileavy mineral concentrations follow rather fine current laminations.

These latter prove that the quartzite is not a sandstone dyke.

Quartz is by far the most plentiful mineral in the section and shows no sign

of secondary growth. The grains are subangular or angular, and exhibit shadow

extinction, Grain size averages 0-2 mm., but individual grains range to 0°3 min.

Subangular and slightly rounded grains of microcline, some exceeding 0-2 mm.

in length, are present in small quantities, with little alteration. Plagioclase of

varied composition is not common and alteration is slight.

Although calcite forms the matrix it is not abundant. Small rounded and

subangular grains of zircon occur, concentrated in heavy mineral laminations with

biotite flakes, rounded or subangular tourmaline grains, and irregular grains of

iron ores. A few grains of apatite are present.

Irregular stains and a few grains of iron minerals occur in the general mass

of the rock. Light green flakes of chlorite are uncommon.

Siticeous Grey Limesrone (Tapley Ilill Series)

A specimen was collected from the $.A. Portland Cement Company’s No. 4

Quarry at Reynella immediately underlying the Brighton Limestone horizon, This

limestone is fine-grained, even textured, and microcrystalline.

Practically no structure is visible in the fresh specimen but a weathered sur-

face exhibits banding. An etched surface reveals quartz concentrated in bands.

‘There is considerable interlocking of grains.

In thin section, granular calcite with much included impurity forms a con-

siderable proportion of the rock. Quartz grains, many with shadowy extinction,

are abundant and possess irregular angular form. Some silica is secondary. A

few chlorite and sericitic flakes are present. Minute grains of plagioclase and

flakes of biotite are probably authigenic.

Partial analyses of this limestone show that the percentage of calcium car-

bonate varies considerably (40-80% ) and magnesium carbonate remains at 3-5%.

“VERMICULATE” LIMESTONE (Blue “hieroglyphics” Limestone)

This occurs in the siliceous limestones of the Tapley Hill Series. Tt is a light

greyish microcrystalline limestone in which numerous lithified flakes of grey

calcareous mud are set. The flakes are typically intraformational and a gradation

199

is noticed from intraformational breccia to edgewise conglomerate. Most of the

flakes are flat, but there is a tendency to turn at the edges; length varies from

several to 20 mm. In thin section or on polished faces there is a superficial

resemblance to annelids (see David 1928), but this is quite lost when the third

dimension is considered,

Etched and thin sections reveal the base to be less homogeneous than the

flakes which are largely of calcitic mud with little quartz. The groundmass

consists largely of irregular silica grains usually interlocking in firm aggregales ;

it is really a very fine calcareous silt.

Odd flakes of sericite and chlorite are present, particularly along lines oi

stress. Limonitic stains are uncommon,

Qorittc Grey-Biur Limesronre (Brighton Horizon)

This is grey-blue, even-grained microcrystalline with plentiful flash faces of

calcite. Siall calcite veins are not common. There is no visible banding or

oolitic structure. Magnification shows mttch of the calcium carbonate of the

ooliths to be replaced by concentric shells of secondary silica. Sand grains as

nuclei have suffered considerable secondary growth; other muclei are completely

of secondary silica. The granular nature of the secondary silica may be due in

part to replacement of finely crystalline calcite layers.

Outgrowths of silica from nuclear masses appear identical with the bars of

silica from the “medulla” of supposed radiolaria described by David and Howchin

(1896) from this horizon, There is no reason to believe that any of these struc-

tures are radiolaria, as all gradations from typical ooliths can be seen. A few of

these structures show two concentric “shells,” but the structure of the shells is

in no way suggestive of such fossils. Less frequently there are three shells, so

any particular arrangement is merely fortuitous.

A study of thin sections of the rock confirms the above views. The ooliths

are not well layered and the distinction of adjacent layers is dominantly concerned

with fineness of granulation of the calcite; impurities probably heighten the

difference and may control it.

Partial analysis of an average sample gave 91% calcium carbonate and 273%

magnesium carbonate.

PInk Limestone (Brighton Iforizon)

A pink-coloured, even-textured microcrystalline limestone with a few small

brown intraformational flakes of more argillaceous (and possibly more dolomitic }

material, A few calcitic cleavage faces and minute chloritic flakes can be dis-

tinguished, No oolitic structure is visible macroscopically.

Etched surfaces and microscopic sections show the rock to he very similar

to the underlying blue limestone, This is further evidence that these limestones

are not two well defined horizons, but that the upper pink bed is a slightly more

dolomitised and ferruginised cquivalent of the blue band. Irregularity of the

thickness of the pink limestone and thus of the depth of dolomitisation supports

this view.

The specimen selected has intraformational platy masses of calcareous. silt.

Ooliths exhibit similar characters to those occurring in the blue limestones; some

have nuclei of coarsely crystalline calcite.

Occasionally authigenic quartz shows a tendency to be euhedral. One such

erystal measured 0-8 mm. by 0°25 mm.

Partial analysis of the limestone gave calcitm carbonate 85°7% and mag-

nesium carbonate 4°7%.

200

Burr Dotomitic Limestone (Brighton Horizon)

A buff-coloured rock; the more finely-textured portions break with an almost

subconchoidal fracture, while that of most of the rock is less even, Minerals

present in the hand specimen are for the most part indeterminable, but calcite

cleavage faces can be discerned. Manganese stains and dendrites are common;

siderite is less evident.

Etched surfaces, when magnified, reveal much fine even-grained secondary

silica embedded in granular calcite and (?) dolomite. Limonitic and manganifer-

ous matter stains the rock; veins of silica etch in strong relief.

Caleitic ooliths are plentiful in seme sectors, and many of these have outer

layers replaced completely by granular secondary silica. Some have several con-

centric shells or a nuclear mass of secondary silica. A possible selective action

ot dissolved silica on the varying granularity of the calcite (or original aragonite)

layers is suggested, Dimensions of the ooliths range from 1-3 mm. There is no

suggestion of radiolarian structure.

In thin section the base is seen to be of rather impure granular calcite in

which ooliths of granular calcite, replaced in part by secondary silica, are abundant.

A representative specimen of this dolomitic limestone analysed calcium

carbonate 41%, and magnesium carbonate 29%.

ARKOSE

A specimen was collected from Waterfall Creek, one mile north-cast of

Hallett Cove. It is a greyish-pink medium-grained sedimentary tock in which

rounded and subangular waterworn grains of quartz and felspar are dominant.

Thin sections reveal larger grains of quartz and felspar embedded in a thin

matrix of silty and sandy quartz. Larger rounded grains of quartz, some with

secondary growth, exhibit shadowy extinction. Secondary additions to the silty

quartz of the matrix has led to some fusion of grains.

Microcline with characteristic cloudy alteration and some with minute

inclusions ig not ttncommon. Particles of orthoclase are few. Plagioclase is

plentiful, some apparently reverting to a confused antiperthite. Sericitic altera-

tion products are frequent.

Odd rounded grains of finely crystallised chalcedony are present. Sericite

and palely pleachroic chlorite occur in the ground mass. A black opaque grain

is possibly carbonaceous and siliceous.

Zircon particles are quite common, but apatite and tourmaline are rare. Iron

ores are present in small amount.

Petrographie and field evidence does not favour the association of cold

climate with the formation of this arkose, An absence of composite particles

would seem to preclude glacial action, atihough it does not prove the absence of

fluvio-glaciation.

The horizon is included within a vast “red-bed” series, and as arkoses are

prevalent in dry regions, arid or semi-arid conditions probably existed when this

arkose was being deposited. The sediment is largely of the nature of a lacustrine

lag gravel or coarse sand associated with aridity or semi-aridity.

Sanpy Limestone (Arkose horizon, cast of Hallett Cove Railway Station)

A light grey coloured rock, finely grained and coarsely laminated, the lamina-

tions measuring one to five millimetres in thickness. Quartz sand is concentrated

into laminae. Finely granular calcite forms the mass of the rock.

Secondary accretion of silica has led to much interlocking of grains into bands,

which etch in strong relief. Qoliths are present in the more calcitic laminae,

201

In thin section granular calcite is scen to form the mass of the rock. Quartz

grains arranged in bands are largely sub-angular, and the effect is heightened by

secondary growth. Grain size rarely exceeds 2 mm.; a few grains of iron ore

are present.

Ooliths ranging to 0-5 mm. in diameter are present in the less sandy lamina-

tions but are never plentiful. Very little concentric structure is evident ; nuclei of

quartz grains are uncommon.

A partial anlysis gave calcium carbonate 67°7%, magnesium carbonate 3°2%,

and insolubles 25:0%.

FissILe SILTSTONE

(Specimen taken one-quarter of a mile south of Mallett Cove, along coast)

This siltstone is dominantly chocolate-coloured and contains a thin band

3 mm. in maximum thickness of more reddish chocolate slate in which manganese

dendrites are distributed plentifully. Secondary micaccous munerals are abundant.

Fracture is rather irregular. Parallel and cross laminations can be seen with

difficulty ; some exhibit concentration of heavy minerals,

Microscopically the mass of the rock is fine argillaceous material in which

orientated sericite (parallel to slaty cleavage) and even-grained fine angular quartz

rarely exceeding 0°02 mm. in length is embedded, Earthy and granular iron ores

are plentiful in the base.

Lamination is dominantly concerned with the amount of included iron ores.

Some laminae are almost wholly of lightly packed angular magnetite grains.

A slaty band differs from the bulk of the rock in having less silty but more

sericitic and argillaceous matter. The rock was selected in the hope that evidence

of volcanic activity might be discovered.

No composite grains are present, but the rock may represent a rewashed

volcanic ash or an allied sediment.

BANDED PurRPLE SANDSTONE QUARYZITE

(from the base of the Pre-Archaeocyathinae Quartzites, Curlew Point)

Purple irregularly banded quartzitic sandstone, whose thinner bands are

lighter coloured or greyish, Peculiar white clots are a feature of this rock.

Quartz grains of the dimension of coarse to fine sands form most of the quartzite ;

various iron ores are intergranular or concentrated into bands.

Grain size varies from 0-1 to 0-8 mm., but averages 0-4 mm. The clots

referred to above are aggregations of chalcedony with irregular boundaries and

include a little quartz and iron ore fragments.

Quartz displays very marked shadowy extinction. Secondary growth of the

grains has resulted in some fusion of adjacent grains and a crowding of inter-

granular iron ores.

Small pockets in which magnetite is altering on the periphery to haematite,

are themselves lined by orientated chalcedony,

THE AGE OF THE UPPER ADELAIDE SERIES

In Australia the transition between Proterozoic and Cambrian is indefinite ;

hence Howchin’s “Transition” series (1929). Tlowever, some division should be

made, even though arbitrarily. In the Upper Adelaide Series, no undoubted

structural unconformity at which Cambrian could be considered as commencing

is known. Segnit (1939) claims that a disconformity or unconformity occurs

between the Pound quartzite and the Archaeocyathinae limestones, but the

researches of Mawson (1939, etc.) and Madigan (1927) fail to substantiate this.

As no fossils (excluding problematica) occur below the Archaeocyathinae

limestone, then sediments alone must be relied upon to furnish clues for the solving

of the problem. After a study of the sedimentary succession it is evident that the

202

remarkable quiescent period which culminated with the deposition of Brighton

limestone is succeeded by a series of sediments which are definitely “Flysch” in

character. These grade from calcareous chocolate slates at the hase through

normal chocolate slates to quartzites, attaining the coarsest phase as arkoses and

arkosie gravels, The introduction of this suite of sediments is coincident with

the mstiution of “red bed” conditions following a long period during which a

“grey” series, including tillite, was deposited. This indicates a considerable

environmental change which may mark the commencement of the Palaeozoic.

Contemporaneous volcanic activity known definitely to have been associated with

the chocolate series (Mawson 1939) in the Flinders Ranges and probably this

region, supports the contention. The rather rapid evolution of environmental

conditions from coo! or frigid to warm and arid presents striking analogy with

conditions existent during the late phases of the Palaeozoic. Glaciation of the

Permian Period undoubtedly quickened the evolution of plants and animals.

Similarly the late Proterozoic ice age is probably responsible for the sudden appear-

ance Of highly organised Cambrian fauna.

As mentioned, Mawson (1939) has suggested that the Cambrian include the

pre-irchacocyathinac or Pound Quartzite . The discovery of Lower Cambrian

fossils in the equivalent chocolate series in North America (Chamberlin, 1935)

and the identification of the Archaeocyathinae with the upper portion of the Lower

Cambrian and the Middle Cambrian (David, 1927), suggests that the upper limit

of the Proterozoig will eventually be moved back.

TECTONICS

1 folding

Generally, folding is not intense in this area. The situation has been over-

estimated by Segnit who speaks of the beds as “highly disturbed” and “severely

contorted and crushed.” The nuportance of a few minor folds and dragfolds has

been exaggerated,

The author's investigations show the older beds to be disposed in a major

anticiinal fold with a southward pitch ranging from 3-20° (save where

faulted}, The limbs of this structure have undergone minor and drag folding.

OF this relatively simple structure Segnit scems to have been unaware, attenpting

to explain it with a complex series of faults.

On the west limb of the anticlinal structure a minor fold, seareely distingnish-

able at Mario, becomes more marked when traced southward, reaching its

greatest development at Black Cliff, where it consists of two small anticlines piteh-

ing south at 17°,

The centre portions of the major structure are thrown into minor folds,

which, appearing as undulations, pitching south at 3-5°, die out both to the north

and south of Hallett Creek. This phenomenon is explained by the transference of

material in the Brighton limestones from the limbs of folds into the crests and

troughs as noted previously (“similar folding),

‘This gives in Hallett Creck an appearance of intensified folding. But slate

outcrops appear to the north of this creck and southwards quartzites also occur.

These, by their nature, display only slight “similar” folding, and in the case of

the quartzites the “parallel” type alone. he minor folds exposed in Reynella

quarries pitch south at 19°,

The continuation of the major structure in Sturt Gorge is relatively insignifi-

cant, as the fracture of the lower beds and consequent overthrusting has relieved

compression. Beds to the east of the overthrust, however, are faulted and folded

to a considerable extent. The overthrusting is accompanied by drag folding, which

is quite local and represents the original deformation of a fluvio-glacial sediment.

just prior to faulting. Sigmoidal fracture cleavage accompanies folding and acts

203

ag a locus for the deposition of quartz, Slickensiding on bedding planes illustrates

the relative movement of adjacent beds in synclines exposed in Keynella quarries.

Thin green quartzite bands in the purple slates outcropping at Black Cliff have

formed copious “blatter,” separate layers of which can be scaled off. These have

“fossilised” various directions of adjustments during folding, Movement is

dominantly transverse to the axial planes of the folds, but some “striations” are

inclined considerably to this mean.

Pocket gouging is exposed over a large surface (bedding plane) on the eastern

wall of the old Brighton (now Linwood) quarry. The rock is an_argillaceous

limestone and presents a pseudo ripple-marked appearance. [ach pocket

or depression is slickensided and possesses a film of clay gouge. Here also

the movement of relatively “competent” limestones which sandwich imcompetent

calcareous slates has produced interesting fracture cleavage.

2 Faulting

Contrary to the claim of complexity put forward by Segnit (1940) the

author considers, after careful examination, that faulting falls into two groups.

The first, of the overthrust type, is concerned with the development of com-

pressional stress accompanying orogeny in the Palaeozoic cra. The other faults

are normal or reverse, the latter probably being pivotal and therefore passing into

normal faults along their outcrop. All faults observed exhibit the phenomena

characteristic of their type,

Overthrust movements have been observed only in Sturt Gorge. The first

fault of this type is encotmtered at the junction of the pre-glacial slate and

quartzite with the Sturtian Tillite, It is undoubtedly the major overthrust plane

of the area and dips to the east at 20-30°. The quartzites and slate series have

over-ridden tillite to an unknown extent. Brecciation along the contact is con-

siderable and quartzite fragments are embedded in a silicified and quartz-veined

slaty tillite matrix. To the west the next important overthrust is along good tillite

cleavage and so averages about 45% hade to the east. Drag effect is in evidence.

Throw is probably in excess of 40 feet, as the two laminated slates used in this

determination may not correspond. The difficulties in this direction are consider-

able, as there are at least two, and possibly four or more, similar fluvio-glacial

interealcations, each ranging up to 20 feet in thickness.

A third, more westerly overthrust shows practically no brecciation, but drag

is particularly well demonstrated. |aminated slates abut abruptly against tillite.

The slates exemplify sigmoidal fractures which subsequently have been filled with

quartz. Several smaller overthrusts are marked by similar “sigmoidal”

and “gash” quartz veins, and these can be seen at intervals between the three

major faults.

The most westerly reverse fault observed in this locality dips at 85° to the

east. Throw is about 40 feet to the west. The fault zone is marked by a strong

quartz reef, and as hade is small it is possible that the fault is pivotal and would

re-appear as a normal fault further south.

Most normal faults which could be studied adequately occur to the west of

Reynella. They all dip to the east nearly vertically. Throw varies from a few

inches to at least 60 feet. The fracture zones usually have been the locus of the

deposition of quartz which occurs as thin stringers, or less frequently, as solid

quartz reefs attaining about 4 feet in thickness,

One such fault can be traced for two miles in a north-easterly direction,

crossing Elallett Creek just westwards from Howchin’s “Great Anticline.” It is

marked by a strong quartz reef which occasionally bifurcates and re-unites. Its

northerly extensions become almost unrecognisable, being indicated merely by a

zone of quartz stringers.

204

The roof of the major anticline is broken by at least five normal faults, all

hading to the east at very low angles. Drag phenomena and quartz venation are

in evidence in each case.

The finest development of normal faulting is to be seen in one of the Reynclla

quarries, The fault is compound and well developed for an observed distance of

200 yards; the zone was traced for a quarter of a mile, Its south-westerly

extensions are defined by quartz veins, fracturing, discontinuance of bed outcrops

and travertinous surface zones.

A well-defined normal fault is exposed on the platform of marine erosion to

the south of Marino Rocks. The fault zone is strongly developed for at least

half a mile and is marked by coarse crush breccias except where the more

northerly outcrops of purple slate is cut. The bed has been shattered consider-

ably, which effect, combined with irregular deposition of quartz and calcite, gives

the rock a pseudo tillite appearance (see above). This fault hades to the east at

50-30°, and displacement where observed exceeds 10 feet.

Whether these old normal faults are compensatory to overthrust faulting

occurring to the east (1.¢., isostatic) has not been decided.

LATE PALAEFOZOIC GLACIATION

A small remnant of this widespread glaciation oceurs as an outlier in the

neighbourhood of TTallett Cove. The sediments are mainly fluvio-glacial, but true

till is plentiful.

The glacigenc beds consist of red, yellow, white, and brown clays, with

frequent sandy intercalations and a few erratics. Mudstones are a feature, and true

varves have been found. These pass below into typical boulder till with numerous

striated, soled and faceted erratics, The

fluvio-glacial assemblage is typically that

deposited in a glacial lake during the retreat

of an ice sheet. Tull is exposed in the

cove at lew tide; the boulder clay base is

hardened somewhat and contains fairly

numerous erratics. South of this exposure,

the sub-aerial and marine erosion of

Permian till has formed a coarse boulder

shingle with one Victor Ilarbour granite mac oer

erratic weighing approximately 5 tons.

Adelaide Series reek s and granites, gneisses,

porphyries. pegmatites, and schists occur

commonly as erratics.

The abundance in the till, of Victor Iar-

bour granites aud various porphyries similar

to South-East occurrences, suggest move-

ment of the ice sheet from that direction. ho. Jaaert can

Je FiG, 2

This is supported by a study of striation

directions on bed rock. Nevertheless, dis-

erection must be exercised, as the old ‘ fossil”

valley (see fig, 2) may have influenced the direction of ice movement focally.

The ice w ould tend to flow in a more northerly direction along the valley and over-

flow towards what is now St. Vincent Gulf. llowever, the immensity of the

glacial sheet probably prevented significant deviation of striation direction.

That the old relict valley lies transverse to the present drainage system has

heen an important facter in its preservation,

205

Along the coast north of Black Cliff its western v rall cat. be observed sloping

landwards along practically the whole of its present length. Apparently river

action previous to Permian glaciation had incised a valley along the syncline ot

a minor fold in the Adelaide Series rock, for the existence of a depression at least

100 feet in depth in hard, unbroken quartzites cannot be explained by mere glacial

scooping. Glaciers may have deepened this valley, but upon retreat of the ice it

became choked with glacial debris and finally the site of a small lake. Southerly

extensions of this valley trend south-westerly, and disappear beneath St, Vincent

Gulf.

Black Cliff and sites to the north are famous for striated and occasionally fluted

bed-rock. Segnit has pointed out the misapplication of the term striated pavement.

The tillite passes nonconformably or disconformably into fossiliferous

Pliocene calcareous sandstone containing small erratics concentrated by wave

action, A section of the fluvio-glacial and glacial sediments and the underlying

and overlying beds exposed on the south side of Waterfall Creek (north of Hallett

Cove) is detailed by Segnit. Two nonconformities and a disconiormity may be

seen, Reddish and yellow clays and the Fontainbleau sandstone (Mawson, 1907 )

dip at 20° to the east-south-east and wedge out to the west. This provides

additional proof that a valley existed to the east, a point which previous authors,

including Howehin and Segnit, have overlooked. Such overlap is typical in small

lacustrine basins.

Tne Ace or THE YouNGER TILL.

Originally, by analogy with tillites occuring in the eastern States of Australia

(particularly at Bacchus Marsh), it was stggested that the vounger tills of

Vieurieu Peninsula were late Palaeozoic in age. The former contain the charac-

teristic Gondwana land flora. No other Australian tills were known with which

the South Australian occurrences could be correlated satisfactorily, Evidence from

stratigraphical researches merely indicates an age between Cambrian and Miocene.

With evidence based principally on a supposed analogy with small marine

erratic horizons occurring in the lower Cretaceous series of the Great Artesian

Basin (Brown, 1894, ete.. and Ward, 1925). upon a consideration of the lithology

of the beds, and on his interpretation of faulting, Scgnit suggested that the Hallett

Cove and related tills are Lower Cretaceous.

Many geologists have reported erratics scattered on the surface of the more

south-westerly outcrops of marine Cretaceous in the Great Artesian Basin, This

evidence is significant, but it must be realised that the erratics were dropped from

marine icebergs. Today bergs are known to wander into latitudes lower than

S, 40°, and these, on melting, would scatter included debris into muds charac-

teristic of moderately warm climates and so create anomalous associations of sedi-

ments. Although latitude 40° S. passes through Tasmatua, no one would suggest

that it is undergoing a severe glaciation in which great moraines up to 2,000 feet

thick are being deposited over thousands of square miles, Thus, by analogy, the

occurrence of poor erratic horizons in Cretaceous Marine sediments in the central

Australian region does not explain the deposition of beds 1,970 feet thick (Hind-

marsh Valley) which evidence a period of glacial severity comparable only to the

jacchus Marsh occurrence.

Secondly, Segnit is concerned by lithological dissimilarities between the un-

doubted Permian tillite of Bacchus Marsh, with the Hallett Cove till. This 1s

inconsistent firstly because there is no marked similarity between the Cretaccous

and Hallett Cove deposits, and sceondly because greater dissimilarities do not

prevent his correlating the reddish slate already discussed with Sturtian ‘Pillite.

It should be noted in this connection that a geographical scpatatiom of 500 miles

between the Victorian and Hallett Cove deposits allows for some lithological

ciiferences.

206

Nor can the degree of lithification be accepted as decisive. Segnit remarks

that in South Australia ‘the formations in all the localities examined by the writer

are unconsolidated sediments except due to subsequent infiltration of oxide of

ivon, but it is noted that varves and tillite of equivalent age occur at Black-

fellow Creek, which are quite hard and even porcellanous. Also, as ancient

(Cambrian) sands are known which are still quite unconsolidated and, as the

converse also applies, lithification is not a conclusive indication of age.

Segnit’s third argument is based upon a fault of Tertiary age allegedly cut-

ting the till. No evidence of this may be found. gna

The discovery of plant remains in associated till on Kangaroo Island by Mr.

Kleeman in 1940 may ultimately have an important bearing on the problem. These

fossils have been submitted to Professor B. Sahni, of Lucknow University, India.

Pollen grains, if found, may provide a solution. Until then the original decision,

namely late Palacozoic, must stand as supported by the greater evidence,

OLIGOCENE LACUSTRINE SEDIMENTS

A considerable stratigraphical hiatus exists in the Adelaide region subsequent

to the deposition of Permian glacigene beds. [Following a long period of sub-

aerial peneplanation a series of lacustrine sands and clays were laid down, These

are all grey-white in colour, except where infiltration of iron oxides has produced

mottled ferruginization near the surface.

The series is typically lignitic in South Australia, and is overlain disconform-

ably by fossiliferous marine Miocene and possibly marine Upper Oligocene in

some localities. By analogy with sinilar lignitic beds occurring in Victoria their

age is considered Oligocene.

The clays and sands are always well sorted and bedded and the sand grains

rounded or subangular, Silicified wood was recovered from a well sunk on the

Reynella Distilleries property. The development of lignite on the Eden-Moana

Block is poor, one small seam occurring at Port Noarlunga, Bores sunk at the

direction of the Mines Department (see Mining Reviews 37, 39) reveal a maxi-

mum of 19 feet of brown coal, but this thickness is abnormal; the others have

4 feet or less. The limited extent both horizontally and vertically, in addition to

difficult water problems, depth of overburden, high ash and sulphur content, with

remoteness from an industrial centre, render the deposit valueless.

The Oligocene sediments can be examined to the north of Witton Bluff, in

railway cuttings near Reynella and in the overflow channel of the Happy Valley

Reservoir, In the latter locality these sub-horizontal sediments overlap a pene-

planed surface of Tapley Hill slates which rises to the north-west. Overlying

Pleistocene mottled sandstone hears disconformable to nonconformable relations

with these beds.

Oligocene clays (exposed by the erosion of overlying fossiliferous beds) out-

crop extensively over the northern extensions of the block. This occurrence is

described by Howchin (1933) in discussing the Dead Rivers of South Australia.

The whole scheme of his researches in this field can be questioned and will be

dealt with in a subsequent publication. Considerable accumulations of sands and

clays at Hope Valley, Happy Valley and Baker’s Gully are interpreted by him as

remnants of a large Pleistocene river. Actually these are outliers of Oligocene

fresh water beds (in addition to Post Plocene mottled sandstone which are re-

washed Oligocene dominantly), which have been exposed by erosion and removal

of the Miocene and latter formations on blocks tilted down in the south, Lignile

beds at Payneham are regarded by Howchin as part of a Pleistocene lake; it is diffi-

cult to understand how he relates these to similar lignitic clays and sands occurring

te the south on the Adelaide block at increasing depth. Both the Eden-Moana and

the Clarendon-Ochre Cove fault blocks have foundered in the south or conversely,

207

uplifted in the north, and because of erosion of the overlying Miocene from the

higher positions of the block Oligocene clays and sands with included silicified

wood have been exposed m the north.

The bore log which follows records the maximum thickness of lignite

encountered on this block. Except for local abnormal thickening of the lignite, the

log is typical of bores sunk near Noarlunga.

Description of Strata Thickness in Feet

Dark sandy clay - - “ - 14 feet

Pyritic sandstone = - - - - [e ,,

Dark clay with fine sandy partings - - 374 ,,

Lignite - - oe - - L,

Carbonaceous shale - - - - 4,

Lignite - - - - - 19 ,,

Carbonaceous shale - # 2 “ “or

Light sandy clay - : - - Fo.

Bedrock

Total - 814 feet

THe Miocene Marine FORMATION

Miocene sediments overlying the Oligocene fresh water serics discouformably

form much of the overmass of the block. They are dominantly grey glauconitic

marls. Glauconitic bryozoal limestones, with Cassidulus longianus, similar to those

at Blanche Point occur infrequently, ¢.g., in an old well half-a-mile west of

Ilackham, one of the lowest beds consisting almost entirely of fossiliferous

incoherent glauconitic sand with included polished, rounded fragments of limonite.

Marls outcrop widely south of Hackham and Port Noarlunga. North, except

for one exposure about three-quarters of a mile east-south-east of .Reynella,

Miocene sediments are found only in bores and in the contour channel about

Happy Valley Reservoir (Basedow, 1904). ,

‘The fossil content of these beds is not considered here; Turrifella aldingae,

often with internal casts of silica is dominant, being present particularly in the

lower marls to the exclusion of practically all other macroscopic fossils.

Gencrally the beds are subhorizontal or dip south or south-westerly at

angles varying up to 5°. The only deviations are seen along the fault line at the

back of the block, North of Noarlunga and south of Moana the marls are dragged

up against the Clarendon-Ochre Cove Block at angles often about 25° to the west

er north-west. On the south bank of the River Onkaparinga the beds are but

slightly disturbed, dipping to the westwards at 2 to 4°.

The following is a typical section of the Miocene marine serics met with

during boring operations at Noarlunga (Mining Review, 39).

Description of Strata Thickness in I'eet

Yellow clay with quartz pebbles and Turritella 115 feet

White shell limestone with Turritelia =. 82%

Dark sandy clay - - - eae

Ferruginous clay sandstone with marine fossils 7 ,.

Dark sandy clay with fossils - - 12,

Iron-stained sandstone with marine fossils - 12. ,,

Medium-grained dark sandstone - - 12...

Dark sandy clay with marine fossils - $5

Soft grey clay limestone with marine fossils- 85,

Grey fossil limestone - - ~ 56 4

Grey to green shell limestone (glaucenitic

bed) - ~ - - - 10 ,,

Total - 2544 fect

208

PLIOCENE MARINE SEDIMENTS

Phocene accumulations are typically marine calcareous sandstones almost

identical with outcrops along the banks of the River Torrens near Adelaide, They

represent the thin overlapping remnants of a Pliocene littoral.

Near Marino the bed is exposed in a small waterfall 35 feet above sea level.

Tossils are poorly preserved and represented largely by casts. The bed is hori-

zcntally disposed, outcropping close to the main Marino block fault and at a lower

level than at ITallett Cove, due probably to drag effects.

About half a mile north of Black Cliff the bed reappears with glacial erratics

concentrated at its base. It continues south as a thin outcropping subhorizontal

band (not exceeding four feet) approximately 100 feet above sca level. The bed

is highly leached, and consequently fossils are represented largely by casts, but

local well preserved patches are to be found. Characteristic of this horizon ts the

giant foraminifera Marginopora vertebralis,

Segnit recorded marine Pliocene to the south of the “Sugar-loaf” in the

“amphitheatre,” but the occurrence is much more limited than he indicates. Segnit

appears to have diagnosed the outcropping unfossiliferous white fluvio-glacial

clays and sands (late Palaeozoic) both here and in the cliffs immediately south of

Liallett Creek as Phocene.

The relation of the Phocene to the underlying glacial and fluvio-glacial

deposits varies considerably, at times being distinctly unconformable (as scen

in Waterfall Creek north of Black Cliff), and at others disconformable.

Pliocene overlap to the south does not re-occur until near the sea-stack south

of Curlew Point. From here a bed ot typically leached arenaceous limestone up

to 5 feet in thickness can be traced to the north side of Morphett Vale Creek.

This horizon does not reappear until Blanche Point is reached.

Post-PLIoceN& SEDIMENTS

MARINE FORMATIONS

(a) (?) Pleistocene Calcareaus Sandsione

The occurrence along the block of a shelving sub-horizontal fossiliferous

sandy limestone averaging 250 to 300 feet above sea level is puzzling.

At Hallett Cove the hed outcrops east of the cove, overlying the Brightan

limestone at a height exceeding 250 fcet above sea level. Here it is often gritty

and includes angular to rounded quartz grains, and in the basal portions pebbles

of purple slate and quartzites. For the most part the rock is destitute of fossils,

but near the base is a limited variety of fossil impressions and casts.

Other occurrences appear further south. The first is indicated by floaters

on a ploughed field (Sections 621 and 622) north of Morphett Vale Creek. It

outcrops again along a well-defined north-south ridge three-quarters of a mile

west of Hackham. It is at least 40 feet thick and the base was not found. No

fossils were discovered in these latter localities, but the character of the rock is

unmistakable. It reappears near the 300-foot level on the Clarendon-Ochre Cove

Block, two miles north-east of Noarlunga.

Howcehin (1923, p. 289) recorded the occurrence of the bed at Hallett Cove,

and correlated it with the typical Phocene outcropping at the 100-foot level in

Hallett Cove. Segnit included this outcrop in his map, but did not recognise it as

fossiliferous.

The author considers the bed to be Post Pliocene, as firstly it overlies mottled

clays which normally overlie the Plhocene; secondly, the most common fossil vet

recorded is Tellina lata (see Howchin 1923). This has not been found in the

undoubted Pliocene nearby, and although other fossils are only recognisable

209

generically, the suite is not typically Pliocene. Thirdly, the altitude does not

correspond with the Pliocene horizon, and the amount of pivoted displacement

from the horizontal undergone by the bed since its deposition shows that it is

Post Pliocene (see section on Block Faulting). The only marine beds with which

it can be correlated satisfactorily are the Pleistocene raised beaches of Ooldea and

Naracoorte (300 and 250 feet above sea level respectively ).

(b) Late Pleistocene or Recent

A {fossiliferous boulder conglomerate occurs infrequently along the wave cut

platform north of Black Cliff. The fossils are typically Recent. North of Hallett

Creek, at high tide level, wave action is eroding a fossiliferous calcareous sand

dune rock which may be a raised sea beach remnant.

TERRESTRIAL FORMATIONS

(a) Pleistocene Mottled Series

The erosion of Oligocene and Miocene formations in the north has resulted

in the deposition of an extensive blanket of rewashed sediments on the southern

extension of the block. Difficulty was experienced in attempting to separate the

Oligocene fresh water series from their rewashed equivalents; there is only a

gradation.

Oligocene sediments south of Coromandel Valley appear to be dominantly

sands, but this is only partly true; the sands are concentrated at the surface (“lag”

sands), and the original sediments consist of both sands and clays. The latter

has been removed to lower levels in the south, diminishing progressively in grain-

size. Clays dominate at the coast. Grain size also tends to decrease vertically,

so that at Moana the cliff section reveals silts below clays. In addition coarser

sediments (sands) have accumulated against the Clarendon-Ochre Cove block

fault. These sands are largely denudation products of the Oligocene series once

present on the latter block. On Section 643 they include much talus from the

same source,

These Post Pliocene sediments are grey-white or greenish when fresh, but

on weathering appear mottled pink and grey, due to the diffusion of iron oxides

from centres of incipient ferruginization, The sandstones are commonly well

hedded as scen in railway cuttings between Reynella and Morphett Vale. The

south bank of Happy Valley Reservoir consists of consolidated mottled sands

and clays overlying Oligocene clays unconformably, contributing a source of weak-

uess when the reservoir water level is high, hence Basedow (1904) recorded

secpages to the south.

Mottled sediments overlie the marine Pliocene and underlie the high level

Pleistocene raised sea-beach, but they are not restricted to that short interval, In

fact, erosion of Oligocene sediments and block faulting (early Kosciusko Period)

had already passed maximum severity before deposition of the marine Pliocene

(fig. 3). Rewashing of Oligocene and Miocene sediments continued throughout

the Pliocene and Pleistocene to the preseut day, depositing the mottled sediments

throughout.

North-west of Hackham, Miocene Turrifella marls are covered hy consider-

able accumulations of waterworn quartz pebbles in sands and clays. These

gravels were transported and resorted from the base of the Oligocene serics once

present on the Clarendon-Ochre Cove block.

(b) Recent

The map prepared is dominantly ‘“‘solid” and therefore drift is not indicated

very extensively. Alluvium is not present in sufficient amount to obscure important

‘

210

geological features, and the use of “floaters”? and of numerous wells and bores

has overcome many difficulties. Although drift is thick near the eastern block

fault, the fault has been traced satisfactorily.

The Tapley Hill-O’Halloran Hill locality features humic soils which are

remnants of Oligocene sediments. Similar soils occur immediately south of Happy

Valley Reservoir.

The River Onkaparinga has extensive flood plains between Noarlunga and

Port Noarlunga, Lenticular creek beds are sectioned in the clay outwash cliffs

on the western bank of this river at Noarlunga.

THe Kosciusko Perrop FAauLttTinc

In Australia the Pleistocene, Pliocene and probably even the late Miocene

were periods of intense block faulting which appears to be still in progress; Dr.

Tenner (1931) and others have discussed this broadly.

A series of more or less meridional faults which, in plan, are arched with

their convexities directed eastwards, have developed in a zone embracing Adelaide.

The Eden-Moana block which Itke most of the block faulting south of Adelaide

is of the hinge type, with downthrow to the south, is delineated by two of these

major faults; these are normal and almost vertical and not compression faults as

has been suggested.

The Kosciusko faults are simple, whereas the older group are usually com-

pound. Vault zones, where observed, are marked by superb crush breccias, and

unlike the Palaeozoic group of normal faults, dip to the west. Evidence suggests

that at Noarlunga the new fault line was influenced by previous movement;

scveral older faults, displaying characteristic stressed quartz and drag phenomena,

can be observed on the bank of the River Onkaparinga adjacent to the block fault.

Interesting phenomena accompany the Kosciusko system, The north boundary

fault (Fenner’s Sturt fault) has dragged the older strata down considerably and

altered the strike of beds at the Marino Rocks headland, where the sub-horizontal

limb of a strong asymmetrical fold structure outcrops along the cliffs. North

from the headland the beds pitch north, and south they pitch south.

The change in pitch is also indicated, by the line of intersection of regional

cleavage and sedimentary lamination. As the Sturt-Marino fault is approached,

the pitch of strata flattens (usually within 100 vards or more of the fault), then

reverses until maximum north pitch is recorded at the fault. Actual reversion

can be observed in the quarry at the foot of Tapley Hill,

The Tertiary overmass has undergone slight fault folding. The Miocene

strata has been dragged up against Adelaide Series rocks at angles often in excess

of 25°, as can be seen at Moana and north of Noarlunga.

The Age of the Block Faulting

The discussion which follows is incomplete, referring solely to the Eden-

Moana block. Systematic work is in progress to obtain further information of

the relative movements of other important blocks in the vicinity of Adelaide.

A graph (fig. 3, B) indicating the varying amounts of south tilting undergone

by the Eden-Moana block proves informative. The height above sea level of the

base of each of the three Tertiary marine formations has been plotted against

distance south of Marino. Compared with the horizontal scale, the vertical com-

ponent has been greatly exaggerated.

It will be observed that the graph for the Miocene is relatively even, This is

in keeping with other known facts . Evidence indicates that Miocene or (?) late

Oligocene seas advanced over horizontally bedded lacustrine sediments which have

211

been deposited on a peneplained surface during the Oligocene period, A depres-

sion is indicated in the vicinity of Port Noarlunga; this is the site of the only

brown coal occurrence yet discovered on this block.

Of the marine Pliocene, the Marino occurrence, which is the most northerly,

has been affected by fault drag movements. Altitude readings taken at the base

ef this littoral at Hallett Cove and south of Curlew Point are thought to be

representative of the degree of tilting that the block has undergone sinee Pliocene

times.

The base of the Pleistocene raised sea beach is also relatively even. Few

altitude observations are available, but they are sufficient to postulate the existence

of a raised sea beach or sand dunes near an ancient strand line.

When all positive and negative movement of the block in relation to sea level

is reduced to a simple hinge type movement about a point in the north (as ilus-

{in Feet]

dersews SISL)

= 1-509

Moarli Ge

(tm

Base of Plors foc Atte ~~ S46

dit = =<

cy reo Sea,

bE | M&

= hee fas

fie we ese oo Lh oc ene

Sy Ut

idec Level a

GRAPH OA

a o — Pe,

Lise 4K ie Pa

; S 2 eS %

Be a & - > a

S 2 —~ 8 z

p220 8 * 5 Dr Ne

2 2 > ‘

: an o : NS Ww ‘af

i 2 wy Ss Nea

: ie : = et

: Re 3 = Awe &

400 zg SG fs, Na

tor 2 fi — ¢ gary a. A aw 7h eke, eh ast ze AD

Distance South of MARING (om Mies}

iyated in graph 13) the result is interesting. Observations indicate that over a

distance of six miles the vertical foundering south (actually partly uplift in the

north, but that does not affect the discussion) is 550, 80 and 25 fect respectively

for the marine Miocene, Pliocene and Pleistocene formations.

Assuming that the basal portions of the Miocene formation and the Pliocene

and Pleistocene littorals were deposited near sea level, then the relative uplift and

subsidence can be traced at several well-defined intervals in Tertiary history.

Possible eustatic movement of sea level is considered only when dealing with the

Pleistocene and Recent raised sea beaches.

Miocene and even late Oligocene seas transgressed the Oligocene peneplain

over much of Southern Australia. On the Eden-Moana block more than 200 feet

of Miocene beds were deposited over Oligocene lacustrine sediments. Conditions

during this period were quiescent, as is shown by the absence of observable un-

conformities or breaks in sedimentation,

212

As indicated by the graph, late in the Miocene or in the very early Phocene,

the beds were raised above sea level, then faulting, accompanying the foundering

to the south, began. It was strongly pivotal and appears to continue to the present

day. Most adjustment occurred prior to the deposition of marine Phocene. This

minor transgression of the sca upon the land was restricted to the present coastal

area, The block was then uplifted relative to sea level, resulting in a small hiatus

in the marine record until the land was again invaded by sea in the Pleistocene.

Tilting of the block continued on a greatly reduced scale during the Pleisto-

cene so that an extremely small angular nonconformity which can only be observed

aver a considerable distance exists between the bases of the newly-deposited

Pleistocene littoral and the Pliocene. The marine Pleistocene is tilted only slightly

to the south and is between 250 and 300 feet above sea level, but whether this

altitude is the result of block movement or a negative eustatic movement of the

sea since the time of deposition is not proved. The latter appears to be more

correct. The suite of included fossils, the height above sea level, stratigraphical

relations and the very minor amount of tilting, suggest strongly that the bed is

the equivalent of Pleistocene raised sea beaches at Naracoorte and Ooldea, which

are respectively 250-300 and 300 feet above sea level. Corresponding raised sea

beaches occur in other parts of the world (see Tindale 1933), so that a negative

eustatic adjustment of sea level since that time can be reasonably inferred.

A second raised sea beach just above the existing sea level occurs in Hallett

Cove. North of Black Cliff, recent fossiliferous boulder conglomerates occur on

the wave-cut platform, which is itself a remnant of the higher sea level period.

A stranded line of coastal cliffs at Seacliff and the occurrence of Arca (Anadara)

trapecia in sand dunes at the rear of Moana beach illustrate the former higher sea

Jevel. This series of raised sea beaches just above sea level resultant upon eustatic

movements of the ocean in the present waning ice age, is a consistent feature of

the Australian coast.

Economic

Little mineralisation has taken place in Adelaide Series rocks in this area,

although quartz recfs occur in many fault fissures. The galena zone, developed

poorly in the vicinity of Adelaide, has not extended above the Glen Osmond Clay

Slates (¢.g., the Glen Osmond Mines and Mount Malvern Mine west of Claren-

don). Nor is there any notable concentration of barytes in the Purple Series as

in the Flinders Ranges and near Noarlunga, although it occurs sporadically in the

Brighton limestone at the Brighton quarries as radiating kidney-shaped masses

several inches in diameter. Concentric markings and radial structure suggest

crystallisation of barium sulphate gels. At Reynella several bundred-weight of

wad was collected from Brighton limestone; the occurrence was restricted.

Epigenetic fluorite is not common.

The Brighton limestone is used in cement manufacture, High-grade lime-

stone quarried to the west of Reynella is transported by overhead tramway to the

cement works near Maritio; argillaccous limestone for mixing with the purer lime-

stone is quarried near Marino. J.imestones, suitable four cement, were quarried on

Mr. Pocock’s property to use in building the retaining wall of the Happy Valley

Reservoir and in the construction of the main South Road.

Weathering of the dolomitic horizon of the Brighton limestone serics has

produced a little magnesite.

Alunite is known to occur in the purple slates but not in commercial quan-

tities. Copper was sought in these slates about one mile from the coast in Hallett

Creek; none was found.

At Noarlunga Oligocene brown coal deposits have been prospected, but results

are not encouraging. For many reasons the deposits cannot yet be exploited

213

economically. East of Happy Valley Reservoir clear quartz sands and loosely

cemented sandstones occur plentifully. These may eventually be useful in glass

manuiacture.

A sandy glauconite seam several feet thick commonly exists near the base

of the marine Miocene, occurring at a depth of approximately 13 feet, south-east of

Morphett Vale. Bores also cut the bed to the east of Reynella. As a fertiliser,

the glauconite is of fair quality but would not repay mining. Marls form the mass

of the Tertiaries, but in composition they are tot suitable for the manufacture

of cement.

Thick sub-surface travertine was quarried on a small scale south-west of

Morphett Vale township for top-dressing cultivated land, but the scheme was

unsuccessful.

SUMMARY

After a brief survey of relevant geological literature, the physiography of

the area is considered. ].ate Proterozoic and (?) early Cambrian sedimentation

is discussed, and special attention is drawn to the perfect completion of a sedi-~

mentation cycle following Sturtian glaciation,

In the period succeeding the deposition of the Brighton limestone, conditions

existed which resulted in the deposition of a Flysch series of sediments. This is

a “red bed” or purple series and has apparent tuffaceous affinities. In the con-

sideration of this series Segnit’s Sturtian tillite horizon at Hallett Cove is rejected

as merely being purple slate which has been affected by faulting. Indeed, the

majority of his findings fail to correspond with the author’s investigations.

Correlation of the succession of strata with that of the Upper Adelaide Series

occurring in the Flinders Ranges is attempted, and in general the similarity is

marked. Evidence having regard to the reliability of the author’s estimate of bed

thicknesses is gained from a comparison with Madigan’s Willunga scarp log of

strata and from other sources. The proximity of Cambrian Archaeocyathinae

seaward from Christie Beach North is demonstrated.

Problematica described by David and Howchin from certain horizons are dis-

cussed briefly; opinion is expressed that these are inorganic structures, not fossil

radiolaria, annelids:and crustacea as has been supposed. A few general petro-

graphic descriptions are included.

Contrary to Segnit’s assertions folding and faulting is shown to be relatively

simple, Also, the geological age of the Upper Adelaide Series is considered briefly.

Permian glaciation at Tallett Cove is described and the existence of a fossil

valley indicated; the age of the glacigencs is then discussed. The Oligocene

lacustrine series with included brown coals at Noarlunga and fossil wood at

Reynella are described, and Tlowchin’s supposed dead river theory is shown as

inapplicable to this locality. A discussion of Miocene and Pliocene marine sedi-

mentation follows.

The existence of a raised sea beach between 250 and 300 feet above sea level

is postulated, A second raised sea beach occurs at high tide level.

Post-Pliocene mottled sands and clays were principally derived from Oligo-

cene sediments outcropping along the north eastern extensions of the block. and

also from the adjacent eastern block.

Tertiary block faulting is discussed and the movement of the Eden-Moana

segment relative to sea level is demonstrated by means of a graph. ‘The paper

concludes with a brief section on economic rocks and minerals.

The map, although necessarily greatly reduced with a consequent decrease in

detailed accuracy, was compiled from detailed plans, on a scale of six inches to

one mile, which may be seen at the Geology Department, University of Adelaide.

214

REFERENCES

Basevpow, II. 1904 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 28, 248-252

Brown, H. ¥. 1. 1894 Ann. Rep. Govt. Geol. S. Aust.

Brows, H. Y. 1. 1898 Parl. Pap. No. 46

Brown, 1]. ¥. LL. 1902) Record of Mines of S. Aust.

Drown, H. Y. 1. 1903) “Report on Geological Explorations in West and

North-West South Australia,” Adelaide

CHAMBERLIN, R, 1935 “Science.” 81

Davin, UW. FE. 1927 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, 410-413

Davin, T. W. TE 1928) Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 52, 191-209

Davin, T. W. EL, and Howes, W. 1896 Proc, Linn. Soe. N.SAY.

Davin, T. W. E.. and Howeurn, W. 1923 Proc. A.N.Z.A.A.S., 16, 74-94

Penner, C. 1931 “South Australia: A Geographical Study.” Melb.

Howcnin, W. 1895 Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 19, (1). 61-69

Howcrun, W. 1898 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 22, (1), 12-17

Hlowerrs, W. 1904 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 28, 253-280

Howeminx, W. 1918 “Geology of S. Aust.,” Adelaide (1st Ed.)

JlowcHinx, W. 1923 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47, 279-315

Howenrs, W. 1924 ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 48, 297-302

Howcrrn, W. 1927 ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, 330-349

Tlowcrin, W. 1929 “Geology of S. Aust., Adelaide (2nd Ed.)

Howcnin, W. 1933 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 57, 1-41

Jack, RL L. 1915 Geol. Surv. S. Aust., Bull. 5

Jack, R. 1. 1926 Geol. Surv. S. Aust., Bull. 12 (N.S.)

Jack, R. 1. 1930) Geol. Surv. S. Aust.. Bull. 14 (N.S. )

Manican, C. T. 1925 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. 49, 198-212

Mapican, C. T. 1927 Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 51, 398-409

Mawson, D. 1907 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 31, 119-124

Mawson, D. 1907 Proc. A.A.A.S., 11, 396

Mawson, D. 1911 Mem. Roy. Soe. S. Aust.. 2, (3)

Mawson, D. 1914 Mem. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 2, (4)

Mawson, D. 1926 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, 160-162

Mawson, 1). 1939 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, (1). 69-78

Mawson, D. 1939 Proc, A.N.Z.A.A.S., 24, 79-88

Mawson, D. 1940 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64, (2), 362

Stan~it, RL W, 1939 Geol. Surv. S. Aust., Bull. 18

Seonir, R. W. 1940 Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust.. 64, (1). 1-44

Tare, R. 1879 Trans. Phil, (Roy.) Soc. S. Aust., 2, 1

Tare, R., [owcutn, W., and Davin, T. W. E. 1895) Proc, AVAA.S.. 6, 315-320

Trnpare, N. B. 1933) ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 57, 130-142

Warp, L. K. 1925 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, 61-84

Wootnovai, W.G. 1904 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 28, 193-212

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942

THE HALLETT COVE AREA

Scale :-

o 220 40 Iyerds

ALLUVIUM

BOULDER SHINGLE WITH RE-OISTRIGUTED ERRATICS

PLEISTOCENE RAISED SEA BEACH

PLEISTOCENE MOTTLED CLAYS

i PLIOCENE CALCAREOUS SANOSTONE

Wea

LATE PALAEOZOIC GLACIAL SERIES

=| FLUVIOGLACIAL CLAYS, MUDSTONES, SiLTS & SHALES

FLUVIOGLACIAL SANDS

BOULOER TILL

| STRIATED BEDROCK

Lee

ADELAIDE SERIES (S&E INSET)

“EO bP

; STRIATION DIRECTION

Tatas Rock <Q

Zid

ute

( 4

( (

Se ee”

one as :

Bis

Barytes Sand Crystals DS}

Deep Scores NGO

BLACK CLIFF L(A 4/ \ oe Se 08

HALLETT COVE

Recent Py

Raised Sta Beach / a

PEt?

ADELAIDE SERIES

CHOCOLATE SLATES & QUARTZITES ~ 2250°

MASSIVE GREY QUARTZITES = 300°

V -

CHOCOLATE SLATES = 140

MASSIVE QUARTZITES - 270°

GA CHOCOLATE & GREY SLATES - 300"

bade aia

as ARKOSIC SANOSTONE & LIMESTONES ~ 180°

A PRIMITIVE METHOD OF MAKING A WOODEN DISH

BY NATIVE WOMEN OF THE MUSGRAVE RANGES,

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By J. R. B. LOVE (Supt. Ernabella Mission, Musgrave Ranges)

Summary

C. P. Mountford described recently (1) a method of making wooden implements (in his case a

spear-thrower) by using unworked stone tools, by men of the Pityantjatjara (Pitjandjara) tribe from

the Mann Ranges in the far North- West of South Australia.

215

A PRIMITIVE METHOD OF MAKING A WOODEN DISH

BY NATIVE WOMEN OF THE MUSGRAVE RANGES, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By J. R. B. Love (Supt. Ernabella Mission, Musgrave Ranges )

| Read 8 October 1942]

Pirates VI anp VIL

C. P. Mountford described recently (1) a method of making wooden

implements (in his case a spear-thrower) by using unworked stone tools, by men

of the Pitjantjatjara (Pitjandjara) tribe from the Mann Ranges in the far North-

West of South Australia.

He stated that the tribe had, perhaps, the simplest and most primitive

immaterial culture in Australia. He went on to say, from his observations and from

information received, that these people could have made satisfactory spear-

throwers and carrying dishes with unworked stones similar to those which he

figured. Such discarded untrimmed stones would bear no recognisable trace of

having been used by man, and it would have been possible for people with a

similar material culture to that of the Pitjandjara to have become extinct without

having left behind them any recognisable evidence of their culture, The present

paper describes the making of a large wooden dish in the neighbouring Musgrave

Ranges by native women, using similar unworked implements, thus confirming

and extending Mountford’s observations.

There are three types of wooden dishes in use in the Musgrave Ranges,

namely: (1) the “piti,” a water vessel, cut from a bend of a tree—this may con-

tain from one to three gallons; (2) the “wira,” a small scoop or shovel, used for

digging in the earth, to make the sleeping hollow for the night camp, for scooping

up hot ashes in cooking, for digging for water in sandy creek beds, and for digging

graves; (3) the “kanilpa,” the winnowing dish, similar in shape to the “wira,”

but larger, used for winnowing grass seed, for separating cooked “jalka” bulbs

from ashes, and also as a container for fruits and berries.

All three types may be spoken of as “piti,’ though usually the term “piti”

signifies a water vessel. The large water “piti’ is also named “mimpa.” The

“wira” is alternatively named “pata,” and the “kanilpa” alternatively named “wini.”

The name “kanilpa” is derived from the verb “kanini” meaning winnow. ‘The

water vessel ‘‘piti’” is, obviously, concave in both longitudinal and transverse

sections; the “wira” and “‘kanilpa” are flat in longitudinal section and concave in

transverse section.

The process of manufacture for the three vessels is the same, the water con-

tainer being cut from a bend, the other two types from a straight tree trunk. The

timber used is the white-stemmed gum (Eucalyptus rostrata).

A convenient opportunity to witness and describe the manufacture of the

dish recently occurred when a tree was felled for a post. The trunk proved to be

hollow, a mere shell, of no use for the purpose for which it was cut. Onc of the

native men remarked that it was a good tree for a “piti.”

Nowadays the dish is usually cut from the tree with a steel axe, but when

volunteers were called for to cut a dish by means of stones only, there was an

immediate response and a laughing party of half a dozen women, headed by a

woman of some fifty years of age, undertook to make a dish, A search was made

for sharp-edged stones, to act as axes. Several of these weighed about six pounds

Traus. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

216

each, and one or two not less than ten pounds, Each woman placed a stone on

her head and walked off to the sandy bed of the creek, where the tree was lying.

Two women took up positions on opposite sides of the tree trunk, and each

with a rather light stone of several pounds weight, marked out on the green bark

of the tree trunk the size of the dish to be cut (fig. 1). These two then chopped

and chipped at one end of the dish until they had sunk a groove through the outer

sap wood (fig. 2). he sharp edges of the axe stones soon wore out, and not a

few of the stones broke after a few blows. Some were re-shaped by striking off

rough flakes from the edge; others were at once discarded.

After the first impression had becn made with lighter stones, heavier stones

were used, being lifted with both hands and good. stout blows struck, until the

hard wood below the sapwood was cut through and a hole actually appeared in

the trunk of the tree. This was greeted with delight.

The women worked in pairs—as one tired another took her place. One

woman worked with an infant in one arm, but did not allow the presence of the

little child to prevent her from doing a very good share of the work. After one

hour and a half of painful labour the whole outline of the dish had been cut

through the sap and hardwood, and the roughly-shaped dish was levered from

the rotten core of the tree by means of a stick of a foot or so in length (fig. 3, 4).

The green bark was left on the back of the dish till a later stage. The rough dish

was now taken to camp and work on it postponed till the next day.

The women all showed their hands, every one blistered and cut from the

wielding of the heavy axe stones; but all laughed at their pains. The ages of the

women varied from about 20 to 50 years, the oldest taking the leading part, but

the youngest being not at all behind in skill and zest. Though they worked cheer-

fully at this task, one could appreciate the difference that the steel axe has made

in alleviating their toil.

The rough dish was buried in wet sand in the creek bed till the following

morning, when work was resumed by four women who toiled in turn singly. Still

using rough natural stones, the centre was hollowed out until the rotten core and

the hardwood were removed, down to the sapwood.

At this stage a manufactured tool was brought into use—the stone adze,

named “tjurna” or “‘tjurninpa.” This is a flake of flint mounted with spinifex

gum on the end of a slightly curved handle of heavy mulga wood. The handle is

about two feet in length by two inches in diameter. This adze is usually regarded

as a man’s tool; but all of these women were quite proficient in its use. After the

rough dish has been chopped out from the trunk of a tree, the finishing stages may

be done by men or women, Jn this case all the work was done by women, with

several of the older men as interested witnesses, particularly the old man who

provided the stone adze for use. This old man gave frequent hints to the women

who were doing the hollowing out, and turned and explained what they were about

to do next.

When all the sapwood had been removed the dish was set in a slanting hollow

in the earth, concave side uppermost. The woman who was chiselling the centre sat

astride the dish and, using the adze in both hands, striking towards her, chisclled

out small shavings from the centre of the dish.

When the centre of the dish had been approximately shaped the dish was

reversed, the green bark removed, and the back of the dish subjected to further

chiselling until the dish was pronounced thin enough,

The adzing, first with natural stones, and then with the manufactured adze,

of the centre and back of the dish, took a day and a half of almost continuous

labour by four women who worked in turns.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate VI

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol, 66, Plate VII

As the adzing neared complction a cooking pit was prepared. A hole was

scooped in the earth, big enough to accommodate the dish. Over this a good fire

was lit and allowed to burn down to ashes and hot coals. By the time the adzing

was finished the fire was ready to receive the dish. As the adzing went on and the

sides of the dish became thinner, the edges curled inwards. It was to counteract

this that the fire was needed. The completely adzed dish was rubbed all over,

inside and out, with a handful of wetted shavings. Coals and ashes were now

scooped from the fire pit and the dish placed in the pit, concave side upwards. The

back of the dish was next covered with wetted shavings, which were in turn

covered with ashes and coals. After being in the fire pit for a quarter of an hour,

the dish was taken and beaten clean from hot ashes. Hot coals were now put in

the centre of the dish, which was placed on the ground. The woman who had

taken the leading part now gradually forced the sides of the dish wide open, by

pushing against the far side with one foot and pulling the near edge with her two

hands. The dish was pulled into a low concave shape while hot from the fire.

To keep the dish from curling while drying, three transverse sticks were

inserted, pressed firmly down into the hollow of the dish and held in place by the

tendency of the drying vessel to contract (fg. 6).

The dish was now rubbed over the back with red ochre and pronounced

complete.

It measured two feet three inches in length by eleven inches in width.

The first stage of manufacture, that of chopping the rough shape from the

tree trunk, took one and a half hours; the remaining stages required one and a

half days.

REFERENCE

(1) Mountrrorp, C. P. 1941 Trans, Roy Soc. S. Aus., 65, (2), 312-316

EXPLANATION OF PLATES VI AND VII

Pirate VI

Fig. Marking out the shape of the dish by using a small stone.

Fig. 2 Chopping through the stem with heavier stones (note stone in the hand

of the woman on the left).

Fig. 3 Using a stick to prise the roughly-shaped dish from the remainder oi the

hollow stem (adjacent to the stem are the stones which had been used).

Pirate VII

Fig. 4 The roughly-shaped dish as removed from the log.

Fig. 5 Using the stone-bladed adze (tjurna) to trim the dish. :

Fig. 6 The finished dish (piti or kanilpa), with the three transverse sticks still

in position to prevent contraction.

THE MORPHOLOGY OF NANNOCHORISTA MACULIPENNIS TILLYARD

(MECOPTERA)

By J. W. EVANS

Summary

The Mecoptesa, which at the present day comprise one of the smallest orders of insects, are of great

interest to students of insect morphology because it is generally accepted that they lie at the base of

the evolutionary stem from which have arisen all the holometabolous orders, including the

Coleoptera. The order is divided into two sub-orders, the Protomecoptera and the Eumecoptera. One

family of the Protomecoptera, the Meropeidae, is represented in the Australian region and four out

of the five families of the Eumecoptera occur here. Three of these have a world-wide distribution,

whilst one family, the Nannochoristidae, has only been recorded from Australia, Tasmania, New

Zealand and Southern Chile.

218

THE MORPHOLOGY OF NANNOCHORISTA MACULIPENNIS TILLYARD

(MECOPTERA)

By J. W. Evans

[Read 8 October 1942]

The Mccoptera, which at the present day comprise one of the smallest orders

of insects, are of great interest to students of insect morphology because it is

generally accepted that they lie at the base of the evolutionary stem from which

have arisen all the holometabolous orders, including the Coleoptera. The order

is divided into two sub-orders, the Protomecoptera and the Eumecoptera. One

family of the Protomecoptera, the Meropeidae, is represented in the Australian

region and four out of the five families of the Eumecoptera occur here. Three

of these have a world-wide distribution, whilst one family, the Nannochoristidae.

has only been recorded from Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand and Southern

Chile.

_ ocr

Fig. 1 Nannochorista maculpennis—Head in dorsal aspect: A, antenna; ATP,

anterior tentorial pit; C, clypeus; EPST, cpistomal suture; LB. labrum; LPLP.

labial palp; MD, mandible; MXPLP, maxillary palp; OCC, occiput; PH, pharynx.

Fig. 2 Head in ventral aspect: AT, anterior arm of ientorium; E, epipharynx;

LC. lacinia; M, mentum; OCCD, occipital condyle; OCF, occipital foramen;

POCS, postoccipital suture; PTP, posterior tentorial pit; TB, tentorial bar.

The present study, which has been undertaken in order to make better known

an archaic though specialised type, has been made possible by the collection of a

large number of specimens of Nannochorisia maculipennis Tillyard. This species,

one of the four species of Nannochorista so far recorded from Tasmania, was

originally described from a single male specimen collected on Cradle Mountain,

Tasmania, at a height of 3,500 feet. During February 1941, countless represen-

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

219

tatives of N. maculipennis were found flying around shrubs, especially Orites

acicularis, growing at a height of 3,800 feet on Mount Wellington, near Hobart,

Tasmania.

Tillyard (1917) thought that the larvae of Nannocherista were almost cer-

tainly aquatic. This is improbable, and although small pools and streams abound

in the shallow, swampy valley where most of the insects were taken, several were

also found at a considerable distance from any exposed water surface. It is

believed that the larvae inhabit damp moss and that a Mecopterous larva described

recently (Evans, 1942) may well be the larva of a species of Nannochorista.

DESCRIPTION

N. maculipennis is a small fragile insect with a wing expanse of about 14 mm.

The body is brown in colour and the wings hyaline with brown markings.

The Head (Fig. 1-4)

The head is small and globular, the eyes large and three ocelli are present.

The antennae consist of twenty-four segments, the two proximal ones being

broader and shorter than the rest. Little trace remains of the various cranial

Tig. 3 Nannochorista maculipennis—Labium and maxillae: CD, cardo; PLG,

palpiger; SO, salivary orifice; ST, stipes. Fig. 4 Anterior part of head of same,

viewed internally: H, hypopharynx; other lettering as in previous figures.

sutures. An occipital suture separates off a small triangular occiput and continues

ventrally around the occipital foramen, and the epistomal suture lies just anterior

to the antennae between the pits of the anterior arms of the tentorium. Indistinct

subgenal sutures extend laterally from these pits as far as the eyes on each side.

The mandibles are reduced and probably functionless since the adductor and

abductor muscle apodemes are suppressed. Each maxilla consists of a small

felbaaty cardo and a narrow stipes from which arises a single process, probably

the lacinia.

220

The maxillary palps are five-segmented; sense organs occur on the third and

apical segments, The labium comprises a long, narrow sclerite in contact with the

stipes of the maxilla on each side and a pair of palps. The prementum is reduced

to a narrow membranous band and a pair of palpigers. The palps, which are

convex on their external surfaces and concave internally, have grooves on their

inner surfaces lined with forwardly-projecting hairs. The apical segment of each

palp, which is larger than the proximal segment, is armed with short strong spines.

In life, the palps are not widely separated, as shown in the figures, but are held

out in front in contact with each other, below the apposed laciniac. The single

plate of the postmentum is believed to represent the mentum; a submentum is not

developed. The area between the labium and the occipital foramen consists of a

hypostemal bridge and not a gula.

The labrum is long and narrow and together with the epipharynx forms an

apically-swollen tongue-like structure. The pharynx is sclerotised anteriorly and

trough-shaped. The dorsal surface of the trough, to which are attached dilator

muscles that arise on the clypeus, is of thicker consistency than the ventral surface.

The hypopharynx arises from the ventral surface of the trough and is a flattened

rounded lobe.

The Thorax (Fig. 5, 6, 8, 9)

In the description of the thorax which follows, Ferris’ (1939) interpretation

of thoracic structure is adopted.

Fig. 5 Nannochorista maculipennis—Thorax in dorsal aspect: ABD, abdominal

segment; CSCL, cervical sclerite; PN, pronotum; PNWP, posterior notal wing

process; PSTN, postnotum; SB, subalar scterite; SCT, scutum. Fig. 6 Thorax of

same in lateral aspect: ANEPS, anepisternum; BS, basalar sclerite; CX, coxa:

EPM, epimeron; EPS, episternum; KEPS, katepisternum; MN, meron; PLAP,

pleural apodeme; PREPS, preepisternum; PLC, pleural costa; STAP, sternal

apophysis. Fig. 7 Hind-leg of same.

221

The prothorax has a well-developed notum, a small episternum and a reduced

epimeron, A pair of apophyses which arise from pits on the prosternum extend

to and are attached to the epimeron. The mesothorax and metathorax so closely

resemble each other that separate description is unnecessary. Each is divided

dorsally into a large scutum, a small scutellum and a narrow postnotum. Laterally,

the episternum is partially divided into three distinct areas comprising a dorsal

anepisternum, a median preepisternum and a narrow ventral katepisternum, The

preepisterna and katepisterna of the two sides are infolded mid-ventrally at

the discrimenal line and a pair of large apophyses, fused medially but free proxi-

mally and distally, arise from the apposed katepisterna. These apophyses represent

all that remains of a true sternum. The epimera are undivided, a coxal meron is

developed and no trace remains of a trochantin.

The forewings and hindwings resemble each other in size, shape and venation.

Each forewing has a single jugal bristle and each hindwing three frenular bristles.

The legs are long and have five tarsal segments of which the proximal segment is

considerably the largest. There are two pairs of thoracic spiracles situated as

shown in fig. 6, and eight pairs of abdominal spiracles.

Fig. 8 Nannochorista maculipennis—Prothorax and mesothorax, ventral aspect: DL,

discrimenal line; PLF, pleural fold; PLSTAP, pleuro-sternal apophysis; other tetter-

ing as in fig. 5 and 6. Fig. 9 Mesothorax of same, anterior aspect-—Lettering as in

previous figures.

The Abdomen

é (fig. 12)—The apical abdominal segments of the male consist of a well-

developed seventh segment divided into a tergite and sternite, a reduced eighth

segment consisting of a complete ring, and a still more reduced ninth segment,

also a complete ring. A pair of ventrally-fused bulbous coxopodites arise from

the ninth segment, to which are attached a pair of inwardly-toothed harpogones

or styles. The phallus, which comprises a median aedeagus covered by a hood-

shaped structure, and a pair of ventral lobes, is sunk within the cavity of the

coxopodites. The tenth segment is a small complete ring and bears a pair of one-

segmented cerci which lie on either side of the eleventh or anal segment. The anal

segment consists of distinct dorsal and ventral plates.

222

@ (fg. 11)—The female genitalia arc of a simple type. he eighth

segment bears a pair of ventral lobes which partially overlap the ninth segment;

a pair of small laterotergites occur on cither side of these lobes. The sternite of

Fig. 10° Nannocherista maculipennis—Fore and hing-wings

the ninth segment is divided into two narrow processes. The tenth segment

consists of a complete ring, and the anal segment which lies between the cercal

bases, as in the male, cotsists of separate dorsal and ventral sclerites. The cerci

are well developed and two-segmented.

COMPARISON WITH OTHER MECOPTERA

The head of Nannocherista differs from those of Panorpodes, Panorpa,

Boreus, Bittacus, Apterobittacus and Merope as figured by Otanes (1922)

and from the heads of Apteropanorpa and Harpobittacus in size, being consider-

ably smaller, in shape, being globular, not elongated, and in certain structural

features. Species in the genera mentioned above are carnivorous insects with

well-developed mandibles. Nannochorista feeds by suction or rather “sipping.”

In most Mecoptera the clypeus and labrum are distinct, the former often being

as much as four or five times the length of the latter. In Naanochorista the labrum

ig longer than the clypeus and no extcrnal sutures serve to indicate the limits of

the two sclerites. The elongation of the head in other genera has resulted in the

arching of the subgenal sutures; in Nannochorista the subgenal sutures are more

or less in a line with the epistomal suture and. close to the base of the mandibles.

It is uncertain whether the mandibles are entirely functionless, but at the most

they can only serve to form part of the walls of a sucking tube. In other

Mecoptera the mandibles are elongated and toothed and equipped with strong

muscle apodemes,

In having a single process instead of two, the maxilla differs from that of

related genera. Otanes considered the divided process of the Mecopterous maxilla

represented a divided galea, Ferris and Rees a galea and a lacinia, or at least a

223

divided lacinia, As the only type examined which displays any tendency to a

reduction of either lobe is Apteropanorpa, in which the outer lobe is very small

and weak, and the inner lobe resembles in shape and appearance the process of

Nannochorista, the latter is assumed to be the lacinia.

SPM

Fig, 11. Nannochorista maculipennis—Apical abdominal segments of female: AN,

anal segment; CC, cercus; LT, laterotergite; SPM, spermatheca. Fig. 12 Male

terminal segments—AED, aedeagus; CXP, coxopodite; HP, harpogone; other letter-

ing as in fig 11.

In most Mecoptera the labium consists of a small wide basal sclerite, the

mentum, followed anteriorly by a narrow partially-divided plate, the prementum,

also a pair of two-segmented palps of which the proximal segments are larger than

the distal ones. Such a condition is found in Apteropanorpa tasmanica and is well

illustrated for Panorpa nuptialis by Ferris and Rees. In these species there is

also a large submental area overlying a pair of labial apodemes that arises from

the base of the prementum. In Nannochorista the prementum is represented only

by a narrow membranous area and a pair of palpigers. Tillyard originally (1917)

considered the labial palps to be paraglossae, later (1926), he recognised their

true identity, The sclerotisation of the dorsal wall of the pharynx anteriorly, in

conjunction with the development of a sucking pump, is more marked in Nanno-

chorista than in other Mecoptera, though it is probable that such a development

occurs to some extent in all representatives of the order.

The tentorium is of the normal type for the group though in Apterepanorpa

the pits of the posterior arms are situated at the ventral corners of the occipital

foramen and not midway along the sides. It is almost certain that the elongation

of the clypeus and the consequent wide separation of the mouth-parts from the

head-capsule, such as occurs almost universally in the Mecoptera, is a secondary

devclopment from the condition retained in Nannochorista. Nevertheless, although

224

the head of Nannochorista can be considered primitive in this respect, in other

characteristics it is extremely specialised,

The thorax of Nannochorista closcly resembles those of Panorpa nuptialis

figured by Ferris and Rees, and of P. consuetudinis illustrated in Snodgrass (1937,

ig. 99). The only significant difference lies in the development of a pleural cleft

in the mesothorax which separates the anepisternum from the preepisternum

almost as completely as in the Neuroptera. The retention of jugal and frenular

bristles on the wings, which are suppressed in most families, is a characteristic the

Nannochoristidae shares only with the Choristidae. So far as the venation is

concerned, the only unusual feature is the partial fusion of the media and the

first cubitus.

Tillyard (1935) recognised three types of genitalia, the very reduced Meropid

type; the Bittacid, which he considered the most primitive existing type, and the

Panorpid or bulbous type. The male genitalia of Nannochorista belong to the

bulbous type but differ from others in this group in the structure of the ninth

abdominal segment, the tergite and sternite of which do not partially conceal the

coxopodites. The female genitalia are more complete and less specialised than

those of certain other Mecoptera, as they retain a pair of gonapophyses on the

eighth abdominal segment and have separate cercal bases.

COMPARISON WITH THE Diptera

It has been claimed (Tillyard, 1937) that the nearest approach among the

Mecoptera to the type of Dipterous head-capsule and mouth-parts is to be found

in the Nannochoristidae. Further, that the archaic Blepharocerid Edwardsina

Alex., which like Nannochorista has an Antarctic distribution, is the representa-

tive of present-day Diptera most nearly related to Nannochorista.

An investigation of the head-structure of Edwardsina tasmaniensis Tonnoir

(fig. 13-15) discloses that there are only two cephalic characteristics shared by

Nannochorista and Edwardsina which are not also possessed by other Mecoptera.

Fig. 13-15 Edwardsina tasmaniensis (9): 13, head; 14, labium and maxillae,

PM, prementum; 15, anterior part of head, viewed internally. Lettering as in

previous figures.

225

These are the single maxillary lobe and the presence of a sense-organ on the third

segment of the maxillary palps. Among the characters which Hdwardsina has in

common with the majority of Mecopterous genera are a sclerotised pharynx, a

postmentum consisting of a single plate, the mentum, two-segmented labial palps,

the suppression of glossae and paraglossae and narrow elongated mandibles. The

prementum of Edwardsina resembles that of all Mecoptera except Nannochorista.

The head of Edzwardsina differs from that of Mecoptera in the position of

the clypeus and in the great elongation of the hypopharynx. It is probable that

these characteristics are related to each other, as it is evident from the arching

of the subgenal and epistomal sutures in Edwardsina that the clypeal position is

a secondary development. This development may have resulted from the increased

pull of the dilator muscles of the sucking pump on the inner surface of the clypeus

which followed the change in the function of the mouth-parts that accompanied

the elongation of the hypophraynx.

Several Diptera possess a single maxillary lobe, and if Rees and Ferris

(1939) are correct in regarding this lobe in Tipulids as the lacinia, and Snodgrass

correct in regarding the maxillary process of ‘abanids as the galea, then the

Diptera must have arisen from a Mecopterous type possessing both a lacinia and

a galea. A comparison of the head of Tipula reesi as figured by Rees and Ferris

with the head of Panorpa nuptialis figured by Ferris and Rees, discloses that these

two insects resemble each other more closely than do Edwardsma and Nanno-

chorista. Both have a long narrow clypeus which lies anterior to the eyes and

a distinct labrum, also the hypopharynx of T. reesi is suppressed, not enlarged

as in Edwardsina. It is therefore suggested that Nannochorista is not so closely

related to the Diptera as the other Mecoptera which have an elongate head.

REFERENCES

Evans, J. W. 1942 Pap. Roy. Soc. Tasm., 1941 (1942)

Ferris, G. F., and Rees, B. E. 1939 Microentomology, 4, (3)

Oranges, FQ. 1922 Ann. Ent. Soc, America, 15, (4), 311

Rees, B. E., and Ferris, G. F. 1939 Microentomology, 4, (6)

Snoperass, R. E. 1935 Principles of Insect Morphology

Tittyarp, R. J. 1917 Proc, Linn, Soc. N.S.W., 42, (2), 284

Trttyarp, R. J. 1922 Aust. Zool., 2, (4), 159

Tittyarp, R. J. 1926 Insects of Australia and New Zealand

Tittyarp, R. J. 1935 Ann. Ent. Soc. America, 38, (1), 1

TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

I CORMORANTS AND DARTERS

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, University of Adelaide

Summary

The earliest record of the presence of trematodes in Australian birds was by Krefft (1873), who

reported Distomum spp. from two species of herons and from a coot from Eastern Australia. The

first paper describing flukes from our birds was that published by S. J. Johnston (1904) giving an

account of three species of Holostomum (from a gull, tern and heron, respectively) and two of

Hemistomum (from a black swan and Dacelo, respectively), all of these having been obtained in

New South Wales. T. H. Johnston (1910; 1912) referred to various bird parasites under broad

generic terms, e.g., Echinostomum and Monostomum. S. J. Johnston followed on (1913) with an

account of two new species from North Queensland and a record of two already known species. In

the following year Nicoll (1914 a; 1914 b) published two papers dealing with parasites from

Northern Queensland birds, the first describing seven new species and recording one already known

elsewhere, the second paper including eleven new species and four previously known elsewhere. In

1916 T. H. Johnston issued his census of the endoparasites recorded from Queensland animals,

including birds (1916).

226

TREMATODES FROM AUSTRALIAN BIRDS

I CORMORANTS AND DARTERS

By T. Harvey Jounston, University of Adelaide

{Read 8 October 1942]

INTRODUCTION

The earliest record of the presence of trematodes in Australian birds was

by Krefft (1873), who reported Distomum spp. from two species of herons and

from a coot from Eastern Australia. The first paper describing flukes from our

birds was that published by S$, J. Johnston (1904) giving an account of three

species of Holostomum (from a gull, tern and heron, respectively) and two of

Henustomum (from a black swan and Dacelo, respectively), all of these having

been obtained in New South Wales, TV. H. Johnston (1910; 1912) referred to

various bird parasites under broad generic terms, ¢.g., Echinostoimum and Mono-

stomum, 5. J. Johnston followed on (1913) with an account of two new species

from North Queensland and a record of two already known species. In the

following year Nicoll (1914a; 1914b) published two papers dealing with para-

sites from Northern Queensland birds, the first describing seven new species and

recording one alrcady known elsewhere, the second paper including eleven new

species and four previously known elsewhere. In 1916 T, H. Johnston issued his

census of the endoparasites recorded from Queensland animals, including birds

(1916).

Next year 5. J. Johnston published the most extensive paper that has yet

appeared relating to flukes from Australian birds. It included the description of

twenty-one species of trematodes and gave a list of recorded species (1917), The

latter portion of this paper (p. 251-253) contains some errors and omissions which

have been carried over into the work of later authors. He omitted to list

Notocotylus attenuatus {from Anseranas semipalmata, Burhinus grallarius and

Lobivancllus lobatus; Opisthorchis obsequens from Hieracidea orientalis; aud

Patagifer bilobus {rom Carphibis spinicollis, these records having been published

by Nicoll (1914), all from North Queensland ; also Patagifer bilobus recorded from

Ibis molucca by T. H. Johnston (1916) from Southern Queensland. Strigea

flosculus, reported by Nicoll (1914) from Pedargus strigoides, was listed by

Johnston (1917, 253) under Pacelo gigas and omitted from its proper host.

Hemistomuin triangulare (= Adenodiplostonum triangulare) whose true host

is Dacelo gigas, was placed under Ninow maculata in addition. lt might be men-

tioned that these errors relate to three host species which follow each other in

S. J. Johnston’s list, and may have been due to accidental transposition of the lines

during typing. He also referred (p. 251) to Hemistomuin triangulare “parasitic

in Dacelo gigas and Ninox maculata in New South Wales.” In reply to my query,

Professor E. A. Briggs of the Zoology Department of the University of Sydney,

a member of the late Professor S. J. Johnston’s staff, informed me that he could

not locate any specimens of trematodes from these two hosts amongst the collec-

tions belonging to that department. The hosts are not related and they have

different food habits. The record of Adenodiplostomum triangulare from Ninox

maculata and Strigea flusculus from Dacelo gigas (which latter record Dubois

(1938) has listed, following S. J. Johnston) should be deleted until corroborated.

Next year T. II. Johnston (1918) identified specifically the various trema-

todes which he had previously (1910, 1912, 1916) indicated under broad generic

names. In 1921 Miss Chase described a Strigeid from a heron. Next year

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

227

Cleland (1922) published a paper which contained, amongst other parasites, a list

of trematodes recorded from Australian birds, but as this was stated to have been

based on S. J. Johnston’s paper (1917), it includes the same errors as the latter’s

work. It was not till 1928 that the next contribution relating to our subject

appeared, when T. H, Johnston described three species from Gallinula,

Dubois in 1937 (1937 a, 1937 b) published papers in which were described some

Strigeids from Australian birds, and in his excellent monograph of the Strigeata

(1938) he dealt with all known Australian species (except one) of the group.

}¥e included one of S. J. Johnston’s erroncous references (p. 71, 480) relating to

Strigea flosculus, and wrongly listed Cardiocephalus musculosus (Johnston 1904)

under the Caspian tern, Hydroprogne caspia, whereas its host was Sterna berg,

the crested tern (p. 116, 481). In passing, it may be mentioned that Dubois in

his monograph omitted mention of Tetracolyle tiliguae Nicoll. This meta-

cercaria was obtained from the lizard, TWiqua scincoides, and its adult stage will

probably be found in an Australian hawk.

Miss Young (1939) published a list of helminth parasites recorded from

Australia. Internal evidence indicates that her recording did not take cognisance

of work published after 1937, in fact several papers which appeared in that year

were omitted, The list is not critical and frequently the same host appears in two

differeut places, since little attempt seems to have been made to give cross refer-

ences to synonymy of hosts or parasites. The following records of parasites have

been omitted: Catatropis gallinulae, Echinostoma australe and L, bancroftt

described by T. H. Johnston (1918) from Gallinula tenebrosa; Opisthorchis

obsequens by Nicoll (1914) from Hieracidea orientalis; and Patagifer bilobus

recorded by T. H. Johnston (1916) from Jbis molucea, FEchinostoma austra-

lasianum Nicoll is referred to as E. australianum (p. 61).

In 1940 Miss Goss described two species from Western Australian cormor-

ants, In the same year Johnston and Simpson gave an account of the life history

of the bird trematodes, Leucochloridium australiense (1904a) and Cyelocoelum

jaenschi (1940 b). Next year Johnston and Angel described the life history of

Diplostomum murrayense {rom terns (1941 a), Petasigcer australis from grebes

(1941 b), and Lchinostomum revolutum from various Australian ducks and the

black swan (1941 .¢). An account ef the life history cf Paryphostomum tenuicollis

from cormorants was published recently (Johnston and Angel, 1942),

The only records of the presence cf trematodes in domesticated birds in

Australia are: (1) Prosthogenimus ovatus (an error for P. pellucidus) by T. H.

Johnston (1910, 116), based on a report by Spencer on the occurrence of trema-

iodes in the egg of a domesticated fowl in Victoria (Proc. Roy, Soc. Vict., 1, 1888,

109) ; (2) Echinostoma revolutum from domestic ducks in Queensland by Roberts

(1934, 5; 1939, 6). I now record Echinoparyphium recurvatum Linst. from a

turkey in Melbourne (coll, Dr. A. W. Turner). The pigeon was proved to be

capable of experimental infection with Echinostoma revolutian in Adelaide (John-

ston and Angel, 1941 c).

T have been unable to trace the types and other material belonging to the

avian species described by the late Professor 5. J. Johnston in 1904. At that time

he was economic zoologist to the Sydney Technological Museum. Mr. T. C,

Roughley of that institution and Professor E. A. Briggs of the University ot

Sydney have not been able to locate them for me, Types of species described in

S. J. Jobnston’s papers published in 1913 and 1917 are in the collections of the

School of Public Health, Sydney (formerly the School of Tropical Medicine,

Townsville, North Queensland), and the Australian Museum, Sydney, respec-

tively. Nicoll’s types (1914) were deposited in the former institution, ATI my

early collections of trematodes were handed over to 5. J. Johnston for study and

formed part of the material described by him in 1917.

228

I desire to acknowledge assistance received from the Commonwealth Research

Grant to The University of Adelaide; from Messrs. G. & F. Jaensch and L. Ellis

of Tailen Bend, South Australia, for supplying local cormorants; to Dr. M, J.

Mackerras and her father, the late Dr. T. L. Bancroft, for some material from

Queensland ; to Professor E. A. Briggs for the loan of S. J. Johnston’s serial sec-

tions of Echinochasmus tenuicollis and Clinostomum australiense; and to Dr.

A. B, Walkom, Director of the Australian Muscum, Sydney, for the loan of the

type slides of the two species, just referred to, and that of Dolichosaccus solecarius.

‘TREMATODES FROM CORMORANTS AND DARTERS

There are five species of cormorants occurring in Australia, Phalacrocorar

carbo (novae-hollandiae), P. sulcirostris (also known as P, ater), P. melanoleucus,

P, fuscescens (leucogaster; gouldi), and P. varius, the last-named being restricted

to coastal regions, P. melanoleucus appears to be by far the most common species

occurring along rivers and swamps. Trematodes have been obtained from all

these species, as well as from the only Australian species of darter, Anhinga

novae-hollandiae.

Four species of trematodes have been described from Australian cormorants:

(1) Echinochasinus tenuicollis S. J. Johnston 1917; (2) Dolichosaccus solecarius

S. J. Johnston 1917; (3) Paryphostomum phalacrocoracis Goss 1940; and (4)

Diplostomum granulosum Goss 1940; the first two were collected in New South

Wales and the remainder from the Swan River, Western Australia. Clinostomum

australiense S$, J. Johnston 1917 was described from a Queensland darter. As a

result of the present study, numbers (1) and (3) are placed as synonyms of

Paryphostomum radiatum (Duj.); (2) has been assigned to a new genus,

Dolichosacculus; and (4) has been found to be a synonym of HHvysteromorpha

iviloba Rud. The occurrence of Petasiger exaeretus and Echinoparyphium phala-

crocoracts in various Australian cormorants is now recorded, and a new species

of Stictodora is described. Additional species have been collected, but their study

is postponed for the present.

Miss Goss (1940) gave a brief account of an immature trematode found in

Phalacrocerax varius from the Swan River. She considered it to belong probably

to the Steringophoridae, and to be a parasite of some fish eaten by the bird. It

scetns to be a member of the Azygiidae near Azygia,

CLINOSTOMUM AUSTRALIENSE S, J. Johnston

(Fig. 1-3)

This species from the oesophagus of a darter, Plotus (= Anhinga) novae-

hollandiae from Eidsvold, Burnett River, Queensland, was described and figured by

S. J. Johnston (1917, 230-234, fig. 17). An examination of the type slide and

Fig. 1-3. Chnostomwn australiense: 1, genital system (from S. J. Johnston’s

type); 2, part of L.H. Sect, ta show relation of male ducts; 3, part of L.H. Sect.

to show relation of uterus to other organs. Fig. 4-5 Dolichesacculus selecarius

(from S. J. Johnston’s type): 4, reproductive system, ventral view, only anterior

vitellaria shown, cirrus sac and acetabulum indicated by dotting; 5, sketch, ventral

view of female system. Fig, 6-8 Siclodora diplacantha: 6-7, entire worms,

various organs omitted; 8, reproductive system, most of uterus omitted, dorsal

view. Fig. 1, 2, 3 drawn to scale beside fig. 2; 4 and 8 to scale below 4; 6 and 7

to scale beside 6.

a, acetabulum; at, atrium; cs, cirrus sac; eb, excretory bladder; ec, excretory

canal; gp, genital pore; i, intestine; le, Laurer’s canal; 0, ovary; od, oviduct;

rs, receptaculum seminis; sg, shell gland; t, testis; u, uterus; v, vitellaria; vd,

vitelline duct; vs, vesicula seminalis.

230

serial sections has been made. Length, 11 mm.; maximum breadth (in the region

of the gonads), 3-25 im. The sucker ratio is ‘nearly Lig;

The excretory system is much more extensive than the figure indicates, and

its ramifications extend from the extreme anterior to the extreme posterior end.

The main canals and loops are well indicated in the original figure. The bifurca-

tion of the very short terminal portion of the bladder lics very closely adjacent

to the ends of the crura, Yamaguti (1933, 67, 69, and fig. 28), in his account of

C. complanatum from Japanese Nyeclicorax, mentioned that the crura each opened

into the excretory bladder. A study of longitudinal horizontal sections of

C, australiense revealed the presence ot a thin membrane separating the termina-

tion of each crus from the base of the corresponding arm of the bladder. Canals

belonging to the excretory system are abundant in the tissues surrounding the

testes, ovary and sex ducts. The caeca have very numerous short irregular

diverticula. Gland cells are very abundant in the pre-acctabular region, both

intra-caecally and extra-caccally.

The anterior testis is somewhat triangular and lies mainly on the left side.

it measures about -66 mm. across its base, and *71 mm. in length. It is almost

surrounded by the uterus and cirrus sac... Its vas deferens arises from the inner

posterior corner as a thin-walled tube which travels nearly transversely to join

the other vas deferens immediately before entering the cirrus sac, The posterior

testis is transversely elongate and much lobed and extends alinost from one crus

to the other. Its maximum breadth is -95 mim. and length -45 mm. Its vas

deferens arises from the part of the gland which lies just behind the ovary and

travels more or less directly ‘anteriorly to the cirrus sac. ‘The vasa lie ventrally

from the ovary, The citrus sac is elliptical with broadly rounded ends, measures

*66 mm. in length by -33 dm. in breadth and lies slightly obliquely on one side

of the midline. Its posterior end is almost in contact with the ovary. It contains

a wide twisted vesicula seminalis, The cirrus is short and provided with pro-

minent blunt conical spines.” There is a well marked genital atrium receiving the

uterine aperture anteriorly, while the short male canal from the cirrus sac enters

it on the opposite side, . The genital pore is median and lies just behind the level

of the front border of the anterior testes.

The ovary is almost circular in outline, being about *3 mm. in diameter. It

lies directly behind the cirrus sac. The oviduct issues from the mid-region of its

inner surface and curves anteriorly and then posteriorly and inwardly. Mehlis’

gland is inconspicuous. The main yolk duct enters the oviduct in its vicinity.

Taurer’s canal is an obvious structure in sections and terminates on the dorsal

surface just in front of the level of the anterior border of the posterior testis.

Yollx glands are scaltered but are restricted, probably because of immaturity of

the specimens, to the region in the vicinity of the posterior testis. The uterus is

thrown into a number of short curves as it travels forwards from the ootype,

inaking two transverse loops and then a longer third one just behind the anterior

testis. It passes around the outer border of the latter on a more ventral level than

the crus, and then curves inwards and forwards in front of the testis to enter

the median uterus at a very acute angle. Johnston’s figure of the uterus in the

vicinity of the genital pore is net quite correct. The median uterus or uterine sac

is thin-walled with muscular fibres, and has numerous short diverticula in the

immature specimens examined, The sac extends forwards to a point distant

behind the acetabulum equal to the length of the latter. The posterior portion of

the sac is widened and then becomes constricted to jom the atrium by means of a

narrow muscular uterine canal.

Johnston has pointed out the chief differences between C. australiense and

C. marginatuin Rud. which is widely distributed in North and South America in

231

Ardeiform birds, its metacercaria occurring as cysts in various fresh water fish,

The position of the uterus is more like that in C. attenuatum than that in

C. marginatum and C. complanatum (Cort 1913). The only other known Austra-

lian species is C. hornum Nicoll 1914 from Ardeiform birds in North Queensland.

The latter is probably a synonym of C, complanatum, as Yamaguti (1933, 71)

has suggested.

Dolichosacculus solecarius (S. J. Johnston 1917) n. gen.

(Fig. 4-5)

This species is known from a single immature specimen taken from Phala-

crocorax imelanoleucus from Tuggerah, New South Wales. It was described and

figured as Dolichosaccus solecarius by Johnston, but some details were not referred

to adequately. As a result of an examination of the type slide, some additional

structtires have been seen.

The excretory bladder can be traced forwards as a rather wide tube above the

two testes, almost to the region of the shell gland, where it bifurcates to terminate

in two short broad arms ending at about the level of the middle of Mehlis’ gland.

It thus resembles that of Opisthioglyphe. The anterior margin of the pharynx

bears four prominent rounded lobes. The oesophagus is practically absent.

Just behind the rounded ovary is the thin-walled spherical receptaculum

seminis containing a number of ova, its diameter being -42 mm. The oviduct

arises postero-laterally from that part of the ovary which lies in front of the shell

gland and.travels back dorsally above the latter and part of the receptaculum.

The shell gland lies laterally from the receptaculum and from the region just

behind and between the two arises J.aurer’s canal which travels posteriorly in a

sinuous course to terminate dorsally. A yolk duct can be seen joining the oviduct

just before the latter enters the shell gland. The uterus, after leaving the shell

gland, becomes thrown into a few short closely-arranged loops between the ovary

and the posterior end of the acetabulum and immediately below the vesicula

seminalis, It then crosses below the posterior portion of the cirrus sac, travels

forward beside the latter, but on the opposite side, and then appears to be thrown

into a wide loop below the anterior half of the cirrus sac. It continues forwards

and, in front of the sac, it curves back to end at the female pore. The tracing of

the course of the uterus has been difficult because of the extreme thinness of its

walls, its unstained condition, and the absence of eggs. The cirrus and the

terminal portion of the female duct are similar in their relations to those figured

by Travassos (1930; fig. 24) for Dolichosaccus rastellus.

The systematic position of the species has remained uncertain. 5S. J. Johnston

included it in his genus Dolichosaccus with some doubts, stating that it differed

from the three known species, all of then: from Australian frogs, in its cylindrical

form, in the relative sizes of the two suckers, and in the topography of the

vitellaria. ‘The latter, in species from amphibians, are not restricted to the zone

below and laterally from the crura but are widely distributed and occupy a broad

post-ovarial zone; they also extend much further forward than in D. solecarius

and may reach the level of the pharynx. The genus as originally diagnosed would

include D. solecarius, except for the distribution of the yolk glands. Though

Johnston stated that it was doubtful whether a receptaculum scminis was present

in species of the genus (1912, 309), his type, D. trypherus, as figured by him

(fig. 4), shows the presence of such an organ which he called a “fertilization

space,” and he actually called the organ a receptaculum seminis in his fig. 5

(D, trypherus), fig. 7 (D. ischyrus) and fig. 8 (D. diamesus). Ue regarded

Dolichosaccus as being close to Opisthioglyphe. He placed it in the Plagiorchinae

(1912) ; 1917),

232

Perkins (1928) allocated the genus to the Telorchiinae, He included it in his

key to the subfamily and regarded the species described from Australian frogs as

validly included in it and (p. 353) incorporated them in his key. He went on to

state that another species placed in the genus, D, parvila Johnston (sic) 1916,

was known only by a single very young specimen (from a bird, Phialacrocorax),

which had an exceedingly short uterus containing only one large egg and which

therefore should probably be removed to the Psilostominae, He did not include it

in his key to species of Dolichosaccus, Perkins apparently confused S. J, John-

ston’s specific name, solecarins, with Nicoll’s Delichopera parvula which is also

mentioned in the same paper. Johnston (1917, 220), in his original account,

stated definitely that the uterus was short and did not extend back beyond the shell

gland and that it contained no eggs. Perkins (1928, 343) thought that Delichosaccits

aud Brachysaccus (both from Australian frogs) were probably not distinct, but

an examination of Johnston’s figures shows that in the latter the cirrus sac is

shorter and lies in front of the acetabulum, Laurer’s canal is very much larger,

and the uterus is much more extensive, occupying most of the intercaecal space

between the ventral sucker and the testes.

Travassos (1930, 2) when dealing with Opisthioglyphe and related genera,

placed Brachvsaceus under the former, and showed that Perkins’ Lecithopyge was

a synonym of Dolichoseccus. He gave a diagnosis of the last-named and included

the presence of a spermatheea as one of the features (1930, 11). Ile did not

include Y., solecarins in the genus as he considered that its occurrence represented

a case of accidental parasitism of the cormorant by a young specimen of a fish

trematode near Podocotwle (Allocreadiinae), young flukes being more easily able

to adapt themselves temporarily in a new host. In this connection it is of interest

to mention that Miss Goss (1940) recorded the finding of an immature trematode,

regarded as belonging to the Steringophoridae, in Phalacrocoras varius from Perth,

Western Australia. The specimen was believed (no doubt correctly) to belong

to a species infesting fish. Her account and figure suggest a member of the

Azygudae, such as Asygia sp., rather than a Steringophorid.

Mebra (1931, 175) allocated both Dolichosaccus and Brachysacens to the

Yelorchiinac, placing the former (in his diagram) between Cercorchis aud Brachy-

saccus, Ina later paper (1937) he retained Dolichosaccus in that subfamily.

From the foregoing statements it will be seen that D. solecarius has been

variously assigned. The appearance of the specimen suggests a member of the

Telorchiinae, but the position of the uterus resembles that of many Allocreadiids.

The form of the exerctory bladder allocates the parasite to the Plagiorchioidea, so

that membership of the Allocreadiidae can be definitely excluded.

The parasite from Phalacrocorax differs especially from typical species of

Dolichosaccus in the distribution of the yolk glands. These are restricted to the

vicinity of the cacca between the level of the veniral sucker and the end of the caeca

and located especially laterally from the caeca, but they extend to lie ventrally to

the latter, leaving the intercaecal field free from them. F

The differences from Dolichosaccus may be best expressed by regarding

D. solecarius as representing a new genus, Volichosacculus, with the following

characters: Telorchiinae; characters as in Dolichosaccus except that the body is

nore or less cylindrical and the vitellaria are restricted to the caccal and extra-

caecal regions behind the mid-acetabular level. Type D. solecarius (S. J.J.) from

Phalacrocorax melanoleucus, The genus is close to Dolichosaccus and Opisthio-

gly phe.

The systematic relationships of D. solecarius suggest that its presence in a

cormorant may be accidental and that its true host may be a frog, since all known

species of Dolichosaccus and Opisthioglyphe occur in frogs, It may be mentioned

233

that the cercaria of a very common trematode, Paryphostomum radiatum, widely

distributed in Australian cormorants, can infect tadpoles and thus reach its meta-

cercatia stage (Johnston and Angel, 1942).

PARYPIOSTOMUM RADIATUM (Duj.) Dietz

Distomun (Echinostoma) radiatum Dujardin 1845.

Paryphostomum radiatum Dietz 1909; 1910; Lithe 1909; Edwards 1927,

Echinochasmus tenuicollis S. J. Johnston 1917; T. H. Johnston 1918.

Paryphostomum testitrifolta Gogate 1934,

Paryphostomum phalacrocoracis Goss 1940,

Paryphostomum tenutcollis Johnston and Angel 1942.

Parvphostomuin testrifolinm Goss 1940, 5-6 (error for testitrifolunt).

The first Australian reference to the parasite was that by S, J. Johnston who

described it as Echinochasmus tenuicollis (1917, 206), the host being Phala-

crocorax melanolencus from New South Wales. He stated that the 19 dorsal

spines were arranged in an uninterrupted row and varied little in size; the testes

were three-lobed; the uterus little coiled; and the vitellaria terminated anteriorly

some distance behind the ventral sucker. 1 identified it (1918, 212) from the

same host species from the Thompson River, Western Queensland, and drew

attention to the extension of the vitcllaria as far forward as the level of the

posterior edge of the acetabulum, as well as to the more anterior position of the

male and female glands than was indicated in the original figure.

A recent examination of my material indicated that the species did not belong

to Echinochasmus but to Paryphostomunt, and it was under the name P. tenui-

collis that the account of its life history and an extended host list were published

by Johnston and Angel (1942). In South Australia it was ascertained that ils

molluscan hosts were the pond snails, Aimerianna pyranudata, A. pectorosa and

A. tenuistriata. It is probable that any Australian species of clmerianna (Physa,

Butinus and Isodora of Australian authors) would be able to serve as the

molluscan host. The cyst stage was obtained experimentally in five species of

aquarium fish, as well as in the tadpole of Pseudophryne bibroni, and was found

occurring as uatural infections in three species of fish from the Murray swamps

at Tailem Bend, South Australia; viz., Carassius auratus (golden carp), Pseuda-

phritis urvilli (congolli), and Tandanus tandanus (cat fish). The adult stage

was recorded from the following species of cormorants in South Australia:

Phalacrocorax carbo, P, melanoleucus, P. fuscescens, and P. sulcirostris (syn.

P. ater). The arrangement of the collar spines in a double row was figured and

ihe sizes published.

Miss Goss (1940) described Paryphostomum phalacrocoracis trom Phalacro-

corax ater and P. aelanoleucus from the Swan River, Western Australie, and

published a comparative table of various characters and measurements of

P, radiatum (of Dietz and of Edwards) and P, testitrifolium Gogate.

A comparison of the accounts and figures published by Dietz, Edwards,

Gogate and Goss indicates that they were all dealing with the same species, since

the differences listed are only minor variations. A study of S. J. Johnston’s type.

as well as of my own material from Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria and

South Australia, has permitted me to synonymize P. tenuicollis with P. radiatum.

A re-examination of the type specimen of P. tenuicollis, which is that figured

by S. J. Johnston (fig. 5), shows that it is 2-47 mm. long by +59 mm. in maximum

breadth (somewhat compressed) and is immature and that the uterus contains

only one egg. The latter is undersized, and has a colourless shell and lies adjacent

to the shell gland, The structure of the female complex is essentially like that of

P. radiatum as described by Edwards. The dorsal collar spines are arranged in

234

‘two series, those of the more anterior row being very slightly longer than those

of the second row, the sizes being respectively -09 and ‘O88 mim. The testes are

trilobed but the anterior shows the presence of a small fourth lobe in front, The

other details regarding its anatomy have been published by S. J. Johnston.

I have already stated that in Queensland material the vitellaria extended

forwards to the acetabular level, and that the ovary and testes were situated more

anteriorly than was indicated by S. J. Johnston. As a result of an examination

ot a large number of specimens from various Australian localities, it has been

ascertained that the length of egg-bearing worms ranges between 2°4 and 5 mm.,

the maximum breadth being about one-fifth or one-sixth the length. Longer

specimens (up to 5-8 mm, long) were collected, but they were relatively narrower

(6-66 mm.) and in them the uterus was very long and narrow, extending back

ior 1-43 mm. behind the end of the acetabulum. Such specimens resemble that

figured by Miss Goss (fig. 1). Most of our mature worms resembled closely

those figured by Dietz and by Edwards.

Two series of collar spines are usually recognisable, especially mid-dorsally,

but the interval between the two is generally slight. The sizes fall within the

ranges listed by Miss Goss. The following sizes were observed. Spines of the

anterior dorsal series measure about *102 mm. long, those of the second series

about *092--095 mm., the shoulder spines about +107 mm.; the spine next to the

group of corner spines, *092--097 mim, (this spine is in series with the posterior

dorsal series), the corner spines are unequal in length the ventral inner being

about +112, ventral outer -105, upper inner *118, and upper outer °136 mm., all

these measurements being taken from heads lying in glycerin in a favourable posi-

tion for measuring.

In mature worms the centre of the aperture of the acetabulum lies at about

the end of the first fourth or fifth of the body length, while the posterior edge

of that sucker is situated at about one-third of the body length from the anterior

end of small mature specimens and at about two-fifths in the case of large adults.

The post-testicular region varies in relative length according to the age of

the worm, and to some degree so also does the length of the preovarian region

(measuring fron the [ront of the ovary to the anterior end of the worm). The

former lengthens with age and the latter diminishes. In specimens 1-3 mm, long

post-testicular region was *275-°33 mm., ratio of the latter to body length

1:4-4-6, preovarian region *75-°99, ratio of the latter to body length 1:1°3-1-7;

ina worm 2 mm. long these measurements and ratios were -42, 1:4°7, 1-16, 1:1-7;

in worms 2°6 to 2°7 mm. long they were -53--66, 1:4-5, 1-12-1-13, 1:2°3-3; in

a worm 2°9 mm, long they were °55, 1:5°3, 1°37, 1:2; and ina specimen 3-44 mm.

in length they were -99, 1:3°5, 1-5, 1:2-3 respectively. All the worms just

referred to had not yet reached the egg-bearing stage, though the longer parasites

had ovarian eggs in the oviduct and nearly all had sperms in the receptaculum

seminis,

dn S. J. Johnston's type (which had just entered egg-bearing, the first egg

having entered the uterus), the post-testicular region was nearly one-fifth of the

body length and the ovary was situated just behind the mid-body.

The longest worm observed which had not yet become egg-bearing was

2-97 mm, long and -44 mm. wide at the acetabulum, but only *3 mm. wide at level

of the testes, the post-testicular region being 1:4°5 of the body length. It was

probably somewhat macerated. The shortest specimens found with one or more

uggs in the uterus were 2-4 mm. and 2°47 mm. long. The former had two eggs,

poorly developed vitellaria, a postacetabular region 1'3 mm. long, and its post-

testicular zone was 1:3°3 of body length. The other worm which was of the same

length of the type specimen had six eggs, a postacetabular length of 1-49 mm,, and

235

a post-testicular zone +58 mm. long 1:4). In mature specimens with abundant

eggs in a closely coiled uterus the latter occupies 1:3-3'8 of the body length.

Miss Goss’ figure indicates that in a very narrow worm 6 mm. long the latter

region was 1:3°5 of the body length and that the preovarian length was one-

eighth of the total. Dietz’s figures show the post-testicular zone to be about

2:5 of body length in a worm 5-2 mm. long and 2:7 in one 6°8 mm, long, The

{estes are very variable in outline and, as stated by Dietz (1910), possess from

three to seven or more lobes. The following indicates the conditions secu by us

in the anterior and posterior testes respectively, minor lobulations being indicated

after the plus sign: 3-+ 1.3;3-4 2, 3 +4;3,3;5,6+ 3;4,4;54,7;4, 6; 3,6.

The vitellaria extend forwards at least as far as the posterior border of the

acetabulum in worms which are mature, but in specimens under 3 mm. in length

the follicles usually do not reach more than half-way between the front of the

ovary and the end of the acetabulum.

Edwards published an excellent account of the female complex. The

receptaculum seminis is a conspicuous thin-walled structure appearing at first

sight to be spherical, but if it be followed down ventrally it will be seen that it

narrows only slightly to join the oviduct while its opposite side becomes some-

what pear-shaped to form eventually a very narrow ootype passing almost directly

ventrally through the relatively large “shell gland,” receiving the very narrow

vitclline duct before entering. The uterus widens suddenly into a tube lying below

the axis of the shell gland and then skirting the ovary or passing below it, travels

forwards in a few loops which lie close together when the uterus is full of eggs.

On reaching the posterior border of the acetabulum the tube hecomes only slightly

sinuous. The metraterm is well supplied with sphincter fibres. Laurer’s canal

arises {rom the receptaculum as a very narrow, rather thick-walled tube which,

after a very short course, terminates on the surface above the region of the shell

gland. The folded condition of the large vesicula seminalis is shown in Edwards’

figure. The extended cirrus measures “43 mm,

The short oviduct is very wide, and tapers tapidly before passing dorsally

to become the receptaculum, The latter commonly contains masses of sperms.

The transverse yolk duct skirts very closely the posterior edge of the shell gland.

The yolk reservoir is usually conspicuous.

The form of, and space occupied by, the uterus vary with the sexual condi-

tion of the worm. When immature, it is only slightly sinuous and is relatively

long (its course between the front of the ovary and the posterior edge of the

acetabulum cup extending for more than one-fifth of the body length in the type

specimen). It becomes more and more markedly coiled and folded when filled

with eggs, and its course, as indicated above, may occupy only 1:25-35 of the

body length, That part of it which lies below the ovary and shell gland has not

been taken into consideration in connection with these measurements. There is

thus a relative shortening of the postacetabular region occupied by the uterus, and

associated with this alteration are the forward extension of the vitellaria and an

increase in the length of the post-testicular zone,

S. J. Johnston reported that eggs measured -084 by -058 mm. ; Dietz -084--088

by :054--061; Edwards -08--1 by -05--064; Johnston and Angel ‘07--084 by

-058--063. The longest I have measured was ‘092 by -063.

Amongst the material studied were numerous immature stages. The smallest

obtained from cormorants were excysted metacercariae measuring only *28 mm.

long by *1 to -12 mm. in maximum width, with the almost hemispherical acetabu-

lum in the posterior third of the body. The size of the metacercarial stage was

not mentioned by Johnston and Angel (1942), but their figure indicates a long

narrow form, ‘32 mm. in length, ‘07 mm. wide at the acetabulum, the latter being

-03 mm. wide, °05 mm. long, and situated at mid-length.

236

The following measurements in millimetres of a series of specimens ranging

from metacercariae to worms which had not yet reached the ege-bearing stage

indicate the relative lengthening of the acetabulum, and the post-acetabular region

in relation to the increasing length of the parasite: (i) total length; (ii) breadth

at acetabulum ; (iii) length of acetabulum (i.¢., from front edge to posterior end

of base; (iv) breadth of acetabulum; (v) distance from front edge of acetabulum

to head end (tc., pre-acetabular Jength); (vi) distance from posterior end of

base of acctabulum to end of worm (7.c., post-acetabular length); (vii) approxi-

mate ratio of (v) to (vi); (viii) length from centre of aperture of acetabulum

to head end; (ix) length from centre of aperture of acetabulum to end of body;

(x) approximate ratio of (viii) to (ix).

i il iti iv Vv Vi vii viii 1x x

10. 28 +] “06 “06 16 “06 8:3 +19 “09 234

De 46 “13 12 “10 “19 ‘14 10:7 24 2S 1:1

3... +51 +17 “13 ‘ll “24 “13 2:1 °30 21 322

+... +58 “18 “15 “13 +26 “15 5:3 +32 25 4:3

5. “66 16 “14 +12 -20 “23 10:9 +32 33 i:l

Go... 87 +27 *25 -20 +32 “30 1:t “40 47 5:6

7... +88 +23 “15 “45 “31 +52 3:5 37 “51 3:4

So... 2:25 “42 +32 +28 +36 “57 3:8 45 “80 1:1-8

9. 1+30 — 33 a +33 -64 1:2

10 2... 1°32 — +35 — 44 “88 1:2 ~ — --

11 1-32 +3 +30 +27 +43 +57 3:4 54 “80 1:1-5

12... 1-80 “40 +38 32 -60 “80 3:4 68 1:12 1:1°7

13 1-08 — +42 —_ 55 1-43 1:26 ae _ —

i4 2-64 *35 “44 °55 “38 1:54 1:2-6

15. 2-69 “44 +55 +42 “62 1-54 £325 P — —

Wo 1. 2-91 +53 “55 +42 “55 1-76 1:3-2 -

17 3-44 +55 +58 “di “06 2-20 1:3°3

Paryphostomum radiatum is now known to occur in the following Australian

localities (including those now recorded) and species of cormorants: Phalacro-

corax melanoleucus—Brisbane and Longreach, Queensland; Tuggerah, New South

Wales; Gippsland, Victoria; Tailem Bend, South Australia; and Perth, Western

Australia. P. sulcirostris—Burnett River, Queensland; Glenelg River, Victoria;

Tailem Bend and Adelaide, South Australia; Perth, Western Australia. P. carbo

novac-hollandiae—Burnett River, Queensland; Bathurst, New South Wales:

Tatlem Bend and llope Valley. South Australia. P. fuscescens—Tailem Bend.

The only Australian species from which the trematode has not been obtained is

P. varius, a cormorant restricted to a coastal habitat. It appears probable that Pary-

phostomiin radiatum is a parasite associated with swamps and rivers rather than

marine environments.

Dietz (1910) recorded it from P. carbo from Central Europe, and Edwards

(1927) from the same species from Wales, Yamashita (1938, 1085) reported it

trom P. carbo hanedae from Japan. Yamaguti (1939, 143-4) gave a brief account

of specimens from the latter host species, as well as from P. capillatus, both

from Japan. Gogate’s Paryphostomuim testitrifolinm, stated to have been taken

trom a Burmese tree-duck, Dendrocygna javanica, agrees so closely with

P. radiatuin that it should be placed in synonymy.

DETASIGER EXAERETUS Dietz

This minute echinostome has been found in Phalacrocerar carbo from Tailem

Pend, South Australia, and from Bathurst, New South Wales; P. melanoleucus

and P, sulcirostris from Tailem Bend. S. J. Johnston’s type slide of Dolichosaccus

solecarius from P, melanoleucus from Tuggerah, New South Wales, contains a

specimen of Petasiger exacretus,

The dimensions and certain other features differ markedly from those given

by Dietz (1910) whose material came from P. carbo from Europe, but they agree

sufficiently closely with the measurements given by Davies (1934) for specimens

from P, carbo from Wales. The following account is based on specimens from

South Australia.

Length 1-2-1-3 mm., but up to 1-76 mm, in worms with very elongated pre-

acetabular region; maximum breadth (at the acetabulum) *J31--38 nmu.; width

of the head collar -23, and of the neck *17--18. In a worm 1-3 mm. long and

-34 mm. in breadth, the gonads were fully developed but no egg was present ; while

jn another of similar dimensions (1-2 mm, long by -35 mm, iu maximum width)

there were five eggs. The preacctabular region ot the body is covered by abund-

ance of scales. ‘he oral sucker is more or less circular, -04--06 mm, long by

-04--07 mm. wide; the acetabulum is almost circular in outline, *18--24 mm. wide

by *19--25 mm. long. The ratio of breadths of the two suckers is 1:3-3°5; and

of lengths 1:3-5, usually about 1:3, ‘he distance from the anterior border of the

acetabulum to the head end of the worm, 7.c., the preacctabular length, is approxi-

mately half the body length, the ventral sucker lying wholly in the posterior halt.

The postacetabular length (7.¢., measuring from the hinder border of the acetabu-

lum to the end of the worm) is about one-third of the total length. There are 27

spines including the two corner groups, cach with four, The larger pair of corner

spines are about 75-77 » long and the other pair about 60-70 », the width being

12-13 pn. The first lateral spine is the smallest and narrowest in the series; il

measures 35-40 » long and may overlap the corner spines. The remaining laterals

are 57-63 » long, the length increasing as they approach the dorsal surface. The

dorsal spines are arranged in two series, those of the anterior series being much

shorter (36-42 » long) and narrower (4 broad) than those of the second group

(45-55 p by 6-7°5), the shortest and thinnest in the groups being those nearest

the mid-dorsal region, All spines are rather pointed, especially the dorsal series.

‘The prepharynx is about -05 mm. long; the pharynx *076--08 mm. long by

-034--04 mm. wide; and the oesophagus *27--3 mm. long. The crura extend

almost to the end of the worm.

The testes are tandem, slightly clongate transversely. especially the anterior,

the posterior being usually rather narrower and longer than the other. The dimen-

sions are °19-'22 mm. broad by *1-°15 mm. long. The thin-walled cirrus sac lies

somewhat obliquely on one side in the region between the crura and the acetabu-

lum, and extends back above or beside the anterior third of the latter. It measures

about °14 by -05 mm. and its posterior half is occupied by the folded seminal

vesicle. The genital aperture is inunediately behind the intestinal bifurcation,

Davies has given a good account and figure of the female complex. The

vyaty is about ‘075 mm. in diameter and lics to one side of the midline. The

receptaculum is closely associated with the shell gland and is of about the same

size but rather less regular in shape. It lies between the ovary and shell gland,

and ig approximately in the median ling. The course of the uterus 1s sinular to

that described by Davies, as also is that of the yolk ducts and yolk reservoir. The

yolk follicles do not extend forwards much beyond the mid-level of the acetabulum.

They may invade the edges of the testicular field to a slight extent.. The arrange-

inent is the same as that given by Davies and unlike that described and figured by

Dietz. The uterus is very short, forming a loop in the vicinity of the ovary and

then travelling forwards, parallel with the cirrus sac. In some specimens the

thicker-walled vaginal portion is greatly dilated into a more or Jess spherical struc-

ture several times the size of the cirrus sac and filled with a darkly-staining secre-

238

tion. Eggs measure :055--09 by -055--067 mm. The maximum number seen in

the uterus was nine, but there were usually 1-5,

Petasiger exaeretus has been recorded by Dietz from Central Europe and by

Davies from Wales, in both cases from Phalacrocoraxy carbo. Yamashita (1938)

reported its presence in P. carbo hanedae in Japan. Its known range is now

extended to include south-eastern Australia,

HYSTEROMORPHA TRILOBA (Rud.)

Distoma trilobuin Rud. 1819.

Henustomum trilobuim Dies 1850; Lithe 1909; Krause 1914.

Proalaria triloba La Rue 1926; Ciurea 1930,

Diplostomum trilobum Hughes 1929; Ciurea 1933.

Hysteromorpha triloba Lutz 1931; Dubois 1938; Yamaguti 1939,

Diplostomum granulosum Goss 1940,

The only Australian record of this diplostome was that of Miss Goss (1940,

6-7) who described it as Diplostomum granulosum from Phalacrocorax ater trom

Perth, Western Australia. I have obtained it from P. carbo novac-hollandiac

from Tailem Bend, South Australia, and Bathurst, New South Wales; P. melane-

icucus trom Tailem Bend, and Glenelg River, Victoria; P. sulcirostris (ater) from

Tailem Bend; and P. fuscescens (Tailem Bend). A comparison of the accounts

and figures published by Krause (1914), Lutz (1931), and especially those by

Dubois (1938), Ciurea (1930) and Yamaguti (1939), with the Australian material

and with Miss Goss’ account, indicates that H. triloba is a very widely distributed

species, now being known from P. carbo from Austria and Roumania; P. pyg-

maeus from Roumania; P, auritus from Minnesota, U.S.A.; P. brasiliensis from

Brazil; P. carbo hanedae from Japan; and from the four Australian species men-

tioned above.

Eggs from my material measured -085-:093 mm. by -060--068, most of them

being *087--090 by -063-:065 mm. Yamaguti gave the dimensions as -092--105

by -06--069 ; Goss -086 by -085, but her figures indicate -07--08 by -07--50 mm. ;

Dubois *097--099 by -052--062 ; Citrrea -075--099 by -048--075 mm. Lutz (1931)

and Ciurea (1930; 1933) have published information relating to stages in the life

history of the species.

ECHINOPARYPUIUM PILALACROCORACIS Yamaguti

This small trematode was described recently by Yamaguti (1939, 142) from

the Japanese cormorants, P. carbo hanedae and P. capillatus, 1 have collected it

from P. carbo novae-hollandiae, P, sulcirostris and P. melanoleucus from Tailem

Bend, Very few specimens were present on the few occasions that the parasite

was obtained.

The narrow body measures 1-6-2°1 mm. by *29--22 mm. in maximum width

(at the acctabulum), The head is somewhat pointed, -15--17 mm, wide, not

sharply marked off from the neck which at the level of the pharynx measures

"16to-2mm. There is little variation in width from the region of the genital pore

to that of the posterior testis. The oral sucker is neatly spherical, measures

06-'08 mm. long by :06--07 mm. wide. The acetabulum is -17 mm, long by

"16 mm. wide and lies at the end of the first third and anterior part of the middle

third of the body length, The preacetabular length (measuring from the front

edge of the organ) is 1:2°6-2-7 of body length, and the postacetabular length

(measuring from the posterior edge of the base of the organ to the end of the

worm) 1:1°86-1-9 of body length. The sucker ratio is 1:2+3-2°6 for breadths

and 1:2:1-2-8 for lengths. The distance between the centres of the apertures of

the suckers is °64--77 nm., i.c., 1:2°5-2°6 of body length. The genital pore lies

239

about ‘07-14 mm. in front of the acetabulum and a short distance behind the

intestinal bifurcation. There are 27 collar spines, including the two end groups

each comprising four, The latter are 57-63 » long by 8-10» wide. The lateral

spines are much shorter but vary in length (36-42). The dorsal spines are

arranged in two distinct alternating series, those of the anterior row being 25-29 p

and those of the second row 36-38 » long.

The narrow prepharynx measures *075--09 mm. long; the pharynx ‘065-

07 mm. long by 05 mm. wide; and the narrow oesophagus *30--35 mm. long.

The caeca extend almost to the posterior end.

The two rounded testes are arranged tandem and are of approximately the

same size, *16-'18 mm. diameter, and lie in the posterior half of the body. The

cirrus sac is large, about °17-*2 mm. long by -11 mm. wide, somewhat obliquely

placed behind the intestinal bifurcation and extending back above the anterior half

of the acetabulum. Most of the sac is occupied by the voluminous vesicula

seminalis which forms a few short curves. The prostatic region is inconspicuous.

The ovary is ‘05--07 mm. in diameter and lies on one side of the median line

at approximately mid-length of the body. The receptaculum seminis is imme-

diately behind, and slightly inwardly from, the ovary, so that its position is approxi-

mately median. Laurer’s canal lies above it and the shell gland which is somewhat

ubliquely placed. The short uterus forms a few loops and contains very few eggs.

The latter measure -08--09 by -06--065. Vitellaria extend from the posterior end

of the worm almost to the mid-acetabular level, and encroach very little on the

testicular field though they oceupy most of the post-testicular region. The large

yolk reservoir lies adjacent to the front edge of the anterior testis.

Stictodora diplacantha un. sp.

(Fig, 6-8)

Many specimens of this small Heterophyid were obtained from cormorants,

Phalacrecorax varins, from Port Gawler, South Australia. Length. -8-1-14 mm.;

maximum breadth, -21-'29 mm.; the usual dimensions being *99-1-05 by -21-

-4imm. The longest worms are relatively the narrowest. [Extreme anterior end

narrowed; posterior broadly rounded. The breadth is fairly constant in the

anterior two-thirds of the body, being about +17 mm., widening from the level of

the genital atrium to reach the maximum in the region of the ovary and testes,

In some specimens there may be a constriction in the prepharyngeal region, and

also a slight waist in front of the atrium. The body is beset with delicate sharp

spines, these being especially abundant as far back as the level of the posterior

testis in some cases, of the ovary in others, while in others they do not reach the

region of the pharynx, The rest of the body bears extremely minute spines, the

surface being almost smooth.

The oral sucker is ventral, subterminal, -061--065 mm. long and, *538 mm.

wide. The prepharynx is relatively long, -145--153 mm, in length; pharynx

-044--046 mm, long by *029--031 wide; and the oesophagus -047--086 mm. im

length, The crura extend almost to the end of the worm and lie close to the

lateral border of the body in the post-atrial region. The distance irom the crural

bifurcation to the head end of the worm is 1:3-3'2 of the body length.

The genital atrium, together with the highly modified acetabulum, is a con-

spicuous structure in cleared specimens. It is often slightly oblique ; its measure-

ments are, length -065-:067 mm., breadth -092--1 mm. Its front edge is distant

from the head end 1:1-6-1-7 af the total body length, so that the whole organ lies

at the end of the middle third of the body. The acetabular portion contains two

well-defined gonotyls, not quite equal in size, one of them (that on the ovarian

side of the worm) being more ventrally placed than the other, These gonotyls

240

are similar in structure, each having about 18 strongly curved, sharply-pointed

hooks arranged in two series—a basal row of 12-15 (13-14) smaller hooks and a

group of five or six much larger central hooks, 17-21 » long. The specific name

is based on the double gonotyl with its prominent armature, ‘The actual atrium

has, when at rest, strongly folded walls and into it open the sex ducts, The genital

pore is not quite median, being displaced away from the ovarian side of the worm.

The testes are similar, -077--09 mm. in diameter, with an cntire margin, and

situated in the intercaecal region in the posterior third of the body. The anterior

testis 1s at about the same level as the ovary, but on the opposite side. The

posterior testis lies behind the ovary but is more medially situated. The thin-

walled vesicula seminalis is constricted into three spherical structures, each about

-05--08 mm. in diameter. The most posterior lies more or less median between

the ovary and the testes and is below the receptaculum seminis; the other two

are situated between it and the atrium. The third portion lics adjacent to, or

numediately above, the short thick-walled prostate region of the male duct, which

is 048 mm. long by 03 mm. wide and is succeeded by ‘the narrow male canal, about

“04 mm. long by ‘012 mm. wide. he latter enters the posterior or postero-lateral

region of the atrium,

The ovary is approximately spherical, -05--12 mm, in diameter, situated on

one side of the median line. and distant from the head end 1:1:4 of the body

length, t.¢., it lies in the posterior third of the worm, The oviduct arises from its

inner surface. The receptaculum seminis is relatively large, its diameter (+07-

‘1 mm) at times exceeding that of the ovary. It partly overlies the latter and may

also extend above part of the posterior testis and even reach the edge of the other

testis. Below it is part of the vesicula seminalis. The uterus occupics most of the

available space in the region behind the atrium and underlies the crural region (in

part), testes, receptaculum, vesicula and even part of the ovary. Its terminal

portion is more or less transversely placed in front of the gonads, becoming very

narrow as it passes forwards just below the male duct to enter the atrium. The

seattered vitelline follicles occupy a very thin zone dorsally and ventrally in the

post-testicular region and reach almost to the end of the worm. The two main

duets travel forwards and inwards, one of them lying close behind the posterior

testis, the two ducts joining to form the small yolk reservoir, about midway

hetween the two testes and situated behind the en aa uum, The common yolk

duct travels forwards to terminate below the latter. Eggs are very numerous,

"032-033 by *O15--017 mm. in size, with a slight narrowing towards the opereular

end, and sometimes a niuinute projection mar ks the edge of the operculuin.

A slide containing the type and several paratypes has been deposited in the

south Australian Museum. ‘The species resembles Stictodora japonica Yamaguti

(1939, 175) more closely than any other yet described, but differs from. the

laponcic parasite in body proportions, relative lengths of the oesophagus and pre-

pharynx, relative position of the testes, structure of the acctabular region and the

position of the latter in relation to the body length. Ciurea (1933, 108) placed

the genus in the Galactosominae.

AUSTRALIAN llosrs AND PARASITES RECORDED IN TITIS PAPER

ANHINGA NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE Gould

Clinostomum australiense S. J. Johnston, Burnett River, Old.

PHALACROCORAX CARBO NOVAF-HOLLANDIAE Stephens

Parvphostomum radiatian (Rud.), Burnett River, Qld.; Bathurst, N.S.W.;

Tailem Bend and Hope Valley, S. Aust.

Echinoparyvphium phalacracoracis Yamaguti, Tailem Bend. S. Aust.

Petasiger exacretus Dietz, Bathurst, N.S.W.; ‘Vailem Bend, S, Aust.

fiysteromorpha triloba (Rud.), Bathurst, N.S.AV.; Tailem Bend, S. Aust.

241

PIALACROCORAX MELANOLEUCUS Vieillot

Paryphostomum radiatum (Rud.), Brisbane and Longreach, Qld.;

Tug-

gerah, N.S.W.; Gippsland, Vict.; Tailem Bend, S. Aust.; Perth,

W. Aust.

Echinoparvphium phalacrocoracis Yam., Tailem Bend, S. Aust.

Petasiger exacretus Dietz, Tuggerah, N.5.W.; Tailem Bend, S. Aust.

Hysteromorpha triloba (Rud.), Glenelg River, Vict.;.Tailem Bend, S. Aust.

Dolichosacculus solecarius (S. J. Johnston), Tuggerah, N.S.W. 7

FP HALACROCORAX SULCIROSTRIS Brandt (syn. P. ater Lesson)

Paryphostomum radiatum (Rud.), Burnett River, Qld. ; Glenelg River, Vict. ;

Tailem Bend, Adelaide, S. Aust.; Perth, W. Aust.

Echinoparyphium phalacrocoracis Yam., Tailem Bend, 5. Aust.

Petasiger exaeretus Dietz, Tailem Bend, 5. Aust.

Hystcromorpha triloba (Rud.), Tailem Bend, 5. Aust. ; Perth, W. Aust.

PIPALACROCORAX VARIUS Gmel,

Stictodora diplacantha n.sp., Port Gawler, S. Aust.

PHALACROCORAX FUSCESCENS Vieillot (syn. P. gouldi Salv.)

Paryphostomunr radiatum (Rud.), Tailem Bend, 5S. Aust.

Hysteromorpha triloba (Rud.), Vailem Bend, 5. Aust.

Meceacris GALLopavo Linn. (Turkey)

Echinoparyphium recurvatuim (Linst.), Melbourne, Vict.

Crass, EE.

Ciurea, I.

Cort, W. W.

Davies, E.

Durors, G.

Dusois, G.

Dupzors, G.

Epwarps, E. I

GoGaTE, B. 5.

Goss, O. M. 1940 Jour.

Jounston, S. J. 1904

jJotunston, S. J. 1912

Jounston, S. J. 1913

Jounston, S. J. 1917

Jounston, T. H.

Jounston, T. H. 1916 Proc.

jJounston, T. H.

Jounston, T. H. 1928 Rec.

jJounston, T. H., and Ance, L. M.

Jotnston, T. H., and Ancen, L. M.

Jonson, T. f

Jounston, T. H

Lutz, A.

Menra, H. R.

1921

1930

1933

1913

1934

Jornston, T. H.,

1.,

LITERATURE

Proc, Linn. Soc, N.S.W., 45, (1920), 500-504

Arch, roumain, Path. exp. Microbiol., 3, 277-323

Arch. roumain. Path. exp. Microbiol., 6, 151-170

Cretanp, J. B. 1922 Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 26, 85-118

Parasitol., 26, 133-137

Dietz, E. 1910 Zool. Jahrb. Syst., Suppl. 12, (3), 265-512

1927 Parasitol., 19, 245-249

1934 Rec. Ind. Mus., 36, 139-144

Trans. Amer. Micr. Soc., 32, 169-182

1937a Rev. Suisse Zool., Geneva, 44, 391-396

1937b Ann, Parasitol, 15, 231-247, 333-353

1938 Monogr. Strigeides, Mem. Soc. Neuchatel Sci. Nat., 6, 1-535

Roy. Soc. W. Aust., 26, (1939-40), 1-14

Pr. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 29, 108-116

Pr. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 37, 285-362

Q. |. Mier. Sci., 59, 361-400

Jour, Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 50, (1916), 187-261

1910 Jour, Roy. Soc. N.S.W.. 44, 84-122

1912 Emu, Melb., Vict., 12, 105-112

Roy. Soc. Qld., 28, 31-79

1918 Proc. Roy. Soc. Qld., 30, 209-218

and ANGEL, L.

1931

and Anatr, I. M.

., & Simpson, E.R.

Jounston, T. H., & Stimpson, E.R.

1931 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz., 25, 333-342, 343-3

Parasitol. 23, 157-178

1942

S, Aust. Mus., 4, 135-142

1941a Trans. Roy.

1941b Trans. Roy.

1941c Trans. Roy.

Trans. Roy.

1940a Trans. Roy.

1940b Trans. Roy.

Soc.

Soc,

Soc.

Soc

. Aust., 65, 140-144

. Aust., 65, 285-291

. Aust., 65, 317-322

. Aust., 66, 119-123

. Aust., 64, 119-124

e Aust., 64, 273-278

242

Meura, H. R. 1937 Z. £. Parasitenk., 9, 429-468

Nricott, W. 1914a Parasitol., 6, 333-350

NIcotL, W. 1914b Parasitol., 7, 105-126

Perkins, M. 1928 Parasitol., 20, 336-356

Rozerts, F. H. S. 1934 Worm Parasites of Domesticated Animals in Queens-

land. Pamphlet 2, Animal Health Station, Yeerongpilly. Dept. Agr.

Stock, Qld. 8 pp.

Roperts, F, H. S. 1934 Parasites of Poultry, Advis. Leaflet 6, Animal

Health Station. Yeerongpilly. Dept. Agr. Stodk, Qld. 24 pp.

Travassos, L. 1930 Mem. Inst. Osw. Cruz., 24, 1-17

YaMacuti, S. 1933 Jap. Jour. Zool., 5, (1), 1134

YAmacuti, S. 1939 Jap. Jour. Zool., 8, (2), 129-211

YAmAsHITA, J, 1938 Botany and Zool., Tokyo, 6, 1085-1086

Younc, M. R, 1939 Helminth Parasites of Australia. Imp. Bur, Agr. Parasit.

(Helminthology), 145 pp.

A NEW MELOMYS FROM QUEENSLAND

WITH NOTICE OF TWO OTHER QUEENSLAND RATS

By H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

Of the three rats from central coastal Queensland dealt with herein, two belong to species which,

though known, have not been figured. An opportunity is taken, therefore, of making good that

deficiency so far as the material permits and of amplifying the description of one of them. The third

proves to be an undescribed form which may be known as

243

A NEW MELOMYS FROM QUEENSLAND

WITH NOTICE OF TWO OTHER QUEENSLAND RATS

By H. H. Finiayson

[Read 8 October 1942]

Piares VII anp IX

Of the three rats from central coastal Queensland dealt with herein, two

belong to species which, though known, have not been figured. An oppor-

tunity is taken, therefore, of making good that deficiency so far as the material

permits and of amplifying the description of one of them. The third proves to

be an undescribed form which may be known as

Melomys callopes sp. nov.

A small species with very long tail and ear. Nearest to Lonnberg’s littoralis

located 500 miles further north, but differing in its more sombre trizoned colour ;

in a greyish-white instead of buffy belly; in a more complex pelage with multi-

banded fur; and in the larger skull with longer anterior palatine foramina.

The following description is based upon a single specimen, originally in

alcohol; an adult female taken about 30 miles south-west of Duaringa in

the Rockhampton district. The animal was pregnant with two early embryos in

the right horn of the uterus only; stomach contents—granular multi-coloured

vegetable matter without identifiable fragments.

External Characters.

Form moderate, limbs rather stout. Ilead broad with a comparatively short

blunt muzzle; well developed though sloping upper lip and prominent mentum.

Mysticial vibrissae profuse but attenuated; the longest 43 mm.; black with the

extreme tip white. Eye small. Ear large and broad; its substance white at the

base of conch and most of the pinna dark lead colour.

Manus large and stout; length from base of carpal pad to tip of apical pad

11 mm.; breadth at base of digits 2-5, 5 mm.; length of third digit, 4-5 mm.;

lower side of digits naked and strongly ridged, claws short reaching but slightly

beyond apical pads in a palmar view. Pads large and prominent; carpals sub-

equal; the outer descending below the inner but beginning at a lower level proxi-

mally ; first and second interdigitals broadly pyriform; third bell-shaped and with

a distinct postero-external satellite. Outer carpal == inner carpal > first inter-

digital > third > second.

Pes very broad interdigitally, but tapering rapidly and evenly to the heel

where there is considerable lateral infringement of hair; length, 25 mm.; breadth

at base of digits 1-5, 6 mm.; third digit, 6 mm, Digits and sole quite naked ;

former well grooved, claws projecting well beyond apical pads. Plantar pads very

large, high, and prominent; beautifully sculptured with unusually broad and crisp

outlines. Inner metatarsal much elongated, 4:5 mm., but nearly straight and its

surface weakly striate transversely. Outer metatarsal small, round. First inter-

digital large reniform and with a small semi-detached satellite postero-externally ;

second and third pyriform and subequal; fourth reniform with its posterior

extremity tapered and a distinct postero-external satellite, Inner metatarsal

> first interdigital = fourth > second = third > outer metatarsal.

Tail long, very slender and nearly nude with the scales everywhere prominent ;

mid-dorsally there are 15 scales per centimeter and three hairs per scale.

Trans. Roy. Soc, $.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

244

Mammae prominent; posterior 4 mm. from base of clitoris; anterior 6°5 mm.

from posterior.

Pelage

Tron a skin made up from alcohol after a few weeks’ immersion only

and with the colouration apparently unchanged, short, fine and moderately

soft; dense and diffieult to part. Mid-dorsal length of the main pile ca. 8 mm, with

a sparse overlay of a longer pile reaching 11 mm. The main pile is not homo-

geneous but consists of two types of hairs; type one, which are stouter, are

blackish plumbeous for the basal quarter of the shaft, followed by a band of

Ridgway’s clay colour, topped by an attenuated blackish tip; type two, which arc

more slender and slightly longer, are blackish plumbeous for their basal ihree-

quarters, followed by a greyish-white (Tilleul Buff) terminal band which is

carried above the clay zone of the first type and mingles with the blackish points

of the latter. The sequence of colour zones from the base up 1s therefore

plumbeous, clay, blackish, greyish-white and again blackish, the latter being con-

tributed by the tips of type one and by the blackish “guard” hairs, which, however,

are scarcely coarser than the former and which are white-tipped on the rump.

The resulting external mid-dorsal colour viewed at a little distance is a sombre

greyish-brown, near Ridgway’s Mununy Brown, with a slight ashy grizzling. On

the shoulders and rump the colour is colder (about Mouse Grey), the belt of

warmer colour separating these areas, extending as a distinct saddle-shaped

marking down to the edges of the belly.

Sides clearer and more buffy, forming at the junction with the belly a sharply

contrasted lateral band of Ochraceous Buff extending from the angle of jaw to

femoral area.

Ventrum basally, a paler grey than on the dorsum, externally nearly white, but

the basal grey everywhere emergent except for a large gular and smaller inguinal

area which are creamy white to base. Ilead like the midback. Upper lip whitish;

cheeks buffy like the transition areas of the sides, Lars internally nearly nude

with a sprinkling of brownish hairs; externally well haired and almost black with

a sprinkling of silver-grey on the posterior margin; the ear as a whole much darker

than and well contrasted with the head and back. Limbs externally like the sides,

internally grey-white like the belly; dorsum of carpus and manus sparsely haired

white, an indistinct greyish marking extending down the outer margin of the meta-

carpus ; dorsum of pes white, faintly tinged with grey and without markings.

Integuinent of tail about Fuscous of Ridgway above, paler beneath; hairs

blackish-brown above and darker than scales; below greyish-brown and paler than

the scales. The tail as a whole is darker above than below, but is not strongly

bicolor.

Skull

General form broad and stout, but not with dense ossification. Muzzle

region short, broad and deep. Nasals tapering strongly but evenly to the frontals,

their lateral margins straight or nearly so; the naso-frontal suture narrow but not

pointed and with emargination in midline, Anterior root of zygoma thrown

boldly outwards almost at a right angle to the long axis of the skull; general

zygomatic outline squarish but with the angles softened; the anterior zygomatic

width almost equal to the posterior. Anteorbital fossa feebly developed. Inter-

orbital region broad and with smoothly rounded edges. Lacrymals small, Brain-

case large, moderately elongated in shape, smooth and unridged, with a long inter-

parietal suture. Interparietal long, narrow, spanning the braincase. In side view

the skull is unusually deep from above downwards throughout its length,

especially in the muzzle region. Free edge of zygomatic plate nearly vertical;

245

slightly convex at upper end, very slightly concave at lower. Anterior palatine

foramina longer than in other species of similar size, reaching beyond the anterior

margin of M!. Posterior margin of palate with a well-developed spur. Meso-

pterygoid fossa very wide anteriorly. Parapterygoid fossa deep and with well-

defined boundaries. Bullae small.

Incisors and incisive angle moderate; molar rows parallel; the molar crowns

simple without supplementary cingular cusps and with the laminae normally

arched and discrete, Lower molars with distinct supplementary posterior cusps.

Coronoid process of mandible reduced.

Flesh dimensions (in aleohol)—Ilead and body, 120; tail, 144; pes, 25;

ear, 18.

Skull Dimensions—Greatest length, 31:5; basal length, 26°6; zygomatic

breadth, 15:5; braincase breadth, 14-4; interorbital breadth, 4°7; nasals length,

11:0; nasals greatest breadth, 3:7; palatal length, 16°8; palatilar length, 14-4;

ant. pal. foramina length, 6°1, ibid breadth, 2:1; bullae, 4-7; upper molar series,

6-0: molar wear moderate on all laminae.

Type and Habitat as given above.

Structural figures of the nine Australian species of Melomys previously

described are lacking, and existing descriptions alone are frequently inadequate

for a proper conception of relationship. Although the present form is closest to

littoralis, it clearly cannot be merged with that species as described. It

may be noted that the habitat, 80 miles from the sea and in an area of

comparatively dry and temperate climate, is less coastal than that of the small,

more northerly, tropical forms. As the type is in good preservation, an extended

description and figures of manus, pes, skull and molars are provided.

Pseubomys (LEGGADINA) PArgius Thomas and Dollman 1908

A specimen of this comparatively rare form is available from Cooti Uti,

about 100 miles north of Rockhampton, where it was collected on the sea coast by

Mr. R. Vallis. The locality is about midway between that of the type and the

southerly record near Gladstone given by Troughton in 1936.

In dimensions and all structural characters which can be tested it is in good

agreement with the type, but the colouration of the skin made up from alcohol 1s

richer—the dorsum being near Ridgway’s Hazel and therefore much brighter than

the pale Wood Brown of the original description. How much of this difference

is due to alteration in the alcohol it is now impossible to say, but it is noteworthy

that the collector spoke of it when taken as a “red-sided mouse.” The distribu-

tion of colour on appendages and body is exactly as in type,

The specimen was, unfortunately, not sexed before skinning and was too

shrunk for an accurate account of its plastic parts to be drawn up. The skull,

however, adult with worn molars, is nearly perfect and gives the following dimen-

sions: greatest length, 22-8; zygomatic breadth, 11-4; braincase breadth, 11:1;

interorbital breadth, 3°5; nasals greatest length, 8-2; ditto greatest breadth, 2:1;

palatal length, 12-0; palatilar length, 10-6; ant. pal. foramina length, 4°3; ditto

breadth, 1°5; bulla, 4:0; upper molar series, 4-1.

In dorsal aspect it is very close to the skulls of hermannsburgensis, falling

between the two phases figured by me (Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65, pl. xi, fig.

A-B (1941), but differs in the nasals which are longer and narrower and taper

more rapidly. In palatal aspect, too, the mesopterygoid fossa is wider and more

open throughout its length and the bullae are smaller in all dimensions, In the

dentition the incisors are broader from side to side though of equal depth and

by Tate: Bull, American Mus. Nat .Hist., 72, 594 (1936).

246

angle. The molar row is longer and all its members heavier than in the Central

animal, The anterior cingular cusp on M! is small but distinct and is more apical

than in any hermannburgensis skull reviewed (loc. cit.),

Rattus CuLMorUM ¢f, cULMOoRUM Thomas 1908

A well preserved example of this rat is in hand from the same locality as the

Melomys species described above. It is an adult male with worn molars and is in

moderately close agreement (in the characters conventionally defined) with the

typical race as given by Thomas, though in one or two items it shows an approach

to the New South Wales race vallesius. The above-mentioned locality is 300 miles

south of that of the typical race and about 600 miles north of that of vallesius.

External Characters |

Stout, short-limbed, medium-tailed. Head large and heavy; both deep and wide

and with a short muzzle. Mysticial vibrissae well developed, to 45 mm., the shorter

members black with white tip, but the longest entirely white. Eye medium. Ears

comparatively short and broad; the conch and central pinna nearly white in sub-

stance; margins and upper pinna pigmented to a pale slate only; hairing medium.

Manus—W eak and narrow ; length from base of lower carpal to apical pad of

mid digit, 11-5 mm.; breadth at base of digits 2-5, 4-5 mm.; middle digit, 4-5 mm

Palm and digits quite nude and pale yellowish-white throughout: nails of medium

length, stout and blunt; well fringed. Pads small but well raised and with sharp

outlines, Carpals much larger than interdigitals; the outer rather larger, both in

length and area, than the inner but the disproportion slight; base of the inner

carpal profusely haired from the carpus. Interdigitals subequal in area, one and

three bell-shaped or irregularly oval, two broadly oval; thrce with a small semi-

detached satellite at its postero-external corner. Outer carpal > inner carpal >

first interdigital = second == third.

Pes — Length, 27 mm.; breadth at base of digits, 1-5, 6 mm.; third digit,

5:5 mm. Sole and digits pale like manus; under-surface of toes and sole nude;

the former moderately grooved and the latter very smooth; nails well developed,

and moderately fringed. Pads small and weaky except the inner metatarsal which

is long (4 mm.), straight and narrow, club-shaped and tapering posteriorly ; outer

metatarsal very sinall, oval and barely 1 mm, posterior to the fourth interdigital ;

first tnterdigital roughly inverted bell shape and with a large low level heel of

similar shape postero-external to it; second interdigital pyriform; third very

different from second, broader, almost triangular or heart-shaped; fourth beil-

shaped and larger than ihe first and with a smaller, more distinct heel. In area

inner metatarsal > second interdigital = third = fourth > first > outer meta-

tarsal.

Tail shorter than head and body (88% )and rather slender; pale in substance

and with the scales showing strongly on all surfaces; mid-dorsally 10 scales per

cm.; hairing sparse; pale brown above, lighter below, but not strongly bicolor.

Testes large and scrotal; scrotum pigmented on posterior lobes only.

Pelage

Apparently longer (15 mm. mid-dorsally) and perhaps denser and softer than

in the typical race, but the colouration quite as given by Thomas.

Flesh Dimensions (in alcohol)

Head and body, 147; tail, 123; pes, 27; ear, 18; rhinarium to eye, 18; eve

to ear, 13,

The Skull

Greatest length, 36°0; basal length, 33; zygomatic breadth, 20-1; braincase

breadth, 15-9; interorbital breadth, 5:0; nasals length, 12°9; nasals breadth, 3:5;

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate VIIL

> E F

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate IX

any 7; a + Be G

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

247

palatal length, 19-5; ant. pal, foramina length 7°6; ditto breadth, 2°1; bulla, 8-8;

upper molar series (crowns), 7°0.

Impressed by the striking agreements, both structural and metrical, existing

between the above culmorim skull and that of the animal obtained by the Horn

Expedition in Central Australia, described by Waite as Rattus greyi and later re-

named Rattus tunnevi dispar by Brazenor, | have been led to re-examine two of

the skulls upon which Waite based his account. These show appreciable dis-

crepancies with his figure which tend to obscure the likeness to cudmorum, In par-

ticular, the heading of the temporal ridges in their posterior course is much

exaggerated, the interorbital region is too wide and the bullae much too globular.

The molars, however, represent accurately the condition in the younger of the

two skulls (spec. B) and indicate a complete absence of the several supplementary

cusps described for the typical fuuneyi by Thomas; they are also absent from

Brazenor’s figures of dispar. Waite’s molar dimension is evidently taken from

the root at alveolar level, which considerably exceeds the crown measurement.

Careful re-measurement of the two skulls, specimen B a sub-adult male with

unworn molars, and the much older female from Vennant’s Creek obtained after

the Horn Expedition, gives the following values respectively:

Greatest length 34-2, 37 ca.; basal length 30-6, —; zygomatic breadth (pos-

terior) 19-0, 20°5; braincase breadth 15-0, 15-9; palatal length 18°5, 19-7; ant.

palatine foramina 7-9 > 1°7,7°7 X 2-1; bullae 7-8, —; upper molar row 6°75, 6°6,

1 am unable to check external characters with matcrial, but Waite’s dimen-

sions (which exceed Brazenor’s type considerably) show no great disparity with

culmorum varieties, and the pelage characters of the presence of spines and white-

based belly fur appear to be the only remaining distinction from that group of rats.

On the whole, there seems as much propriety in treating dispar as a race of

culmorum as of tunneyi, and the point is not without interest in its bearing on the

derivation of the Central fauna.

The assistance of three correspondents, Mrs. Charles Barnard, Mr. A.

Dettrick and Mr. R. Vallis, in forwarding specimens is gratefully acknowledged.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

Piate VIIT

A, B, C: Dorsal, palatal, and lateral views of skull of adult 9 of Melomys callopes sp. nov.

from Duaringa district, Queensland. (x 2-2 ca.)

D, FE, F: Dorsal, palatal, and lateral views of skull of an adult unsexed example of

Psendomys (Leggadine) patrins Thomas and Dollman from Cooti Uti, 100 miles

north of Rockhampton, Queensland. (x 3-2 ca.)

Piare TX

A, B, C.: Dorsal, palatal and lateral views of skull of an adult g of Rattus culmorum ci,

culmorum Thomas from Duaringa district, Queensland. (x 1-9 ca.)

D, E: Right pes and manus of same. (x 2-5 and 3-0 respectively.)

F, G: Right pes and manus of Melomys callopes sp.nov. (x 2-8 and 3-3 ca. respectively.)

H.: Right upper molars of Pseudomys (Leggadina) patrins Thomas and Dollman. (x 9 ca.)

1; Right upper molars of Melomys callopes sp.nov. (x 5-6 ca.)

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA NO. 41

By J. M. BLACK, A.LS.

Summary

The following species are described in English in the revised Part 1 of the author's "Flora of South

Australia."

248

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

No. 41

By J. M. Bracx, A.L.S.

[Presented 8 October 1942]

The following species are described in English in the revised Part 1 of the

author’s “Flora of South Australia.”

GRAMINEAE

Poa humifusa, nov. sp. Glabra, perennis, longe stolonifera; folia conferta;

laminae setaceae, flaccidae, saepe curvatae, 2-8 cm. longae, vaginis arctis multo

longiores; ligula ovata, brevissima, glabra; crista foliorum cum caule capillari

longiore ex quoque nodo stolonum gracilium orta; panicula parva terminalis,

1-14 cm. longa, ramis duobus brevibus, utrisque 1-3 spiculas gerentibus; spiculae

3-4 florae, 3-4 mm. longae; prima gluma 2 mm. longa, subtrinervis, secunda 24 mm.

longa, 3-nervis; glumae floriferae obtusae, fere 3 mm. longae, 5-nerves, demum

divergentes, dorso et nervis exterioribus lanatae; palea carinis ciliata, glumae

floriferae aequilonga,

Scrub at Keith and near Mount Gambier, Nov. 1917, J. Af. B.

Poa halmaturina, nov. sp. Perennis, parva, rigida, glabra, rhizomate

repente; folia pleraque in cristibus basilaribus; laminae filiformes, fere pungentes,

curvatae, 2-3 cm. longae, vaginis laxiusculis longiores; ligula minuta, truncata;

caules erecti, filiformes, 5-10 cm. longi; panicula spiciformis, 1-3 cm. longa,

ramis 1-3, erectis, alternis, 1-3-spiculatis; speculae subsessiles, 2-3-florae, 4-5 mm.

longae; glumae florifcrae subacutae, 34 mm. longae, 5-nerves, parte inferiore et

basi lanatae; palea aequilonga, nervis ciliata.

Rocky River, Kangaroo Island, “In burnt consolidated dunes,” Dec. 1940,

J.B, Cleland (on Late Society Expedition).

LILIACEAE

Lomandra densiflora, nov. sp. Tolia rigida, canaliculata vel planiuscula,

20-40 cm. longa, 14-6 mm. lata, vaginis in capillamenta brunnea fissis; flores

masculi patentes, plerique singuli sed in ramis erectis paniculae brevissimae

(3-4 cm. longae) dense conglomerati; paniculae rhachis ramique angulares,

omnino laeves; caulis perbrevis, latiusculus, plus minusve planus, quasi inter

vaginas obtectus; perianthitm tenue, segmentis liberis patentibus, exterioribus

lineari-lanceolatis, acuminatis, subhyalinis, 3 mm. longis, segmentis interioribus

fere ovatis, 25 mm. Jongis, viridibus; antherae albae; ovarii rudimentum adest ;

bractea linearis hyalina, pediccllum circa 1 mm. longum aequans; flores feminel

singuli scd approximati, patentes vel nutantes, in paniculam angustam 2-3 cm.

longam dispositi, pedicello 2-4 mm. longo, cum bractea lineari hyalina duplo

longiore; perianthium campanulatum, basi umbilicatum, 4 mm. longum, segmentis

erectis, acutis, subrigidis, apice patentibus; capsula fere matura ovoidea, 6 mm.

longa.

Mount Lofty Range and southern districts. Spring and summer. J. B.

Cleland and others.

Lomandra fibrata, nov. sp. Folio filiformia, debilia, 20-50 cm. longa,

4-1 mm. lata, minute scabra, vaginis in capillamenta numerosa fissis ; flores masculi

erecti, subsessiles vel brevissime pedicellati, in paniculam spiciformem, pauci-

floram, 2-3 cm. longam dispositi, ramis basilaribus brevibus unifloris; rhachis

Trans. Roy. Soc. §.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

249

laevis; caulis inter vaginas obtectus; bractea linearis hyalina florem subaequans;

perianthium 3-34 mm. longum, viride, segmentis liberis, exterioribus acuminatis

apice incurvis, interioribus paulo brevioribus, ovatis, flavis; flores feminei sub-

sessiles, erecti, campanulati; spica pauciflora, 2-24 cm. longa, interdum cum paucis

ramis basilaribus 1-2 floris; perianthium femineum 3-4 mm. longum, segmentis

omnibus acutis; capsula matura nondum visa.

Mount Lofty Range; Mount Remarkable. Nov. J. B. Cleland.

Near L. sororia, F. vy. M., but the latter has a longer, more branched panicle

and the outer segments of the flower are shorter than the inner and without the

long tips of L. fibrata,

Both these species have (like L. caespitosa Benth., Ewart) very short

spikes, racemes or panicles, sometimes almost concealed among the dense erect

bases of the leaves. The long very slender leaves of L. fibrata, distinctly scabrous

to the touch although the marginal hairs are minute, are characteristic of that

species. The thin crowded flowers, spreading horizontally, in the male panicle of

L. densiflora, and the angular rhachis and rather broad flattish stem below the

panicle, distinguish that species from its associates.

PoLYGONACEAE

In October 1941 the Pink Dock (Rumes roseus, L.) was found to have estab-

lished itself near Blinman, in the Flinders Range, during the previous two or three

years, In September 1942 it was reported to have extended its range and to be

occupying a considerable area, Like those other adventives, Salvation Jane

(Echium plantagineum) and Soursob (O-ralis cernua), it is a handsome feature in

the landscape, but it has the additional advantage of being nutritious, Experience

has shown that sheep like the succulent foliage, and the residents regard it as a

useful immigrant. Pink Dock has been cultivated, to a moderate extent, in

gardens near Adelaide, where its ripe fruits have a handsome aspect in mass.

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA NO. 3

By T. HARVEY JOHNSTON and EFFIE W. BEST, University of Adelaide

Summary

The present paper deals with species of Corynosoma obtained from bird and mammalian hosts from

South Australian waters. Types of the new species, as well as representatives of the others referred

to in this report, have been deposited in the South Australian Museum. We desire to acknowledge

our indebtedness to the Director of the latter institution for material from Delphinus delphis; and

also to the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide for financial assistance.

250

AUSTRALIAN ACANTHOCEPHALA

No. 3

By T. Harvey Jonnsron and Errir W, Best, University of Adelaide

[Presented 8 October 1942]

The present paper deals with species of Corynosoma obtained from bird and

mammalian hosts from South Australian waters. Types of the new species, as

well as representatives of the others referred to in this report, have been deposited

in the South Australian Museum. We desire to acknowledge our indebtedness

to the Director of the latter institution for material from Delphinus delphis; and

also to the Commonwealth Research Grant to the University of Adelaide for

financial assistance.

PITALACROCORAX vARIUS Gmelin—Corvnosoma clavatunt Goss.

DELPHINUS DELPIISs Linn.—Corynosoma cetaceum n. sp.

Turstorps truncatus Montague—Corynosoma celaceum n. sp,

NEOPHOCA CINEREA (Péron), syn. Arctocephalus forsteri of Johnston 1937—

Corvnosoma australe Johnston,

GYPSOPHOCA DORIFERA (Wood Jones)—Coryvnosoma clavatum Goss.

Corynesoma cetaceum n. sp.

(Fig. 1-10, 13)

The material examined came from two collections from dolphins—Delphinus

delphis (type host) from St. Vincent Gulf, and Tursitops trimcatus from Port

Lincoln. The parasites from the former host were rather larger and much more

numerous than those from the latter but the arrangement of the body spines and

proboscis hooks was similar, as also was the general anatomy. The copulatory

bursa was fully everted in most of the males from Delphinus.

The length ranged from 3 to 7 mm. in males (exclusive of the bursa), and

1-7 to 3 mm. in females, the greater number of specimens approaching the upper

limit of the range in both sexes. The comparative shortness and stoutness of the

female allowed ready differentiation of the sexes. The anterior disc-like region

varied from 1°3 to 1-7 mm. in diameter in males, and from 1:3 to 2 mm. in

females, and is covered with conspictious spines, ‘05 mm. long, surrounded by

very obvious protuberances of the cuticle, Similar spines extend towards the

posterior end of the body in both sexes, but they do not surround the genital

aperture,

The proboscis and its hook arrangement closcly resemble those of

C. antarcticum, except that the former tapers evenly from the base to its tip

(fig. 1,3). Ina typical specimen the organ measures -97 mui. long, +33 nim, wide

at the base, and *17 mm. at the tip. There is a short neck, -2 mm. in length,

-45 mm. in width, and devoid of spines. The portion of the body immediately

following the neck sometimes projects from the dise as a cone, which like the disc,

bears spines. The proboscis hooks are arranged in 18 longitudinal rows of 14-16

hooks, whose form in profile is shown in fig. 3.

The proboscis sheath is double-walled and measures 1-3 by +3 mm., the ganglion

lying at about its midlength. ‘The body cavity, particularly in the disc is, as usual

in the genus, crossed by very numerous strands of muscle within which the small

irregular leaf-life lemnisci are enclosed. The lacunae of the body wall are very

inconspicuous, and longitudinal vessels are hardly to be distinguished from the

general network.

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

)

Fig. 1-8, Corynosoma cetacenm: 1, proboscis; 2, male; 3, proboscis hooks in

profile; 4, malformed hook often seen in any position along the rows; 5-6, body

spines; 7, lacunar system; 8, female system. Fig. 3-6 are drawn to the same

magnification.

ab, auricle of bursa; b, bursa: br, bursal ray; cg, cement gland; cr, cement reservoir ;

g, ganglion; gc, gland cell: gl, genital ligament; 1, lemniscus; mb, markbeutel ;

r, retinaculum; rp, retractor of proboscis; t, testis; vd, vas deferens; vs, vesicula

seminalis; vs 1, vs 2, vaginal sphincters.

252

Male—The testes lie side by side, almost at the same level, just behind the

proboscis sheath, The vasa deferentia unite at about the anterior end of the

“markbeutel,” the common duct being swollen at its base to form a thin-walled

vesicula seminalis. The ducts of the six compact cement glands unite, three on

each side, to form lateral ducts which are swollen at their bases and join to form

the U-shaped cement reservoir, The everted bursa is particularly large and robust,

approximately 1 mm. in length and in breadth. with eighteen sensory rays. The

posterior fifth of the body is completely devoid of spines.

Female—The uterus proper is about 1 mm. long and :-25 mm. in maximum

width, he uterine bell is borne at an angle to it and is ‘5 mm. long, with very

marked projections bearing the lateral apertures. The anterior half of the uterus

is thin-walled and swollen, and is succeeded by a narrower muscular portion. Both

vaginal sphincters are well developed. The eggs are thick-shelled, with obvious

polar prolongations of the inner shell. Those within the swollen portion of the

uterus appeared to be all about the same size, -13 by -045 mm. The ventral body

spines reach the level of, but do not actually surround, the genital aperture.

The generic concept of Coryvunosoma |.tihe 1904 has been so modified that

Van Cleave (1936) has stated that “spines around the genital orifice, at least in

the males, is the only single criterion available for recognising the genus,” Never-

theless, the species here described combines so many of the features of the original

concept that the lack of spines around the sex aperture cannot exclude it from

Corynosoma, It would seem that the peculiar expanded and flattened form of

the lemnisci may assume importance as a diagnostic feature. The strong muscu-

lature of the disc obscures their form in whole mounts, and they can be seen

clearly often only on dissection; consequently, the term band-like which is some-

times applied to them is probably a misinterpretation, based on a side view.

The species differs from the closely allied C. antarcticum from Antarctic

seals in several respects. The body spines of the latter, as secn in specimens

available for comparison, are much Iess conspicuous, and though of approximately

similar size, are more deeply embedded in the subcuticula and extend in both

sexes to surround the genital aperture, There are also differences in the detailed

anatomy and proportions of both male and female organs. The presence of

eighteen longitudinal rows of proboscis hooks occurs commonly in the gents.

The forms of the proboscis and the arrangement of its hooks resemble those of

both C. antarcticum and C. australe, but the latter is a much smaller parasite, The

posterior ends of males of the three species are illustrated in fig. 11-13 for com-

parison. The arrangement of the spies surrounding the genital opening is quite

distinctive.

Corynosoma sp. has been recorded from Delphinus longirostris from Japanese

waters by Yamaguti (1935), but the size and proportions are different from those

of C. cefaceum, being 14 mm. in length and 1 mm. in width of the dise in the

former, as against 3 mm. by 2 mm. in the Australian species. The material

described from Delphinus delphis is that recorded by us as Carynosoia sp.

(Johnston and Deland, 1929).

CORYNOSOMA CLAVATUM Goss

(Fig. 14-19)

The species was described by Miss Goss (1940) from material collected from

three species of cormorants from Western Australia. We have a single male

specimen from Phalacrocorax varius from Port Gawler. It is not in a very satis-

factory condition for comparison, but the host relationship, size, and form of the

proboscis and its hooks have led us to identify it as C, clavatum,

253

Fig. 9, 10, 13, Corynosoma cetaceum: 9, female; 10, egg; 13, posterior end of

male. Fig. 11, C. australe, posterior end of male. Fig. 12, C. antarcticum, from

Weddell seal. Fig. 14-19, C. clavatum, from seal: 14, male; 15, spines from

disc; 16, ventral body spines; 17, disc spines; 18, posterior end of male; 19, hooks

in profile. Fig. 10, 15-19 are drawn to the same magnification. Lettering as in

preceding figures.

La}

Three males, regarded as belonging to the same species, were collected from

a seal. Gypsophoca dorifera, which had been captured off Yorke Peninsula and

had died after having been some tinie in captivity. The only important respect

in which the specimens differ from the account given by Miss Goss, is in the

presence of distinct spines about the genital aperture. The sizes of the various

organs, except the cement glands, are comparable. The small size of the cement

glands in our material may indicate immaturity. Miss Goss referred to the parasite

(1940, 1) as Polvimorphus clavatus, as well as C. clavatwin. Figures showing the

distribution of the body spines, as well as certain anatomical features, exhibited

by material from the seal, are now given, and in addition, details of the hooks

and spines (fig, 14-19), since these are not shown in the original account.

C. phalacrecoracis Yamaguti (1939, 337) from Phalacrocoray pelagicus from

Japan is a very much larger form.

CORYNOSOMA AUSTRALE Johnston

(Fig. 11)

This species was described from the South Australian hair seal which was

incorrectly identified as Arctocephalus forsteri, The latter name is now restricted

to a species occurring in New Zealand. our local seal being known as Neophoca

cimerea, under which name the parasite should be listed. | Re-examina-

tron of the material from Pearson Island has revealed some errors in the original

account, ‘he scale beside fig. 8 is marked to indicate 2 mm., but should be 1 mm..

the testes are recorded as ‘04 mn. instead of 0-4 mm., and the lemnisci have been

ascertained, on dissection, to possess the irregular leaf-life form common in the

genus.

LiteRATURE

Goss QO. M. 1940 Jour. Roy. Soc. West. Aust., 24 (1939-40), 1-14

Jounsrox, T. H. 1937 Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 62, 9-16

Jorunston, T. H.. and Besr, E. W. 1937 Acanthocephala. Aust. Autarct. /x-

ped., 1911-14, Ser. C, 10, (2), 20 pp.

Jounsron, T. H., and Dzranp, E. W. 1929) Trans. Roy Soc. S. Aust., 53,

146-154

Mrver, A. 1932 Acanthocephala. In Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Tier-

reichs, Bd. 4, (2), Buch 2, 1-332

Van Cieave, H. J. 1931 Goéteborgs Kel. Vetensk, Vitt. Samm. Handl., B, 5,

(2), 1-6

YAMAGUTI, S. 1935 Jap. Jour. Zool., 6, (2), 247-278

Yamacuts, S. 1939 fap. Jour. Zool., 8, (3), 317-351

A SECOND SPECIMEN OF WYULDA SQUAMICAUDATA ALEXANDER

By H. H. FINLAYSON

Summary

To the courtesy of the Rev. J. R. B. Love, formerly of Kunmunya Mission in the Kimberley

Division of Western Australia. I owe a field skin and skull of this interesting marsupial, which

apparently has not been taken since the description of the single type specimen by Alexander in

1918.

255

A SECOND SPECIMEN OF WYULDA SQUAMICAUDATA ALEXANDER

By H. IL. Frxrayson

[Presented 10 October 1942]

PLates X Anp XI

‘Yo the courtesy of the Rev. J. R. 2. Love, formerly of Kunmunya Mission

in the Kimberley Division of Western Australia, | owe a field skin and skull of

this interesting marsupial, which apparently has not been taken since the descrip-

tion of the single type specimen by Alexander in 1918.

The locality is about 150 miles north-west of that of the type and upon the

opposite coast of the peninsula. Mr. Love reports that the Worora blacks call it

Hangurra, and state that it lives amongst rocks and occurs throughout all their

country as far as Obagooma, near Derby, 250 miles south-west of the Mission.

Mr, Alexander (1) justly remarks at the close of his careful description and

stimmary that the generic or subgeneric arrangement of HW/yulda and its allies,

Phalanger and Trichosurus stands in need of review with more adequate material.

This desideratum may be long delayed but the time scems opportune to re-

examine the former animal as far as may be, with the aid of this new example.

In general a close agreement with the types has been found, but there are

some discrepancies, and needful additions and amplifications have been made, with

2 review of its phylogenetic position. In the following description, from motives

of convenience and brevity, direct comparisons are usually made with Trichosuris,

but without prejudice of affinity.

External Characters

These cannot, of course. be checked with accuracy from the filled skin. The

approximate dimensions are: head and body, 427 mim.; tail, 330; pes, 49; car, 28.

‘The ear measurement would probably be at least 25% greater in the flesh—

approximately 35 mm. The ratio of head and body length to tail length is about

asin T. vulpecula, and in many species of Phalanger as well,

In life the superficial aspect of the animal would probably justify the use of

the vernacular Cus Cus already applicd to it by Longman (3). Head short and

wide, with the muzzle region rather weaker than in Zrichosurits but less conical and

pointed than in Phalanger. All facial vibrissae are strongly developed and entirely

black; the mysticial reach 73 mm., the genals 62 and the supraorbitals 57 mm.

Rhinarium large, naked and its surface finely granular; it has a well marked

median groove with a small projecting process at its base as in Trichosurus.

Limbs noticably shorter than in Trichosurus; vibrissae well developed on

forelimb ; ulna carpal and anconeal white; medial antebrachial black; they are more

conspicuous than in Trichosurus owing to the shorter coat. The calcancal set also

present and white.

The manus is shrunk but scems small for the size of the animal. Digital

formula 4 > 3 > 5 f>2> 1, as given for the type. This, while agreeing with

the condition quoted for Phalanger, is not unknown in Trichosurus, where, how-

ever, 4> 3 > 2 >5>1 is more usual. Vhe claws are short, not strongly curved,

nearly obscured by the fringing hairs of the digits, and (in the dried state)

scarcely projecting beyond the apical pads. In the flesh their saliency would be

still further reduced and their piercing and prehensile effectiveness much inferior

to that of either. Trichosurus or Phalanger. The apical and palmar pads are ii

relative development and shape quite similar to Trichosurus, but the surface,

particularly of the latter elements, is marked by transverse parallel or concentric

striae, more continuous and less granular than in that genus, but quite similar to

the condition to be scen in dried skins of Phalanger maculatus and P. breviceps.

Trans. Roy. Soc. §.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

256

In the pes the general condition secms very close to Trichosurus; the pads

about as well developed and with similar shapes, though evidence of special affinity

to either Phalanger or Trichosurus can scarcely be locked for here, since

Bensley (2) has shown that the condition overlaps in the two genera. In the dried

condition, however, the pads in Wyulda are more conspicuous than in the latter

owing to their finer striation. The claws are relatively longer and sharper than

on the manus.

Tail as in the original description, but the basal portion is densely furred like

the back (not scantily, as stated), and the transition to the tubercular portion is

abrupt and linear. The tubercles increase in size and prominence towards the

middle reaches of its length and then fall away distally again, though they are

everywhere very distinct. Their arrangement is such that they fall into well-

marked linear series, crossing the tail surface obliquely at an angle of 40° to its

widline. Measured along the dorsal midline their frequency increases from four

to six per cm. The interscalar spaces are beset with black bristle hairs, averaging

three per scale and about one-half of a scale in length, and visible only on close

inspection, On the distal half of the ventral surface of the tail, the chief site

of the prehensile function is free from tubercles and transversely creased, a con-

dition present in both Trichosurus and at least some Phalanger species also.

In the material of Phalanger available to me there is little in the caudal scala-

tion of the dorsal surface to recall that of W’yulda, but on the ventral surface of

some examples of P. maculatus just proximad of the prehensile area, low but

distinct and very separate tubercles are developed in transverse rows of five.

separated by the width of two—a condition which might be regarded as an

incipient phase of that of Wyulda, Alexander suggests that the nudity of the

tail is a primitive character, and quotes in support the individual variation in the

scale development in some species of Phalanger, This is difficult to disprove, but

it seems more probable that the loss of hair is a recent change made in response

to a newly acquired habit of rock climbing. There is some slight support for this

in the analogous case of Pseudochirus dahli, and still more in the specialised con-

dition of the scales which differ widely in their roughened, tubercular and pro-

tuberant character, from those of Hypsiprymnodon the only primitive marsupial

with which direct comparison is possible.

Pelage

Very short, fine, soft and copious. Constitution of pelage, vertical dis-

tribution of colour and general appearance of coat quite like some of the

northern and central forms of T. vulpecula; the fur duller and without the sparkle

and gloss of the southern animal, or of most species of Phalanger. Muid-dorsally

the main pile reaches 12 mm. with a sparse overlay reaching 16mm. Here the basal

half of the fur is Pale Neutral Grey, the succeeding quarter a pale slightly vinaceous

brown near Wood Brown, the subterminal band ashy—near Tilleul Buff—and the

extreme tips and guard hairs black. Towards the rump the basal colour becomes

warmer and more ochraceous and the brown zone tends to merge with the base.

The general dorsal colour is a pale ashy grey finely grizzled and obscurely

mottled on the nape, shoulders and rump with washes of buff. The head and mid-

back are coldest in tone and are near Neutral Grey. The buffy areas are incon-

spicuous and bear no relation to the strong rufosity of fore-quarters common in

similarly aged males of T. vulpecula, The overlay of black is slight except mid-

dorsally where an obscure stripe is developed. Sides like the back, but somewhat

paler and less grizzled, though still mottled irregularly with buff. Ventral fur

creamy white to base except on throat and chest, where it is Pallid Neutral Grey ;

external colour creamy white mottled with pale buff. Scrotum nearly nude, Head

pure cold grey like the midback, muzzle upper lip and orbital ring weakly washed

with brown, but not strongly contrasted as in Trichosurus and without the dark

chin patch. Ears nearly nude internally, externally rich brown (Bistre) at base,

257

elsewhere very sparsely clad with greyish-white; the bases strongly contrasted with

the head. Limbs externally like sides, internally like belly, but with a slightly

warmer tone, especially on the hind limbs where the basal colour is pale ochraceous

buff. Manus and pes uniform greyish-brown, near Pale Drab, and not strongly

contrasted with the limb.

From the original illustration (loc. cit.) the present specimen differs in the

much paler and colder dorsal colour, whiter ventral colour and inferior lateral

demarcation except posteriorly towards the hind limb, where it is abrupt; from

Cayley’s, fig. 1, pl. x, in Troughton’s ‘‘Furred Animals of Australia” (1941) it

differs in lacking the strong reddening of head and limbs.

Skull

This gives the following dimensions in mm, (those of the type follow

them in brackets): basal length 74-1, (73); greatest breadth 51-4, (54) ; nasals

length 31-2 (29) ; nasals greatest breadth 14: 4, (14:5); nasals least breadth 7°3

(10-3); constriction breadth 9:6, (8-7); palate length 43 ca., (33); palate

breadth outside M2 23-5, (23); palate breadth inside M? 14-2, (15-2); anterior

palatine foramina 5-5, (5°5) ; basicranial axis 25-3, (24°5) ; basifacial axis 48-4,

(48-5); facial index 191, (198) ; horizontal length of P* 5:0,@) (4:7); length

Ms?3 12-1, (12°5); length of lower I, 13-9, (12-0).

Important discrepancies are shown only in the least breadth of nasals, and

palate length ; and in both cases the type description seems erroneous as the ilustra-

tions do not support them, but give measurements agreeing closely with my own.

In general dorsal outline and many structural features the skull is close to

Trichosurus ; under the first head the chief differences lie in the relatively greater

posterior width, and the attendant change in shape of the zygomatic arch, the

posterior width of which is markedly superior to the anterior or middle width.

This is an accentuation of a condition already present in Trichosurus, whereas

in Phalanger anterior and posterior width are usually equal or the anterior even

greater,

Other respects in which resemblance is shown to the former rather than the

latter genus are as follows:

(1) The muzzle region generally is even narrower and more slender than in

Trichosurus; the nasals project beyond the naso-maxillary suture and

overlap the gnathion; the premaxillae make a larger contribution to the

wall of the nares than the maxillae.

(2) Greater development of the post-orbital process of the jugal.

(3) Detailed condition of the braincase and its rugosities and the lambdoid

and sagittal crests.

(4) The upper profile, which ascends steadily and evenly from the nasion to a

vertex in the sagittal crest just anterior to the auditory meatus and with-

out bulging in the frontal region.

(5) The condition of the squamous temporal which is inflated both in its

dorsal and occipital aspects. to a degree unequalled in the recent Phalan-

geridae. In relation to Trichosurus it presents no novel features, however,

except that of degree—the three species T. caninus, T. vinlpecula and

Wyuldal forming a progression in this, while in Phalanger it is markedly

less.

(6) At the base of the skull the auditory bulla presents features of interest.

Its degree of expansion is intermediate between that of 7, vulpecula and

T. caninus, and therefore much greater than in Phalanger where the

parts are scarcely raised. ‘The bulla shows a tendency towards the more

primitive bilobed condition found in Petauris and Dromicia, being

() On supraorbital edges; below them, 7-5.

(@) Maximum diameter along oblique axis, 5-6,

238

divided by a shallow oblique sulcus into two moteties. But whereas in

these genera both moicties are contributed by the alisphenoid, in Wyulda

only the postero-internal element is so derived while the antero-cxternal

portion, which is the more prominent of the two, is formed from a ventral

process of the squamosal descending from the floor of the glenoid fossa.

This arrangement seems to be unique in the Phalangeridae, though it Js

fore-shadowed in a small percentage of skulls of ZT. culpecula.

In the original description of the type, the bullae were stated to be very large

and responsible for the great posterior width of the skull; this, however, is only

true if the mastoid process of the periotic is regarded as part of the bulla, and for

this there seems no justification at all, Anteriorly the mastoid is well separated from

the alisphenoid-squamosal bulla as defined above, and posteriorly its contours blend

completely and without demarcation with the general occipital cellular inflation.

Some other points in which it shows differences of a minor kind from either

Trichosurus or both genera, concern the hard palate which anteriorly is less riugose

than in cither and the interurbital concavity which favours 2. ortentalis in shape.

Finally, the expansion of the mastoid process of the periotic 1s responsible for

another peculiarity of the skull—namely, the great reduction in the paraoccipital

process of the exoccipitals. In the caudad view these prongs ate pressed against

the mastoids and squamosals almost throughout their entire length, and scarcely

project as free elements at all; in the two allied genera they project prominently.

Mandible

Likeness to Phalanger, especially to the smaller species, is more readily

traceable here than in’ the skull. The area of the ascending portion of the

‘amus with respect to the body is less than in Trichosurus, the condyle 1s

set lower, the coronoid process rises higher and its anterior margin slopes back at

a greater angle, and the symphysis is slightly shorter, The general condition of

the masseteric fossa and of the condyle itself is much as in Trichosurus, but the

inflected angle differs from both the related genera, in being Icess acute at the

extremity and its medial margin is not recurved ventrally to form a Hange; the

floor of the pterygoid fossa differs correspondingly,

Dentition

Incisors—The upper incisors in the present example differ considerably from

those of the type, the differences being partly due perhaps to the greater wear of

the former. 1! which was stated by Alexander to be nearly cylindrical has here

an antero-posterior width at the alveolar margin nearly twice its transverse width,

znd much of its disproportion as compared with [* would seem to be due to the

relatively much greater wear on the latter, I? in this example could never have

reached two-thirds the size of It at any silage of wear, though it is to be noted

that in the tabular summary of characters of the type it is said to be “moderate,”

asin Trichosuris; 1 the latter it averages nearer one-third of It.

In general, wheu compared with similarly worn examples of 7. wulpecula,

the agreements are much more notable than the differences, This is particularly

co in the upright setting of the incisors in the premaxillae and the loss of all

tendency to proctmbency, and in the close proximation of the first incisors to one

another in the midline, The first lower incisors are relatively slightly longer than

in Trichosurus, narrower and less spatulate and they ascend towards their occlu-

sion with their upper opponents, at a slightly steeper angle; sympathetically the

incisor-premolar diastema is shortened. ‘Two luwer vestigial incisors are present

as in the type; the anterior procumbent, the other upright.

The incisors as a whole therefore, especially in the lower jaw, are slightly

more primitive than in Trichosurus, but show very little special resemblance to

Phalanger.

The canine, in size and situation, is exactly as in Trichosurus, but is shghtly

sharper and more strongly curved.

259

Premolars—Upper P! about one-half of the size of the canine and similar in

size, shape and position to 7, vulpecula, in its usual condition, though there is some

variation in the latter. Median upper premolar quite absent. The upper P? is a

remarkably large tooth, exceeding any of the molars in sectional area and greatly

exceeding them in bulk. It exhibits strong sectorial specializations, actually

execeding in some respects those of Trichosurus, but in detailed morphology is

intermediate between that genus and the more advanced forms of Phalanger, ct.

lululae and rothschildi, as described. The crown of the tooth, both cone and

blade, projects far below the crown surface of the molars. The outer surface of

the blade is concave, a shallow but well-defined sub-triangular fossette occupying

the greater part of its arca, while the upper portion is marked by three prominent

narrow vertical grooves, extending to the cutting edge which is correspondingly

serrate; and vestiges of a parallel series are to be seen upon the antero-internal

face. Almost the whole area of the latter is occupied by an occlusal facet of

greater extent and more even development than in Trichosurus. The tooth is

rotated outward to a marked degree, probably more strongly than in any other

recent marsupial, and its cutting edge makes an angle of about 45° with the Jong

axis of the molar series; a line drawn along its cutting edge, if produced, bisects

the crown of M+. The lower P, also larger than any of the lower molars, and

similarly rotated, grooved and worn. As in the type a vestigial premolar is pressed

against the base of P*.

Molars generally very close to those of Trichosurus. In sectional area the

sequence in the upper series is Mt=M? > M*> M+, and in the lower

M,=M, > M, > M,; both formulae agreeing with Trichesurus except that in

T. caninus M+ may be equal to M1, The declension in size of the posterior molars,

both ahove and below, is steeper in M’yilda than in Trichosurus, and much steeper

than in the species of Phalanger to which | have access, in which there is a marked

tendency towards the enlargement of the third and fourth molars both above and

below, leading to subequality of the upper molars, and in the lower jaw even to

such formulae as M, > M, > M, > M,.

The molars are slightly broader in relation to their antero-posterior length

than in T. vulpecula and their over-all shape is rather less quadrate, the width of

the posterior of M? and M® bemg about one-third less than that of the anterior ;

in both respects they approach 7. cantnus more closely than T. culpecula. The

molar enamel is smooth and free from the pitting and marginal crenulation

frequent in Phalanger, The lingual cusps are slightly less elaborated than in

Trichosurus but in all structural detail of significance, such as the longitudinal

linking of the lingual cusps, development of anterior and posterior terminal Jedges,

transverse tidging of the buccal cusps, exaggeration of the paracone on M! and

the wearing pattern, there is a very close agreement with that genus.

The dentition as a whole, therefore, resembles Trichosurus more closely than

Phalanger, Traces of more primitive conditions linger in the lower incisors and

canine, but the complex of characters which marks the progressive herbivorous

evolution of the subfamily, and in which the former is held to be more advanced

are either equally developed in MW7yulda, or in some respects carried stuill further.

Relationships

Setting aside a considerable substratum of characters in which an mter-

mediate conditions is shown, the status of I’4ulda in the matters here reviewed

may be roughly summarised in the following categories:

1 Resemblances to Trichosurus : .

(a) general structure of skull; (b) general level of dentition; (c) pelage.

2 Resemblances to Phalanger:

(a) digital formula; (b)striation of pads; (c) tail (in origin); (d)

mandible (in part); (e) lower incisors, canine and P* (in part).

260

3 Characters in which W’yulda is peculiar or shows an extreme development

of a condition already present in either Phalanger or Trichosurus:

(a) reduction of forelimb and manus; (b) loss of piercing specialisations

in the claws of manus; (c) tail (in detail); (d) bulla (in detail) ;

(e) inflation of temporals; (f) paraoccipital processes; (g) axial

rotation and wear of P*; (h) molar gradation; (i) condition of man-

dibular angle; (j) petrophile habit.

HAL ANGER ROTHSCHELDI

ete,

Arboreal hobits

ratained.

Molar ridging slightly

elaborated.

Canine and incisors

unchanged.

P4 much enlarged, moderately rotated.

Trenchant cheracter slight

Conine enlarged.

T3 reduced.

WrULDs

Partly terrestrial habits

assumed.

Moiar ridging much

elaborated

Canina displaced from

Upper incisors nesdy

upright

P4 much enlarged and much rotated,

Trenchant chowociets much

increased

Canine reduced.

F enlarged

TRicHOsuRUS

Arboresl habits

retained.

Molar tidging much

globorated.

Conine displaced from %

Upper incisors nearly

upright

P4somewhot enlarged and moderotely rotared.

Trenchant character much increased.

Piercing function lost.

Canine teduced.

[3 enlarged.

Prooumbency of upper incisors

teduced Canine reduced.

Procumbency of upper incisors

penly rateined Original

Canine teteined

Primitive spp.of pHaLangea with higher deepar

grooved P4 procumbent upper incisors and

modemte caning. te

PRO -PHALANGER

(hypathencai)

Procumbency of upper incisors

reduced. Canine reduced.

Primitive sop.of pHALAanGER with low shollow

groeved P4 procumbent upper incisors ond

moderate canine

—_

The somewhat heterogeneous character

P =

= 8

% m=

22]

7 a3

rf Sz

a) Sy

a 3 |

px e4

a é ai

2 23

2) ved

2 =

Go| £3

al « &

a 5

3 68

ES oA

= Sy

2] €e£

6 a

za Os

of Phalanger, containing as it does

several incipient specialisations more or less divergent, creates a taxonomic

problem which Alexander in his discussion (op, cif.) opines may best be solved

by the recognition of subgenera therein. In suggesting the inclusion of Trichosurus

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate X

Photo by H. H. Finlayson

Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1942 Vol. 66, Plate XI

Photo by AH. H. Finlayson

261

jn this scheme of subgenera, however, he has evidently overlooked the fact estab-

lished by Bensley with ample material for comparison that the Trichosurus denti-

tion as compared with that of any of the numerous forms of Phalanger represents

4 distinct advance in the herbivorous specialisation which is the major theme in

the evolution of the subfamily.

In the same way, it would not appear from the results of the present detailed

examination, that Wyulda (despite some basic resemblances especially in plastic

characters) differs very widely from any of the species of Phalanger, and that

even the most conservative view could scarcely withhold generic rank from a

species presenting such a complex of differential characters as is listed at (3)

above.

The resemblances to Trichosurus are striking, but any derivation of Wyulda

from that genus, either by retrogression or further evolution, is clearly ruled out

by the evidence of the posterior premolars. This leaves as the obvious alternative

an independent collateral development of both from ancestral forms of Phalanger

which differed in premolar character in somewhat the same way as the Bettongiinae

do from the Macropodinae.

On this view the evolution of the three genera, as interpreted by dentition

alone, might be represented somewhat as in the scheme on page 260.

The dental evolution of Phalanger and Trichosurus is closely associated with

an arboreal habit in all the species of both, and is phytophagous rather than herbi-

vorous in the wider terrestrial sense. Since the dentition of Wyulda is on much

the same phytophagous level as Trichosurus, it would appear that the present

partly terrestrial rock haunting habits of the former represent a recent develop-

ment, initiated possibly by the desiccation of the habitat, and that the response to

this has so far only affected the plastic anatomy of the forelimb and manus and

possibly the tail.

Regarding the caudal depilation, Mr. Love informs me (in litt.) that the

Worora have views of their own, It came to pass in this way. Long ago, in the

carly time, Hangurra had a bushy tail like Burkumba the ordinary opossum. One

day when Iangurra was beginning to climb into a tree, a passing echidna, Koonun-

ginya, in mischievous mood, siezed him by the tail and tried to pull him down.

He did not succeed but instead pulled all the hair out of the tail. Thereupon

llangurra jumped down and in a rage seized Koonunginya and threw him into a

prickly bush. Since that day of discord Mangurra has had a bare and scaly tail

and Koonunginya has been covered with spines,

REFERENCES CITED

ALEXANDER, W. B. 1918 Journ. and Proc. Rol. Soc. W. Aust., 4, 31

Brenstey, B. A. 1903 Trans. Linn. Soc. Lond., (2), 9, 83, ef seq.

Loneman, El. A. 1930 Mems. Q. Mus., 10, (1), 62

tale

EXPLANATION OF PLATES X AND XI

Pruate X

Fig. A, B, C, D—Dorsal, lateral, palatal and occipital aspects of the skull of Wyulda

squamicaudata Alexander, adult g from Kunmunya. (x lca.)

PLATE XI

Fig. A—Upper posterior premolar of the left side of Wyulda squamicaudata Alexander.

Adult g¢ from Kunmunya; a postero-cxternal view of the blade at about 90° to the

cutting edge, with the paracone of M* in situ, (xllca.) Fig. B—Lateral view of

mandible. (x 1-1ca.) Tig. C—Posterior view of same to show condition of the inficcted

anele and pterygoid fossa. (x1-8ca.) Fig. D—Ditto in Trichosurus vulpecula,

(xl-4ca.) Fig. E—Proximal portion of dorsal surface of the tail of Wyulda

squamicaudata Alexander. (x2¢ca.)

THE STRUCTURAL CHARACTER OF THE FLINDERS RANGES

By D. MAWSON

Summary

EXPLANATORY NOTES RELATING TO THE ACCOMPANYING MAP

The map herewith submitted, illustrating the distribution of the rock formations of the central

portion of the Flinders Ranges, details only the broader features of this interesting area. If is not

presented as a final and accurate representation, but as an approximation to illustrate the points to

be made regarding the structure and stratigraphy of the region. It also serves the purpose of

coordinating several geological cross-sections of portions of the area already published by the

author, and it illustrates their relation to the structure as a whole. The geographical position of each

of these lines of section is clearly indicated.

262

THE STRUCTURAL CHARACTER OF THE FLINDERS RANGES

By D. Mawson

[Presented 8 October 1942]

EXPLANATORY NOTES RELATING TO THE ACCOMPANYING MAP

The map herewith submitted, illustrating the distribution of the rock forma-

tions of the central portion of the Ilinders Ranges, details only the broader

features of this interesting area. It is not presented as a final and accurate repre-

sentation, but as an approximation to illustrate the points to be made regarding

the structure and stratigraphy of the region. It also serves the purpose of co-

ordinating several geological cross-sections of portions of the area already pub-

lished by the author, and it illustrates their relation to the structure as a whole.

The geographical position of each of these lines of section is clearly indicated.

This map is based on the pastoral plan issued by the Government Depart-

ment of Jands and Survey. But as the latter is mainly of the nature of a sketch

plan, the general detail, apart from the location of the trig. stations, which are

accurately placed, is only very roughly delineated. In critical areas, therefore,

some slight correctious have been introduced in the compilation of the present map.

In the region between Nildottie Gap, Angorigina Hill and First Hill the data

available are so meagre and contradictory that the exact location of the Wirrealpa

track and the trend of streams in that area 1s still in doubt. Consequently, it has

been left more or less featureless.

In dealing with the area north of Blimman, data from Ilowchin’s account

(1922) interpreted in the light of knowledge of the sedimentary succession in

our recent work has been incorporated.

The heights quoted are mean aneroid readings, except in the case of St.

Mary’s Peak, the highest point in South Australia, and the railway sidings which

have been fixed with precision, respectively by the Survey Department and by the

S.A. Railways engineers.

No attempt has been made to indicate minor faulting, and only certain major

faults that have come under observation are recorded. There are also major

north to south faults on either side of the elevated block which constitutes the

body of the ranges. ‘he lines of these faults are hidden beneath Pleistocene to

Recent deposits and have not been fixed cxactly, and consequently, are not shown

in the plan.

It has been established that there are large blocks in this area which are little

affected by major faulting, though in other localities the interpretation of the true

succession of the beds is greatly complicated by fault dislocations. My own

method has been to select for careful measurement a number of blocks which have

been found to be least affected by faulting and then to compare the result obtained,

thereby the better detecting omissions or duplications in the record and, at the

saine time, supplying data for ultimatcly discussing variations in the nature of

sedimentation in different portions of the area,

The dips and strikes recorded are, for the most part, mean figures for the

neighbourhoods indicated.

The rocks of the area have been divided into four periods, indicated on the

map by appropriate hatching. Where there is no hatching on the map, know-

ledge of the locality is yet too meagre to venture a suggestion with any reason-

able degree of confidence as to the character of the rock formation,

Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 66, (2), 18 December, 1942

263

THE CENTRAL AREA OF THE FLINDERS RANGES

» @NYEALEEIA

_/ we ue

“MiLuesu.

wat Caernacvon . x 2 f “

abt 2520 < NS NN

‘ oS RZ — N “8 oN

A oe

sas SNA

S 1 SS arts Melt

442

OLY

LEN,

vad

i SE

wrist ees . AS

TERTIARY & RECENT

Toot «OCOBOLELLA- GIRVANELLA HORIZON

Of {7 bf pf iopte @ +

a CAMBRIAN [ex | w \

POUND SANDSTONE

RANK XK xKe HIEROGLYPHIC LIMESTONE GREYWACKE ETC, GRITS ASABAB TILLITE

LOCATION OF SECTIONS SHOWN IN HEAKY BLACH LINES Fa MLE

264

Areas which are known to be or belicved to be occupied by the Pound Sand-

stone are specially indicated and have not been included in the hatching scheme

indicating age. This decision has been adopted since, though the author regards

the Pound Sandstone as, in all probability, Cambrian in age, there are others who

prefer to regard it as the last deposition of the Pre-Cambrian.

The fossiliferous Cambrian formation which everywhere overlies it is very

rich in fossil Archaeocyathidae; in fact, this is the most famous, locality in the

world for that group of fossils. At a considerable higher level there is a notable

fossiliferous horizon rich in Obolella and Girvanella, The location of this. band

is indicated in the case of the Wirrealpa Cambrian Basin. ‘So far it has not been

identified elsewhere within the area of this present map, though we have found

it represented in the Cambrian basin to the west of Copley.

The basin arca of Wilpena Pound is hatched to indicate the Cambrian

terrain, but it has not yet been fully explored and so far no fossiliferous Cambrian

strata have been proved to exist there. It may be that all the limestone which

formerly must have existed there has been removed by denudation. In any case,

1 hold the Pound Sandstone to be of Cambrian age at least in its upper section.

The thick unfossiliferous sandstones of the Grindstone Range, separated from

the fossiliferous Cambrian beds by a line of disturbance and faulting have been

indicated as Cambrian, though it is possible that this is a down-faulted block of

Ordovician age.

Locations of several of the marker beds in the late Proterozoic succession

are indicated in the map. These, however, are locations where these formations

have been met with, and it is not implied that they do not exist in other areas;

in fact, it is certain that they do, but such areas have not been examined in suff-

cient detail to fix the position of these horizons.

The core areas in the neighbourhood of Oraparinna and Blinman are only

very roughly delineated, for in fact, up to the present, they have not been subjected

to critical examination.

The low unrelieved plains on either side of the Ranges are paved with out-

wash material, much of which is in the nature of coarse boulder beds. Where

these have been dissected by later streams they are observed to be of considerable

thickness; vertical faces of over 50 feet have been noted. In regions of greatest

accumulation these beds must be very much thicker than this. Such beds outcropping

at the surface are in the main undoubtedly Pleistocene to Recent in age. But

occasionally remnants of older horizontally disposed sandstones and pebble beds

composing isolated buttes are met with: these may conceivably be outliers of the

Eyrian formation of early Tertiary age. An example of such is the block lying

immediately to the south-east of the township of Copley. On the map, all such

‘lertiary to Recent sediments are grouped together without distinction.

GEOLOGICAL SECTION ACROSS THE FLINDERS RANGES

During the past few years, when dealing with the sedimentary succession of

the older rocks of the Flinders Ranges, I have submitted for publication in the

Transaction of the Royal Society of South Australia, a number of geological

scctions across the strike of the beds in certain selected areas. The exact location

of each of those lines of section is now indicated on the map supplied (p. 263)

herewith. Thus I and, II refer to the geographical location of the sections illus-

trated on page 256 of vol. 62 (19382). Number III is the section line, details of

which are illustrated on page 334 of volume 63 (1939). Section lines IV and V

are dealt with respectively on pages 297 and 299 of volume 65 (1941 a), and VI is

detailed on page 348 of volume 62 (1938b). Number VII is dealt with in the

Trans. A.N.Z.A.A.S., pages 79-88, volume 24 (1939), The interval between

section lines VII and VI indicated as VIII is now dealt with in this paper.

265

It will be observed that, taken together, the data of VII, VWI and VI con-

stitute a complete cross-section of the Flinders Ranges (note the traverse A to B),

which goes far to explain the structure of the whole mountain system in that region.

‘Therefore, to begin with, we will record the nature of the outcrops along the

section line VIII, which will be considered in the three following sections.

The portion VIII A is a traverse across the Proterozoic glacial and fluvio-

glacial beds from the tillite itself up to the first notable calcareous horizon.

That indicated as VIII B is a region of poor relief, presenting only limited

opportunities for properly deciphering the rock structures and sequence of beds.

The uppermost deposit is tillite, which overlies irregularly a region of slates,

dolomite and basic igneous rocks, The tillite appears to overlie the other forma-

tions unconformably.

Finally, the portion VIII C connects the, as yet unresolved, central region

VIII B with the Mount Caernarvon quartzite. It is thus the downward extension

af the Mount Caernarvon Series as published (1938b). Descriptive details of each

of these three subdivisions of section VIII now follow.

Section VIIA

At its downward limit the Brachina Creek section (VIII) ends at the summit

of the Mount Sunderland ridge, which is near the central region of a domed torma-

tion of Pre-Cambrian glacial and post-glacial sediments. Jn 1939, with a view to

ascertaining the sedimentary succession below the Mount Sunderland arkosic

quartzite and greywacke, a further reconnaissance was made across the strata on

the section line indicated on the map as VIII A, located somewhat to the north of

the earlier section line VII. As a result, a continuous sequence of beds was estab-

lished along a somewhat staggered line of outcrop down to the actual glacial

horizon at a point about two miles 5S.S.E. of Oraparinna ITead Station,

The new scction now detailed actually overlaps portion of the original

Brachina Creck section (VII), for item (15) of the latter is (A) of this section.

The strata are recorded below in downward succession.

Item True Thickness Nature of the Strata

A 80 ft.—-Arenaceous limestone, calcareous sandstone, a band of lime-

stone several feet thick showing cryptozoonic markings, and

finally a thin stratum of oolitic limestone at the bottom of

this division. Dip 15° to N.55°W. (mag.).

B 144 ft.—Arenaceous impure limestone above to argillaceous limestone

below.

C 72 it.—Somewhat calcareous argillaceous flags above, passing down

into arenaceous limestone with some argillaceous bands.

Dip 18°.

D 90 {t.—-Slates,

E 93 ft.—Sandstone.

F 93 it—-Flaggy slates. The flags break out each several inches thick.

Dip 18°.

G 65 ft—Argillaceous slates with some siltstone flags at intervals.

H 230 ft.—Thick-bedded flaggy slate above to thin-bedded slate below.

Dip 23°. In the lower part of this section flags 4 inches in

thickness alternate with bands 6 to 12 inches in thickness of

thin-splitting slate.

210 ft—Flaggy slate. Dip 20°.

J 110 ft.—The upper limit is a bar of exceedingly fine-grained arkosic

quartzite; below this are argillaceous flagstones, a further

bar of fine-grained arkosic quartzite, more flagstones and at

the base an arkosic quartzite formation 30 ft. thick.

266

DIOZOWALOUd WSTAGIN

DIOZOYaLOUd YaddN

« a! L hy

yy WIL (ffs yA,

jE on

\ \ NEE 3 ?

aNods 7 ' {40 HLNOS Wi) i ;

Oi oNavan lt Ink Sy3xNNB |

bp esa | t 1 OL ONIDYS

\ 1 i NIV

I I. -sASe tails aaney ONINdS J3ULY3L vNILY73 | i

I | { {

! H ose aonve Dav |

TIBLNVYA Lh Oz5z JONVa, f

dJOMN NOAUYNYSYD LA QNYTYSGNNS LW JdNTG JaWMAVH

a M

VNNIQVdVHOQ HONOYHL SAONYE SYXCNITI dO NOLLOES-Ssoud

‘23 FLT. ‘SLs | saza_! "Sayowe! 7 7

AVIDVI9-GIAMa_snOsO¥NaUY! SA1V1S OB1VNINV? OASto SOWA aye SSLV 7S AdSW14 ATNIVA 1g F438,

Mon

SILINO TON ¥

NO ONILS3Y

SLIT

WO UNILV 72

YNNITH Idd OL

FNM YS KAO

WOM NIVEL ONVTYIONDS 1A

ct 40 HLYON

290g

NOILVYLG OV3H VNNINWdVHO YWEN VIIA NOILI3S

267

Item True Thickness Nature of the Strata

K 126 ft—Arenaceous, flaggy argillite. Dip 21°.

L 200 ft—Laminated slates, faintly calcareous. Dip 18°,

M 17 it—Argillaceous limestone.

N 126 ft——Light-grey to dark-grey fine-grained greywacke. Concre-

tionary nodules occur near the base of this formation.

O 124 ft.—Very fine-grained silty greywacke. This is massive in out-

crop but the process of weathering renders obvicus a fine

lamination.

P 17 ft—Massive greywacke, strongly resistant to weathering.

QO 32 ft-—Ripple-marked beds; flaggy argillite above and laminated

slates below.

40 {t.—Massive fine-grained greywacke.

255 {t—-Flaggy to massive greywacke. This bed corresponds in part

to item (1) of the Brachina Creek section (Mawson 1939 a,

p. 81).

Down to this point all the above beds are represented in varying forms in the

strata listed in the Brachina Creek section. Items (1) to (15) inclusive of that

section amount to 2,199 feet in total thickness, in comparison with which the

corresponding items (A) to (S) of this section aggregate in thickness 2,094 feet.

Below this point come the strata enumerated as (T) to (Y), which are the

downward extension of the same series below the horizon of the Mount Sunder-

land greywacke.

Item True Thickness Nature of the Strata

T 776 {t—Slates, finely laminated. Dip 17°; strike N.50°E. (mag).

U 240 it.—Slaty siltstone and arenaceous slates.

Vv 173 it.—Slates, finely laminated, Dip 18°.

WwW 1,000 ft.--Slates, somewhat arenaceous above, then less arenaceous and

again somewhat arenaceous near the base.

x 500 ft—Arenaceous beds incorporating some strong beds of grey-

wacke siltstone,

Y 1,000-++ ft.—Below the arenaceous horizon of (X) are fluvio-glacial beds

leading to true tillite. Included are argillites which bulk

most abundantly in the upper section, occasional arenaceous

beds, some intercalations of fine-grained glacial mud, and,

finally, unsorted tillite. In the downward succession, the

first clear evidence of glacial transport appears at an horizon

some hundreds of feet below the base of (X).

These glacigene beds (below (X) } were traced down,

for a thickness of not less than 1,000 feet, into low country

with poor exposures unsuited for the prosecution of a rapid,

and, at the same time, critical examination of their struc-

tural and petrological features. The bulk of this section of

strata, though glacigene in origin, has been deposited in

water; only at the base does anything resembling tillite

appear, and even then no really thick formation of breccia

typically facial in character was encountered.

Z is an underlying formation apparently unconformably disposed to the over-

lying beds. Some account of its nature is given under the section VIII B.

Section VIIIC

Since the publication of the sequence of beds in the Mount Caernarvon block

(Mawson 1938b) the extension of the succession to the west has been cursorily

investigated. To the west from the summit of the Mount Caernarvon ridge, the

268

surface of the ground falls steeply until abutting against a lofty quartzite ridge

known as Love’s Mine Rock, This latter is a striking outcrop more than a mile

in length composed of quartzite which everywhere dips steeply and in places is

almost vertically disposed ; it trends approximately in a meridional direction, rang-

ing froma few degrees east to a little west of true north. It is almost as high

as Mount Caernarvon itself and for the most part rises abruptly from low country.

Love’s Mine Rock is not conformable with the Mount Caernarvon series of

beds and is either part of an earlier formation or is a dislocated portion of a still

lower section of the Mount Caernarvon beds. That the latter is so is likely

because of considerable variation in dips and strikes in beds adjacent to this

quartzite monolith. In the centre of the mass a dip of 75° to N.1O°W. (true)

was recorded.

It is estimated that in the face of the steep slope below the summit of the

Mount Caernarvon ridge and extending to the quartzite of Love’s Mine Rock,

a thickness of about 1,000 feet of sedimentary strata is represented. This is an

approximation, but has not been accurately measured, Apart from the Mount

Caernarvon greywacke-quartzite at the top, this column of strata, where examined,

is composed mainly of flaggy slates which dip 45° to the east and strike N,12°E.

(true). However, as the base is approached some bands appear of a definitely

fluvio-glacial nature. Then at the base, just above Love’s Mine Rock quartzite,

massive tillite was observed at a point where a stream following a fault line cuts

across the quartzite from the east to the west side. The tillite exposed at that

spot is quite characteristic and contains abundant erratics up to eighteen inches

or more jn diameter; boulders of quartzite, porphyry, granite, mica schist and

basalt were noted; one of the basalt erratics collected is well faceted and striated.

Thus it is now shown that the sedimentary series which when first recorded

(Mawson 1938b) was referred to as the Mount Caernarvon Series continues down-

wards for about another 1,000 feet below the horizon of Mount Caernarvon and

passes into tillite, This succession is therefore another illustration of the nature

of the post-glacial Proterozoic sediments laid down within the region of South

Australia.

It is to be observed that the nature and thickness of the corresponding sedi-

ments on the western flank of the Range ( Brachina Creek Series) agrees in ecneral

with those of the eastern flank. Comparing the thickness of sediments on either

side of the Range between the upper limit of the glacial horizon and the lowest

well-defined chocolate shale horizon we note the following.

In the east, at Mount Caernarvon, the beds represented below item (35)

(Mawson 1938b) and down to and inclusive of (1), which is the Mount Caernar-

von quartzite, total 6,287 fect. Below this, to the top of the first appearance of

definite tillite as recorded above, is a further section of about 1,000 feet of beds;

taking the total thickness, from the chocolate horizon to the tillite, about 7,287 feet.

On the western side of the ranges in the Mount Sunderland locality, the

beds from item (39) (Mawson 1938a) to and inclusive of (1) amount to 4,339

feet. The additional items (T) to (X), detailed earlier in this record, amount to

2,689 feet, making a total of 7,028 fect to the base of the arenaceous formation

(X). Add to this about 700 feet of glacigene heds below (X) before the first

meeting of tillite in the division (Y), and the total becomes 7,728 feet, which

corresponds to the 7,287 feet in the neighbourhood of Mount Caernarvon.

Section VIIIB

This portion of the traverse across the ranges deals with sediments which

predate the tillite and are much disturbed and faulted, and with which are asso-

ciated basic igneous rocks, some of which are intrusive as dykes and possible

necks. Tuffaceous breccias and scoriaccous melaphyre are also met with and

269

appear to have originated as volcanic effusions. Jater on in this account more will

be said concerning these igneous rocks. No detailed investigation of this division

of the rock formations has yet been undertaken, but casual observation has dis-

closed the presence of a notable amount of dolomite, from the outcrops of which

are shed occasional lumps of magnesite. In one place east of Teatree Spring there

was observed an occurrence of sandy shale with casts of both former dolomite

crystals and halite crystals, attesting aridity at the time of deposition.

It has been shown (Mawson 1941b) that in the Copley district the tillite is

underlain without any really obvious break in the succession, by a richly dolomitic

scries of sediments. However, in that area, fragments of the underlying scrics

are contained in the overlying tillite, so that an erosion interval is indicated, though

possibly of very short duration. Where examined near Copley, no igneous rocks

were observed associated with the dolomites. However, from Wooltana Station

on the eastern flank of the range near its northern extremity there have been

described (Mawson 1926) melaphyres and diabases associated with calcareous

and dolomitic beds underlying the tillite. It appears, therefore, that the rocks of

the central region at Oraparinna are similar to and comparable with the rocks

below the tillite at Wooltana.

In the latter locality, the tillite has resulted from the erosive work of a land

ice-sheet capping a region of former marked volcanic activity. ‘There the base of

the tillite is unconformable in relation to the underlying series. The same appears

io apply at Oraparinna but is not so clearly marked. At Oraparinna the dolomitic

series has been much disturbed and intruded by volcanic activity prior to the

period of glacial erosion,

A special feature in this area is, the occurrence of strong mineral vein

formations rich in micaceous haematite with which are associated quartz, siderite

and dolomite. Veins rich in baryte have also been encountered, At the spot

indicated on the map by. the mark x, located to the north of Pantapinna Spring,

there is a notable vein of excellent light grey-blue asbestos, which recalls the

vecurrence of asbestos in the Wooltana igneous area.

Around and especially to the west of Blinman, is another region of dolomitic

sediments invaded by basaltic intrusions. It is a repetition of the Oraparinna

centre-country, and has been recorded by Howchin (1922).

THE IGNEOUS ROCKS OF THE CENTRAL FLINDERS RANGES

Within the area now under consideration, the only igneous rocks are basic

or near-basic lavas, dolerites, breccias and tuffs. These, for the most part, are

grouped in two localities: firstly around Blinman as a centre, and secondly within

a limited radius eastward of Oraparinna Head Station. Examples of occurrences

in the Blinman area collected by Howchin (1922) have been described by

Benson (1909).

Since that time we have located many outcrops of basic igneous rocks occurring

in a belt of country with a roughly north to south trend, situated between Mount

Caernarvon and Oraparinna Head Station. These are mainly compact or

amygdaloidal melaphyres, but dolerites are well represented. One example en-

countered just east of Veatree Spring is extremely coarse-grained and approxi-

mates to gabbro; to this the term gabbroid dolerite could be applied. All have

suffered mineral changes to a more or less degree; thus uralitization, saussuriliza-

tion, epidotization and chloritization are regular features, while scapolite makes

its appearance in some cases.

A melaphyre (No. 4,937) occurring im sife in considerable amount at about

six miles from Oraparinna Head Station on the track to the Bunkers Hut, has

270

been selected for analysis as typical ot the magma involved in these outbursts.

The analysis below (1) included herewith was executed by E. G. Robinson, who

had also assisted me in field work in that area, The composition is that of a typical

basalt. In the hand specimen it is very fine-grained and uniform in character and

of a reddish chocolate colour. Microscopically examined it is seen to have beeu

rich in immute felspar laths and magnetite and to have embodied considerable

augite. But it is now greatly changed and much clouded with hacmatite stains.

Chlorite and leucoxene are abundant.

Related and apparently contemporaneous volcanic activity has been recorded

in the neighbourhood of Wooltana and Parallana, some 68 miles to the north-east

of Blinman, by Mawson (1939 and 1926) and Weolnough (1926).

Apart from the Oraparinna and the Blinman igneous centres such rocks have

not been located im situ elsewhere within the area of the map accompanying this

contribution, excepting on the eastern flank of the Bunkers Range to the south-

west of Old Wirrealpa Station buildings. Howchin (1922) was the first to record

the existence of such in this region, The basalts and dolerites of this locality

occur as dykes and as sheets conformable with the bedding of the adjacent beds.

One of the reported occurrences in this area may prove to be a volcanic neck. The

period of igneous activity in this locality apparently post-dates at least the main

outbursts in the Blinman-Oraparinna areas, for they are associated with Cambrian

Archacocyathinac-bearing sediments. Also the specimens examined from ihis

area have suffered a less degree of mineral change. An example to illustrate the

character of the magma of these outpourings was collected iz siti adjacent to the

Rlinman-Wirrealpa Road at a point 7 miles from Wirrealpa Head Station. An

analysis of this rock executed by R. H. Jones, who accompanied me on a visit to

the area, is quoted below (IT).

The rock (No. 2,581) is of a fine even-grained texture, very dark-coloured

and dense; specific gravity 3°05. It is a dolerite which has undergone partial

amphibolitization. Relics of original ophitic structure are still preserved. The

felspar was a medium labradorite but is in process of change. Cores of unaltered

pyroxene of the composition of augite are surrounded by secondary amphibole.

‘This latter is strongly zoned, being colourless or nearly so in the centre and

strongly pleochroic in yellow-green to blue-green on the rim, The optical

characters indicate tremolitic amphibole in the central areas to a sodic variety

without. The amphibole has a general brown appearance in transmitted light

owing to abundant very fine inclusions of particles of iron ore, Epidote and

chlorite are present in the rock only in very small quantity. Original ilmenite has

been converted to Ieucoxene.

I IT I II

SiO, - - 47-20 49-40 Na.Q - ™ 3°43 2°72

TiO, - _ 1-80 1-02 KO - - 2:76 0-38

ALO, - - 14°65 14-42 ,.O- bs 2°46 1°36

FeO. - ~ [9-55 2:75 H,O— = 0:49 0-12

FeQ - . 3°71 8°87 Pak = - 0°37 0-06

MnQ - 4 0-04 not det. CO, - £ 0-08 ae

MgO - - 6°61 7°38 rr =

CaQ - 5 5°39 11-75 160°54% 100-23%

J. Melaphyre from near Teatree Spring about 5 miles from Oraparinna Head

Station on the track to Bunkers Ilut. Rock No. 4,937. analysed by

E. G, Robinson, B.Sc.

II. Meta-dolerite from the north side of the Blinman to Wirrealpa road at about

7 miles from Wirrealpa Head Station, Rock No. 1,258, analysed by

R. H. Jones, B.Sc.

OROGENY

Two distinct orogenic episodes operated in the development of the preseut

orogtaphic features. To begin with, at some time in the early Palaeozoic, probably

in later Cambrian times, the enormously thick mass of Proterozoic and early

Cambrian sediments which had accumulated in a great south to north trending

geosyncline off the east coast of Pre-Cambrian ancestral Australia was buckled and

folded on a grand scale,

In all probability peneplanation of this early-Palacozoic mountain chain was

far advanced by the end of Triassic time. Subsequent to this, as the result of a

second period of diastrophism, the region now constituting the Flinders Range

was raised as a horst block above the level of its surroundings; erosion has since

brotight into relief the present topographic features, though evidence of former

peneplanation has not been obliterated. ‘There is for instance, a general accord-

ance of summit level over long distances in the case of ridges constituted of the

harder sediments. Excellent examples of the kind are the level summit line of

Freeling Heights, 3,120 feet above sea level, and of the Wilyerpa Range, about

2,900 fect above sea level, flanking the Bibliando Dome.

By analogy with the Mount Lofty Ranges whose history closely follows that

of the Flinders Ranges, the period of commencement of block elevation should be

referred to the later Pliocene. However, a greater degree of erosion appears io

have taken place in the case of the latter, so the inception of block elevation in that

locality may have antedated that of the Mount lofty Ranges.

The trough faulting, which threw down and preserved the Triassic Leigh

Creek coal basin, was a forerunner of the subsequent meridional faulting respon-

sible for the present elevated mountain block. Though it is obvious that on either

side of the ranges longitudinal faults exist in the plains country, now hidden

beneath subsquent sedimentary depositions, yet the great face on the western flank

between the Wilpena Pound Range and Mount Samuel is not, in itself, a fault

scarp comparable with the faces of the fault block of the Mount Lofty Ranges.

Throughout most of its length that great wall is actually the dip face of the

massive Pound Sandstone formation; stratigraphically above it rest the com-

paratively soft Cambrian shale and Archaeocyathinae limestone which, in large

measure, have been removed by erosion bringing the massive Pound Sandstone

into strong relief.

There have been observed some lines of inajor faulting of much greater age

than the comparatively recent system of meridional trend associated with the

uplift of the main horst block. The most notable of these lies north of the area

included in the map on page 263, It passes the neighbourhood of Aroona Waters

to the west of Copley and extends across the ranges in the vicinity of Mount Hack

and towards Mount Roebuck. Another notable fault line roughly parallel to this

truncates the Pound Sandstone at Wirrealpa Hill adjacent to Old Wirrealpa

Station. An extensive zone of crushing at Mount John also illustrates faulting

on a large scale. Such fault lines are very ancient, predating the period of pene-

planation and in all probability developed in the early Palaeozoic miountain-

building period.

However, it is not faulting that is responsible for much of the most striking

oragraphic relief of the central and northern Flinders Ranges. This has mainly

resulted from the denudation of a remarkably folded and thick series of sedi-

ments in which are contained not only massive beds. very hard and resistant to

erosion, but also there are, sandwiched into the series, major formations of an

unusually soft nature. Thus there are very thick arenaceous formations, in part

converted to hard quartzite, and at the other extreme, recurrent formations all of

considerable thickness of soft chocolate shales in part tuffaceous. As a con-

272

sequence, the processes of erosion have developed deep valleys and high crest

lines. Thus the uplifted pencplane had been very deeply etched and the character

of the folding developed in the piling up of these sediments into an early-

Paleozoic mountain chain is clearly demonstrated. This is a region eminently

suited for aerial survey.

In that ancient, mountain-building period the sediments involved were thrown

into a series of Jong parallel folds in the more southerly areas affected; well

exhibited in the region between Port Pirie and Mount Bryan. Further north,

more especially above the line joining Wilson and Baratta, cycloclinal folding was

developed. The most striking example of centroclinal structure is the basin range

known as Wilpena Pound. Another such is developed in the Angepena system

of hills north of Patawarta. Mern Merna is another such basin which is

rendered unsymmetrical by a downthrow of the western portion of faulting. The

Chace and Druid Ranges form an almost closed structure but this is actually a

narrow syneclinal basin, partially blocked by faulting at its eastern end.

Periclinally dipping domed structures are also well represented. In the

region between Mount Sunderland and Patawarta, the sediments have been raised

up to form a grand dome in the form of two linked subsidiary partial domes as

sown in the map herewith. Other examples to be mentioned are the Bibliando

Dome between Wilyerpa Hill and Baratta and the Mount Grainger Dome.

In the case both of periclinal and cycloclinal structures where there are elements

in the sedimentary series differing widely in their resistance to erosion, there are

developed by the processes of erosion, ring-shaped enclosures from which effluent

streams escape through narrow breaches in the encircling wall. These structures

are a feature of the Flinders Ranges of South Australia, The local pastoral com-

munity has applied to these land forms the term “pound,” having reference to the

application of the term to a place of confinement for animals.

It is obvious that this term “pound” may have useful application in descrip-

tive geomorphology ; to be distinguished as periclinal or domed pounds and centro-

clinal or basin pounds,

REFERENCES

Benson, W. N. 1909 Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 33, 226

Howerrn, W. 1922 Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 47, 46-82

Mawson, D. 1923 Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47, 376

Mawson, D. 1926 Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, 192

Mawson, D. 1938a Roy. Soc. Aust., 62, (2), 255

Mawson, D. 1938b Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62, (2), 347

Mawson, D. 1939a A.N.Z.A.A.S., 24, 79

Mawson, D. 1939b Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 63, (2), 331

Mawson, D. 1941a Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65, (2), 295

Mawson, D. 1941b Roy. Soc. 5. Aust., 65, (2), 304

Woortxouan, W. G. 1926 Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 60, 283

AAW

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED).

Receipts and Payments for the Year ended September 30, 1942.

273

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA (INCORPORATED)

Receipts and payments for the Year ended 30 September 1942

RECEIPTS PAYMENTS

£ s. da é£ 8. a. £ sd £ 8 da

To Balance, Ist Oct. 1941 287 0 6 | By Transactions (Vol. 65, Pt. 2, and

, Subscriptions boa 126 0 0 Vol. 66, Pt. 1)—

» Government Grant for Printing LN BUT

Printing, etc. ... 300 0 0 Illustrating ... .. .. 99 15 4

, Sale of Publications and Publishing ... .. ... IL 0 0

Reprints :— poe es gee 2 ad

University of Adelaide 62 13 3 » Reprints 0.0 ce ee 81 Lt 9

Sundries tke Sek kg too Lf! =F , Librarian a 2616 O

r ————— 96 10 105 3 Library—Bookbinding | . ltl 3 0

» Research Fund Trans- | Sundries . 0 1 5

ferred a 6 0 0 ees TOY a 5

, Interest — Transferred Saal rigss =

from Endowment Fund 201 3 4 i Lighting and Cleaning 16 0 6

Printing, Postages and

Stationery 2... .. 33 18 5

Petties, Bank Fee, ete. 3.3 = 8

Insurances 0. o 6 5 Oo

Legal Expenses re

Rules ee 919 6

a DT

, Balances—30 Sept. 1942—

Savings Bank of S.A... 227 2 5

Bank of Aust. £8 8 7

Less Out-

standing Chqs. 2 10 11

——— 517 8

Cash to Bank 3.3 0

236 3 1

£1,016 14 8 £1,016 14 8

ENDOWMENT FUND as at 30 September 1942

(Capital—Stocks at Cost Price .... £5,798 6s. 1d.)

1941---October 1 1942—-September 30

To Balance— : By Revenue Account mu 201 3 4

Aust. Inscribed Stocks 5,762 0 0 | » Balance

Savings Bank of S.A. 36 6 1 Aust. Inscribed Stocks 5,762 0 0

—————- 5,798 6 1 Savings Bank of S.A... 36 6 1

» Interest— \ ——————— 5,798 6 1

Inscribed Stocks .. 194 14 0 |

Savings Bank of S.A. 6 9 4

—_——— 201 3 4 |

£5,999 9 5 £5,999 9 §

Audited and found correct. We have verified the Government Stocks at the Registries of

Inseribed Stock, Adelaide, and the respective Bank Balances.

O. GLASTONBURY, F.A.LS., AF.LA. U Hon. HERBERT M. HALE,

F. M. ANGEL § Auditors Hon, Treasurer

Adelaide, 2 October 1942

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS ON 30 SEPTEMBER 1942

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society's Transactions.

Those marked with a dagger (+) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note - The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions are in

arrear.

274

AWARDS OF THE SIR JOSEPH VERCO MEDAL

1929 Pror. WaLter Howcurn, F.G.S.

1930 Joun McC. Brack, A.L.S.

1931 Pror. Srr Doueras Mawson, O.B.E., D.Sc., B.E., F.R.S,

1933 Pror. J. Burton CLELAND, M.D.

1935 Pror. T. Harvey Jounston, M.A., D.Sc,

1938 Pror. James A. Prescorr, D.Sc., A.LC.

LIST OF FELLOWS, MEMBERS, ETC.

AS ON 30 SEPTEMBER 1942

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Socicty‘'s

Transactions. Those marked with a dagger (jf) are Life Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary,

Note—The publications of the Society are not sent to those members whose subscriptions

are in arrear.

Date of

Election Honorary FEtiows.

1926. *CuapmMAn, I’, A.L.S., “Hellas,” 50 Stawell Street, Kew E4, Victoria.

1894. *Wison, Prof. J. ‘U., M.D., Ch.M., F-R.S., Cambridge University, England.

FELLows.

1935. Avan, D. B., B-Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Council,

1939-42: Vice-President, 1942-; Librarian, 1942-.

1925. Avery, W. J.. M.A., C.M.G., 32 High Street, Burnside, S.A.

1927, *ALperMAN, A. R., Ph.D, M.Sc, F.G.S.. Div. Econ. Chemistry, C.S.1.R., Box 4331,

G.P.O., Methourne, Victoria—Council, 1937-42.

1931. Awnprew, Rev. J. R., 5 York Street, Henley Beach, S.A.

1935. *AnpREwarTHA, H. G., M.Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1935. *AnprewarrHa, Mrs, H. V., B.Agr.Sc., M.S., 29 Claremont Avenue, Netherby, S.A.

1929. AnceEL, Ff. M., 34 Fullarton Road, Parkside, S.A.

1939. *Ancer, Miss L. M., M.Se., University, Adelaide.

1936. Barriex, Miss B. S., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1932. Brce, P. R., D.D.Se., L.D.S., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1939. *Brrnot, R. M., S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

1928. Best, R. J., M.Se.,, F.A.C.1., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1946. Bircu, L. C., B.Agr.Se., M.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide.

1934. Brack, E. C., M.B., B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide.

1907. *Brackx, J. M., A.L.S., 82 Brougham Place, North Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1930;

Council, 1927-1931; President, 1933-34; Vice-President, 1931-33.

1940. Bonytuon, Str J. Lavincton, 263 East Terrace, Adelaide.

1923. Burnon, R. S., D.Sc., University, Adelaide, S.A.

1922. *Camppett, T. D, D.D.Sc., D.Sc., Dental Dept. Adelaide Hospital, Adelaide—

Council, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-; Vice-President, 1932-34; President, 1934-35.

1929. Crreistir, W., M.B., B.S., Education Department, Adclaide—Treasurer, 1933-8.

1895. *CieLraxp, Pror. J. B., M.D., University, Adclaide— Verco Medal, 1933; Council,

1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1927-28; 1940-41; Vice-President, 1926-27, 1941-42,

1929. CLeLanp, W. P., M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Dashwood Road, Beaumont.

1930. *CorguHoun, T. T., M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

16G7. Cooke, W. T.. D.Se.. A.A.C.L., University, Adela'’de—Council, 1938-41, Vice-

President, 1941-42:

1938. *Coxnon, H. T., S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

1929. *Corron, B. C., S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

1924. pe Crespieny, Sir C. T. C, D.S.O., M.D., F.R.C.P., 219 North Terrace, Adelaide.

1937. *CrocKer, R. L., B.Se., Bruceden Court, Deepdene Avenue, Westbourne Park.

1929. *Davinson, Pror. J., D.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Council,

1932-35; Vice-President, 1935-37, 1938-39; President, 1937-38; Rep. Fauna and

Flora Board, 1940-.

1927, *Davies, Pror. E. H., Mus.Doc., The University, Adelaide.

1947.) *Dickinson, S. B., B.Sc, Mines Department, Flinders Strect, Adelaide.

1930. Dix, E. V., Hospitals Department, Adelaide, S.A,

1932, Dunstone, H. E., M.B., B.S., J.P., 124 Payneham Road, St. Peters, Adelaide.

275

Election.

1921. Dutton, G. H., B.Se., 12 Halsbury Avenue, Kingswood, Adelaide.

1931. Dwyer, J. M., M.B., B.S., 25 Port Road, Bowden. (A.T.F. abroad.)

1933. *Karntey, Miss C. M., B.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1902. *Epguist, A. G., 19 Farrell Street, Glenelg, S.A.

1938. *Evans, J. W., M.A., D.Sc., Government Entomologist. Hobart, Tasmania.

1917, *FeNNer, C. A. E., D.Se., 42 Alexandra Av. Rose Park, Adclatde—Couneil, 1925-28:

President, 1930-31; Vice-President, 1928-30; Secretary 1924-25: Treasurer,

1932-33; Editor, 1934-37.

1935. *Irenner, F. J., M.B., B.S., 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park. (A.LF. abroad.)

1927, *Finiayson, H. H., 303 Ward Street, North Adelaide—Council, 1937-40,

1923. *Fry, H. K,, D.S.0., M.D, B.S.. B.Sc, F-R.A.C.P., Town Hall, Adelaide—Council,

1933-37; Vice-President, 1937-38, 1939-40; President, 1938-1939.

1932. *Grpson, E. S. H., B.Se., 297 Cross Roads, Clarence Gardens, Adelaide.

1935. *GLastonzpury, J. O. G, B.A. MSc. Dip.Fd., Armament School, R.A.A.F., Hamil-

ton, Victoria.

1919. {GLastongury, O. A., Adelaide Cement Co., Grenfell Street, Adclaide,

1927. Goprrey, F. K., Robert Street, Payneham, S.A.

1935. +Gotpsack, H., Coromandel Valley.

1939. Goopr, J. R., B.Agr.Se., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide. (ALF.

abroad.)

1925. +Gosse, J. H., Gilbert House, Gilbert Place, Adelaide.

1910. *Gxant, Pror, Kerr, M.Se, F.LP., University, Adelaide.

1930. Gray, J. T., Orroroa, S.A.

1933. Greaves, H,, Director, Botanic Gardens, Adelaide,

1904. Grirrits, H. B., Dunrobin Road, Brighton, S.A.

1934. Gunter, Rey. H. A., 10 Broughton Street, Glenside, S.A.

1922. *TIave, H, M., Director, S.A. Museum, Adelaide—Council, 1931-34; Vice-

President, 1934-36, 1937-38; President, 1936-37; Treasurer, 1938-,

1939, Harvey, Miss A., B.A., Dequetteville Terr., Kent Town, Adelaide.

1927, Horpex, Tue Hon. E. W., B.Sc., Dequettevilie Terrace, Kent Town, Adelaide.

1933. Hosxine, H, C., B.A. 24 Northcote Terrace, Gilberton, Adelaide.

1924. *Hossrerp, P. S.. M.Sc., 132 Fisher Street, Fullerton, S.A.

1928. Irovtp, P., Kurralta, Burnside, S.A.

1918. *Jennison, Rev. J.C. 7 Frew Strect, Fullarton, Adelaide.

1910. *Jounson, E. A., M.D., M.R.C.S., “Tarni Warra,’ Port Noarlunga, S.A.

1921. *Jounston, Pror. T. FH. M.A. D.Sc., University, Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1935;

Council, 1926-28, 1940-; Vice-President, 1928-31; President, 1931-32; Secretary

1938-40; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board, 1932-39.

1939. +Kyaknar, M. H., Ph.D, M.B., Khakhar Buildings, C.P. Tank Road, Bombay, India.

1933. *Kieeman, A. W., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1939. Leasx, J. C, A.M.LE., 9 Buller Street, Prospeet, S A.

1922. Lennox, G. A.. M.D. B.S., F.R-CLP., North Terrace, Adclaide. CALF. abread.)

1930. *Louwycx, Rev, N. H., 85 First Avenue, St. Peters, Ade'a‘de.

1938. *Love, Rev. J. R. B., M.C, D.C.M., M.A., Ernabelia, via Oodnadatta, S.A.

1931, *Lupsrook (Mrs. W. V.), N. H., M.A., Elimatta Street, Reid, A.C.T.

1938. Maprern, C. B., B.D.S., D.D.5ce., Shell House, North Terrace, Adelaide.

1922. *Manican, C. T.. M.A., B.E., DiSe., P.G.S., Sch. Milit. Eng., Liverpool, N.S.W.—

Council, 1939-33; Vice-President, 1933-35, 1936-37; President, 1935-36.

1933. Mfacarey, Miss K. de B., B.A. B.Sc., 19 Ashbourne Avenue, Mitcham, S.A.

1932. Mawn, E. A,, C/o Bank of Adelaide, Adelaide.

1923. MarsHatt, J. C., Mageppa Station, Comaum, S.A.

1939, MarsnHaur, T. J.. M.Agr.sc., Ph.D., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1929. Martin, F. C., M.A., Technical High School, Thebarton, S.A.

1905. *Mawson, Pror. Str Doucras, O.B.F, D.Sc., B.E., F.R.S., University, Adclaide—

Verco Medal, 1931; President, 1924-25; Vice-President, 1823-24, 1925-26;

Council, 1941-.

1938. *Mawson, Miss P. M., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1926. Mayo. Tur Hon. Mr. Justice, LL B., K.C., Supreme Court, Adelaide,

1934. McCroucury, C, L., B.E., A.M.LE. (Aust.), Town Hall, Adelaide.

1929. McLaucuriin. E., M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P.. 2 Wakefield Street, Kent Town. Adelaide.

1907, Mrtrrosr, R. T., Mount Pleasant, S.A.

1939, Mrycnam, V. H., Willaloo, via Hallett, S.A.

1925. }MrircHert, Prov. Sir W., K.C.M.G., M.A., D.Se., Fitzroy Ter., Prospect, SA.

1933. Mircrrir, Pror, M. L., M.Sc., University, Adelaide.

1938. Moornouse, F. W., M.Sc, Chief Inspector of Fisheries, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

1940. Mortrock, J. A. T., 39 Currie Street, Adelaide.

276

Date of

Election.

936. *Mountrorp, C. P., 25 First Avenue, St. Peters, Adelaide.

1930. Ocxenpen, G. P., Public School, Norton’s Summit, S.A.

1913. *Osporn, Pror. T. G. B., D.Sc. University, Oxford, England— Council, 1915-20,

1922-24; President, 1925-26; Vice-President, 1924-25, 1926-27.

1937, Parkin, L. W., M.A., B.Sc. c/o Nth. Broken Hill Ltd., Box 20C, Broken Hill, N.S.W.

1929. Pauti, A. G., M.A. B.Sc, Eglinton Terrace, Mount Gambier.

1924. Puirrs, L F., Ph.D. B.Agr.Se., c/o The Flax Production Committee, 409 Collins

Street, Melbourne, Victoria.

1926. *Pirer, C. S., M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Council, 1941-.

1925. *Prescorr, Pror. J. A. D.Sc. A.C, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—

Verco Medal, 1938; Council, 1927-30, 1935-39; Vice-President, 1930-32; President,

1932-33,

1926. Price, A. G., C.M.G., M.A. Litt.D., F-R.G.S., 226 Melbourne Street, North Adelaide.

1937, *Rart, W. L., M.Sc., Medical School, University of Melbourne, Carlton, No. 3, Victoria.

1934. Ramspen, Mrs. B. W., Munitions Supply Laboratories, C. Dept. S. & W., Mary-

byrnong, Victoria.

1925. RicHarpson, A. E. V., C.M.G., M.A., D.Sc., 314 Albert Street, East Melbourne.

1933. Scuneiper, M., M.B., B.S., 175 North Terr., Adelaide.

1924. *Seenit, R. W., M.A, B.Sc. Assist. Govt. Geol. Flinders St., Adelaide—Secretary,

1930-35; Council, 1937-38; Vice-President, 1938-39, 1940-41; President, 1939-40,

1925. *Suearp, I, Nuriootpa, S.A

1936. *SuHeEarp, K., Fisheries Research Div. C.S.LR., Cronulla, N.SAW.

1934. SuHinkrie.p, R. C., Salisbury, S.A.

1938. *Simpson, Mrs. E. R., M.Sc., Warland Road, Burnside,

1924. Srapson, F. N., Pirie Street, Adelaide.

1941. Smuiru, J. LAncrorn, B.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide. (R.A.A.T.)

1925. +Smiru, T. E. Barr, B.A., 25 Currie Street, Adelaide.

1941. Sourucorr, R. V., M.B., B.S., 12 Avenue Road, Unley Pork, S.A.

1936. Sournwoon, A. R., M.D., M.S. (Adel.), M.R.C.P., Wootoona Terr., Glen Osmond, S.A,

1936. Spricc, R. C., Toddville Street, Seaton Park, Adelaide.

1938. StepHens, C. G., M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1935. Srrickrann, A. G., M.Aegr.Se., 11 Wootoona Terr., Glen Osmond, Adelaide.

1932. Swan. D. C., M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adclaide -— Secretary,

1940-42,

1934. Symons, I. G., Murray Street, Mitcham.

1929. *Taytor, J. K., B.A. M.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide—Council,

1940-.

1940. TuHomson, J. M., 302 The Terrace, Port Pirie, S.A.

1923. *Tinpate, N. B., B.Se., South Australian Museum, Adelaide—Secretary, 1935-36.

(R.A.A.F.)

1937. *Trumece, H. C., D.Sc. M.Agr.Sc., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide.

1894. *Turner, A. J.. M.D., F.R.E.S., Dauphin Terr., Brishane, Qld.

1925. Turner, D. C., National Chambers, King William Street, Adelaide.

1933. Warkrey, A. B.A, B.Sc. Ph.D. Div. Industrial Chemistry, C.S.ILR. Box 4331,

Melbourne, Victoria.

1912. *Warn, L. K., B.A. BE. 1).Se., Govt. Geologist, Flinders Street, Adelaide—

Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; President, 1928-30; Vice-President, 1927-28.

1941. Wark, D. C.. M.Agr.Se., Waite Institute, Private Mail Bag, Adelaide.

1936. Watrruovuse, Miss L. M., 35 King Street, Brighton, S.A.

1939. Wrenptne, Rev. B. J., Hamley Bridge, S.A.

1931. Wuson, C. FE. C, M.B., B.S., “Woodfield,” Fisher Street, Fullarton, Adelaide.

1938. *Wirison, J. O.. Animal Nutrition Laboratory, University, Adelaide.

1935. Wuinxrer, Rev. M. T., B.A., D.D., 20 Austral Terrace, Malvern, Adelaide.

1930, *Womrrstey, H., F.RES., A.L.S., Museum, Adelaide—Secretary, 1936-37; Editor,

1937-,

1923. *Woon, Pror. J. G. D.Sc. Ph.D., University, Adelaide—Council, 1938-40; Vice-

President, 1940-41; Rep. Fauna and Flora Board, 1940-; President, 1941-42.

GENERAL INDEX.

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described are new to science. ]

277

GENERAL INDEX

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described

are new to science, |

Aboriginal Names and Uses of Plants in the

Ooldea Region, South Australia, Johnston,

T. H., and Cleland, J. B., (1), 93

Acanthocephala; Australian; Johnston, T. H.,

and Best, E. W., (2), 250

Acarina-Parasitoidea of Australia, Pt. J;

Additions ta the; Wamersley, H., (2), 142

Acarine Fauna of Australia; Miscellaneous

Additions to the; Womersley, H., (1), 85

Achorutes armatus, manubrialis, purpur-

ascens, (1), 23

Achorutidae, (1), 25

Achorutinae, (1), 23

Acmea witcentiana, scalarina, valida, ferru-

ginea, teres, yorkensis, (2), 128

Acmeidae, (2), 127

Acryptolaria angulata, aboriformis, (1), 111

Aglaophenia billardi, dannevigi, divaricata,

plumosa, ramulosa, carinifera, whiteleggei,

(1), 110

Alderman, A. R., Sillimanite, Kyanite and

Clay Deposits near Williamstown, South

Australia, (1), 3

Amblygamasus, (2), 143

Amerianna aliciae, subundata, tenuistriata,

(1), 76, subacuta, lincolnensis, gabriel,

(1), 7

Anandia, (1), 19

Angel, L. M., and Johnston, T. H., Larval

Trematodes from Australian Fresh Water

Molluses.Pt. VIII, (1), 50

Angel, L. M. and Johnston, ‘I. H., The Life

History of the Trematode Paryphostomum

tenuicollis (S. J. Johnston), (2), 119

Anisakis diomedeae, sp., (1), 67

Anoetidae, (1), &8

Antenella dubia, (1), 116

Anystid Mites of Australia; The; Womers-

ley, H., (1), 15

Anystidac, (1), 15, 92

Anystinae, (1), 15

Anystis, baccarum, (1), 16

Assiminea granum, tastmamnica,

relata, (2), 127

Assitnineidae, (2), 127

Athecata, (1), 105, 116

Australian Mean Monthly Temperatures; The

Phase and Amplitude of; Prescott, J. A.,

(1), 46

Austrogamasus, gracilipes, (2), 157

Austropeplea, aruntalis, (1), 80

Austropyrgus, (2), 125, buccinoides, ruppiae,

grampianensis, tastnanica, petterdiana,

brownii, elongatus, marginata, smithii,

brazieri, pctterdi, hyalina, vertiginosa,

schraderi, nigra, gunnii, turbinata, pat-

tisoni, (2), 126

pagodella,

Beaurieuia, (2), 148, 164

Bechstaenia, (1), 19 ,

Best, E. W., and Johnston, T. H., Australian

Acanthocephala, No. 3, (2), 250

Black, J. M., Additions to the Flora of South

Australia, No. 41, (2), 248

Blackburn, M., A Systematic List of the Hy-

droida of South Australia with a Summary

of their Distribution in other Seas, (1),

104

Bougainvilliidac, (1), 105

Bourletiella arvalis, (1), 30

Brachylaelaps, (2), 184

Bragg, Sir William; Obituary, (1), 1

Bythinella pattisoni, buccinoides, (1), 81

Calvolia ? heterocomus, (1), 92

Campanularia australis; pumila, pulcratheca,

(1), 105; ambiplica, (1), 116

Campanulartidae, (1), 105, 116

Cephalopoda from Stomach Contents of Fish

from Fast and South Australia, Cotton,

B.C, (1), 83

Cercaria metadena, (1), 50

Cereals in some South Australian Experi-

ments; Trends in the Yields of Fallow-

sown and Stubble-sown; Wark, D. C,

(2), 133

Chabricria, (1), 19

Chapman, Sir Robert W.; Obituary, (1), 1

Chaussicra, warregense, (1}, 92

Cheletogenes ornatus, (1), 85

Cheyletidae, (1), 85

Chiropteranoctus chalinolobus, (1), 91

Clathrozoon wilson, (1), 105

Cleland, J. B., and Johnston, T. H., Aboriginal

Names and Uses of Plants in the Qoldea

Region, South Australia, (1), 93

Clinostomum australicnse, (2), 228

Clytia delicatula, stolonifera, (1), 106

Coal; An examination of a Sample of Leigh

Creek; Cooke, W. T., (2), 130

Collembola from Australia, New Zealand and

New Guinea; New Genera, Species and

Records of ; Womersley, H., (1), 23

Contracaecum magnicolare, pelagicum, (1),

Cooke, W. T., An examination of a Sampie

of Leigh Creek Coal, (2), 130

Corynephoria quadrimaculata, (1), 31

Corynosoma cetaceum, (2), 250; clavatum,

(2), 252; australe, (2), 254

Cosmocerca linnodynastes, (2), 174; ausira-

licnsis, propingua, (2), 176

Cotten, B. C, Some Australian Freshwater

Gasteropoda, (1), 75

Cotton, B. C., Cephalopoda from Stomach

Contents of Fish from Fast and South

Australia, (1), 83

Cotton, B. C., Australian Gastropoda of the

Families Hydrobiidae, Assimineidae and

Acmeidae, (2), 124

Coxiella striatula, filosa, (2), 129

Coxielladda gilesi, mammillata, (2), 129

Cryptolaria exserta, (1), 111

Cryptopygus fasmaniensis, (1), 25

278

Deutcrosm:nthurus bicinctus v.

pallipes, (1), 31

Dickinsen, S. B., The Moonaree

Saline Ground Waters and the Origin of

the Saline Material, (1), 32

Digamasellus, (2), 158; concina, (2), 159;

punctatus, (2), 160; tragardii, (2), 161;

semipunctatus, (2), 163

Diphasia attenuata, subearinata, (1), 112

Diplostomulum metadena, (1), 50

Dolichosaccuins solecarius, (2), 231

Dynamena crisiodes, (1), 112; quadridentata,

cornicina, (1), 113

repandus, v.

Echinoparyphium phalacrocoracis, (2), 238

Echinuria querquedulae, (1), 71

Eden-Moana Fault Block; The Geology of |

the; Sprigg, R. C., (2), 185

Elaphrolaelaps, (2), 184

[ntomeobrya stramincola, straminea, termito-

phila, v. clarki, miultilasciata, nivalis,

nivalis v. immaculata, (1), 28

Entomobryidae, (1), 28

Entomobryinae, (1), 28

Entomobryoidea, (1), 25

Epomidiostomum uncinatum, (1), 73

Erythracarinae, (1), 19

Erythracarus, (1), 19, 20, parictinum, (1), 20

Euepicrius, filamentosus, (2), 170

Eugamasus, (2), 143

Euryparasitus, (2), 158

Euoploteuthis galaxias, (1), 84

Fuphausiacea, (1), 60

Euphausiidae, (1), 60

Euphymna stenodactyla, (1), 83

Evans, J. W., Further Notes on the Mor-

phology of the Insect Head, (2), 180

Evans, J. W., The Morphology of Nanno-

chorista maculipcnnis

tera), (2), 218

Finlayson, H. H., A new Melomys from

Queensland with notice of two other

Queensland Rats, (2), 243

Finlayson, II. H.. A second specimen of

Wyulda squamicaudata Alexander, (2),

255

Flinders Ranges; The Structural Characters

of the; Mawson, D., (2), 262

Flora of South Australia; Additions to the;

Black, J. M., (2), 248

Folsomia emeraldica, (1), 25

Gabbia iredalei, (2), 126

Gamasiphis, (2), 155: femoralis, (2), 156

Gamasodes, (2), 158

Gamasolaclaps, (2), 158

Gamasolaelaptidae, (2), 158

Gasteropoda; Some South Australian Fresh-

water; Cotton, B. C., (1), 75

Gastropoda of the Families Hydrobiidae,

Assimineidae and Acmeidae; Australian;

Cotton, B. C., (2), 124

Geholaspis sp., (2), 169

Gray; James Hugo; Obituary, (1), 2

Station |

Tillyard (Mecop-

Halecium mediterranium, (1), 1065

Haleciidae, (1), 106

Halicornopsis elegans, (1), 107

Halocordyle disticha v. australis,

wilsoni, (1), 116

| Halocordylidae, (1), 105, 116

Halolaclaps, (2), 158

Hehbella calearata, (1), 111

Histiostoma, (1), 88; humiditatus, (1), 89

Ho!oparasitus, (2), 143

Hydrobiidae, (2), 124

Hydrogamasus dentlaius, (2), 149: relatis,

(2), 151; retictus, (2), 152, vo mayor, (2),

153; australtcus, (2), 153; antarchcus,

» (4), 154

, ITydroida of South Australia with a Sum-

j mary of their Distribution in other Seas;

A Systematic List of the; Blackburn, M.,

(1), 104

, Hypogastruridae, (1), 23

| Tlypopyxis labrosa, (1), 112

| Hysteromorpha triloba, (2), 238

(1), 105;

| Idiella pristis, (1), 116

| Isidorella neweombi, subinflata, ruhida, (1),

| Isutomidae, (1), 25

Tsotominae, (1), 25

| Isotomurus palutris, (1), 25

Johnston, T. EL, Trematodes from Australian

Birds. I. Cormorants and Darters, (2),

225

Johnston, T. H., and Angel, L. M., Larval

Trematodes from Australian Freshwater

Molluscs, Pt. VIII, (1), 50

Johnston, T. H., and Angel, L. M.. The Life

History of the Trematode Paryphostomum

i tenuicollis, (S, J. Johnston), (2), 119

Johnston, IT. H., and Best, E. W., Australian

Acanthocephala, No. 3, (2), 250

| Johnston, T. H., and Cleland, J. B., Abori-

ginal Names and Uses of Plants in the

Ocldea Region, South Australia, (1), 93

Johnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., Nema-

todes from Australian Alhbatrosses and

Petrels, (1), 66

Johnston, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., Some

Avian Nematodes from Tailem Bend,

South Australia, (1), 71

Johnston, T. H., and Simpson, E. R., Some

Nematodes from Australian Frogs, (2),

172

Kirchenpaueria mirabilis, (1), 106; producta,

biseptata, (1), 107

Kyanite and Clay Deposits near Williams-

town, South Australia; Sillimanite; Alder-

man, A. R., (1), 3

Lafoeidae, (1), 111

, Letpoanema cellist, (1), 73

| Lepidocyrtinus queenslandica, (1), 28

279

Lepidocyrloides cheesmani, (1), 28

Lepidephorella australis, (1), 28

Lepidophorellinae, (1), 28

Lineolaria flexuosa, inarmata, (1), 111

Lineolariidae, (1), 111

Lomandra densiflora, fibrata, (2), 248

Love, J. R. B,, A Primitive Method of Mak-

ing a Woeden Dish by Native Women of

the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia,

(2), 215

Macrocheles vagabundus v. australis, (2),

166; copraphila, (2), 167

Macrochelidac, (2), 165

Mawson, D., The Structural Characters of

the Flinders Ranges, (2), 262

Mawson, P. M., and Johnston, T. H., Nema-

todes from Australian Albatrosses and

Petrels, (1), 66

Mawson, P. M., and Johnston, T. H., Some

Avian Nematodes from Tailem Bend,

South Australia, (1), 71

Megaliphis, (2), 148

Megalolaclaps, (2), 184

Megalothorax swani, (1), 30

Melons from Queensland with notice of two

other Queensland Rats; A new; Finlay-

son, H. H., (2), 243

Melomys callopes, (2), 243

Mesira flavocincta v. unicolor, brunnea, cincta,

(1), 29

Millsia tiegst, (1), 26

Morphology of the Insect Head; Further

Notes on the; Evans, J. W., (2), 180

Murray; Sir George R.; Obituary, (1), 1

Myobia musculi, affinis, minima, ensifera,

chalinolobus, miniopteris, clara, (1), 85

Nannochorista maculipennis Tillyard (Mecop-

tera); The Morphology of; Evans, J. W.

(2), 218

Neanura muscorum, hirtellus v. cirratus, ra-

diata, (1), 24

Neanurinag, (1), 23

Neelidae, (1), 30

Nematodes from Australian Albatrosses and

Petrels, Johnston, T. H., and Mawson,

P. M., (1), 66

Nematodes from Tailem Bend, South Austra-

lia; Some Avian; Johnston, T. H., and

Mawson, P. M., (1), 71

Nematodes from Austrahan Frogs; Some;

Johnston, J. H., and Simpson, E. R., (2),

172

Neoparasitus, (2), 148, 164

Neoparasitidae, (2), 148

Nothrholaspis montivagus, (2), 168

Nototodarus gouldi, (1), 83

Obelia geniculata, australis, (1), 106

Octopus pallidus, cyanea, (1), 84

Ologamasus, (2), 148

Olopachys, (2), 184

Onchodellus, (2), 184

Oncopodura fiegsi, (1), 27

Oncopodurinae, (1), 27

Onychiuridae, (1), 24

Onychiurinae, (1), 24

Onychiurus armatus,

(1), 24

Orthopyxis macrogona, (1), 105

Oswaldocruzia limnodynastes, (2), 172

ambulans v. inermis,

Pachylaelaps australicus, (2), 164

Pachylaclaptidae, (2), 164

Pachylaella, (2), 184

Pachyseius, (2), 184

Parataelaps, (2), 184

Pergamasus crassipes v. australicus, (2), 145;

v. longicornis, (2), 146; barbarus, (2), 147

Physaloptera confusa, (2), 178

Platylaelaps, (2), 184

Poecilochirus, (2), 148

Parakatianna zebra, (1), 72

Paranura, australasiae, (1), 23

Parascyphus simplex, (1), 112

Parasitidae, (2), 143

Parasitus americanus, (2), 144

Parisotoma pentomma, (1), 26

Paryphostomum tenuicollis (S. J. Johnston) ;

The ITafe History of the Trematode;

Johnston, T. H., and Angel, L. M., (2),

119

Paryphostomum radiatum, (2), 233

Paryseria diomcdeae, (1), 69; macronectes,

pachyptilae, (1), 70

Petterdiana paludinea, tasmanica, (2), 124

Petasiger exaerctus, (2), 236

Phocasearis sp. larvae, (1), 68; spp. (1), 73

Phylactotheca armata, (1), 106

Plumularia asymmetrica, australis, compressa,

putchella, obliqua, obesa, procumbens,

augusta, (1), 108; crateriformis, seta-

ceoides, spinulosa, (1), 116

Plumulariidae, (1), 106, 116

Poa humifusa, halmaturina, (2), 248

Poduroidea, (1), 23

Pontoppidantidae, (1), 92

Precott, J. A., The Phase and Amplitude of

Australian Mean Monthly Temperature,

(1), 46

Proisotoma minuta, ripicola, (1), 26

Promes-ra wigrocephala, (1), 29

Pseudachcrutes tasmanicnsis, pescotti,

(1),

Pseudomys (Leggadina) patrius, (2), 245

Raoiella, (1), 87; queenslandica, (1), 88

Rattus culmorum cf. culmorum, (2), 246

Rhabdias hylac, (2), 176

Rhodacarellus, (2), 158

Rogers, R. S.; Obituary; (1), 2

Rumex roseus, (2), 249

Salacia sinuosa, (1), 115

Saline Ground Waters and the Origin of the

Saline Material; The Moonaree Station;

Dickinson, S. B., (1), 32

280

Scatopse aptcra, (1), 74

(Seatopsidae) from South Australia; A New

Apterous Dipteron; Womersley, H., (1),

Schellenbergia, (1), 19, 20; warregense, (1),

Schizotricha buski, campanula, sulcata, (1),

107; secundaria, (1), 108

Seuratia shipleyi, marina, (1), 69

Septanychus tumidus, (1), 87

Sepia (Solitosepia), mestus, plangon, (1), 84

Sepioloidea lineolata, (1), 84

Sepioteuthis australis, (1), 83

Sertularella indivisa, pygmaca,

neglecta, lata, robusta, (1), 115

Sertularia operculata, bispinosa, maplestonci,

divaricata,

unguiculata, (1), 113; recta, tenuis,

minima, muelleri, geminata, marginata,

brunnea, minuscula, (1), 114; ligulata,

(1), 116

Sertulariidae, (1), 112

Sessiluncus, (2), 143

Sheard, K., The Genus Thysanopoda (Crus-

tacea, Euphausiacea), (1), 60

Siblyia, (1), 19

Simpson, FE. R., and Johnston, T. H., Some ,

Nematodes from Australian Vrogs, (2),

172

Sinella termitum, coeca, (1), 28

Silicularia undulata, (1), 105

Sillimanite, Kyanite and Clay Deposits near

Williamstown, South Australia, Alderman,

A. R., (1), 3

Sira jacobsoni, (1), 28

Smith; Tom E. Barr; Obituary; (1), 1

Sminthuridae, (1), 30

Sminthurinus aureus v. ochrapus, (1), 30

Sminthurus viridis, regalis, (1), 31

Sphacrolaelaps. (2), 184

Sphaeroseius, (2), 148

Spironoura fiylae, (2), 173

Sprigg, R. C., The Geology of the Eden-

Moana Fault Block, (2), 185

Stereotheca clougata, (1), 111; acanthostoma,

(1), 112

Stictodora diplacantha, (2), 239

Streptocara recta, (1), 71; sp. (1), 72

Symphypleona, (1), 30

Synhimantus sp., (1), 71

Synthectidae, (1), 111

Synthecium clegans, (1), 111

Tarsolarkus, (1), 19

Tarsotomus, (1), 19

Tasmaniclla launcestonensis,

Icdderae, (2), 124

Tatea rufilabris, (1), &1

minima,

hullii, :

Tetrameres diomedeac, (1), 69; pelecani, (1),

Tetranychidae, (1), 87

Theeata, (1), 105

Thecocarpus calyciferus, (1), 109; megalo-

carpus, tenuissimus, (1), 110

Thecocaulus obconicus, oppositus, (1), 107

Thysanopoda (Crustacea, Euphausiacea) ;

The Genus; Sheard, K., (1), 60

Thysanopoda tricuspidata, cristata, mona-

cantha, (1), 60; aecqualis, obtusifrons, pec-

tinata, acutifrons, orientalis, microph-

thalma, cornuta, egregia, mansuli, armata,

spinula, 61; johnston, (1), 62

Thyroscyphus marginatus, (1), 112

Tomoceridae, (1), 28

; Tomocerinae, (1}, 28

' Tomocerus tasmanicus, (1), 28

| Trachygamasus, (2), 143

Trematodes from Australian Freshwater

Molluscs; Larval; Johnston, T. H., and

Angel, L. M., (1), 50

’ Trematodes from Australian Birds, I, Cor-

morants and Darters, Johnston, T. H.,

(2), 226

Trichadenidac, (1), 87

Tullbergia tillyardi, (1), 24

Tuliberginac, (1), 24

Urewera flava, (1), 29; purpurea, (1), 30

Walzia, (1), 17; ausiralica, (1), 18

Wark, D. C., Trends in the Yields of Fallow-

sown and Stubble-sown Cereals in some

South Australian Experiments, (2), 133

Winkler, M. T.; Obituary; (1), 2

Wonrersley, H., The Anystid Mites of Aus-

tralia, (1), 15

Womersley, H., New Genera, Species and

Records of Collembola from Australia,

New Zealand and New Guinea, (1), 23

Womersley, H., A New Apterus Dipteron

(Scatopsidac) from South Australia, (1),

| Womersley, H., Miscellaneous Additions to

the Acarine Fauna of Australia, (1), 85

Womersley, H., Additions to the Acarina-

Parasitoidea of Australia, Pt. I, (2), 142

| Wooden Dish by Native Women of the Mus-

| grave Ranges, South Australia; A Primi-

| tive Method of making; Love, J. R. B.,

(2), 215

: Wyulda squamicaudata Alexander; A Second

Specimen of; Finlayson, H. H., (2), 255

Xenvila maritima, (1), 23

Wholly set up and printed in Australia by Gillingham & Co. Limited, 106 Chris Street, Adelaide

CONTENTS

PART I

OsITUARIES—

T, E. Barr Smite

Siz Grorcz J. R. Murray

Sir Wititam Brace ~ +.

«. Str Rosert W, CHAPMAN

James Huco Gray

R. S. Rocers

W.-M. WINKLER

AwtpermMan, A, R.: Sillimanite, iaste Gad Clay Deposits a near Williamstown, South

_ INDEX

RD ee ee

Australia oe : 3

Womerstey, H.: The Aigena Mites ‘of Asstt qk 15

Womerstry, H.: New.Genera, Species and Records of Coltembola ae Australias New

Zealand and New Guinea 23

‘ sDicxinson, S. B.: The Moonaree ‘Station ates Grotind Waters ret the Origin of the

Saline Material Pe aES 4

Prescott, J. A.: The Phase and Amplitude of ceriaiian ies: Monthly "Pesaperatsives .. 46

Jounston, T. H., and Ancer, L. M.: ~Larval Trematodes from Australian Freshwater

Molluscs, Pt, VIII ra rears

SHearp, K.: The Genus. pesgudionds 4 eae Fapiaupiaceas 60

Jounston; T. H., and Mawson, P.M.: Nematodes from Australian Albatrosses and Petrels 66

Jounston, T. H., and Mawson, P.M.: | Some Avian Nematodes from Tailem Bend, Oo

Australia ‘ 71

Womerstey, H.;: A May teri ieeron ( eslopidas) com Soltis. ecatvatia, 74

Corton, B. C’:. Some Australian Freshwater Gasteropoda 663 > 75

Corton, B: C.: Cephalopoda from East and South Australia 83

Womerstey, H.: Miscellaneous Additions to the Acarine Fauna of Auikratix 85

Region, South Australia .. ; 93

Biackgurn, M.: A Systematic List of the Hvdeiiay of South Australia with a Summary

of their Distribution in-Other States . 104

PART II

Jounsron, T. H., and Ancer, L. M.: The Life History of ths Trematode Pary-

phostomum tenuicollis ES: }. Johnston) ; 119

Corron, B. C.: Australian feness of the Families Hydrobidae Assimincida, poo

Acmeidae 124

Cooke, W. T.: An en Ce Pe oe a Sicints of ae Crete. Coal. ; 130

Wark, D. C.: Trends in the Yields of Fallow- -sown and* Stubble-sown Cereals in_ some

South Australian Experiments 133

Womerstey, Hi: Additions to the Aecsiring-Parasituiden “ot Australia; cra L 142

Jounston, T. Hi, and Stupson, E. R.: Some Nematodes from Australian Frogs 172

Evans, J. W.: Further Notes on the Morphology of the Insect Head 180

Spricc, R. C.: The Geology of the Eden-Moana Fault Block = ; 185

Love, J. R. B:: A Primitive Method of making a Wooden Dish by Native Women « of

the Musgrave Ranges, South Australia oe : 215

Evans, J. W.: The Morphology of Nannochorista dgaiipeaiic Tillyard . 218

Jounston, T. H.: Trematodes from Australian Birds. I. Cormorants ant Darters 226

Fin.tayson, H. H,: A new. Melomys. from Queensland, with Hose of two othér

Queensland Rats +. 243

Buacx, J. M.: Additions to the Fra of ‘South “Australia, Re. 41. 248

Jounston, T, H., and Best, Errre W.: Australian Acanthocephala, No. 3 250

Fintayson, H. H.: A second specimen of Wyulda squamicaudata Alexander .. 255

Mawson, D.: The Structural Characters of the Flinders Ranges 262

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS ao 5 pee

Verco MEDAL hele 3 SS es a Re “A an 274

List oF FELLows Me e ¥; ra Sons a s e at See